FW GD TestMode - Rev 1.3

IE-02193-013
ComColor FW / GD Series
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Chapter 17. Test Modes
REVISION 1.3
DECEMBER 2018
Copyright: 2017 RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION

All Rights Reserved. This Technical Manual was prepared and written for
the exclusive use of RISO Inter national Group Cert ified Dealers.
Reproduction and/or transmittal of this material in an y form or by any
means, including photocopying or record ing of the information is strictly
prohibited without the consent of RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION.
CONFIDENTIAL RISO SQUARE WEB VERSION
Test mode
Type Test mode name ON OFF Remarks FW GD
No.
Engine system section
S 04-1-001 BP WIRE LOOSE DETECTION Detected (switching pressed) Not detected (switching released) ✔ ✔
S 04-1-002 FRONT COVER INTER LOCK SWITCH Close (switching pressed) Open (switching released) ✔
S 04-1-002 LEFT FRONT COVER INTER LOCK SWITCH Close (switching pressed) Open (switching released) ✔
S 04-1-003 PAPER ELEVATION COVER INTER LOCK SW Close (switching pressed) Open (switching released) ✔ ✔
S 04-1-004 SWITCHBACK COVER INTER LOCK SWITCH Close (switching pressed) Open (switching released) ✔ ✔
Close (Paper feed tray maximum value or
S 04-1-005 PAPER FEED TRAY INTER LOCK SW Open ✔ ✔
lower limit switch ON)
S 04-1-006 TRAY1 SET SAFETY SWITCH DETECTED (TRAY CLOSED) Detected (tray 1 closed) Not detected (tray 1 open) ✔ ✔
S 04-1-007 TRAY2 SET SAFETY SWITCH DETECTED (TRAY CLOSED) Detected (tray 2 closed) Not detected (tray 2 open) ✔ ✔
S 04-1-008 TRAY3 SET SAFETY SWITCH DETECTED (TRAY CLOSED) Detected (tray 3 closed) Not detected (tray 3 open) ✔
S 04-1-009 STRIPPER UNIT SET SWITCH Detected Not detected (Stripper unit is off) ✔ ✔
S 04-1-010 FU JAM RELEASE COVER SW Detected Not detected (door open) ✔ ✔
Detectable only when not driving the front cover lock
S 04-1-011 Front cover lock solenoid connection detection Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
solenoid.
S 04-1-012 Front cover lock plate orientation monitoring sensor Locked Lock released ✔
S 04-1-013 RIGHT FRONT COVER INTER LOCK SWITCH Close (switching pressed) Open (switching released) ✔
S 04-1-021 OPTION PCB DETECT SIGNAL Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
S 04-1-022 VENDOR DETECT SIGNAL Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
S 04-1-023 AUTO-CTL STACKING TRAY DETECT SIGNAL Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
S 04-1-024 MULTI FINISHER DETECT SIGNAL Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
S 04-1-025 FU EJECT UNIT DETECT SIGNAL Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
Paper feed section
S 05-1-001 PAPER FEED TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR A Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-002 PAPER FEED TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR B Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-003 PAPER FEED TRAY LOWER LIMIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-004 TRAY1 UPPER LIMIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-005 TRAY2 UPPER LIMIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-006 TRAY3 UPPER LIMIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 05-1-011 PAPER FEED TRAY PAPER DETECT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-012 TRAY1 PAPER DETECT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-013 TRAY2 PAPER DETECT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-014 TRAY3 PAPER DETECT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 05-1-016 P-FEED TRAY PAPER LENGTH DETECT SNSR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-017 TRAY1 PAPER SIZE DETECT SENSOR 1 Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-025 TRAY3 PAPER SIZE DETECT SENSOR 1 Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 05-1-031 P-FEED TRAY PAPER VOLUME SENSOR 1 Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 05-1-032 P-FEED TRAY PAPER VOLUME SENSOR 2 Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 05-1-033 TRAY1 PAPER VOLUME SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
Paper feed section
S 05-1-034 TRAY2 PAPER VOLUME SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-035 TRAY3 PAPER VOLUME SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
1/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

Test mode
No.
S 05-1-041 EXTERNAL PAPER FEED MOTOR ENCODER Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-042 TRAY1 JAM DETECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-043 INTERNAL PAPER TRANSFER SENSOR1 Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-044 TRAY2 JAM DETECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-045 INTERNAL PAPER TRANSFER SENSOR2 Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-046 TRAY3 JAM DETECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 05-1-047 INTERNAL PAPER TRANSFER SENSOR3 Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 05-1-048 INTERNAL PAPER MERGE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-049 VERTICAL PAPER FEED SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-051 REGISTRATION MOTOR ENCODER Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-052 REGISTRATION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-056 PAPER FEED TRAY ELEVATION SW ON (pressed) OFF (released) ✔ ✔
S 05-1-057 Internal paper feed jam release door switch Detected (door closed) Not detected (door open) ✔ ✔
Transport section
S 06-1-001 BELT HP SENSOR Detected Not detected ✔ ✔
S 06-1-002 TRANSFER BELT ENCODER Detected Not detected ✔ ✔
S 06-1-003 TOP EDGE SENSOR 1 Detected Not detected ✔ ✔
S 06-1-004 PAPER LIFT DETECTION SENSOR Detected Not detected ✔ ✔
S 06-1-005 PAPER ELEVATION IN SENSOR Detected Not detected ✔ ✔
S 06-1-006 PAPER ELEVATION SENSOR Detected Not detected ✔
S 06-1-006 PAPER ELEVATION SENSOR Detected Not detected ✔
S 06-1-021 SWITCHBACK ENTRANCE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 06-1-021 SWITCHBACK ENTRANCE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 06-1-022 SWITCHBACK TRANSFER SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 06-1-022 SWITCHBACK TRANSFER SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 06-1-023 SWITCHBACK SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 06-1-024 LOWER PAPER TRANSFER ENTRANCE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 06-1-025 LOWER PAPER TRANSFER EXIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 06-1-031 FD PAPER EJECTION FLIPPER DETECT Connected Not connected ✔
S 06-1-031 FD PAPER EJECTION FLIPPER DETECT Connected Not connected ✔
Paper ejection section
S 07-1-001 FD PAPER EJECTION MOTOR ENCODER Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 07-1-002 FD PAPER EJECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 07-1-003 FD PAPER EJECTION FULL SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 07-1-004 FD PAPER EJECTION PAPER DETECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
Not detected (light passes through:
S 07-1-005 FD PAPER EJECTION PAPER GUIDE HP SENSOR Detected (light blocked: at home position) ✔
not at home position)
S 07-1-011 FU PAPER EJECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 07-1-012 FU PAPER EJECTION JUMP MOTOR ENCODER Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
Not detected (light passes through:
S 07-1-013 FU PAPER EJECTION WING HP SENSOR Detected (light blocked: at home position) ✔
not at home position)
Ink maintenance section
S 09-1-001 INK COOLING FAN1 CONNECT Connected Not connected Only detectable while being driven ✔ ✔
S 09-1-002 INK COOLING FAN2 CONNECT Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
S 09-1-003 INK SUPPLY VALVE K DETECT Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
S 09-1-004 INK SUPPLY VALVE C DETECT Connected Not connected ✔ ✔

Test mode
No.
Also applicable to the following.
- R for KCRY model
S 09-1-005 INK SUPPLY VALVE M (R,B) DETECT Connected Not connected ✔
- R for KR model
- B for KB model
S 09-1-005 INK SUPPLY VALVE M (R,B) DETECT Connected Not connected ✔
S 09-1-006 INK SUPPLY VALVE Y DETECT Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
This is also applicable to the following:
S 09-1-007 INK SUPPLY VALVE P (R, GR) DETECT Connected Not connected - R of KCMYR units ✔
- Gr of KCMYGr units
S 09-1-008 PRESSURE INK TANK AIR VALVE DETECT Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
S 09-1-009 N-PRESSURE INK TANK AIR VALVE DETECT Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
S 09-1-010 PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE CONNECT Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
S 09-1-011 N-PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE CONNECT Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
S 09-1-012 PRESSURE TANK INK SENSOR K DETECT Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
S 09-1-013 PRESSURE TANK INK SENSOR C DETECT Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
- R for KCRY model
S 09-1-014 PRESSURE TANK INK SNR M (R,B) DETECT Connected Not connected ✔
- R for KR model
- B for KB model
S 09-1-014 PRESSURE TANK INK SNR M (R,B) DETECT Connected Not connected ✔
S 09-1-015 PRESSURE TANK INK SENSOR Y DETECT Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
S 09-1-016 PRESSURE TANK INK SNR P (R, GR) DETECT Connected Not connected - R of KCMYR units ✔
S 09-1-017 N-PRESSURE TANK INK SENSOR K DETECT Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
S 09-1-018 N-PRESSURE TANK INK SENSOR C DETECT Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
- R for KCRY model
S 09-1-019 N-PRESSURE TANK INK SNR M (R,B) DET Connected Not connected ✔
- R for KR model
- B for KB model
S 09-1-019 N-PRESSURE TANK INK SNR M (R,B) DET Connected Not connected ✔
S 09-1-020 N-PRESSURE TANK INK SENSOR Y DETECT Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
S 09-1-021 N-PRESSURE TANK INK SNR P (R, GR) DET Connected Not connected - R of KCMYR units ✔
S 09-1-022 OVERFLOW TANK INK DETECT Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
S 09-1-023 IP PCB DETECT Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
Not detected (current not
S 09-1-030 24V VOLTAGE DETECT Detected (current conducted) ✔ ✔
conducted)
S 09-1-031 24V IL-VOLTAGE DETECT Detected (current conducted) ✔ ✔
conducted)
S 09-1-032 36V VOLTAGE DETECT Detected (current conducted) ✔ ✔
conducted)
S 09-1-033 36VA IL-VOLTAGE DETECT Detected (current conducted) ✔ ✔
conducted)
Only detectable when the AIR REGULATOR VALVE is
S 09-1-034 AIR REGULATOR VALVE connection detection Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
not being driven.
S 09-1-039 PR INK TANK INK SENSOR K2 CONNECT Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
S 09-1-040 N-PR INK TANK INK SENSOR K2 CONNECT Connected Not connected ✔ ✔
S 09-1-041 INK CARTRIDGE DETECT K Detected Not detected ✔ ✔
S 09-1-042 INK CARTRIDGE DETECT C Detected Not detected ✔ ✔
- R for KCRY model
S 09-1-043 INK CARTRIDGE DETECT M (R,B) Detected Not detected ✔
- R for KR model
- B for KB model
S 09-1-043 INK CARTRIDGE DETECT M (R,B) Detected Not detected ✔
S 09-1-044 INK CARTRIDGE DETECT Y Detected Not detected ✔ ✔

Test mode
No.
S 09-1-045 INK CARTRIDGE DETECT P (R, GR) Detected Not detected - R of KCMYR units ✔
S 09-1-046 CIRCULATION PUMP K ERROR DETECT Detected (error or not connected) Not detected (normal) ✔
S 09-1-047 CIRCULATION PUMP C ERROR DETECT Detected (error or not connected) Not detected (normal) ✔
S 09-1-048 CIRCULATION PUMP M (R,B) ERROR DETECT Detected (error or not connected) Not detected (normal) ✔
S 09-1-049 CIRCULATION PUMP Y ERROR DETECT Detected (error or not connected) Not detected (normal) ✔
S 09-1-050 CIRCULATION PUMP P (R, GR) ERROR DETECT Detected (error or not connected) Not detected (normal) - R of KCMYR units ✔
S 09-1-051 PRESSURE INK TANK INK SENSOR K Detected Not detected ✔ ✔
S 09-1-052 PRESSURE INK TANK INK SENSOR C Detected Not detected ✔ ✔
S 09-1-053 PRESSURE INK TANK INK SENSOR M (R,B) Detected (connected) Not detected (Not connected) ✔
S 09-1-053 PRESSURE INK TANK INK SENSOR M (R,B) Detected (connected) Not detected (Not connected) ✔
S 09-1-054 PRESSURE INK TANK INK SENSOR Y Detected (connected) Not detected (Not connected) ✔ ✔
S 09-1-055 PRESSURE INK TANK INK SENSOR P (R, GR) Detected (connected) Not detected (Not connected) - R of KCMYR units ✔
S 09-1-056 N-PRESSURE INK TANK INK SENSOR K Detected (connected) Not detected (Not connected) ✔ ✔
S 09-1-057 N-PRESSURE INK TANK INK SENSOR C Detected (connected) Not detected (Not connected) ✔ ✔
S 09-1-058 N-PRESSURE INK TANK INK SNR M (R,B) Detected (connected) Not detected (Not connected) ✔
S 09-1-058 N-PRESSURE INK TANK INK SNR M (R,B) Detected (connected) Not detected (Not connected) ✔
S 09-1-059 N-PRESSURE INK TANK INK SENSOR Y Detected (connected) Not detected (Not connected) ✔ ✔
S 09-1-060 N-PRESSURE INK TANK INK SENSOR P (R, GR) Detected (connected) Not detected (Not connected) - R of KCMYR units ✔
S 09-1-061 OVERFLOW TANK INK SENSOR Detected (connected) Not detected (Not connected) ✔ ✔
The detection status of 0-09-1-063
The detection status of 0-09-1-063 "WASTE INK TANK FULL
The near full and full statuses of the waste ink tank are
"WASTE INK TANK FULL SENSOR" is: SENSOR" is:
S 09-1-062 WASTE INK TANK NEAR FULL SENSOR detected in combination with 0-09-1-063 "WASTE INK ✔ ✔
ON: Near full ON: Full
TANK FULL SENSOR".
OFF: Waste ink tank set in machine OFF: Waste ink tank not set in
machine
"WASTE INK TANK NEAR FULL
"WASTE INK TANK NEAR FULL The near full and full statuses of the waste ink tank are
SENSOR" is:
S 09-1-063 WASTE INK TANK FULL SENSOR SENSOR" is: detected in combination with 0-09-1-062 "WASTE INK ✔ ✔
ON: Waste ink tank set in machine
ON: Near full TANK NEAR FULL SENSOR".
OFF: Waste ink tank not set in
OFF: Full
machine
S 09-1-067 PRESSURE INK TANK INK SENSOR K2 Detected (connected) Not detected (Not connected) ✔ ✔
S 09-1-070 N-PRESSURE INK TANK INK SENSOR K2 Detected (connected) Not detected (Not connected) ✔ ✔
S 09-1-071 INK PAN MOTOR STRAGE POS SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 09-1-072 INK PAN MOTOR OPEN POS SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 09-1-073 WIPER MOTOR HP SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 09-1-074 AUTHORIZATION CAM HP SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 09-1-075 BP LOWER LIMIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 09-1-076 BP UPPER LIMIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 09-1-077 BP HIT SENSOR (RL) Contact detected Contact not detected ✔ ✔
S 09-1-078 BP HIT SENSOR (FL) Contact detected Contact not detected ✔ ✔
S 09-1-079 BP HIT SENSOR (RR) Contact detected Contact not detected ✔ ✔
S 09-1-080 BP HIT SENSOR (FR) Contact detected Contact not detected ✔ ✔
S 09-1-081 BP MIDPOINT SENSOR At release position Not at release position ✔
S 09-1-085 INK LEAK DETECT SENSOR 1 Ink leak detected Ink leak not detected ✔ ✔
IF unit

Test mode
No.
S 10-1-001 IF UNIT COVER INTER LOCK SWITCH Detected Not detected ✔ ✔
Scanner
S 21-1-002 FB ORIGINAL SIZE SENSOR 1 Original loaded (light passes through) No original (light blocked) ✔ ✔
S 21-1-003 FB ORIGINAL SIZE SENSOR 2 Original loaded (light passes through) No original (light blocked) ✔ ✔
S 21-1-004 FB ORIGINAL COVER SENSOR Cover closed (light blocked) Cover open (light passes through) ✔ ✔
Scanner
S 21-1-005 FB ORIGINAL COVER ANGLE SENSOR Cover closed (light blocked) Cover open (light passes through) ✔ ✔
Mirror at origin (home position, light Mirror not at origin (light passes
S 21-1-006 SCANNER HP SENSOR ✔ ✔
blocked) through)
S 21-1-021 AF UNIT DETECT Original loaded (light passes through) No original (light blocked) ✔ ✔
S 21-1-022 AF ORIGINAL DETECT SENSOR Original loaded (light passes through) No original (light blocked) ✔ ✔
S 21-1-023 AF tray sensor 1 Original loaded (light passes through) No original (light blocked) ✔ ✔
S 21-1-024 AF tray sensor 2 Original loaded (light passes through) No original (light blocked) ✔ ✔
S 21-1-025 AF FEED COVER SET SW Cover closed (light blocked) Cover open (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 21-1-026 AF REGISTRATION SENSOR Original loaded (light passes through) No original (light blocked) ✔ ✔
S 21-1-027 AF READ SENSOR (F) Original loaded (light passes through) No original (light blocked) ✔ ✔
S 21-1-028 AF READ SENSOR (B) Original loaded (light passes through) No original (light blocked) ✔ ✔
S 21-1-029 AF SEPARATION SENSOR Original loaded (light passes through) No original (light blocked) ✔ ✔
S 21-1-030 AF ORIGINAL SET SENSOR Original loaded (light passes through) No original (light blocked) ✔ ✔
S 21-1-031 AF LAST PAPER SENSOR Original loaded (light passes through) No original (light blocked) ✔ ✔
Not detection (light passes
S 21-1-032 AF WHITE PLATE HOME POSITION SENSOR Detected (light blocked, home position) ✔ ✔
through, not home position)
Not detection (light passes
S 21-1-033 AF ELEVATION TRAY HOME SENSOR Detected (light blocked, home position) ✔ ✔
S 21-1-034 AF ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSOR 1 Original loaded (light passes through) No original (light blocked) ✔ ✔
S 21-1-037 AF ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSOR 1 Original loaded (light passes through) No original (light blocked) ✔ ✔
S 21-1-038 AF ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSOR 2 Original loaded (light passes through) No original (light blocked) ✔ ✔
S 21-1-039 AF ORIGINAL FEED POSITION SENSOR Original loaded (light passes through) No original (light blocked) ✔ ✔
Multifunction Finisher
S 23-1-001 DECURLER IN SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-002 DECURLER OUT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-006 PUNCH OUT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-007 COMPILE EXIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-008 TOP TRAY EXIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-009 BAFFER PATH SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-010 SIDE REGISTRATION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-011 PUNCH MOTOR SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
Not detected (light passes through,
S 23-1-012 PUNCH MOVE HOME SENSOR Detected (light blocked, home position) ✔ ✔
not home position)
S 23-1-013 PUNCH HOME SENSOR Detected (light blocked, home position) ✔ ✔
not home position)
S 23-1-014 PUNCH FRONT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-015 PUNCH HOLE SELECT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-016 SIDE REGISTRATION HOME SENSOR Detected (light blocked, home position) ✔ ✔
not home position)
S 23-1-017 PUNCH BOX SET SENSOR Attached Not attached ✔ ✔
S 23-1-018 TOP TRAY FULL SENSOR Full Not full ✔ ✔
S 23-1-019 COMPILE TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-020 SUB PADDLE HOME SENSOR Detected (light blocked, home position) ✔ ✔
not home position)
S 23-1-021 STAPLE 50PIN SENSOR Attached Not attached ✔ ✔

Test mode
No.
S 23-1-022 TAMPER HOME SENSOR Detected (light blocked, home position) ✔ ✔
not home position)
S 23-1-023 END WALL HOME SENSOR Detected (light blocked, home position) ✔ ✔
not home position)
S 23-1-024 END WALL OPEN SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-025 SHELF HOME SENSOR Detected (light blocked, home position) ✔ ✔
not home position)
S 23-1-026 STAPLE CENTER POS SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-027 STAPLE MOVE HOME SENSOR Detected (light blocked, home position) ✔ ✔
not home position)
S 23-1-028 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR 2 Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-029 LOW STAPLE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-030 SELF PRIMING SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-031 STAPLE HOME SENSOR Detected (light blocked, home position) ✔ ✔
not home position)
S 23-1-033 EJECT UP SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-034 EJECT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-035 STACKER NO PAPER SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-036 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-037 TRAY HIGHT SENSOR LOWER Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-038 MIX STACK SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-039 HALF STACK SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-040 FULL STACK SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-041 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR 3 Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-042 STACKER REAR POS SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-043 LOWER LIMIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-044 STACKER SAFTY SWITCH Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-045 FINISHER I/F MODULE FRONT COVER SW Detected (cover closed) Not detected (cover open) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-046 FINISHER FRONT COVER SWITCH Detected (cover closed) Not detected (cover open) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-047 FOLDER ENVELOPE TRAY OPEN SW Detected (switch pressed) Not detected (switch released) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-048 FOLDER ENVELOPE TRAY SW Attached Not attached ✔ ✔
S 23-1-050 KNIFE HOME SENSOR Detected (light blocked, home position) ✔ ✔
not home position)
S 23-1-051 BOOKLET COMPILE NO PAPER SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-052 BOOKLET FOLDER ROLLER EXIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-053 BOOKLET DRAWER SET SENSOR Attached Not attached ✔ ✔
S 23-1-054 BOOKLET STAPLER READY Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-055 BOOKLET STAPLER ERROR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-056 BOOKLET LOW STAPLE F SW Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-057 BOOKLET LOW STAPLE R SW Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-058 FEED OUT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-059 BOOKLET TRAY BELT SW Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-060 FOLDER ENTRANCE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-061 FOLDER PATH SENSOR 2 Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
Not detected (light blocked
S 23-1-063 END GUIDE HOME SENSOR 1 Detected (light blocked, home position) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-064 END GUIDE HOME SENSOR 2 Detected (light blocked, home position) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-065 ENVELOP TRAY FULL SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔

Test mode
No.
S 23-1-068 IOT EXIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-069 PUNCH 3 HOLE DETECT Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-070 FOLDER DETECT Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-071 BOOKLET DETECT Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-072 BOOKLET TAMPER HP SENSOR (F) Detected (light blocked, home position) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-073 BOOKLET IN SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-074 BOOKLET TAMPER HP SENSOR (R) Detected (light blocked, home position) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-075 BOOKLET END GUIDE HP SENSOR Detected (light blocked, home position) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-076 BOOKLET NO PAPER SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-077 KNIFE FOLDING SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 23-1-078 FOLDER EXIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
FACE DOWN FINISHER
S 24-1-001 FDF SWITCHBACK PATH SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-002 FDF STAPLE SCRATCH PREVENTION LEVER HP SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-003 FDF RELAY 1 SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-004 FDF ENTRANCE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-005 FDF EJECTION ROLLER ELEVATION HP SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-006 FDF LOADING TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-007 FDF REVERSE ROLLER ELEVATION HP SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-008 FDF LOADING TRAY ELEVATION CLK SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-009 FDF LOADING TRAY PAPER SURFACE DETECT SENSOR 1 Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-012 FDF LOADING TRAY LOWER LIMIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-013 FDF PROCESSING TRAY PAPER DETECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-014 FDF RAKING ROLLER ELEVATION HP SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-015 FDF REAR ALIGNMENT PLATE HP SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-016 FDF LOADING TRAY SHIFT SENSOR 1 Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-017 FDF LOADING TRAY PAPER DETECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-018 FDF LOADING TRAY SHIFT CLK SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-019 FDF LOADING TRAY SHIFT SENSOR 2 Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-020 FDF FRONT ALIGNMENT PLATE HP SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-021 FDF ALIGNMENT PLATE POSITION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-022 FDF STP HORIZONTAL MOVEMENT HP SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-023 FDF STP CLINCH HP SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-024 FDF STP NO STAPLE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-025 FDF STP SELF-PRIMING SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-026 FDF STAPLE REPLACEMENT COVER SWITCH Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-027 FDF JAM COVER SWITCH Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
S 24-1-028 FDF JAM COVER SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
Auto-control stacking tray / RP stacking tray
S 25-1-001 AS SIDE FENCE HP SENSOR Detected (light blocked, home position) ✔ ✔
S 25-1-002 AS END FENCE HP SENSOR Detected (light blocked, home position) ✔ ✔
S 25-1-003 AS PAPER REMOVAL SW Detected (switch pressed) Not detected (switch released) ✔ ✔
S 25-1-004 AS PAPER DETECT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔ ✔
High Capacity Feeder
S 29-1-001 HCF PAPER FEED TRAY ELEVATION SW ON (pressed) OFF (released) ✔

Test mode
No.
S 29-1-002 HCF PAPER FEED TRAY INTERLOCK SW ON (pressed) OFF (released) ✔
S 29-1-003 HCF PAPER FEED TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR (STANDARD) Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 29-1-004 HCF PAPER FEED TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR (CARD PAPER) Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 29-1-005 HCF PAPER FEED TRAY LOWER LIMIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 29-1-006 HCF PAPER VOLUME SENSOR 1 Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 29-1-009 HCF PAPER DETECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 29-1-010 HCF PAPER LENGTH DETECT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 29-1-011 HCF INTERMEDIATE EXIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 29-1-012 HCF JAM RELEASE DOOR DETECT SIGNAL ON (pressed) OFF (released) ✔
S 29-1-013 HCF PU DRIVE MOTOR FG SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 29-1-014 HCF INTERMEDIATE TRANSPORT MOTOR FG SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 29-1-015 HCF INTERMEDIATE ENTRANCE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 29-1-016 HCF NIP RELEASE HP SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 29-1-017 HCF STRIPPER PLATE SET SW Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 29-1-018 HCF INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER UPPER DOOR SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
High Capacity Stacker
S 30-1-001 HCS PAPER RECEIVING TRAY SET SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-002 HCS TROLLEY SET SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-003 HCS JAM RELEASE DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SW Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-004 HCS PRE-STOCKER DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SW Detected (SW pressed) Not detected (SW released) ✔
S 30-1-005 HCS ELEVATOR ELEVATION SW Detected (SW pressed) Not detected (SW released) ✔
S 30-1-011 HCS PAPER RECEIVING TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR Detected (SW pressed) Not detected (SW released) ✔
S 30-1-012 HCS PAPER RECEIVING TRAY INTERMEDIATE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-013 HCS PAPER RECEIVING TRAY LOWER LIMIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-016 HCS ENTRY SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-017 HCS SWITCHBACK SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-018 HCS SB SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-019 HCS INTERMEDIATE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-020 HCS FU SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-021 HCS ELEVATION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-022 HCS EJECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-023 HCS PAPER EJECTION MOTOR FG Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-024 HCS PAPER RECEIVING TRAY PAPER DETECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-025 HCS POST CARD FULL SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-026 HCS FULL SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-027 HCS OFFSET FULL SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-028 HCS UPPER SURFACE DETECT SENSOR 1 Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-029 HCS UPPER SURFACE DETECT SENSOR 2 Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-031 HCS SIDE PAPER GUIDE HP SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-032 HCS END PAPER GUIDE HP SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-033 HCS PAPER EJECTION WING HP SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-034 HCS OFFSET GUIDE HP SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-035 HCS END PAPER GUIDE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-036 HCS OFFSET GUIDE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-037 HCS OFFSET GUIDE POSITION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-041 HCS ELEVATOR MOTOR FG Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 30-1-042 HCS SWITCHBACK MOTOR FG Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
Wrapping Envelope Finisher
S 33-1-001 MM INTRODUCTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔

Test mode
No.
S 33-1-002 MM INTERMEDIATE ALIGNMENT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-003 MM TRAILING EDGE ALIGNMENT HP SENSOR Home position (light blocked) Other (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-004 MM SIDE ALIGNMENT HP SENSOR Home position (light blocked) Other (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-005 MM ALIGNMENT NIP HP SENSOR Home position (light blocked) Other (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-006 MM LEADING EDGE ALIGNMENT HP SENSOR Home position (light blocked) Other (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-007 MM LEADING EDGE ALIGNMENT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-008 MM ALIGNMENT EJECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-009 MM MIDDLE PAPER FOLD ENTRANCE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-010 MM MIDDLE PAPER CONTACT HP SENSOR 1 Home position (light blocked) Other (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-011 MM MIDDLE PAPER CONTACT HP SENSOR 2 Home position (light blocked) Other (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-012 MM MIDDLE PAPER FOLD SWITCH HP SENSOR Home position (light blocked) Other (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-013 MM WRAPPING ENTRANCE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-014 MM WRAPPING WAIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-015 MM MIDDLE PAPER EXIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-016 MM FORM RECEIVING SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-017 MM FORM RECEIVING NIP HP SENSOR Home position (light blocked) Other (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-018 MM FORM REGISTRATION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-019 MM FORM HORIZONTAL HP SENSOR Home position (light blocked) Other (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-020 MM FORM EDGE DETECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-021 MM FORM CONTACT HP SENSOR 2 Home position (light blocked) Other (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-022 MM WRAPPING SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-023 MM FLAP ENTRANCE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-024 MM FORM CONTACT HP SENSOR 3 Home position (light blocked) Other (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-025 MM GLUING SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-026 MM GLUING HP SENSOR Home position (light blocked) Other (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-027 MM FLAP BONDING EJECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-028 MM PRESSURE BONDING EXIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-029 MM EJECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-030 MM EJECTION ELEVATION EDGE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-031 MM WATER LEVEL SENSOR Water present (floating) No water present (not floating) ✔
S 33-1-032 MM EJECTION TRAY FULL SENSOR F Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-033 MM EJECTION TRAY FULL SENSOR R Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 33-1-034 MM EJECTION PAPER GUIDE POSITION SENSOR F Form A, Form C envelope position Down ✔
S 33-1-035 MM EJECTION PAPER GUIDE POSITION SENSOR R Vertical Down ✔
Perfect Binder
S 34-1-001 PB PAPER RECEIPT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-002 PB PAPER PASSING (COVER SIZE MEASUREMENT) SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-003 PB BODY EJECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-004 PB COVER REGISTRATION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-005 PB COVER CUT LENGTH SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-006 PB COVER POSITIONING SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-007 PB COVER CHIP TRAY PRESENCE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
Perfect Binder
S 34-1-008 PB STACKED BODY PRESENCE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-009 PB TOP-BOTTOM ALIGNMENT ORIGIN SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-010 PB EDGE ALIGNMENT ORIGIN SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-011 PB BODY STACKING JAM SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-012 PB CLAMP VERTICAL ORIGIN SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-013 PB CLAMP VERTICAL RECEPTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-014 PB CLAMP BODY PRESENCE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-015 PB CLAMP OPEN SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔

Test mode
No.
S 34-1-016 PB CLAMP CLOSED SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-017 PB CLAMP HORIZONTAL ORIGIN SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-018 PB CLAMP HORIZONTAL PASSAGE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-019 PB GLUE ROLLER BACKLASH SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-020 PB GLUE SHEET FEED SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-021 PB GLUE SHEET CUT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-022 PB ARRANGEMENT COVER DETECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-023 PB COVER ALIGNMENT ORIGIN SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-024 PB ARRANGEMENT PLATE OPEN SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-025 PB ARRANGEMENT PLATE CLOSED SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-026 PB BOOKLET EJECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-027 PB BOOKLET ALIGNMENT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-028 PB BOOKLET EJECTION POSITION 1 SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-029 PB BOOKLET EJECTION POSITION 2 SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-030 PB EDGE REFERENCE PLATE ORIGIN Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-031 PB EDGE REFERENCE PLATE SHELTER Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-032 PB SHIELD PLATE OPEN SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-033 PB SHIELD PLATE CLOSED SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-034 PB COVER CUT ORIGIN SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-035 PB COVER CUT LIMIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-036 PB FRONT COVER SW Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-037 PB RIGHT DOOR SW Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-038 PB TOP COVER SW Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-039 PB COVER DETECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-040 PB COVER TOP SURFACE SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-041 PB COVER PAPER FEED (COVER SIZE MEASUREMENT) SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-042 PB COVER PASSING SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-043 PB COVER SIZE 1 SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-044 PB COVER SIZE 2 SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-045 PB LIFT-UP LOWER LIMIT SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-046 PB BOOKLET JAM DETECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-047 PB BOOKLET FEED PULSE DETECTION SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-048 PB GUIDE SWITCH OPEN SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔
S 34-1-049 PB GUIDE SWITCH CLOSED SENSOR Detected (light blocked) Not detected (light passes through) ✔

Type Test mode No. Test mode name Action FW GD

D 04-2-001 Front cover lock solenoid Front cover lock drive ✔ ✔
Paper feed section
D 05-2-001 REGISTRATION MOTOR Registration motor activation. ✔ ✔
D 05-2-002 EXTERNAL PAPER FEED MOTOR (STRAIGHT) EXTERNAL PAPER FEED MOTOR (STRAIGHT) activation. ✔ ✔
D 05-2-003 EXTERNAL PAPER FEED MOTOR (VERTICAL) EXTERNAL PAPER FEED MOTOR (VERTICAL) activation. ✔ ✔
D 05-2-004 INTERNAL PAPER FEED MOTOR INTERNAL PAPER FEED MOTOR activation. ✔ ✔
D 05-2-005 TRAY1 PICKUP MOTOR TRAY1 PICKUP MOTOR activation. ✔ ✔
D 05-2-006 TRAY2 PICKUP MOTOR TRAY2 PICKUP MOTOR activation. ✔ ✔
D 05-2-007 TRAY3 PICKUP MOTOR TRAY3 PICKUP MOTOR activation. ✔
D 05-2-008 RE-FEED MOTOR RE-FEED MOTOR activation. ✔
Transport section
D 06-2-001 TRANSFER BELT SUCTION FAN1
Activation of BP Suction Fan F & BP Suction Fan R. ✔ ✔
D 06-2-002 TRANSFER BELT SUCTION FAN2 TRANSFER BELT SUCTION FAN2 activation. ✔ ✔
D 06-2-004 TRANSFER BELT SUCTION FAN ALL TRANSFER BELT SUCTION FAN activation. ✔ ✔
BP motor activation. ✔ ✔
D 06-2-011 TRANSFER BELT MOTOR The BP motor speed when executing this test mode is set according to values in TM0-04-6-101 "TM PAPER FEED SPEED SETTING".
D 06-2-012 LOWER PAPER TRANSFER MOTOR LOWER PAPER TRANSFER MOTOR activation. (Elevation/both sides) ✔
D 06-2-012 PAPER ELEVATION MOTOR 1 PAPER ELEVATION MOTOR 1 activation. ✔
D 06-2-013 LOWER PAPER TRANSFER ASSISTMOTOR LOWER PAPER TRANSFER ASSISTMOTOR activation. ✔
D 06-2-013 PAPER ELEVATION MOTOR 2 PAPER ELEVATION MOTOR 2 activation. ✔
D 06-2-014 SWITCHBACK MOTOR (NORMAL) SWITCHBACK MOTOR (NORMAL) activation. ✔ ✔
D 06-2-015 SWITCHBACK MOTOR (REVERSE) SWITCHBACK MOTOR (REVERSE) activation. ✔ ✔
LOWER PAPER TRANSFER ENTRANCE LOWER PAPER TRANSFER ENTRANCE MOTOR activation. ✔
D 06-2-016
MOTOR
D 06-2-016 HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 activation. ✔
D 06-2-017 LOWER PAPER TRANSFER EXIT MOTOR LOWER PAPER TRANSFER EXIT MOTOR activation. ✔
D 06-2-017 HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT MOTOR 2 HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT MOTOR 2 activation. ✔
D 06-2-031 FD EJECT FLIPPER SOLENOID FD EJECT FLIPPER SOLENOID activation. ✔
D 06-2-031 FD EJECT FLIPPER SOLENOID FD EJECT FLIPPER SOLENOID activation. ✔
D 06-2-032 FU EJECT FLIPPER SOLENOID FU paper ejection flipper solenoid activation. ✔ ✔
D 07-2-001 FD EJECT MOTOR FD paper ejection motor activation. ✔ ✔
D 07-2-011 FU EJECT JUMP MOTOR FU EJECT JUMP MOTOR activation. ✔ ✔
D 07-2-012 FU EJECT TRANSPORT MOTOR Turn ON or OFF face up paper ejection transport motor. ✔
Print head area
D 08-2-001 HEAD DRIVE IC COOLING FAN F Head drive IC cooling fan activation. ✔
D 08-2-001 HEAD DRIVE IC COOLING FAN FL Head drive IC cooling fan FL activation. ✔
D 08-2-002 HEAD DRIVE IC COOLING FAN R Head drive IC cooling fan2 activation. ✔
D 08-2-002 HEAD DRIVE IC COOLING FAN RL Head drive IC cooling fan RL activation. ✔
D 08-2-003 HEAD DRIVE IC COOLING FAN FR Head drive IC cooling fan FR activation. ✔
D 08-2-004 HEAD DRIVE IC COOLING FAN RR Head drive IC cooling fan RR activation. ✔
D 09-2-001 INK COOLING FAN INK COOLING FAN1, 2 activation. ✔ ✔
D 09-2-011 PRESSRE & NEGATIVE PRESSRE AIR PUMP PRESSRE & NEGATIVE PRESSRE AIR PUMP activation. ✔ ✔
D 09-2-012 AIR REGULATOR VALVE AIR REGULATOR VALVE activation. ✔ ✔
Opens pressure ink tank air valve. ✔ ✔
D 09-2-016 PRESSURE INK TANK AIR VALVE (OPEN) If left alone while being driven, the ink in the ink route may overflow.


Closes pressure ink tank air valve. ✔ ✔
If left alone while being driven, because the ink route is sealed shut, expansion and contraction of air due to temperature changes may cause the
D 09-2-017 PRESSURE INK TANK AIR VALVE (CLOSE)
head to break.

Opens pressure regulator valve. ✔ ✔
D 09-2-018 PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE (OPEN) If left alone while being driven, the ink in the ink route may overflow.
Opens negative pressure open air valve. ✔ ✔
D 09-2-021 NEGA PR INK TANK AIR VALVE (OPEN) If left alone while being driven, the ink in the ink route may overflow.
Closes negative pressure ink tank air valve. ✔ ✔
If left alone while being driven, because the ink route is sealed shut, expansion and contraction of air due to temperature changes may cause the
D 09-2-022 NEGA PR INK TANK AIR VALVE (CLOSE)
head to break.
Pressure regulator valve ✔ ✔

D 09-2-023 NEGA PR REGULATOR VALVE (OPEN) If left alone while being driven, the ink in the ink route may overflow.
CIRCULATION PUMP K activation. ✔ ✔
D 09-2-031 CIRCULATION PUMP K If left alone while being driven, the ink in the ink route may overflow.
CIRCULATION PUMP C activation. ✔ ✔
D 09-2-032 CIRCULATION PUMP C If left alone while being driven, the ink in the ink route may overflow.
CIRCULATION PUMP M (R,B) activation. ✔ ✔
D 09-2-033 CIRCULATION PUMP M (R,B) If left alone while being driven, the ink in the ink route may overflow.
CIRCULATION PUMP Y activation. ✔ ✔
D 09-2-034 CIRCULATION PUMP Y If left alone while being driven, the ink in the ink route may overflow.
CIRCULATION PUMP P activation. ✔
If left alone while being driven, the ink in the ink route may overflow. This is also applicable to the following:
D 09-2-035 CIRCULATION PUMP P (R, GR) - R of KCMYR units
Opens ink supply valve K. ✔ ✔
D 09-2-036 INK SUPPLY VALVE K If left alone while being driven, the ink in the ink route may overflow.
Opens ink supply valve C. ✔ ✔
D 09-2-037 INK SUPPLY VALVE C If left alone while being driven, the ink in the ink route may overflow.
Opens ink supply valve M (R,B). ✔ ✔
D 09-2-038 INK SUPPLY VALVE M (R,B) If left alone while being driven, the ink in the ink route may overflow.
Opens ink supply valve Y. ✔ ✔
D 09-2-039 INK SUPPLY VALVE Y If left alone while being driven, the ink in the ink route may overflow.
Opens ink supply valve P. ✔
If left alone while being driven, the ink in the ink route may overflow. This is also applicable to the following:
D 09-2-040 INK SUPPLY VALVE P (R, GR) - R of KCMYR units
IF unit
D 10-2-001 DECURLER MOTOR Decurler motor activation. (Operates at at 200 mm/s) ✔ ✔
Scanner
D 21-2-001 SCANNER LAMP Activates scanner lamp. ✔ ✔
D 21-2-002 AF READ PULSE MOTOR CW Drives AF read pulse motor at normal rotation. Speed is scan speed 1. ✔ ✔
D 21-2-003 AF FAN AF fan activation. ✔ ✔
D 21-2-004 AF SCANNER LAMP Activates AF scanner lamp. ✔ ✔
D 21-2-005 SCANNER POWER SUPPLY COOLING FAN Activates the scanner power supply cooling fan. ✔ ✔


D 21-2-006 FB COOLING FAN Activates the FB cooling fan. ✔ ✔
D 21-2-011 AF TRAY ELEVATION MOTOR Drives AF tray elevation/lowering motor. ✔ ✔
D 21-2-012 AF PAPER FEED MOTOR FRD (SPEED 1) Drives paper feed motor at normal rotation. Speed is separation speed 1. ✔ ✔
D 21-2-013 AF PAPER FEED MOTOR FRD (SPEED 2) Drives paper feed motor at normal rotation. Speed is separation speed 2. ✔ ✔
D 21-2-014 AF PAPER FEED MOTOR FRD (POS. SPEED) Drives paper feed motor at normal rotation. Speed is insertion speed. ✔ ✔
D 21-2-015 AF PAPER FEED MTR REV (P.UP INITIAL SPD) Drives paper feed motor at reverse rotation. Speed is pickup default speed. ✔ ✔
D 21-2-021 AF READ PULSE MOTOR FRD (SPEED 2) Drives AF read pulse motor at normal rotation. Speed is scan speed 2. ✔ ✔
D 21-2-022 AF READ PULSE MOTOR REV (SHADING) Drives AF read pulse motor at reverse rotation. Speed is shading speed. ✔ ✔
D 21-2-026 AF SEPARATION CLUTCH Drives AF separation clutch. ✔ ✔
D 21-2-027 AF REGISTRATION CLUTCH Drives AF registration clutch. ✔ ✔
D 23-2-001 DECURLER TRANSPORT MOTOR Drives the I/F unit transport roller. ✔ ✔
TRANSPORT MOTOR (HIGH SPEED Drives the X port system roller. (Normal rotation at 1000 mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-002
FORWARD)
TRANSPORT MOTOR (MID SPEED Drives the X port system roller. (Normal rotation at 800 mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-003
FORWARD)
TRANSPORT MOTOR (LOW SPEED Drives the X port system roller. (Reverse rotation at 385 mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-004
REVERSE)
D 23-2-005 COMPILE EXIT MOTOR (HIGH SPEED FRD) Drives compile exit/buffer system roller. (Normal rotation at 1000 mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-006 COMPILE EXIT MOTOR (MID SPEED FRD) Drives compile exit/buffer system roller. (Normal rotation at 800 mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-007 COMPILE EXIT MOTOR (LOW SPEED FRD) Drives compile exit/buffer system roller. (Normal rotation at 285 mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-008 COMPILE EXIT MOTOR (HIGH SPEED REV) Drives compile exit/buffer system roller. (Reverse rotation at 1000 mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-009 COMPILE EXIT MOTOR (LOW SPEED REV) Drives compile exit/buffer system roller. (Reverse rotation at 385 mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-010 PUNCHER MOVE CLUTCH Switches between puncher and sensor movement. ✔ ✔
D 23-2-011 PADDLE MOTOR Drives compiler paddle/sub-paddle. ✔ ✔
D 23-2-012 EJECT MOTOR (1st FORWARD) Drives eject roller. (Normal rotation at 800 mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-013 EJECT MOTOR (2nd FORWARD) Drives eject roller. (Normal rotation at 610 mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-014 EJECT MOTOR (3rd FORWARD) Drives eject roller. (Normal rotation at 404 mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-015 EJECT MOTOR (4th FORWARD) Drives eject roller. (Normal rotation at 320 mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-016 EJECT MOTOR (5th FORWARD) Drives eject roller. (Normal rotation at 285 mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-017 EJECT MOTOR (1st REVERSE) Drives eject roller. (Reverse rotation at 800 mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-021 SCT EJECT MOTOR (MID SPEED FORWARD) Drives SCT eject system roller. (Normal rotation at 800 mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-022 SCT EJECT MOTOR (LOW SPEED FORWARD) Drives SCT eject system roller. (Normal rotation at 285 mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-023 SCT EJECT MOTOR (LOW SPEED REVERSE) Drives SCT eject system roller. (Reverse rotation at 385 mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-024 EJECT MOTOR (HIGH SPEED FORWARD) Drives eject roller. (Normal rotation at 1000 mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-025 EJECT MOTOR (HIGH SPEED REVERSE) Drives eject roller. (Reverse rotation at 1000 mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-026 BOOKLET PAPER PATH MOTOR (HI SPEED) Drives booklet IN roller. (800mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-027 BOOKLET PAPER PATH MOTOR (MID SPEED) Drives booklet IN roller. (250mm/s) ✔ ✔
BOOKLET PAPER PATH MOTOR (LOW Drives booklet IN roller. (50mm/s) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-028
SPEED)
BOOKLET FOLDER ROLLER MOTOR Drives folder roller. (Regular rotation) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-029
FORWARD
BOOKLET FOLDER ROLLER MOTOR Drives folder roller. (Reverse rotation) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-030
REVERSE
D 23-2-031 TRAY BELT DRIVE MOTOR Drives tray belt. ✔ ✔
D 23-2-032 BOOKLET PADDLE MOTOR Drives booklet paddle. (Rotation) ✔ ✔
D 23-2-033 FOLDER DRIVE MOTOR 2 Drives transport roller and folding roller. ✔ ✔
D 23-2-034 FOLDER DRIVE MOTOR 1 Drives transport within the folder. ✔ ✔
D 23-2-035 FOLDER ENTRANCE MOTOR (HIGH SPEED) Drives transport above the folder. ✔ ✔


D 23-2-036 FOLDER ENTRANCE MOTOR (LOW SPEED) Drives transport above the folder. ✔ ✔
D 23-2-037 FOLDING SOLENOID 1 Drives folding solenoid 1. ✔ ✔
D 23-2-038 FOLDING SOLENOID 2 Drives folding solenoid 2. ✔ ✔
D 23-2-039 ENVELOPE TRAY LED 1 Activates envelope tray LED 1. ✔ ✔
D 23-2-040 FOLDER C SOLENOID Folder C solenoid activation. ✔ ✔
FACE DOWN FINISHER
D 24-2-001 FDF RELAY MOTOR 1 Driving of FDF relay motor 1. ✔ ✔
D 24-2-002 FDF RELAY MOTOR 2 Driving of FDF relay motor 2. ✔ ✔
D 24-2-003 FDF TRANSPORT MOTOR Driving of the FDF transport motor. ✔ ✔
D 24-2-004 FDF PAPER EJECTION MOTOR (FORWARD) Drives the FDF paper ejection motor in the forward direction. ✔ ✔
D 24-2-005 FDF REVERSE MOTOR Driving of the FDF reverse motor. ✔ ✔
D 24-2-006 FDF POWER SUPPLY COOLING FAN Driving of the FDF power supply cooling fan. ✔ ✔
D 24-2-007 FDF RELAY COOLING FAN Driving of the FDF relay cooling fan. ✔ ✔
D 25-2-001 AS SIDE FENCE MOTOR (WIDEN)
Operates AS side fence motor in the widen direction. ✔ ✔
If left alone while being driven,the mechanism may be damaged.
D 25-2-002 AS SIDE FENCE MOTOR (CLOSE)
Operates AS side fence motor in the close direction. ✔ ✔
D 25-2-003 AS END FENCE MOTOR (WIDEN)
Operates AS end fence motor in the widen direction. ✔ ✔
D 25-2-004 AS END FENCE MOTOR (CLOSE)
Operates AS end fence motor in the close direction. ✔ ✔
D 29-2-001 HCF PU DRIVE MOTOR Activation of the PU drive motor of the large-capacity paper feed unit. ✔
D 29-2-002 HCF INTERMEDIATE TRANSPORT MOTOR Activation of the intermediate transport motor of the large-capacity paper feed unit. ✔
D 29-2-003 HCF NIP RELEASE MOTOR Drives the nip release motor of the large-capacity paper feed unit in the clockwise direction. ✔
D 30-2-001 HCS ENTRY MOTOR Activation/stoppage of the entry motor of the large-capacity paper ejection unit. ✔
D 30-2-002 HCS SWITCHBACK MOTOR (FORWARD) Activation (in the forward direction)/stoppage of the switchback motor of the large-capacity paper ejection unit. ✔
D 30-2-003 HSC SWITCHBACK MOTOR (REVERSE) Activation (in the reverse direction)/stoppage of the switchback motor of the large-capacity paper ejection unit. ✔
D 30-2-004 HCS INTERMEDIATE TRANSPORT MOTOR Activation/stoppage of the intermediate transport motor of the large-capacity paper ejection unit. ✔
D 30-2-005 HCS ELEVATION MOTOR Activation/stoppage of the elevation motor of the large-capacity paper ejection unit. ✔
D 30-2-006 HCS PAPER EJECTION MOTOR Activation/stoppage of the paper ejection motor of the large-capacity paper ejection unit. ✔
HCS PAPER EJECTION WING MOVEMENT Activation/stoppage of the paper ejection wing movement motor of the large-capacity paper ejection unit. ✔
D 30-2-007
MOTOR
D 30-2-011 HCS ROUTE SWITCHING SOLENOID Activation/stoppage of the route switching solenoid of the large-capacity paper ejection unit. ✔
D 30-2-012 HCS OFFSET GUIDE SOLENOID Activation/stoppage of the HCS offset guide solenoid of the large-capacity paper ejection unit. ✔
D 33-2-001 MM ENTRY MOTOR Operates the entry motor in the transfer direction. ✔
D 33-2-002 MM ENTRY SELECTION SOLENOID Activation (in the form transfer direction)/stoppage (in the middle paper transfer direction) of the entry selection solenoid. ✔
D 33-2-003 MM ALIGNED FEEDING MOTOR Operates the aligned feeding motor in the transfer direction. ✔
D 33-2-004 MM LEADING EDGE ALIGNMENT SOLENOID Activation (alignment plate shelter position)/stoppage (alignment plate contact position) of the leading edge alignment solenoid. ✔
D 33-2-005 MM MIDDLE PAPER FOLD MOTOR Operates the middle paper fold motor in the transfer direction. ✔
D 33-2-006 MM WRAPPING FEED MOTOR Operates the wrapping feed motor in the transfer direction. ✔
D 33-2-007 MM FORM REGISTRATION MOTOR Operates the form registration motor in the transfer direction. ✔
D 33-2-008 MM WRAPPING FOLD MOTOR Operates the wrapping fold motor in the transfer direction. ✔
D 33-2-009 MM FLAP FOLD MOTOR Operates the flap fold motor in the transfer direction. ✔
D 33-2-010 MM PRESSURE BONDING MOTOR Operates the pressure bonding motor in the transfer direction. ✔
D 33-2-011 MM EJECTION ELEVATION MOTOR Operates the ejection elevation motor in the transfer direction. ✔
D 33-2-012 MM PAPER EJECTION MOTOR Operates the paper ejection motor in the transfer direction. ✔
D 33-2-013 MM ALIGNMENT COOLING FAN Checks the operation of the MM alignment cooling fan. ✔


D 33-2-014 MM WRAPPING COOLING FAN Checks the operation of the MM wrapping cooling fan. ✔
Perfect Binder
D 34-2-001 PB PAPER TRANSFER 1 MOTOR (FEED) Activation/stoppage of the PB paper transfer 1 motor (feed). ✔
D 34-2-002 PB PAPER TRANSFER 1 MOTOR (RETURN) Activation/stoppage of the PB paper transfer 1 motor (return). ✔
D 34-2-003 PB PAPER TRANSFER 2 MOTOR (FEED) Activation/stoppage of the PB paper transfer 2 motor (feed). ✔
D 34-2-004 PB PAPER TRANSFER 2 MOTOR (RETURN) Activation/stoppage of the PB paper transfer 2 motor (return). ✔
D 34-2-005 PB GLUE AMOUNT MEASUREMENT FAN Activation/stoppage of the PB glue amount measurement fan. ✔
D 34-2-006 PB BOOKLET EJECTION 1 MOTOR (FEED) Activation/stoppage of the PB booklet ejection 1 motor (feed). ✔
D 34-2-007 PB BOOKLET EJECTION 1 MOTOR (RETURN) Activation/stoppage of the PB booklet ejection 1 motor (return). ✔
D 34-2-008 PB BOOKLET EJECTION 2 MOTOR (FEED) Activation/stoppage of the PB booklet ejection 2 motor (feed). ✔
D 34-2-009 PB BOOKLET EJECTION 2 MOTOR (RETURN) Activation/stoppage of the PB booklet ejection 2 motor (return). ✔
D 34-2-010 PB EXHAUST FAN Activation/stoppage of the PB exhaust fan. ✔
D 34-2-011 PB COVER TRANSPORT MOTOR (FEED) Activation/stoppage of the PB cover transport motor (feed). ✔
Perfect Binder
D 34-2-012 PB COVER TRANSPORT MOTOR (RETURN) Activation/stoppage of the PB cover transport motor (return). ✔
D 34-2-013 PB COVER SUCTION FAN Activation/stoppage of the PB cover suction fan. ✔
D 34-2-014 PB COVER SEPARATION FAN Activation/stoppage of the PB cover separation fan. ✔
D 34-2-015 PB PAPER DIVERGING SOLENOID Activation/stoppage of the PB paper diverging solenoid. ✔
D 34-2-016 PB COVER DIVERGING SOLENOID Activation/stoppage of the PB cover diverging solenoid. ✔
D 34-2-017 PB COVER REGISTRATION SOLENOID Activation/stoppage of the PB cover registration solenoid. ✔
D 34-2-018 PB ROLLER CRIMPING SOLENOID Activation/stoppage of the PB roller crimping solenoid. ✔
D 34-2-019 PB SUCTION CONTROL SOLENOID Activation/stoppage of the PB suction control solenoid. ✔
D 34-2-020 PB PAPER FEED DRIVE CLUTCH Activation/stoppage of the PB paper feed drive clutch. ✔
D 34-2-021 PB BOOKLET EJECTION SOLENOID Activation/stoppage of the PB booklet ejection solenoid. ✔
PB FRONT COVER LOCK RELEASE Activation/stoppage of the PB front cover lock release solenoid. ✔
D 34-2-022
SOLENOID
D 34-2-023 PB RIGHT DOOR LOCK RELEASE SOLENOID Activation/stoppage of the PB right door lock release solenoid. ✔

Test
Type Test mode name Action Stop reception FW GD
mode No.
PMS section
Carry out compensation using the following steps
(1) Touch the 3 diagonally opposite points on the panel to calculate the compensation amount for those positions.
U 01-3-001 PANEL CALIBRATION × ✔ ✔
(2) Display the confirmation screen, touch the 3 points and confirm that they have been compensated correctly. If
compensation fails, go back to step (1) (redo compensation)
Automatically adjusts the touch pane threshold value (ON/OFF threshold value). Adjustment values are saved in the
TOUCH PANEL THRESHOLD
U 01-3-002 data flush of the panel micro computer. × ✔ ✔
LEVEL ADJUST
Do not touch the touch panel when executing this TM.
REv information recorded in the buffer is stored in a CSV file and written to a USB memory device.
Buffer data should not be cleared after writing when TM0-01-6-041 "REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTION SELECTION"
are set to "Enable".
U 01-3-011 REV INFORMATION WRITE Execution is possible when TM0-01-6-051 "REMOTE REV FUCNTION ON/OFF" in this menu is enabled. When ○ ✔ ✔
Enable, this TM is displayed in the menu. Execution by inputting the TM number shall also be possible.
When disabled, it will not appear in the menu list of this menu. Execution by inputting the TM number shall also be
unavailable.
Generates manual event code set in TM0-01-6-054 "REMOTE MANUAL EVENT CODE1 SETTING " and TM0-01-
6-055 "REMOTE MANUAL EVENT CODE2 SETTING", as a Rev event.
This menu can only be executed when TM0-01-6-051 "REMOTE REV FUCNTION ON/OFF" is enabled. When
U 01-3-012 MANUAL EVENT CODE SET × ✔ ✔
Enable, this TM is displayed in the menu. Execution by inputting the TM number shall also be possible.
unavailable.
The transmit log file recording the transmission history between the transmission module and management server is
saved to an external memory device (USB memory device).
When executed without connecting a USB memory device, the action will end in an error when there is insufficient
USB memory capacity.
U 01-3-013 TRANSMIT LOG USB SAVE ○ ✔ ✔
* This menu can be executed only when TM0-01-6-041 "REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTION SELECTION" is enabled.
When Enable, this TM is displayed in the menu. Execution by inputting the TM number shall also be possible.
unavailable.
When the remote agent function is ON, the CSV file, which serves as the source for generating transmission failure
files (XML) between the transmission server and remote management server, is stored on an external memory
device (USB memory device). When executed without connecting a USB memory device, the action will end in an
TRANSMIT FAIL DATA USB error when there is insufficient USB memory capacity.
U 01-3-014 ○ ✔ ✔
SAVE * This menu can be executed only when TM0-01-6-041 "REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTION SELECTION" is enabled.
When Enable, this TM is displayed in the menu. Execution by inputting the TM number shall also be possible.
unavailable.

Test
mode No.
Display the following count values in a list and print. Print content is the count type and value. Count values are
listed in 8 to 10 digits (zero suppression).
- Detailed count 1 - 21
- Maintenance count (Paper feed system, paper ejection system)
- Finisher count 1 - 8
- Cleaning count (extras, strong, normal)
- Offset staple taper receiving tray count 1 - 3
U 01-3-021 COUNT INFORMATION PRINT ○ ✔ ✔
Print conditions are as follows (cannot be changed)
- Output size: A4 (millimeters), Letter (Inches)
- Paper feed tray - Paper feed tray (Because specification processing is manual, print is carried out even when
different size paper is loaded
- Paper ejection tray: Standard paper ejection tray (FD paper receiving tray)
- Duplex print setting: Both sides
- Quantity: 1
PMS section
PMS and engine TM that fulfill the following conditions are extracted and printed in the reference chart. Contents for
print should be the TM number, TM name (English only), and setting value.
If there are no TMs that fulfill the following conditions, print "With no change" (none).
- TM for service engineer
- Setting value can be changed
U 01-3-022 TEST MODE CONFIG PRINT ○ ✔ ✔
- Setting value saved on main unit as non-volatile
- Setting value changed from default
Print conditions are the same as TM0-01-3-021 "Print count information".
* Prints the numbers and the setting values only for TM unshown on the panel.
* Refer to "Information print output material.xls" for the layout of print contents.
PMS and engine TM that fulfill the following conditions are extracted and printed in the reference chart. Contents for
print should be the TM number, TM name (English only), and setting value.
- TM for service engineer/manufacturing/development
- Setting value can be changed
U 01-3-023 TEST MODE CONFIG PRINT 2 ○ ✔ ✔
- Setting value saved on main unit as non-volatile
- Setting value changed from default
Print conditions are the same as TM0-01-3-021 "Print count information".
* Prints the numbers and the setting values only for unshown test mode on the panel. The print layout is the same as
TM0-01-3-022 "Test mode setting print".

Test
mode No.
Conducts a communication check between the main unit (transmission module) and management server.
The management server receiver can be checked in TM0-01-6-061 "AUTHENTICATION SERVER CONNECTION".
ADMIN SERVER * This menu can be executed only when TM0-01-6-041 "REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTION SELECTION" is enabled.
U 01-3-031 ○ ✔ ✔
COMMUNICATION TEST When Enable, this TM is displayed in the menu. Execution by inputting the TM number shall also be possible.
unavailable.
Sets printed content of charge count print (J) via USB memory device.
- Read destination: Directly under USB memory folder File name: ChargeCountTest.csv
CHARGE COUNT PRINT(J) [Precaution]
U 01-3-036 × ✔ ✔
IMPORT Executing immediately after inserting a USB memory device may cause W049-0280-6. Execute the following steps.
- After inserting a USB memory device, wait 5 seconds before executing
- Re-execute if W049-0280-6 appears
Saves printed content of charge count print (J) to USB memory device.
- Write destination: Directly under USB memory folder File name: ChargeCountTest.csv
Overwrite procedures are carried out if a file with the same name already exists.
CHARGE COUNT PRINT(J)
U 01-3-037 [Precaution] × ✔ ✔
EXPORT
Executing immediately after inserting a USB memory device may cause W049-0280-6. Execute the following steps.
Reads user information and retail store information from a USB memory device printed in a charge count.
- Read destination: Directly under USB memory folder File name: ChargeCountTest.csv
CHARGE COUNT PRINT(G) [Precaution]
U 01-3-038 × ✔ ✔
IMPORT Executing immediately after inserting a USB memory device may cause W049-0280-6. Execute the following steps.
Writes user information and retail store information to a USB memory device printed in a charge count.
- Write destination: Directly under USB memory folder File name: ChargeCountTest.csv
Overwrite procedures are carried out if a file with the same name already exists.
CHARGE COUNT PRINT(G)
U 01-3-039 [Precaution] × ✔ ✔
EXPORT

Test
mode No.
PMS section
Restoring default setting values to engine control HDD
The store data when executing this TM differs from the storage destination when executing TM0-01-3-041 "TEST
MODE VALUE STORE".
Restoring default setting values
U 01-3-040 This TM is executed internally while TM0-01-4-002 "Factory default" is running. Supplement × ✔ ✔
to engine control PCB
Because the engine control PCB was damaged during unpacking, it is assumed that the HDD factory setting values
are not reflected the first time the power is turned ON, and the TM is executed internally and factory setting values
are saved.
Saves engine part test mode setting values to PMS HDD. Used when replacing PCB.
U 01-3-041 TEST MODE VALUE STORE ○ ✔ ✔
Data saved to the HDD is restored to PCB on TM0-01-3-042 "Test mode setting value restore".
In TM0-01-3-041 "TEST MODE VALUE STORE", engine part test mode setting values saved to the PMS HDD are
U 01-3-042 TEST MODE VALUE RESTORE restored to the engine PCB. Used when replacing PCB. ○ ✔ ✔
* Turn the machine power OFF and ON again after executing this TM.
Stores the saved setting information from HDD to a USB memory device.
<Restoring procedure>
(1) Set the USB memory device in the main unit and execute.
(2) Turn off and on the printer with the sub power key.
(3) Storing is performed during startup of the printer.
(4) Remove the USB memory drive after the startup of the printer is completed. [Information retained by
storing/restoring]
· Information that can be set in administrator setting · User information, group information, and card ID · Job
management information · Stock management information · Favorites and POP information · Account record
U 01-3-044 HDD VALUE STORE × ✔ ✔
information (current and history) · REv and WebRemote information · Setting values of test modes related to data
edition that will be saved in HDD
[Information not retained by storing/restoring]
· Job data, and data saved in storage · Non-volatile mirrored data of the engine control PCB · Temporarily saved
data for image adjustment
[Precaution]

Test
mode No.
Restores the HDD setting information saved on a USB memory device to the HDD.
* This test is not displayed in the menu. It can be executed only by inputting the test number with numeric keypad,
and the test name is not displayed in the execution screen (to hide the execution mechanism of the test).
<Restoring procedure>
(1) After replacing HDD, insert a USB memory device containing the data for restoration into the printer and execute.
(2) Turn off and on the printer with the sub power key.
(3) Restoring is performed during startup of the printer.
U 01-3-045 HDD VALUE RESTORE × ✔ ✔
(4) Remove the USB memory drive after the startup of the printer is completed, and press the sub power key to
restart the printer.
(5) After the startup of the printer is completed, confirm that the setting information is restored successfully.
[Precaution]
Image Adjustment
<Automatic image adjustment>

The function performs rough adjustment of print timing.
By adjusting the print timing of each nozzle line for misaligned paper transfer direction print positions for each head
nozzle line, the paper transfer direction print print position can be aligned.
Perform rough adjustment when misalignment of the print positions is large. Reading is executed at 400 dpi.
Def = 2, Min = 1, Max = 9, Step = 1, Unit = sheets
The recommended auto image adjustment sequence is as follows.
(1) TM0-02-3-001 "Print timing rough adjustment"
PRINT TIMING ROUGH (2) TM0-02-3-002 "BP direction adjustment"
U 02-3-001 ○ ✔ ✔
ADJUSTMENT (3) TM0-02-3-003 "Registration roller direction adj"
(4) TM0-02-3-004 "Print head angle adjustment"
(5) TM0-02-3-005 "Print head position adjustment"
(6) TM0-02-3-006 "Print timing fine&overlap width adj"*
(7) TM0-02-3-007 "Print head edge density adjustment"
(8) TM0-02-3-008 "Head density adjustment"
(9) TM0-02-3-009 "Image elongation adjustment"
*(6) TM0-02-3-006 "Print timing fine&overlap width adj" is the TM that executes TM0-02-3-010 "Print timing fine
adjustment" and TM0-02-3-011 "Overlap width adjustment". The two TMs above can be executed in place of (6).

Test
mode No.

The function aligns the transfer belt unit orientation with the print head holder unit orientation.
The adjustment amount (scale mark numbers) of the BP unit direction adjustment mechanism is calculated and
U 02-3-002 BP DIRECTION ADJUSTMENT displayed from the printed and scanned image data of the measurement pattern. ○ ✔ ✔
Reading is executed at 400 dpi.
For the preferable automatic image adjustment execution sequence, see TM0-02-3-001 "PRINT TIMING ROUGH
ADJUSTMENT".

Aligns the registration roller orientation with the transfer belt orientation.
The adjustment amount of the registration roller unit direction adjustment mechanism is displayed from the printed
REGISTRATION ROLLER
U 02-3-003 and scanned image data of the measurement pattern. ○ ✔ ✔
DIRECTION ADJ
ADJUSTMENT".

The function adjusts the print heads so that the lengthwise direction of nozzles becomes perpendicular to the paper
transport direction. From the scanned image of the printed measurement pattern,the paper transport direction and
the lengthwise angle direction of nozzles are calculated and the number of rotations for the print head angle
U 02-3-004 HEAD ANGLE ADJUSTMENT ○ ✔ ✔
adjustment screw are calculated and displayed.
ADJUSTMENT".

Calculates the relative position of the horizontal (lengthwise direction of nozzle) of each lane's Cyan, Magenta, and
Yellow print head relative to the Black print head of the same lane and converts it to the adjustment screw rotation
amount and displays it to match the Black.
HEAD POSITION
U 02-3-005 When adjusting the Black print head position (e.g., when the Black print head is replaced), calculation is conducted ○ ✔ ✔
ADJUSTMENT
from the Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow adjustment amount (either or the average value) of the same lane.
ADJUSTMENT".

Test
mode No.

A single scan of TM0-02-3-010 "Print timing fine adjustment" and TM0-02-3-011 "Overlap width adjustment"
PRINT TIMING simultaneously calculates the adjustment value and sets the result of adjustment value to the engine.
U 02-3-006 ○ ✔ ✔
FINE&OVERLAP WIDTH ADJ Def = 2, Min = 1, Max = 9, Step = 1, Unit = sheets
ADJUSTMENT".
Image Adjustment
<Manual image adjustment>

(Although this contains the preferable automatic image adjustment sequence, because the adjustment value is
entered and set, it is manual image adjustment.)
Adjusting approximately a 0.5 mm width of the print head edge compensates for density.
HEAD EDGE DENSITY
U 02-3-007 - Click the "Print" button to print an edge adjustment pattern. Enter the desired position information for each seam. ○ ✔ ✔
ADJUSTMENT
Def = (blank column), Min = 1, Max = 20, Step = 1,
Unit = number (which number in a pattern with 12 components)
ADJUSTMENT".

The function adjusts the print head drive correction voltage to keep the same print density between neighboring
U 02-3-008 HEAD DENSITY ADJUSTMENT lanes. Reading is executed at 300 dpi. ○ ✔ ✔
ADJUSTMENT".

IMAGE ELONGATION The function adjusts the length of the image in the paper transport direction. Reading is executed at 400 dpi.
U 02-3-009 ○ ✔ ✔
ADJUSTMENT For the preferable automatic image adjustment execution sequence, see TM0-02-3-001 "PRINT TIMING ROUGH
ADJUSTMENT".

The function performs fine adjustment of print timing.
PRINT TIMING FINE By adjusting the print timing of each nozzle line for misaligned paper transfer direction print positions for each head
U 02-3-010 ○ ✔ ✔
ADJUSTMENT nozzle line, the paper transfer direction print print position can be aligned.
Def ＝ 2, Min ＝ 1, Max ＝ 9, Step ＝ 1, Unit ＝ sheet

Test
mode No.

Adjusts the overlap of the print areas of neighboring print heads
The function measures overlap of the print areas of neighboring print heads and determines the nozzle range. When
OVERLAP WIDTH a parameter that is larger than the actual overlap width value is set, a gap can occur in the seam, and when a
U 02-3-011 ○ ✔ ✔
ADJUSTMENT parameter that is smaller than the actual overlap width value is set, the seam becomes darker. The seam becomes
hard to see if the appropriate overlap is specified.
Def ＝ 2, Min ＝ 1, Max ＝ 9, Step ＝ 1, Unit ＝ sheet

Adjusts the beginning image recording position for the leading edge of the paper (length of margin) and length of the
margin for the trailing edge of the paper.
Determines the leading edge of the paper and trailing edge of the paper based on the output from the top edge
sensor. The top edge sensor contains both the top edge sensor 1 and top edge sensor 2, which are necessary for
TOP END POSITION adjusting the leading and trailing positions.
U 02-3-021 ○ ✔ ✔
ADJUSTMENT Sensor 1 Top print position:
Def = 0, Min = -70, Max = 70, Step = 1, Unit = 0.1mm Sensor 1 Trailing end mask length:
Def = 0, Min = -70, Max = 70, Step = 1, Unit = 0.1mm
Sensor 2 Top print position:
Def = 0, Min = -70, Max = 70, Step = 1, Unit = 0.1mm Sensor 2 Trailing end mask length:
Def ＝ 0, Min ＝ -70, Max ＝ 70, Step ＝ 1, Unit ＝ 0.1 mm

The function adjusts the amount of margin at the right and left edges of paper. Left:
U 02-3-022 SIDE MASK ADJUSTMENT ○ ✔ ✔
Def = 0, Min = -100, Max = 100, Step = 1, Unit = 0.1 mm Right:
Def ＝ 0, Min ＝ -100, Max ＝ 100, Step ＝ 1, Unit ＝ 0.1 mm

U 02-3-023 DENSITY COMPENSATION The function compensates for density difference between the print heads. ○ ✔ ✔
Def ＝ 0, Min ＝ -100, Max ＝ 100, Step ＝ 1, Unit ＝ 0.01 V

Test
mode No.
Image Adjustment

The function adjusts the individual print head positions in the X direction with reference to black of the lane. Def = 0,
Min = *, Max = *, Step = 1, Unit = μm
*Min and Max are determined by TM0-02-3-026 "Print head overlap adjustment"
U 02-3-024 X DIRECTION ADJUSTMENT ○ ✔ ✔
The "1" taken from the TM0-02-3-026 value is the absolute figure for Min and Max in this TM. Min is the value with a
- (minus) attached.
TM0-02-3-026 = 1000, Min = -999, Max = 999
TM0-02-3-026 = 2000, Min = -1999, Max = 1999

U 02-3-025 Y DIRECTION ADJUSTMENT The function adjusts print timing of each nozzle for each line. Def = 0, Min = -3000, Max = 3000, Step = 1, ○ ✔ ✔
Unit = 2.64μm (84.5μm* (1/32) ⇒ 1 dot 1/32)

The function adjusts overlap between neighboring lanes. Def = 0, Min = *, Max = 3000, Step = 1, Unit = μm
*Min is determined by the value in TM0-02-3-024 "X DIRECTION ADJUSTMENT".
OVERLAP AMOUNT
U 02-3-026 The value with a "1" added to the absolute figure of TM0-02-3-024 determines the Min for this TM. Min is the value ○ ✔ ✔
ADJUSTMENT
with a - (minus) attached.
TM0-02-3-024 = 1000, Min = 1001
TM0-02-3-024 = 2000, Min = 2001

Sets "AL value" and "voltage value" with respect to the head which is specified in "head color designation" and
"head position designation" when the head is replaced.
- Head color: Selects the colors of the replaced heads
HEAD REPLACEMENT - Head position designation: Selects the positions of the replaced heads
U 02-3-027 ○ ✔ ✔
PARAMETER - AL value: Inputs the AL value described in the replaced heads
- Voltage value: Inputs the voltage value described in the replaced heads
AL value:
Def = 0, Min = 0, Max = 13, Step = 1, Unit = Mode Voltage value:
Def = 1100, Min = 700, Max = 1400, Step = 1, Unit = 0.01 V
Temporarily saves (backs up) current image adjustment data.

IMAGE ADJUST PARAMETER
U 02-3-041 * Temporarily saves the current adjustment values before image adjustment, enables you to restore the original × ✔ ✔
SAVE
status if image adjustment fails.
IMAGE ADJUST PARAMETER Retrieves the image adjustment data temporarily stored in TM0-02-3-041 "IMAGE ADJUST PARAMETER SAVE."
U 02-3-042 × ✔ ✔
RETRIEVE * Enables you to restore the original status if image adjustment fails.

Test
mode No.
Transmits the image adjustment command from USB memory to the engine.
* When executing this test mode, you must insert the USB memory stick containing image adjustment files into the
IMAGE ADJUST FILE
U 02-3-043 main unit beforehand. ○ ✔ ✔
TRANSMIT
Error message W047-0255 (No image adjustment file error) will appear if this test mode is executed with no image
adjustment command file in the USB memory stick.

Executes "INK SUPPLY UNIT INITIALIZE" and "Maintenance head holder unit mechanisms initialization."
U 04-3-001 INITIALIZE MOVEMENT * This menu cannot be executed if an inoperable error in "transfer belt unit," "ink pan," "wiper," or "ink circulation ○ ✔ ✔
unit" occurs.
FRONT COVER LOCK Makes the front cover lock solenoid generate suction for 1 second.
U 04-3-002 SOLENOID 1-SECOND If you perform this test with the front cover locked, the front cover will be released. If you perform this test with the ✔
SUCTION OPERATION front cover released, the front cover will be locked.
OPTION PCB FIRMWARE

U 04-3-008 Downloads option PCB firmware. × ✔ ✔
DOWNLOAD
U 04-3-011 ADJUST PARAMETER SAVE Backs up setting values that vary from equipment to equipment. Overwrites the factory default test mode settings. × ✔ ✔
Automatically acquires paper edge information and AD values.

U 04-3-021 CIS OPERATION CHECK * This menu cannot be executed under following conditions. × ✔ ✔
- In case an inoperable error in "transfer belt unit," "ink pan," or "wiper" occurs
Executes automatic shading compensation for the rear (left) CIS.

REAR CIS SHADING
U 04-3-022 * This menu cannot be executed under following conditions. × ✔ ✔
COMPENSATION
Executes automatic shading compensation for the front (right-side) CIS.

FRONT CIS SHADING
U 04-3-023 * This menu cannot be executed under the following conditions. ✔
COMPENSATION
Executes automatic shading compensation for the front and rear CIS.
FRONT & REAR CIS SHADING
U 04-3-024 * This menu cannot be executed under following conditions. × ✔ ✔
COMPENSATION
Phase from 0 to 340 is performed test print in every 20 steps. Confirms the roller profile phase from interference
ROLLER PROFILE PHASE
U 04-3-026 unevenness of print. ○ ✔ ✔
PRINT
* This menu cannot be executed in case of inoperable print conditions.

Test
mode No.
Amplitude from 0100 to 1600 is performed test print in every 100 steps. Confirms the roller profile amplitude from
ROLLER PROFILE AMPLITUDE
U 04-3-027 interference unevenness of print. ○ ✔ ✔
PRINT
* This menu cannot be executed in case of inoperable print conditions.
ROLLER PROFILE DATA Adjustment data is generated from the values entered in TM0-04-6-022 "ROLLER PROFILE AMPLITUDE INPUT"
U 04-3-028 × ✔ ✔
OPEN and TM0-04-6-023 "ROLLER PROFILE PHASE INPUT," and this is saved to the engine flash memory.
- Prints a head test pattern.

- Transfer speed corresponds to "300-5".
- Paper width 297 mm or wider is used.
- Print conditions other than the above apply the following settings.
-- TM0-04-6-065 "TM PRINT: PRINT HEAD TEST PATTERN"
-- TM0-04-6-061 "TM PRINT: PRINT QUANTITY SETTING"
-- TM0-04-6-062 "TM PRINT: OUTPUT DESTINATION"
-- TM0-04-6-063 "TM PRINT: DUPLEX/SIMPLEX"
-- TM0-04-6-064 "TM PRINT: PAPER FEED TRAY SELECTION"
U 04-3-031 HEAD TEST PATTERN PRINT ○ ✔ ✔
The following test modes are used when TM0-04-6-062 "TM PRINT: OUTPUT DESTINATION" of "0: FACE UP" is
connected with the multi-finisher.
-- TM0-04-6-071 "TM PRINT: EJECT TRAY SELECTION"
-- TM0-04-6-072 "TM PRINT: FIN OFFSET EJECT SELECTION"
-- TM0-04-6-073 "TM PRINT: FIN STAPLE SELECTION"
-- TM0-04-6-074 "TM PRINT: FIN PUNCHER SELECTION"
-- TM0-04-6-075 "TM PRINT: FIN BOOKLET SELECTION"
-- TM0-04-6-076 "TM PRINT: FIN FOLDING SELECTION"
* This test mode cannot be executed in case of inoperable print conditions.
Executes print operation.

* You must set parameters of print quantity, simplex and duplex print by the following test modes. TM0-04-6-061 "TM
PRINT: PRINT QUANTITY SETTING"
U 04-3-032 PRINT OPERATION TM0-04-6-062 "TM PRINT: OUTPUT DESTINATION" TM0-04-6-063 "TM PRINT: DUPLEX/SIMPLEX" ○ ✔ ✔
TM0-04-6-064 "TM PRINT: PAPER FEED TRAY SELECTION" TM0-04-6-101 "TM PAPER FEED SPEED
SETTING"
An inverse Fourier transform is performed using value entered in TM0-04-6-012 "BELT PROFILE DATA INPUT",
U 04-3-041 BELT PROFILE DATA OPEN and this is saved to the engine flash memory. At this time, the value entered for TM0-04-6-013 "BELT PROFILE × ✔ ✔
CHECK DIGIT INPUT" is used in verification test, and invalid input values cause an error.

Test
mode No.
Prints the information of replacement part for paper supply system. Print contents are as follows (* 1).
- Equipment information (Date confirmed (Execution date of this test mode), Model name, Serial No., Copy counter,
Package version)
- Part position (Illustration, Number)
- Part name * 2
PREV MAINT CHECK PRINT
U 04-3-050 - Estimated counter * 3 ○ ✔ ✔
(REPLACE)
- Current counter
- Evaluation * 3
* 1 Refer to "Information print output material.xls" for the layout of print contents.
* 2 Output cannot be performed in Japanese.
* 3 Output cannot be performed in US English.

PREV MAINT CHECK PRINT Prints the information of cleaning part for paper supply system.
U 04-3-051 ○ ✔ ✔
(CLEAN) * Refer to TM0-04-3-050 "PREV MAINT CHECK PRINT (REPLACE)" for more information.
Outputs the counter value of replacement part for paper supply system to USB memory. Output file name:
"0043055.csv"
Output data: Part number and Counter value (Unit without tray cannot be output the tray data) Output format: csv
Output data image:
1-1,250000
COUNT INFORMATION 1-2,190000
U 04-3-055 ○ ✔ ✔
OUTPUT (REPLACE) 1-3,100000
2-1-1,123456
2-1-2,123456
2-2-1,123456
3-1,250000
:
Outputs the counter value of cleaning part for paper supply system to USB memory. Output file name:
COUNT INFORMATION
U 04-3-056 "0043056.csv" ○ ✔ ✔
OUTPUT (CLEAN)
* See TM0-04-3-055 "COUNT INFORMATION OUTPUT (REPLACE)" for more information, such as output data.
Paper feed section
PAPER FEED TRAY WIDTH Specifies an A/D value of 297 mm as the width for paper size detection.
U 05-3-001 × ✔ ✔
ADJUST (WIDE) * Execute this test mode after loading paper of this size (A4 landscape) on the paper feed tray.
U 05-3-002 × ✔ ✔
ADJUST (MID) * Execute this test mode after loading paper of this size (A4 portrait) on the paper feed tray.
U 05-3-003 × ✔ ✔
ADJUST (NRRW) * Execute this test mode after loading paper of this size (A4 portrait, 2-fold) on the paper feed tray.

Test
mode No.
REGIST&TOP EDGE SNSR 1 Feeds paper from the paper feed tray to the position for executing TM0-05-3-012 "REGIST&TOP EDGE SENSOR 1
U 05-3-011 × ✔ ✔
ADJ AUTO FEED AUTO ADJUST".
REGIST&TOP EDGE SENSOR

U 05-3-012 The luminous energy of registration sensor and top edge sensor 1 are both adjusted automatically. × ✔ ✔
1 AUTO ADJUST
PFT UPPER LIMIT POSITION

U 05-3-016 Starts the elevator motor, detects the upper limit, and stops it. Positioning is conducted at the upper limit. × ✔ ✔
MOVE
PFT LOWER LIMIT POSITION

U 05-3-017 Starts the elevator motor, detects the lower limit, and stops it. × ✔ ✔
MOVE
TRAY1 UPPER LIMIT

U 05-3-018 Starts the tray 1 elevator motor, detects the upper limit, and stops it. Positioning is conducted at the upper limit. × ✔ ✔
POSITION MOVE
TRAY2 UPPER LIMIT

U 05-3-019 Starts the tray 2 elevator motor, detects the upper limit, and stops it. Positioning is conducted at the upper limit. × ✔ ✔
POSITION MOVE
TRAY3 UPPER LIMIT

U 05-3-020 Starts the tray 3 elevator motor, detects the upper limit, and stops it. Positioning is conducted at the upper limit. ✔
POSITION MOVE
Transport section
TOP EDGE SENSOR 2 AUTO

U 06-3-001 The luminous energy of top edge sensor 2 are adjusted automatically. × ✔ ✔
ADJUST
Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed.

* Print conditions shall be as follows (No changes are allowed)
- Output size: A4 landscape (Millimeter machine), Letter landscape (Inch machine)
- Paper feed tray: Paper feed tray
- Paper ejection tray: Standard paper ejection tray (face down tray)
BP MOTOR SPEED AUTO - Duplex print setting: Simplex
U 06-3-006 × ✔
ADJUST - Speed: 632 mm/s (fixing)
Measurement is made by feeding 8 papers. Automatically adjusts the speed if the transfer speed is faster than the
prescribed speed (632 mm/s), or slower.
* The test mode area clear and the factory default operation initialize to the set value in TM0-04-3-011 "ADJUST
PARAMETER SAVE."

Test
mode No.
Transport section
Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed.

BP MOTOR SPEED AUTO
U 06-3-006 - Duplex print setting: Simplex ✔
ADJUST
- Speed: 632 mm/s (fixing) Measurement is made by feeding 8 papers. Automatically adjusts the speed if the
transfer speed is faster than the prescribed speed (632 mm/s), or slower.
* The test mode area clear and the factory default operation initialize to the set value in TM0-04-3-011 “ADJUST
PARAMETER SAVE.”
Adjusts the lower duplex transport brushless motor speed.

LOWER P-TRANS MOTOR - Duplex print setting: Simplex
U 06-3-007 × ✔ ✔
SPEED AUTO ADJ - Speed: 632 mm/s (fixing)
Measurement is made by feeding 8 papers. Automatically adjusts the speed if the transfer speed is faster than the
prescribed speed (632 mm/s), or slower.
* The test mode area clear and the factory default operation initialize to the set value in TM0-04-3-011 "ADJUST
PARAMETER SAVE."
BELT MAINTENANCE COUNT

U 06-3-011 Resets the belt maintenance counter. × ✔ ✔
RESET
FD PAPER EJECTION PAPER

U 07-3-001 Moves the paper ejection paper guide to the home position. ✔
GUIDE HOME POSITION
FD PAPER EJECTION PAPER Moves the paper ejection paper guide to the position specified with "No. 0-07-6-004 FD PAPER EJECTION PAPER
U 07-3-002 ✔
GUIDE CUSTOM GUIDE SPECIFIED POSITION SETTING".
Moves the FD paper ejection paper guide for one cycle.

(1) Returns to the home position.
FD PAPER EJECTION PAPER
U 07-3-003 (2) Moves to the "minimum" position and stops for 1 second. ✔
GUIDE 1 CYCLE
(3) Moves to the "maximum" position and stops for 1 second.

Test
mode No.
FU PAPER EJECTION WING
U 07-3-011 Moves the FU paper ejection wing to the home position. ✔
HOME POSITION

U 07-3-012 Moves the FU paper ejection wing to the specified position (Tm1852). ✔
CUSTOM
Moves the FU paper ejection wing for one cycle.

FU PAPER EJECTION WING 1
U 07-3-013 (2) Moves to the "minimum" position and stops for 1 second. ✔
CYCLE
(3) Moves to the "maximum" position and stops for 1 second.
Starts normal cleaning.

* This test mode cannot be executed under following conditions.
U 09-3-001 NORMAL CLEANING × ✔ ✔
- In case an inoperable error in "transfer belt unit," "ink pan," "wiper," or "ink circulation unit" occurs
- In case an error on "no ink," or "ink bottle" occurs
Starts hyper cleaning.

U 09-3-002 HYPER CLEANING × ✔ ✔
Starts extra cleaning.

(Necessary time: hyper cleaning (3 times) and Circulation time (approx. 5 min))
U 09-3-003 EXTRA CLEANING * This test mode cannot be executed under following conditions. × ✔ ✔
Pressurizes the nozzle to the same value as when pressurizing hyper cleaning.
STRONG CLEANING
U 09-3-004 - In case an inoperable error in "ink circulation unit" occurs × ✔ ✔
PRESSURE
- In case an error on "no ink" or "ink bottle" occurs
- In case it is already in "strong cleaning pressure"
Pressurizes the nozzle to the same value as when pressurizing normal cleaning.
NORMAL CLEANING
PRESSURE
- In case it is already in "normal cleaning pressure"

Test
mode No.
Perform strong maintenance (pressure sensor initialization → ink level adjustment without supplying ink [liquid
STRONG MAINTENANCE transfer until the pressurized ink tank turns ON] → strong purge → wipe) without opening the ink-supply valve.
U 09-3-006 WITHOUT OPENING THE INK- - Use TM0-09-6-053 "TM STRONG MAINTENANCE WITHOUT OPENING THE INK-SUPPLY VALVE_COUNT" to × ✔
SUPPLY VALVE set
the repetition count.
Executes ink initial filling.

U 09-3-011 INK INITIAL FILLING × ✔ ✔
Initializes the ink supply unit mechanisms.

U 09-3-012 INK SUPPLY UNIT INITIALIZE × ✔ ✔
* This test mode cannot be executed if an inoperable error in "ink circulation unit" occurs.
Repeats the initial ink filling operations (supply → cleaning → circulation → drainage). - Use TM0-09-6-052 "TM
INITIAL INK FILLING REPETITION MODE COUNT" to set the repetition count.
- You can use TM0-09-5-012 "TM INITIAL INK FILLING REPETITION MODE EXECUTION COUNT DISPLAY" to
check
INITIAL INK FILLING
U 09-3-013 the most recent initial ink filling repetition count. ✔ ✔
REPETITION MODE
- If the printer stops due to an error, initial ink filling will be performed only once automatically after the error is
released. This also increments the count of the executed repetitions. The remaining repetitions are performed when
this test mode is executed again.
- Assume that a recovery wipe is present.
Moves the wiper motor to the front.

* You must check the transfer belt unit and the ink pan mechanism positions before this operation.
U 09-3-016 WIPE MOTOR TO FRONT * This test mode cannot be executed under following conditions. × ✔ ✔
- In case "wiper" is in the front position
Moves the wiper motor to the rear.

* You must check the transfer belt unit and the ink pan mechanism positions before this operation.
U 09-3-017 WIPE MOTOR TO REAR * This test mode cannot be executed under following conditions. × ✔ ✔
- In case "wiper" is in the front position
Executes wiping action.

U 09-3-018 WIPING ACTION × ✔ ✔
- In case "wiper" is not in the front position

Test
mode No.
BP ELEVATOR MOTOR TO DOWN (sensor stop)

BP ELEVATOR MOTOR TO
U 09-3-020 * This test mode cannot be executed under following conditions. × ✔ ✔
DOWN
BP ELEVATOR MOTOR TO MIDPOINT (sensor stop)

BP ELEVATOR MOTOR TO
MIDPOINT
BP ELEVATOR MOTOR TO UP (sensor stop)

U 09-3-022 BP ELEVATOR MOTOR TO UP - In case an inoperable error in "transfer belt unit," "ink pan," or "wiper" occurs × ✔ ✔
- In case "transfer belt unit" is in the open position
- In case "transfer belt unit" is in the upper limit position
Moves the BP elevation motor to the upper limit direction (1 sec)

* Machine will not accept any BP related test mode after operation of this test mode since the machine is unable to
BP ELEVATOR MOTOR PUSH
U 09-3-023 detect the BP position. × ✔ ✔
UP
The mechanical initializing operation by open/close of the front cover is required in order to return from this test
mode.
BP ELEVATOR MOTOR MAINTENANCE POS (encoder stop)

BP ELEVATOR MOTOR * This test mode cannot be executed under following conditions.
U 09-3-024 × ✔ ✔
MAINTENANCE POS - In case an inoperable error in "transfer belt unit," "ink pan," or "wiper" occurs
- In case "transfer belt unit" is in the wipe position

Moves the ink pan to the pause position.
U 09-3-026 INK PAN PAUSE POSITION × ✔ ✔
- In case "ink pan" is in the storage position or the pause position
Moves the ink pan to the storage position.

U 09-3-027 INK PAN STORAGE POSITION × ✔ ✔
- In case "ink pan" is in the storage position
Moves the ink pan to the open position.

U 09-3-028 INK PAN ON-BELT POSITION × ✔ ✔
- In case "ink pan" is in the open position

Test
mode No.
AUTHORIZE CAM MOTOR HP Moves the authorization cam motor to the home position.
U 09-3-031 × ✔ ✔
POSITION * This test mode cannot be executed if an inoperable error in "authorization cam" occurs.
Moves to the normal paper position in head gap adjustment.

U 09-3-036 HEAD GAP ADJUST (NORMAL) × ✔ ✔
- In case "transfer belt unit" is in the normal paper position
Moves to the card paper position in head gap adjustment.

U 09-3-037 HEAD GAP ADJUST (THICK) × ✔ ✔
- In case "transfer belt unit" is in the card paper position
Moves to the envelope position 1 in head gap adjustment.

HEAD GAP ADJUST * This test mode cannot be executed under following conditions.
U 09-3-038 × ✔ ✔
(ENVELOPE POS1) - In case an inoperable error in "transfer belt unit," "ink pan," or "wiper" occurs
- In case "transfer belt unit" is in the envelope position 1
Moves to the envelope position 2 in head gap adjustment.

HEAD GAP ADJUST * This test mode cannot be executed under following conditions.
U 09-3-039 × ✔ ✔
(ENVELOPE POS2) - In case an inoperable error in "transfer belt unit," "ink pan," or "wiper" occurs
- In case "transfer belt unit" is in the envelope position 2
Activates K ink circulation pump motor and deactivates automatically in 100 msec.
U 09-3-046 K-PUMP MOTOR ACTION × ✔ ✔
* This test mode cannot be executed if an error on "K ink circulation pump" occurs.
Activates C ink circulation pump motor and deactivates automatically in 100 msec.
U 09-3-047 C-PUMP MOTOR ACTION × ✔ ✔
* This test mode cannot be executed if an error on "C ink circulation pump" occurs.
M (R,B,K2)-PUMP MOTOR Activates M ink circulation pump motor and deactivates automatically in 100 msec.
U 09-3-048 × ✔ ✔
ACTION * This test mode cannot be executed if an error on "M ink circulation pump" occurs.
Activates Y ink circulation pump motor and deactivates automatically in 100 msec.
U 09-3-049 Y-PUMP MOTOR ACTION × ✔ ✔
* This test mode cannot be executed if an error on "Y ink circulation pump" occurs.
Opens the K-ink fuse solenoid valve and then closes it after 500 msec.
U 09-3-051 K INK-SUPPLY VALVE OPEN × ✔ ✔
* This test mode cannot be executed if "K-ink fuse solenoid valve connection error" occurs.
Opens the C-ink fuse solenoid valve and then closes it after 500 msec.
U 09-3-052 C INK-SUPPLY VALVE OPEN × ✔ ✔
* This test mode cannot be executed if "C-ink fuse solenoid valve connection error" occurs.

Test
mode No.
M (R,B) INK-SUPPLY VALVE Opens the M-ink fuse solenoid valve and then closes it after 500 msec.
U 09-3-053 × ✔
OPEN * This test mode cannot be executed if "M-ink fuse solenoid valve connection error" occurs.
INK SUPPLY VALVE M (R,B) Opens ink supply valve M (R,B) for 500 msec and then closes it.
U 09-3-053 ✔
ACTION * This test mode cannot be executed if “Ink supply valve M (R, B) not connected error” occurs.
Opens the Y-ink fuse solenoid valve and then closes it after 500 msec.
U 09-3-054 Y INK-SUPPLY VALVE OPEN × ✔ ✔
* This test mode cannot be executed if "Y-ink fuse solenoid valve connection error" occurs.
Opens ink supply valve P for 500 msec and then closes it.
* This test mode cannot be executed if "Ink supply valve P not connected error" occurs. This is also applicable to the
P (R, GR) INK-SUPPLY VALVE
U 09-3-055 following: ✔
OPEN
- R of KCMYR units
Opens the pressurized tank air valve and then closes the valve after 500 msec.
U 09-3-056 PRESSURE TANK AIR OPEN × ✔ ✔
* This test mode cannot be executed if "pressurized tank air valve connection error" occurs.
NEGATIVE PRESSURE TANK Closes the negative ink tank air valve and then opens it after 500 msec.
U 09-3-057 × ✔ ✔
AIR OPEN * This test mode cannot be executed if "negative ink tank air valve connection error" occurs.
Pressurizes the nozzle to the same value as at the time of print.

* Execute TM0-09-3-067 "NOZZLE LOW NEGATIVE PRESSURE" to stop it.
U 09-3-066 NOZZLE PRESSURE - PRINT × ✔ ✔
- In case an inoperable error in "ink circulation unit" occurs
- In case it is already in "nozzle pressure - print"
Nozzle low negative pressure

NOZZLE LOW NEGATIVE
PRESSURE
- In case it is already in "nozzle low negative pressure"

Test
mode No.
Collectively executes TM0-09-6-025 "INK TEMPERATURE ADJUST ON/OFF", TM0-09-3-066 "NOZZLE

PRESSURE -
PRINT," TM0-09-3-067 "NOZZLE LOW NEGATIVE PRESSURE." (Ink circulation work simplification
correspondence) [Action]
Performs processing in the following order in this test mode.
1. When executing this test mode, temporarily stops this test mode if the ink temperature adjustment action is
executed.
2. When the ink path pressure is not the nozzle low negative pressure, temporarily changes to the nozzle low
negative pressure, and then changes to the print pressure.
U 09-3-068 INK CIRCULATION ACTION 3. When the ink path pressure becomes the print pressure, continues the print pressure in accordance with the ○ ✔ ✔
setting value of TM0-09-6-131 "INK CICULATION DURATION", after the set time has elapsed, changes the ink
path pressure to the nozzle low negative pressure and then closes this test mode.
* Before the set time has elapsed, changes to the nozzle low negative pressure even when the stop key is pressed
from the panel.
* If the process is interrupted by the error occurrence when executing this test mode, displays W070-0247-3 "TEST
MODE NON-COMPLETE."
- In case an inoperable error in "ink circulation unit" occurs
Executes the filter air vent operation before performing TM0-09-3-070 "EXTERNAL FILTER INK CIRCULATION."
- BP ELEVATOR MOTOR TO DOWN
- INK PAN ON-BELT POSITION
EXTERNAL FILTER AIR VENT - INK-SUPPLY VALVE OPEN
U 09-3-069 ○ ✔ ✔
INK CIRCULATION - INK CIRCULATION ACTION * 1
*1
Sets the ink circulation time in the following test mode.
TM0-09-6-050 "TM EXTERNAL FILTER AIR VENT INK CIRCULATION DURATION"

Test
mode No.
Executes the external filter ink circulation operation.
- BP ELEVATOR MOTOR TO DOWN
- INK PAN ON-BELT POSITION
- INK-SUPPLY VALVE OPEN
- EXTERNAL FILTER INK CIRCULATION ACTION * 1 * 2
- COOLING CIRCULATION ACTION
EXTERNAL FILTER INK - (Operator) switches the circulation path
U 09-3-070 ○ ✔ ✔
CIRCULATION - (After switching the circulation path) normal cleaning operation
*1
Sets the external filter ink circulation time in the following test mode.
TM0-09-6-051 "TM EXTERNAL FILTER INK CIRCULATION DURATION"
*2
Displays the execution time of the external filter ink circulation in the following test mode. TM0-09-5-010 "TM
EXTERNAL FILTER INK CIRCULATION EXECUTION TIME DISPLAY"
U 09-3-071 INK HEATER 24V ACTION Activates 24V ink heater and deactivates automatically in 30 sec. ○ ✔ ✔
Prints a chart for print head cleaning. Output size is equivalent to A3. Prints an image reflecting the image
adjustment parameters.
U 09-3-076 HEAD MAINTENANCE PRINT * Print conditions shall be as follows (No changes are allowed) ○ ✔ ✔
- Output size: A3 (Millimeter machine), Ledger (Inch machine)
- Print conditions other than the output size are the same as TM0-01-3-031 "COUNT INFORMATION PRINT."
Prints a chart for checking the nozzles. Output size is equivalent to A3.
Prints an image reflecting the image adjustment parameters. (Actually, although joint processing of head etc. should
be disabled as of HC, non-support is acceptable at the moment)
- Prints the following equipment information at the top of the sheet.
- Clock/Date (yy/mm/dd)
U 09-3-077 NOZZLE CHECK PRINT - Equipment number (8-digit number) ○ ✔ ✔
- TC (service count: 8-digit number)
- Displays all the equipment information in one block, and makes it in all of the six blocks.
- Output size: A3 (Millimeter machine), Ledger (Inch machine)
- Print conditions other than the output size are the same as TM0-01-3-031 "COUNT INFORMATION PRINT"

Test
mode No.
Makes the K-color solid image pattern prints and the normal cleaning for the number of times specified by TM0-09-6-
112 "MD RECOVERY -REPEAT QTY SETTING", and then makes the solid image pattern print for checking the MD
recovery status in the quantity specified by TM0-09-6-111 "MD RECOVERY -PRINT QTY SETTING".
K-MD RECOVERY PRINT
ACTION
- In case of inoperable print conditions
Makes the C-color solid image pattern prints and the normal cleaning for the number of times specified by TM0-09-
6-112 "MD RECOVERY -REPEAT QTY SETTING", and then makes the solid image pattern print for checking the
MD recovery status in the quantity specified by TM0-09-6-111 "MD RECOVERY -PRINT QTY SETTING".
C-MD RECOVERY PRINT
ACTION
Makes the M-color solid image pattern prints and the normal cleaning for the number of times specified by TM0-09-
M (R, B)-MD RECOVERY
U 09-3-080 * This test mode cannot be executed under following conditions. × ✔
PRINT ACTION
Makes the M-color solid image pattern prints and the normal cleaning for the number of times specified by TM0-09-
M (R, B)-MD RECOVERY
U 09-3-080 * This test mode cannot be executed under following conditions. × ✔
PRINT ACTION

Test
mode No.
Makes the Y-color solid image pattern prints and the normal cleaning for the number of times specified by TM0-09-6-
Y-MD RECOVERY PRINT
ACTION
Makes the P-color solid image pattern prints and the normal cleaning for the number of times specified by TM0-09-6-
P (R, GR)-MD RECOVERY
U 09-3-082 - In case an inoperable error in "transfer belt unit," "ink pan," "wiper," or "ink circulation unit" occurs ✔
PRINT ACTION
- In case of inoperable print conditions This is also applicable to the following:
- R of KCMYR units
Makes the K2-color solid image pattern prints and the normal cleaning for the number of times specified by TM0-09-
6-112 "MD RECOVER -REPEAT QTY SETTING", and then makes the solid image pattern print for checking the MD
U 09-3-083 K2-MD RECOVERY ACTION * This test mode cannot be executed under following conditions. × ✔
Makes the K2-color solid image pattern prints and the normal cleaning for the number of times specified by TM0-09-
6-112 "MD RECOVER -REPEAT QTY SETTING", and then makes the solid image pattern print for checking the MD
U 09-3-083 K2-MD RECOVERY ACTION * This test mode cannot be executed under following conditions. × ✔
Purges all the print heads, and drives the K-color print heads.
* This menu cannot be executed under following conditions.
U 09-3-090 K-MD RECOVERY CLEANING × ✔ ✔

Test
mode No.
Purges all the print heads, and drives the C-color print heads.
U 09-3-091 C-MD RECOVERY CLEANING × ✔ ✔
Purges all the print heads, and drives the M-color print heads.
M (R, B)-MD RECOVERY * This menu cannot be executed under following conditions.
U 09-3-092 × ✔
CLEANING - In case an inoperable error in "transfer belt unit," "ink pan," "wiper," or "ink circulation unit" occurs
Purges all the print heads, and drives the M-color print heads.
M (R, B)-MD RECOVERY * This menu cannot be executed under following conditions.
U 09-3-092 ✔
CLEANING - In case an inoperable error in “transfer belt unit,” “ink pan,” “wiper,” or “ink circulation unit” occurs
- In case an error on “no ink,” or “ink bottle” occurs
Purges all the print heads, and drives the Y-color print heads.
U 09-3-093 Y-MD RECOVERY CLEANING × ✔ ✔
Purges all the print heads, and drives the P-color print heads.
P (R, GR)-MD RECOVERY - In case an inoperable error in "transfer belt unit," "ink pan," "wiper," or "ink circulation unit" occurs
U 09-3-094 ✔
CLEANING - In case an error on "no ink," or "ink bottle" occurs This is also applicable to the following:
- R of KCMYR units

Test
mode No.
Tag control
Switches the machine registration status from "temporarily registered" to "final registered." Functions only when
MACHINE FINAL there are machine code tags and the machine is temporarily registered.
U 11-3-001 × ✔ ✔
REGISTERING * Temporary registration = Limited function. Makes the final registration in this menu, and releases the function limit
at the user's request.
Makes when mounting new model card

U 11-3-002 MACHINE CARD DATA INPUT × ✔ ✔
(Writes the RISO machine serial number onto the model card)
Scanner
Activates the FB scanner for one cycle (Return to home position → shading → scanning → return to home position).
Scans at the resolution set in TM0-21-6-161 "TEST MODE PRINT -RESOLUTION".
U 21-3-001 FB SCAN 1 CYCLE Scans at the size set in TM0-21-6-162 "TEST MODE PRINT -SCAN SIZE". Image data is not output. × ✔ ✔
* The execution of this test mode is prohibited when errors have occurred on the EEPROM (U007-4130, U007-4131,
U007-4132, U098-4140, U098-4141, U098-4142, U098-4143).
Performs continuous scanning for TM0-21-3-001 "FB SCAN 1 CYCLE."

Stops the FB scanning in the test stop, and moves the print head carriage to the home position.
U 21-3-002 FB SCAN REPEAT CYCLE × ✔ ✔
U007-4132, U098-4140, U098-4141, U098-4142, U098-4143).
Moves the scanner print head carriage to the home position.

U 21-3-003 CARRIAGE HP POSITION * The execution of this test mode is prohibited when errors have occurred on the EEPROM (U007-4130, U007-4131, × ✔ ✔
U007-4132, U098-4140, U098-4141, U098-4142, U098-4143).
After the print head carriage is moved to the home position, it is moved to the print head carriage replacement
CARRIAGE REPLACE position. Print head carriage replacement position: 335 mm from the home position toward the FB side
U 21-3-004 × ✔ ✔
POSITION * The execution of this test mode is prohibited when errors have occurred on the EEPROM (U007-4130, U007-4131,
U007-4132, U098-4140, U098-4141, U098-4142, U098-4143).
After the carriage is moved to the home position, it is moved to the locked position during auto startup. Lock
position: 6.1 mm from the home position toward the AF side
U 21-3-005 CARRIAGE LOCK POSITION × ✔ ✔
U007-4132, U098-4140, U098-4141, U098-4142, U098-4143).

Test
mode No.
Scanner
Moves the print head carriage in the lock position to the home position.
U 21-3-006 SCANNER LOCK RELEASE * The execution of this test mode is prohibited when errors have occurred on the EEPROM (U007-4130, U007-4131, × ✔ ✔
U007-4132, U098-4140, U098-4141, U098-4142, U098-4143).
SCANNER TEST SET VALUE Saves scanner test mode setting values to the PMS HDD. Used when FB and AF boards are replaced.
U 21-3-010 ○ ✔ ✔
STORE * Restores data on the HDD to FB and AF boards using TM0-21-3-032 "SCANNER TEST SET VALUE RESTORE."
Performs continuous AF scanning for as many cycles as there are loaded originals (Return to the home position →
shading → move to AF scanning position → scanning).
Scans at the resolution set in TM0-21-6-161 "TEST MODE PRINT -RESOLUTION". Scans at the size set in TM0-
21-6-062 "TEST MODE PRINT -SCAN SIZE".
Scans the scanning surface set in TM0-21-6-163 "TEST MODE PRINT -AF SCAN SPLX/DPLX". Image data is not
U 21-3-011 AF SCAN REPEAT CYCLE × ✔ ✔
output.
Stops the AF scanning in the test stop, and moves the print head carriage to the home position. If originals are not
loaded to AF, the test is terminated immediately.
U007-4132, U098-4140, U098-4141, U098-4142, U098-4143).
Transfers AF originals continuously for as many cycles as there are loaded originals.
* This test mode only transfers originals. Scanning of originals is not performed.
AF ORIGINAL FEEDING
U 21-3-012 Transfers the scanning surface set in TM0-21-6-163 "TEST MODE PRINT -AF SCAN SPLX/DPLX". × ✔ ✔
OPERATION
U007-4132, U098-4140, U098-4141, U098-4142, U098-4143).
Adjusts the AF original paper guide VR, based on postcard-sized paper (100 mm).
AF GUIDE FENCE VR ADJUST
U 21-3-013 * TM0-21-3-014 "AF GUIDE FENCE VR ADJUST (A4R)" must also be performed to complete the AF original paper × ✔ ✔
(P-CARD)
guide VR. There is no higher priority in these two test modes.
Adjusts the AF original paper guide VR, based on A4 Landscape paper (297 mm).
AF GUIDE FENCE VR ADJUST
U 21-3-014 * TM0-21-3-013 "AF GUIDE FENCE VR ADJUST (P-CARD)" must also be performed to complete the AF original × ✔ ✔
(A4R)
paper guide VR. There is no higher priority in these two test modes.
U 21-3-015 AF WHITE PLATE POSITION Moves the AF side white plate to the white plate position × ✔ ✔
AF WHITE PLATE HOME

U 21-3-016 Moves the AF side white plate to the home position × ✔ ✔
POSITION

Test
mode No.
Prints a test pattern (RGB gradation data generated by the CCD board is converted to a CMYK image and printed)
generated by the scanner.
Prints the gradation that varies from black into white, from left to right (horizontal) when the leading edge of paper
ejected is set as the top.
The width of the gradation is approx. 86.7 mm for 2,048 pixels of 600 dpi.
The variation of gradation is not smooth since it is affected by the color profile when converting from RGB to CMYK.
SCANNER TEST PATTERN
U 21-3-021 The print quantity is one sheet. × ✔ ✔
PRINT
Prints at the resolution set in TM0-21-6-161 "TEST MODE PRINT -RESOLUTION" and at the size set in TM0-21-6-
062 "TEST MODE PRINT -SCAN SIZE".
The number of drops is specified as follows.
When 0, 2, 3 = 300 dpi x 300 dpi and 1 = 300 dpi x 600 dpi are set in TM0-21-6-161 "TEST MODE PRINT
-RESOLUTION" sets the number of drops = 5 and 4 respectively.
Paper for print is transferred from the paper feed tray. Finishing is not performed.
Extracts the scanner test mode satisfying the following conditions, and prints a list of test mode. Contents for print
should be the TM number, TM name (English only), and setting value.
- Test mode for service technicians
SCANNER PARAMETER - Variable setting values
U 21-3-022 × ✔ ✔
PRINT - Setting values of nonvolatile storage
- Setting values changed from the defaults
* Print conditions are the same as TM0-01-3-021 "COUNT INFORMATION PRINT."
* Prints the numbers and the setting values only for unshown test mode on the panel. The print layout is the same as
TM0-01-3-022 "Test mode setting print".

Test
mode No.
Scanner
Executes scanner profiling mode.

(1) Profiling is performed as follows (first time).
Prepares to record the white level adjustment value → Transitions to recording the white level adjustment value →
Records the white level adjustment value (first time) → Performs white shading
(2) Waits for the CCD lamp luminous energy saturation time.
(3) Profiling is subsequently performed as follows (second time).
U 21-3-026 SCANNER PROFILE MODE × ✔ ✔
Records the white level adjustment value (second time) → Performs white shading → Updates the profile.
* Execute this test mode in the closed state of the stage cover.
Execute this test mode again after closing the stage cover when executing the mode in the closed state of the stage
accidentally.
* Execute this test mode when the fan is not rotated since the mode must be executed in the cooled state of the
lamp.
SCANNER PROFILE MODE Executes back scanner profiling mode.

U 21-3-027 × ✔ ✔
(BACK) * See TM0-21-3-026 "SCANNER PROFILE MODE" for more information.
SCANNER TEST SET VALUE Restores engine test mode setting values saved to the PMS HDD with TM0-21-3-031 "SCANNER TEST SET
U 21-3-031 ○ ✔ ✔
RESTORE VALUE STORE" to FB and AF boards. Used when replacing PCB.
Illuminates the scanner front LEDs. LED (green) / LED (red) OFF: 0 / ON: 1
U 21-3-032 SCANNER FRONT LED ○ ✔ ✔
Repeats this sequence: 0/0 → 1/0 → 0/1 → 1/1 → 0/0
U 21-3-033 CARRIAGE TM POSITION Moves the carriage to the position set in the test mode. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-001 FINISHER TM DATA STORE Reads finisher TM information and stores it in nonvolatile memory on the engine. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-002 FINISHER TM DATA RESTORE Writes TM information stored by TM0-23-3-001 "FINISHER TM DATA STORE" back to the finisher. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-004 PUNCHER 2HOLE POSITION Moves the 2/4 hole puncher unit to the home position. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-005 PUNCHER 3HOLE POSITION Moves the 3-hole puncher unit to the home position. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-006 PUNCHER MOTR 2HOLE Moves the 2/4 hole puncher unit in both directions. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-007 PUNCHER MOTOR 3HOLE Moves the 3-hole puncher unit in both directions. × ✔ ✔

Test
mode No.
PUNCHER MOVE MOTOR
U 23-3-008 Moves the puncher unit toward the front at high speed. × ✔ ✔
HIGH FRONT
PUNCHER MOVE MOTOR

U 23-3-009 Moves the puncher unit toward the rear at high speed. × ✔ ✔
HIGH REAR
PUNCHER MOVE MOTOR

U 23-3-010 Moves the puncher unit toward the front at low speed. × ✔ ✔
LOW FRONT
PUNCHER MOVE MOTOR

U 23-3-011 Moves the puncher unit toward the rear at low speed. × ✔ ✔
LOW REAR
TRANSPORT GATE
U 23-3-012 Switches the paper path toward the buffer. × ✔ ✔
SOLENOID PUSH
TRANSPORT GATE SOLNOID

U 23-3-013 Switches the paper path toward the top tray. × ✔ ✔
PULL
TAMPER MOTOR HIGH

U 23-3-014 Drives the tamper toward the front. (3000pps) × ✔ ✔
FRONT
U 23-3-015 TAMPER MOTOR LOW FRONT Drives the tamper toward the front. (1000pps) × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-016 TAMPER MOTOR HIGH REAR Drives the tamper toward the rear. (3000pps) × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-017 TAMPER MOTOR LOW REAR Drives the tamper toward the rear. (1000pps) × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-018 END WALL MOTOR OPEN Opens the end wall. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-019 END WALL MOTOR CLOSE Closes the end wall. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-020 EJECT CLAMP MOTOR UP Drives the eject roll release. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-021 EJECT CLAMP MOTOR DOWN Drives the eject roll nip. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-022 SHELF MOTOR EJECT Pushes the shelf out. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-023 SHELF MOTOR STORAGE Retracts the shelf. × ✔ ✔

Test
mode No.
U 23-3-024 STAPLE MOTOR CLOSE Crunches the staple. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-025 STAPLE MOTOR REVERSE Reverses the staple motor. (For 110 msec) × ✔ ✔
STAPLE MOVE MOTOR HIGH

U 23-3-026 Moves the staple position toward the front. (1000pps) × ✔ ✔
FRONT
STAPLE MOVE MOTOR LOW

U 23-3-027 Moves the staple position toward the front. (530pps) × ✔ ✔
FRONT
STAPLE MOVE MOTOR HIGH
U 23-3-028 Moves the staple position toward the rear. (1000pps) × ✔ ✔
REAR
STAPLE MOVE MOTOR LOW

U 23-3-029 Moves the staple position toward the rear. (530pps) × ✔ ✔
REAR
COMPILE PADDLE SOLENOID
U 23-3-030 Raises the compile paddle. × ✔ ✔
UP
COMPILE PADDLE SOLENOID

U 23-3-031 Lowers the compile paddle. × ✔ ✔
DOWN
U 23-3-032 SUB PADDLE SOLENOID UP Raises the sub paddle. × ✔ ✔
SUB PADDLE SOLENOID

U 23-3-033 Lowers the sub paddle. × ✔ ✔
DOWN
U 23-3-034 STACKR FLAPER MOTOR UP Raises the stacker flap. × ✔ ✔
STACKR FLAPER MOTR

U 23-3-035 Lowers the stacker flap. × ✔ ✔
DOWN
U 23-3-036 SET CLAMP SOLENOID Raises and lowers the set clamp. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-037 PADDLE SUPPORT CLUTCH Raises and lowers the compile sub paddle. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-038 ELEVATOR MOTOR UP Raises the stacker. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-039 ELEVATOR MOTOR DOWN Lowers the stacker. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-040 STACKER OFFSET MOTOR F Moves the stacker offset position toward the front. × ✔ ✔

Test
mode No.
U 23-3-041 STACKER OFFSET MOTOR R Moves the stacker offset position toward the rear. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-042 ELEVATOR MOTOR UP 2 Raises the stacker until the stack height sensor is activated. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-043 ELEVATOR MOTOR DOWN 2 Lowers the stacker until the full stack sensor is activated. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-044 TAMPER MOTOR MID FRONT Drives the tamper toward the front. (2000pps) × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-045 TAMPER MOTOR MID REAR Drives the tamper toward the rear. (2000pps) × ✔ ✔
BOOKLET KNIFE FLAP Extends and retracts the booklet knife.

U 23-3-046 × ✔ ✔
SOLENOID (Booklet knife flapper solenoid is actually operated)
BOOKLET END GUIDE MOTOR

U 23-3-047 Drives the booklet end guide downward. (450pps) × ✔ ✔
LOW DOWN

U 23-3-048 Drives the booklet end guide downward. (1002pps) × ✔ ✔
HIGH DOWN

U 23-3-049 Drives the booklet end guide upward. (450pps) × ✔ ✔
LOW UP

U 23-3-050 Drives the booklet end guide upward. (1002pps) × ✔ ✔
HIGH UP
U 23-3-051 BOOKLET STAPLE ON Executes stapling by the booklet stapler (F/R). × ✔ ✔
BOOKLET GATE SOLENOID

U 23-3-052 Switches the paper path to the booklet. × ✔ ✔
PUSH
BOOKLET GATE SOLENOID

U 23-3-053 Switches the paper path to the stacker. × ✔ ✔
PULL
U 23-3-054 END GUIDE MOTOR 1 UP Raises the booklet end guide to the first stopping position for folding. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-055 END GUIDE MOTOR 1 DOWN Lowers the booklet end guide to the first stopping position for folding. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-056 END GUIDE MOTOR 2 UP Raises the booklet end guide to the second stopping position for folding. × ✔ ✔

Test
mode No.
U 23-3-057 END GUIDE MOTOR 2 DOWN Lowers the booklet end guide to the second stopping position for folding. × ✔ ✔
FOLDER GATE SOLENOID 1

U 23-3-058 Switches the paper path toward the top. × ✔ ✔
PUSH

U 23-3-059 Switches the paper path to the folder. × ✔ ✔
PULL

U 23-3-060 Switches the paper path to the envelope tray. × ✔ ✔
PUSH

U 23-3-061 Switches the paper path to the folder. × ✔ ✔
PULL
ENVELOPE LOCK SOLENOID

U 23-3-062 ENVELOPE LOCK SOLENOID OPEN. × ✔ ✔
OPEN
ENVELOPE LOCK SOLENOID

U 23-3-063 ENVELOPE LOCK SOLENOID CLOSE. × ✔ ✔
CLOSE
U 23-3-064 NIP RELEASE SOLENOID Opens and closes the nip release solenoid. × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-065 BOOKLET F-TAMPER REAR 1 Drives booklet tamper motor F in the rear (tamping) direction. (985PPS) × ✔ ✔
U 23-3-066 BOOKLET F-TAMPER REAR 2 Drives booklet tamper motor F in the rear (tamping) direction. (645PP+F97S) × ✔ ✔
BOOKLET F-TAMPER FRONT

U 23-3-069 Drives booklet tamper motor F toward the front (home). (985PPS) × ✔ ✔
1
2
3
4

Test
mode No.
BOOKLET R-TAMPER FRONT
U 23-3-073 Drives booklet tamper motor R in the front (tamping) direction. (985PPS) × ✔ ✔
1
2
3
4
U 23-3-077 BOOKLET R-TAMPER REAR 1 Drives booklet tamper motor R toward the rear (home). (985PPS) × ✔ ✔
FACE DOWN FINISHER
U 24-3-001 FDF ADJUST VALUE STORE Reads the adjustment value information of the FDF and stores it in the Engine PCB. × ✔ ✔
FDF ADJUST VALUE Write back the adjustment value information saved in TM0-24-3-001 "FDF ADJUST VALUE STORE" to
U 24-3-002 × ✔ ✔
RESTORE the FDF. Use it when replacing the PCB.
FDF COUNT INFORMATION

U 24-3-003 Reads the count information of the FDF and stores it in the Engine PCB. × ✔ ✔
RESTORE
FDF COUNT INFORMATION Writes count information stored by TM0-24-3-003 "FDF COUNT INFORMATION RESTORE" back to the offset
U 24-3-004 ✔ ✔
STORE staple paper ejection tray. Used when replacing PCB.
FDF EJECTION ROLLER

U 24-3-011 ELEVATION MOTOR Operates the ejection roller elevation motor of the offset staple tray in the ascending direction. ✔ ✔
(ASCENDING)

Test
mode No.
FDF EJECTION ROLLER
U 24-3-012 ELEVATION MOTOR Operates the ejection roller elevation motor of the offset staple tray in the descending direction. ✔ ✔
(DESCENDING)
FDF LOADING TRAY

U 24-3-013 ELEVATION MOTOR Operates the loading tray elevation motor of the offset staple tray in the ascending direction. ✔ ✔
(ASCENDING)
FDF LOADING TRAY

U 24-3-014 ELEVATION MOTOR Operates the loading tray elevation motor of the offset staple tray in the descending direction. ✔ ✔
(DESCENDING)
FDF REVERSE ROLLER

U 24-3-015 ELEVATION MOTOR Operates the FDF reverse roller elevation motor of the offset staple tray in the ascending direction. ✔ ✔
(ASCENDING)
FDF REVERSE ROLLER

U 24-3-016 ELEVATION MOTOR Operates the FDF reverse roller elevation motor of the offset staple tray in the descending direction. ✔ ✔
(DESCENDING)
FDF STP HORIZONTAL

U 24-3-017 Operates the FDF STP horizontal movement motor of the offset staple tray to the rear side. ✔ ✔
MOVEMENT MOTOR TO REAR
FDF STP HORIZONTAL

U 24-3-018 MOVEMENT MOTOR TO Operates the FDF STP horizontal movement motor of the offset staple tray to the front side. ✔ ✔
FRONT
FACE DOWN FINISHER
FDF REAR ALIGNMENT

U 24-3-019 Operates the FDF rear alignment motor of the offset staple tray to the rear side. ✔ ✔
MOTOR TO REAR
FDF REAR ALIGNMENT

U 24-3-020 Operates the FDF rear alignment motor of the offset staple tray to the front side. ✔ ✔
MOTOR TO FRONT
FDF LOADING TRAY SHIFT

U 24-3-021 Operates the FDF loading tray shift motor of the offset staple tray to the rear side. ✔ ✔
MOTOR TO REAR

U 24-3-022 Operates the FDF loading tray shift motor of the offset staple tray to the front side. ✔ ✔
MOTOR TO FRONT
FDF FRONT ALIGNMENT

U 24-3-023 Operates the FDF front alignment motor of the offset staple tray to the rear side. ✔ ✔
MOTOR TO REAR

Test
mode No.
FDF FRONT ALIGNMENT
U 24-3-024 Operates the FDF front alignment motor of the offset staple tray to the front side. ✔ ✔
MOTOR TO FRONT
Performs continuous FDF raking roller elevation operations.

FDF RAKING ROLLER
U 24-3-025 Operations are performed with one cycle consisting of descending and ascending. After one cycle of operations is ✔ ✔
ELEVATION
performed, the test mode stops automatically.
Performs continuous FDF ejection roller elevation operations.

FDF EJECTION ROLLER
ELEVATION MOTOR
Performs continuous FDF reverse roller elevation operations.

FDF REVERSE ROLLER
ELEVATION MOTOR
Continuously moves the FDF STP horizontal movement motor to the rear side and front side. Operations are
FDF STP HORIZONTAL
U 24-3-028 performed with one cycle consisting of movement to the rear side and to the front side. After one cycle of operations ✔ ✔
MOVEMENT MOTOR
is performed, the test mode stops automatically.
Continuously moves the FDF front alignment motor to the rear side and front side.
FDF FRONT ALIGNMENT
U 24-3-029 Operations are performed with one cycle consisting of movement to the rear side and to the front side. After one ✔ ✔
MOTOR
cycle of operations is performed, the test mode stops automatically.
Continuously moves the FDF rear alignment motor to the rear side and front side.
FDF REAR ALIGNMENT
MOTOR
Performs continuous FDF loading tray elevation operations.

FDF LOADING TRAY
ELEVATION MOTOR
Continuously moves the FDF loading tray shift motor to the rear side and front side.
MOTOR
U 24-3-033 FDF STAPLER CLINCH Continuously performs FDF stapler clinch operations. ✔ ✔

Test
mode No.
FDF RAKING ROLLER

U 24-3-034 Turns ON the FDF raking roller elevation solenoid for 1 second, and then turns it OFF. ✔ ✔
ELEVATION SOLENOID
Continuously performs FDF staple scratch prevention lever I/O.

FDF STAPLE SCRATCH
U 24-3-035 One cycle consists of input and output. After one cycle of operations is performed, the test mode stops ✔ ✔
PREVENTION LEVER I/O
automatically.
Performs continuous FDF elevator elevation operations.

CONTINUOUS FDF ELEVATOR
MOTOR OPERATIONS
U 25-3-001 AS SIDE-FENCE HP POSITION Moves the AS side paper guide for paper ejection to the home position. × ✔ ✔
Moves the AS side paper guide for paper ejection to the specified position (TM0-25-6-011 "AS SIDE-FENCE
U 25-3-002 AS SIDE-FENCE CUSTOM × ✔ ✔
POSITION").
U 25-3-003 AS END-FENCE HP POSITION Moves the AS end paper guide for paper ejection to the home position. × ✔ ✔
Moves the AS end paper guide for paper ejection to the specified position (TM0-25-6-012 "AS END-FENCE
U 25-3-004 AS END-FENCE CUSTOM × ✔ ✔
POSITION").
Moves the AS paper guide for one cycle.

(1) Returns the side paper guide to the home position.
(2) Returns the end paper guide to the home position.
(3) Moves the side paper guide to the "minimum" position.
U 25-3-005 AS FENCE 1 CYCLE (4) Moves the side paper guide to the "maximum" position. × ✔ ✔
(5) Returns the side paper guide to the home position.
(6) Moves the end paper guide to the "minimum" position.
(7) Moves the end paper guide to the "maximum" position.
(8) Returns the end paper guide to the home position.

Test
mode No.
IC card authentication kit
This test mode is for configuring the IC Card read out setting and PaperCut connection setting.
The setting is applied by installing the configuration file to the USB memory, inserting the USB memory in the USB
port of the printer and activating this test mode.
- Reading destination: Folder immediately under the USB memory
- File name: "config.txt"
- Character code of the configuration file: cp932 (Windows-31J)
* To use this test mode, the setting of the TM0-27-6-004 "IC CARD CONFIG" must be selected to "0: Use Config
File."
* Related errors are:
- No USB memory → W053-0053
AUTHENTICATION SERVER - No configuration file → W098-0267
U 27-3-001 × ✔ ✔
CONFIG IMPORT - Incorrect file format → W098-0267
* Applied setting without errors is:
- Incorrect setting (out of specifications, typographical error, etc.)
→ The test mode works at the default setting
→ TM0-27-5-001 "IC CARD CONFIG DISPLAY" and TM0-27-3-002 "IC CARD CONFIG EXPORT" enable
confirmation
for the incorrect setting
* This test mode provides the setting for "External authentication server" and "NTP server" for compatibility with
older models. However, it is not recommended to set using this test mode since these can be set by the
administrator setting.
* This test mode used USB ports is also available for China and Korea models.
Copies the setting of the TM0-27-3-001 "AUTHENTICATION SERVER CONFIG IMPORT," or TM0-27-6-004 "IC
CARD
CONFIG" in USB memory.
U 27-3-002 IC CARD CONFIG EXPORT - Copying destination: Folder immediately under the USB memory × ✔ ✔
- File name: "config.txt"
Same file name in the USB memory will be overwritten.
* This test mode used USB ports is also available for China and Korea models.
Specifies an A/D value of 297 mm as the width for size detection.
HCF PAPER FEED TRAY VR
U 29-3-001 * Execute this test mode after loading paper of this size (A4 landscape) on the paper feed tray of the large-capacity ✔
ADJUST (WIDE)
paper feed unit.

U 29-3-002 * Execute this test mode after loading paper of this size (A4 portrait) on the paper feed tray of the large-capacity ✔
ADJUST (MID)
paper feed unit.

Test
mode No.
U 29-3-003 * Execute this test mode after loading paper of this size (A4 portrait, bifold) on the paper feed tray of the large- ✔
ADJUST (NRRW)
capacity paper feed unit.

U 29-3-004 * Execute this test mode after loading paper of this size (Ledger) on the paper feed tray of the large-capacity paper ✔
ADJUST—INCHES (WIDE)
feed unit.

U 29-3-005 * Execute this test mode after loading paper of this size (Letter portrait) on the paper feed tray of the large-capacity ✔
ADJUST—INCHES (MID)
paper feed unit.

U 29-3-006 * Execute this test mode after loading paper of this size (Letter portrait, bifold) on the paper feed tray of the large- ✔
ADJUST—INCHES (NRRW)
capacity paper feed unit.
Starts the large-capacity paper feed unit elevator motor, detects the upper limit, and then stops the elevator motor.
MOVE TO HCF PAPER FEED Positioning is conducted at the upper limit.
U 29-3-007 ✔
TRAY UPPER LIMIT POSITION The upper limit position can be switched with "DF PAPER FEED TRAY UPPER LIMIT POSITION" of each paper
feed setting.
MOVE TO HCF PAPER FEED

U 29-3-008 Starts the large-capacity paper feed unit elevator motor, detects the lower limit, and then stops the elevator motor. ✔
TRAY LOWER LIMIT POSITION
Performs the nip positioning and release positioning of the nip release unit as one set of operations, and then stops
HCF NIP RELEASE UNIT 1 the test mode.
U 29-3-009 ✔
CYCLE When the unit position is undetermined, the nip position is determined, one set of the above operations is
performed, and then the test mode is stopped.
Moves the nip release unit to the nip position.

MOVE TO HCF NIP RELEASE
U 29-3-010 When the nip release unit position is undetermined, the nip position is determined, and then the release position is ✔
UNIT RELEASE POSITION
determined.
MOVE TO HCF NIP RELEASE Determines the nip position of the nip release unit.
U 29-3-011 ✔
UNIT NIP POSITION When the unit position is undetermined, this test mode determines the nip position in the same manner.

Test
mode No.
When operations are turned ON, the HCF paper feed tray is moved to the upper limit detection position (the sensor)
and then descends to a point where it passes the 10% level sensor.
MOVE TO HCF PAPER FEED
* If there is a large amount of paper remaining in the paper feed tray and the 10% level sensor does not turn ON
U 29-3-012 TRAY MAINTENANCE ✔
with the upper limit detection, an error sound is generated and the test mode is stopped at the upper limit detection
POSITION
position.
* Use this test mode when there is no paper in the large-capacity paper feed unit.
When operations are turned ON, the paper feed tray ascends to the upper limit detection position (sensor). After
that, the paper feed tray descends and stops when level sensor 2 switches from ON to OFF.
* If the amount of paper loaded prevents level sensor 1 from turning ON when the upper limit position is reached
MOVE TO HCF FACTORY
U 29-3-013 during the operations of this test mode, an error (W191-2581) will be generated and the test mode operations will ✔
DEFAULT POSITION
end.
* This test mode can be used to move the paper feed tray to the upper limit position even if there is no paper in the
large- capacity paper feed unit.
Moves the HCS side paper guide to the position specified with
"HCS FACTORY DEFAULT SIDE PAPER GUIDE POSITION SETTING".
Moves the HCS end paper guide to the position specified with
MOVE TO HCS FACTORY
U 30-3-001 "HCS FACTORY DEFAULT END PAPER GUIDE POSITION SETTING". ✔
DEFAULT POSITION
Moves the HCS elevator to the position specified with
"HCS FACTORY DEFAULT ELEVATOR POSITION SETTING".
* This test mode can only operate when the paper receiving tray set sensor has not activated.
MOVE TO HCS LOCK Moves the HCS side paper guide to the home position. Moves the HCS end paper guide to the home position.
U 30-3-002 ✔
RELEASE HOME POSITION Moves the HCS elevator to the lower limit position.
HCS OFFSET UNIT OFFSET

U 30-3-006 Moves the offset unit to the offset position. ✔
POSITIONING

Test
mode No.
(1) Moves the end paper guide and the side paper guide to the home positions.
(This is performed before the mechanical adjustment of the paper guide positions, so the paper guides are set in the
most open positions.)
(2) Executes the upper surface positioning of the elevator.
HCS PAPER GUIDE CENTER (3) The printing operation is performed from the paper feed tray, and then the final roller stops the transfer at the
U 30-3-007 ✔
ADJUSTMENT TRANSFER position where the paper was nipped.
* Use A3 or Ledger paper at this point in time.
* The target for the amount that paper flies off the final HCS roller is 200 mm.
* Ensure that this test mode can be executed even if there is paper in the paper receiving tray (that is, even if the
paper detection sensor is detecting that paper is present).
MOVE TO HCS ELEVATOR Moves the elevator to the upper limit position. The elevator stops when the upper limit sensor turns ON.
U 30-3-011 ✔
UPPER LIMIT POSITION * This test mode can only operate when the paper receiving tray set sensor has not activated.
MOVE TO HCS ELEVATOR

U 30-3-012 Moves the elevator to the lower limit position. The elevator stops when the lower limit sensor turns ON. ✔
LOWER LIMIT POSITION
Moves the HCS side paper guide and end paper guide to match A3 paper.
- Side paper guide position: 297 mm
- End paper guide position: 420 mm
MOVE HCS PAPER GUIDES
U 30-3-016 If the HCS paper guide positions are not aligned to the A3 width after you execute this test mode, ✔
FOR A3 WIDTH
you will have to adjust the center position (mechanical adjustment of the paper guide positions).* Even if the original
document is in the HCS (the original detect sensor is ON), you can execute this test mode.
* For this test mode, set the wing height to standard.
Moves the HCS side paper guide and end paper guide to match B5 paper.
U 30-3-017 If the HCS paper guide positions are not aligned to the B5 width after you execute this test mode, ✔
FOR B5 WIDTH
you will have to adjust the center position (mechanical adjustment of the paper guide positions).* Even if the original
document is in the HCS (the original detect sensor is ON), you can execute this test mode.
HCS END PAPER GUIDE

U 30-3-018 Moves the end paper guide motor until the end paper guide home position sensor turns ON. ✔
HOME POSITIONING

Test
mode No.
Perform the following operations continuously: start at the end paper guide home position → pull on the movable
HCS END PAPER GUIDE 1 plate (HCS movable solenoid)
U 30-3-019 ✔
CYCLE → move the end paper guide to its minimum width position → lower the movable plate (HCS movable solenoid)
→ pull on the movable plate (HCS movable solenoid) → return the end paper guide to the home position.
HCS SIDE PAPER GUIDE

U 30-3-020 Moves the side paper guide motor until the side paper guide home position sensor turns ON. ✔
HOME POSITIONING
With the side paper guide home position sensor ON, moves the side paper guide to the minimum width position and
then to the home position.
HCS SIDE PAPER GUIDE 1
U 30-3-021 With the side paper guide home position sensor OFF, moves the side paper guide to the home position sensor, to ✔
CYCLE
the
minimum width position, and then to the home position.
HCS PAPER EJECTION WING
U 30-3-022 Moves the paper ejection wing motor until the paper ejection wing home position sensor turns ON. ✔
HOME POSITIONING
With the paper ejection wing home position sensor ON, moves the paper ejection wing motor to make the paper
HCS PAPER EJECTION WING ejection wing home position sensor turn OFF → ON.
U 30-3-023 ✔
1 CYCLE With the paper ejection wing home position sensor OFF, moves the paper ejection wing motor to make the paper
ejection wing home position sensor turn ON → OFF → ON.
HCS OFFSET GUIDE HOME

U 30-3-024 Moves the offset guide motor until the offset guide home position sensor turns ON. ✔
POSITIONING

Test
mode No.
With the offset guide home position sensor ON, moves the offset guide motor to make the offset guide home
position sensor turn OFF → ON.
U 30-3-025 HCS OFFSET GUIDE 1 CYCLE ✔
With the offset guide home position sensor OFF, moves the offset guide motor to make the offset guide home
position sensor turn ON → OFF → ON.
Moves the HCS side paper guide and end paper guide to match Ledger paper.
U 30-3-026 If the HCS paper guide positions are not aligned to the Ledger width after you execute this test mode, you will have ✔
FOR LEDGER WIDTH
to adjust the center position (mechanical adjustment of the paper guide positions).* Even if paper is in the HCS (the
paper detection sensor is ON), you can execute this test mode.
HCS ROUTE SWITCHING

U 30-3-031 SOLENOID ON-OFF Turns ON the route switching solenoid for 1 second. ✔
OPERATION
Prints the test pattern to eject to the large-capacity paper ejection unit. The print conditions apply the following
settings.
- Duplex printing setting
HCS TEST PATTERN - Paper feed tray setting
U 30-3-036 ✔
PRINTING OPERATION - HCS test pattern printing count setting
- HCS test pattern printing offset copies setting
- HCS test pattern printing paper feed route
Note that blank paper is output with this test mode.
Postscript option
Activates the internal rip.

* Executing this TM requires an activation card to be installed.
U 31-3-001 ACTIVATE INTERNAL RIP × ✔ ✔
W070-0247-3 may occur if processing fails. TM0-31-5-001 "ACTIVATION CARD STATUS" enables you to check
whether the activation card was already activated.

Test
mode No.
In the job sent from the external CI (FS2000C), the last job printed (RINC data) is saved in the USB
memory.
* This TM is valid only in the following cases.

EXTL-CONTROLLER RINC TM0-31-6-001 "EXTERNAL CONTROLLER CONNECT SELECT" is "1: Connect"
U 31-3-010 × ✔
DATA SAVE USB TM0-31-6-002 "EXTERNAL CONTROLLER TYPE SELECT" is "0: FS2000C connect"
The administrator menu "Finished Job Setting" is "Save"
* Before running this TM, it is necessary to print the job of FS 2000 C.

(Error will occur if you execute this TM after printing a job other than FS 2000 C.)
Security Option
Overview
Installs the security option firmware. Objective
Installs the security option firmware to enable the use of the security option. Operation
This test mode installs the security firmware. The printer will automatically restart when the installation is complete.
Executing this test mode automatically clears the user area and the administrator settings.
Supplemental information/relationship with other functions
In order to execute this test mode, set TM0-01-6-071 "DISPLAY MAINTENANCE OPERATION PERMISSION
SECURITY FIRMWARE SELECTION BUTTON" to "DISPLAY", and then set "MAINTENANCE OPERATION PERMISSION SELECTION" to
U 32-3-001 ✔
INSTALLATION "ENABLE" in the administrator mode.
Before you execute this test mode, you have to connect to the printer a USB memory device with the security option
firmware.
During the execution of this test mode, if the security package key codes are not entered or if an incorrect key code
is entered, an error (W087-6015) will occur.
While this test mode is being executed, print jobs will not be received. Jobs that have been received as well as jobs
that are being received will be deleted.
* Do not turn the power OFF while this test mode is being executed.

MM PAD WETTING
U 33-3-001 Operates the gluing plate and wets the leading edge of the water application pad. ✔
OPERATION
MM TRAILING EDGE
U 33-3-002 ALIGNMENT MOTOR HP Performs the home positioning of the trailing edge alignment plate. ✔
DETECTION
MM SIDE ALIGNMENT MOTOR

U 33-3-003 Performs the home positioning of the side alignment plate. ✔
HP DETECTION

Test
mode No.
MM LEADING EDGE
U 33-3-004 ALIGNMENT MOTOR HP Performs the home positioning of the leading edge alignment plate. ✔
DETECTION
MM ALIGNMENT NIP MOTOR

U 33-3-005 Performs the home positioning of the alignment nip roller. ✔
HP DETECTION
MM MIDDLE PAPER CONTACT

U 33-3-006 Performs the home positioning of middle paper contact plate 1. ✔
MOTOR 1 HP DETECTION
MM MIDDLE PAPER CONTACT

U 33-3-007 Performs the home positioning of middle paper contact plate 2. ✔
MOTOR 2 HP DETECTION
MM MIDDLE PAPER FOLD

U 33-3-008 SWITCH MOTOR HP Performs the home positioning of the middle paper fold switch plate. ✔
DETECTION
MM FORM HORIZONTAL
U 33-3-009 MOVEMENT MOTOR HP Performs the home positioning of the form horizontal movement roller. ✔
DETECTION
MM FORM RECEIVING NIP

U 33-3-010 Performs the home positioning of the form receiving nip roller. ✔
MOTOR HP DETECTION
MM FORM CONTACT MOTOR

U 33-3-011 Performs the home positioning of form contact plate 2. ✔
2 HP DETECTION
MM FORM CONTACT MOTOR

U 33-3-012 Performs the home positioning of form contact plate 3. ✔
3 HP DETECTION
MM GLUING MOTOR HP
U 33-3-013 Performs the home positioning of the gluing plate. ✔
DETECTION
Detects the trailing edge alignment motor home position, the side alignment motor home position, the leading edge
alignment motor home position, and the alignment nip motor home position.
MM ALIGNMENT UNIT
U 33-3-014 * Caution: There are restrictions on this test mode. ✔
INITIALIZATION
- Be sure to execute this test mode before executing the unit operations of this test mode or before executing TM0-
3433, "MM ALIGNMENT UNIT INITIALIZATION".

Test
mode No.
Moves the side alignment plate and the leading edge alignment plate to their waiting positions and moves the trailing
edge alignment plate to the home position.
The waiting positions correspond to A4 sized paper.
MOVE TO MM ALIGNMENT
U 33-3-015 * Caution: There are restrictions on this test mode. ✔
UNIT WAITING POSITION (A4)
- If paper is loaded in the alignment unit, remove the paper before executing the unit operations of this test mode.
- Be sure to execute TM0-3433, "MM ALIGNMENT UNIT INITIALIZATION" before executing the unit operations of
this test mode.
Moves the side alignment plate and the leading edge alignment plate to their waiting positions and moves the trailing
edge alignment plate to the home position.
MOVE TO MM ALIGNMENT The waiting positions correspond to letter sized paper.
U 33-3-016 UNIT WAITING POSITION * Caution: There are restrictions on this test mode. ✔
(LETTER) - If paper is loaded in the alignment unit, remove the paper before executing the unit operations of this test mode.
- Be sure to execute TM0-33-3-014, "MM ALIGNMENT UNIT INITIALIZATION" before executing the unit operations
of this test mode.
Moves the alignment unit to the beating position. When aligning the enclosure paper, the processing shown below is
performed.
- The alignment plates are moved to waiting positions that are wider than the width of the enclosure paper.
- The side alignment plate and the trailing edge alignment plate are moved to beating positions that match the width
of the enclosure paper. In order to perform the above processing, the following adjustment is required.
- When moving to the beating position, the space between the alignment plates is matched to the paper width. The
MOVE TO MM ALIGNMENT goal of this test mode is to move the alignment plates to the beating position in order to make the above adjustment.
U 33-3-017 ✔
UNIT BEATING POSITION * Caution: There are restrictions on this test mode.
- Before executing the unit operations of this test mode, execute TM0-33-3-015, "MOVE TO MM ALIGNMENT UNIT
WAITING POSITION" to move the side alignment plate and the leading edge alignment plate to their waiting
positions.
- The home position (release) of the aligned feeding roller must have been detected (if it is at the nip position, leave
the test mode [such as by transitioning from the test mode screen to the normal screen], perform the home
positioning, and then execute the unit operations of this test mode).
MM MIDDLE PAPER FOLD Detects the middle paper contact motor 1 home position, middle paper contact motor 2 home position, and middle
U 33-3-018 ✔
UNIT INITIALIZATION paper fold switch motor home position.
MOVE TO MM MIDDLE PAPER

Moves middle paper contact plate 1 and middle paper contact plate 2 to their waiting positions. The waiting positions
U 33-3-019 FOLD UNIT WAITING ✔
correspond to A4 sized, trifold paper.
POSITION
MM WRAPPING UNIT
U 33-3-020 Detects the form contact motor 2 home position. ✔
INITIALIZATION

Test
mode No.
MOVE TO MM WRAPPING Moves form contact plate 2 to its waiting position.
U 33-3-021 ✔
UNIT WAITING POSITION The waiting position corresponds to trifold paper for use with 235 × 120 mm (W × H) envelopes.
MM FLAP BONDING UNIT
U 33-3-022 Detects the form contact motor 3 and gluing motor home positions. ✔
INITIALIZATION
MOVE TO MM FLAP BONDING Moves form contact plate 3 to its waiting position.
U 33-3-023 ✔
UNIT WAITING POSITION The waiting position corresponds to trifold paper for use with 235 × 120 mm (W × H) envelopes.
Automatically adjusts the luminous energy of the form edge sensor. This test mode must be executed according to
the following procedure.
1) Open the mail finisher cover.
AUTOMATIC MM FORM EDGE
2) Set paper (RISO IJ A4 size) in the mail finisher's introducing section.
U 33-3-024 SENSOR LUMINOUS ENERGY ✔
3) Instruct the printer to execute this test mode.
ADJUSTMENT
The paper is automatically transported to the form edge sensor position, and then the luminous energy is
automatically adjusted.
4) When the automatic adjustment of the luminous energy is complete, open the cover and remove the paper.
Prints the test pattern for mail creation printing.

Use the paper feed tray or the large-capacity paper feed unit for the mail form tray. Use Tray 1 for the tray for
enclosures.
MM TEST PATTERN PRINTING Blank paper is output with this test mode.
U 33-3-025 ✔
OPERATION Print conditions other than the above apply the following settings.
- TM0-33-6-211: MM TEST PATTERN PRINTING-PRINT SETTINGS
- TM0-33-6-212: MM TEST PATTERN PRINTING-ENCLOSURE COUNT
Before executing this test mode, you have to change the trays to use to the optimal paper feed trays.
Perfect Binder
U 34-3-001 PB GLUE SHEET FEEDING Feeds the glue sheet approximately 20 mm. ✔
U 34-3-002 PB GLUE SHEET RETURN Returns the glue sheet approximately 20 mm. ✔
PB BODY THICKNESS
U 34-3-003 Measures the body thickness. ✔
MEASUREMENT
MOVE TO PB TOP-BOTTOM
U 34-3-004 ALIGNMENT SETTING Moves the top-bottom alignment plate to the setting position. ✔
POSITION

Test
mode No.
U 34-3-005 Moves the top-bottom alignment plate to the alignment position. ✔
ALIGNMENT POSITION
U 34-3-006 Moves the top-bottom alignment plate to the home position. ✔
ALIGNMENT HP
MOVE TO PB EDGE
U 34-3-007 ALIGMENT SETTING Moves the edge alignment plate to the setting position. ✔
POSITION
MOVE TO PB EDGE
U 34-3-008 Moves the edge alignment plate to the alignment position. ✔
ALIGNMENT POSITION
MOVE TO PB EDGE
U 34-3-009 Moves the edge alignment plate to the home position. ✔
ALIGNMENT HP
MOVE TO PB EDGE
U 34-3-010 REFERENCE PLATE SHELTER Moves the edge reference plate to the shelter position. ✔
POSITION
MOVE TO PB EDGE
U 34-3-011 REFERENCE PLATE HOME Moves the edge reference plate to the home position. ✔
POSITION
U 34-3-012 PB CLAMP OPEN/CLOSE Opens/closes the clamp. ✔
MOVE TO PB CLAMP
U 34-3-013 VERTICAL RECEPTION Moves the clamp to the reception height. ✔
HEIGHT
MOVE TO PB CLAMP
U 34-3-014 Moves the clamp to the home position height. ✔
VERTICAL HOME POSITION
MOVE TO PB CLAMP
U 34-3-015 Moves the clamp to the gluing height. ✔
VERTICAL GLUING HEIGHT
MOVE TO PB CLAMP
U 34-3-016 VERTICAL ARRANGEMENT Moves the clamp to the arrangement height. ✔
HEIGHT
MOVE TO PB CLAMP
U 34-3-017 HORIZONTAL RECEPTION Moves the clamp to the reception position. ✔
POSITION

Test
mode No.
MOVE TO PB CLAMP
U 34-3-018 HORIZONTAL HOME Moves the clamp to the home position. ✔
POSITION
Perfect Binder
MOVE TO PB CLAMP
U 34-3-019 HORIZONTAL GLUING Moves the clamp to the gluing position. ✔
POSITION
MOVE TO PB CLAMP
U 34-3-020 HORIZONTAL ARRANGEMENT Moves the clamp to the arrangement position. ✔
POSITION
PB GLUING SHEET UNIT

U 34-3-021 Shelters the gluing sheet unit. ✔
SHELTER
PB GLUING SHEET UNIT

U 34-3-022 Crimps the gluing sheet unit. ✔
CRIMPING
OPEN PB ARRANGEMENT
U 34-3-023 Opens the arrangement plate. ✔
PLATE
CLOSE PB ARRANGEMENT
U 34-3-024 Closes the arrangement plate. ✔
PLATE
MOVE TO PB COVER
U 34-3-025 Moves the cover alignment plate to the alignment position. ✔
ALIGNMENT POSITION
MOVE TO PB COVER
U 34-3-026 Moves the cover alignment plate to the home position. ✔
ALIGNMENT HP
PB GLUING HEIGHT TILT

U 34-3-027 Moves the body bundle from the body stacking position to the gluing position. ✔
CHECK ADJUSTMENT
DRIVING AFTER PB GLUING

U 34-3-028 Performs the ejection operation after performing the operations of the previous test mode. ✔
HEIGHT TILT CHECK
PB ARRANGEMENT HEIGHT Moves the body bundle from the body stacking position to the arrangement position, and then pauses movement.
U 34-3-029 ✔
TILT CHECK ADJUSTMENT After that, the body bundle is ejected.
DRIVING AFTER PB
U 34-3-030 ARRANGEMENT HEIGHT TILT Performs the ejection operation after performing the operations of the previous test mode. ✔
CHECK
U 34-3-031 PB COVER CUTTER DRIVING Moves the cutter to the cut position, and then returns the cutter to the home position. ✔

Test
mode No.
PB COVER CUT ADJUSTMENT
U 34-3-032 Cuts the cover and then transports it to the arrangement position. ✔
(INTERPOSER FEEDING)
U 34-3-033 PB GLUE ROLLER MOTOR Activation/stoppage of the PB glue roller motor. ✔
U 34-3-034 PB HALOGEN HEATER Activation/stoppage of the PB halogen heater. ✔
U 34-3-035 PB SHEATH HEATER Activation/stoppage of the PB sheath heater. ✔
U 34-3-036 PB GLUE CUTTING HEATER Turns ON the PB glue cutting heater. ✔
MOVE TO PB CLAMP
U 34-3-037 HORIZONTAL EJECTION Moves the PB clamp to the horizontal ejection position. ✔
POSITION
MOVE TO PB CLAMP
U 34-3-038 HORIZONTAL BLADE Moves the PB clamp to the horizontal blade position. ✔
POSITION
U 34-3-039 PB COVER LIFT-UP Activation/stoppage of the PB cover lift-up unit. ✔
U 34-3-040 PB COVER LIFT-DOWN Activation/stoppage of the PB cover lift-down unit. ✔
Clamps and glues the body, and then stops operation immediately after the glue cutting blade.
PB BLADE HEIGHT CHECK Execute this test mode as a set with "TM0-34-3-042 DRIVING AFTER PB BLADE HEIGHT CHECK
U 34-3-041 ✔
ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT". (Execute TM0-34-3-041 followed by TM0-34-3-042.)
Before executing this test mode, you have to set the body in the body stacker.
Moves the mechanisms to their waiting positions prior to the execution of "TM0-34-3-041 PB BLADE HEIGHT
CHECK ADJUSTMENT",
DRIVING AFTER PB BLADE
U 34-3-042 and then releases the body clamp. ✔
HEIGHT CHECK ADJUSTMENT
Execute this test mode as a set with "TM0-34-3-041 PB BLADE HEIGHT CHECK ADJUSTMENT". (Execute TM0-
34-3-041 followed by TM0-34-3-042.)
TRANSPORT TO PB COVER
U 34-3-043 Transports the cover to the arrangement position. ✔
ARRANGEMENT POSITION

Test
mode No.
Clamps the body, and then returns to the home position.

U 34-3-044 PB BODY CLAMP EXECUTION Execute this test mode as a set with "TM0-34-3-061 TRANSPORT TO PB BODY STACKING POSITION". (Execute ✔
the test modes in the order of TM0-34-3-061 followed by TM0-34-3-044.)
Clamps the body, and then transports the body to the gluing position.
PB GLUING HEIGHT TILT
U 34-3-045 Execute this test mode as a set with "TM0-34-3-061 TRANSPORT TO PB BODY STACKING POSITION". (Execute ✔
CHECK OPERATION
Perfect Binder
Clamps the body, and then transports the body to the arrangement position and height.
PB ARRANGEMENT HEIGHT
U 34-3-046 Execute this test mode as a set with "TM0-34-3-061 TRANSPORT TO PB BODY STACKING POSITION". (Execute ✔
TILT CHECK OPERATION
U 34-3-047 OPEN PB GUIDE SWITCH Moves the PB guide plate switch plate to the open position. ✔
U 34-3-048 CLOSE PB GUIDE SWITCH Moves the PB guide plate switch plate to the closed position. ✔
MOVE PB GUIDE SWITCH TO

U 34-3-049 Moves the PB guide plate switch plate to the up position. ✔
UP POSITION
U 34-3-050 OPEN PB SHIELD PLATE Moves the PB shield plate to the open position. ✔
U 34-3-051 CLOSE PB SHIELD PLATE Moves the PB shield plate to the closed position. ✔
U 34-3-052 OPEN PB CLAMP Opens the PB clamp. ✔
U 34-3-053 CLOSE PB CLAMP Closes the PB clamp. ✔
Stacks the body, and then stops operation without clamping the body. Execute this test mode as a set with one of
the test modes shown below. "TM0-34-3-044 PB BODY CLAMP EXECUTION"
"TM0-34-3-045 PB GLUING HEIGHT TILT CHECK OPERATION"
TRANSPORT TO PB BODY
U 34-3-061 "TM0-34-3-046 PB ARRANGEMENT HEIGHT TILT CHECK OPERATION" The settings related to this test mode ✔
STACKING POSITION
can be configured with the following test modes.
"TM0-34-6-061 TM TRANSPORT TO PB BODY STACKING POSITION: BINDING SIZE SETTING"
"TM0-34-6-062 TM TRANSPORT TO PB BODY STACKING POSITION: BODY PAGE COUNT SETTING"

Test
mode No.
Prints the test pattern for case binding printing. The closing direction is fixed to [Left].
Print conditions other than the above apply the following settings.
- TM0-04-6-064: "TM PRINT: PAPER FEED TRAY SELECTION"
↑ Specify the body tray. If you are using A5 landscape paper for the body, Tray 1 to Tray 3 cannot be used. Blank
paper is output with this test mode.
- TM0-34-6-066: TM PB TEST PATTERN PRINTING: BODY SIZE
PB TEST PATTERN PRINTING - TM0-34-6-067: TM PB TEST PATTERN PRINTING: BODY PAGE COUNT
U 34-3-062 ✔
OPERATION - TM0-34-6-068: TM PB TEST PATTERN PRINTING: COVER LENGTH
- TM0-34-6-069 TM PB TEST PATTERN PRINTING: COVER TRAY Before executing this test mode, you have to
change the trays to use to the optimal paper feed trays.
However, it is necessary to register the paper size for the cover tray, which requires the user's administrator setting
items to be changed. Therefore, the paper feed tray settings are switched automatically when this test mode is
executed.
* When settings are switched automatically, they are returned to their previous values when this test mode finishes.

PMS section
- Restores factory default values for test modes that can be set by service technicians and are stored on the PMS and engine. Values stored on scanners
or multi-finishers are not cleared.
- Executes the same processing as TM0-01-4-003 "SETUP WIZARD INITIALIZE" (sets the next startup flag for the setup wizard)
I 01-4-001 TEST MODE CLEAR (ALL) * This test mode number and name are not displayed on the panel. (All non-display) ✔ ✔
* Execute this test mode by directly entering the number.
* Do not power OFF the machine while this test mode is in action.
Deletes or puts back to default of setting value and all data except the system (firmware). Makes the state that the following initialization processes are
completely executed.
- "Factory default" in Initialization function
- "Delete all user information" in Initialization function
- Executes the same processing as TM0-01-4-003 "SETUP WIZARD INITIALIZE" (sets the next startup flag for the setup wizard)
- TM0-01-4-023 "ERROR HISTORY DISPLAY CLEAR"
- Restores factory default values for test modes that are stored on the PMS and engine in all of the settings (for service technicians, manufacturing and
I 01-4-002 FACTORY DEFAULT ✔ ✔
development) that can be set in the test mode.
Values stored on scanners or multi-finishers are not cleared.
* This test mode number and name are not displayed on the panel. (All non-display)
* Print job will not be accepted while in this test mode. Print jobs that are received and those being received will be deleted.
* When the Overwrite erasing is effective, overwriting of random values is performed on data defined in the functional specification.
I 01-4-003 SETUP WIZARD INITIALIZE Sets the flag to redisplay setup wizard at the next time of PMS startup. ✔ ✔
Resets the PMS to the Factory default (Initializes the HDD)

* After running this TM, be sure to turn on the power again twice.
<Procedure>
I 01-4-011 HDD INITIALIZE 1.TM execution ✔ ✔
2. Reboot after turning off the power by pressing sub power key
3. Wait until startup of the main unit is completed and the HOME screen is displayed. **
4. Reboot after turning off the power by pressing sub power key
** Initialization processing is executed in the process of main body activation processing at this time. Communication error may be displayed, but restore by
turning on the power again. Regardless of whether or not there is a communication error, the procedure of 4 (power turn on again) is necessary.

Initializes the PMS (Initializes the HDD).

* Execute this test mode after replacing the HDD.
I 01-4-012 EXCHANGE HDD INITIALIZE * Execute this test mode by directly entering the number. ✔ ✔
I 01-4-021 ERROR CLEAR (ALL) Forces all errors system-wide (PMS, engine, and scanner) to be cleared. ✔ ✔
I 01-4-022 ERROR CLEAR (PMS) Forces errors affecting the PMS to be cleared. ✔ ✔
I 01-4-023 ERROR HISTORY DISPLAY CLEAR Clears the history information shown by TM0-01-5-011 "ERROR HISTORY DISPLAY". ✔ ✔
Restores initial setting and factory default values for test modes that can be set by service technicians and are stored on the engine. Values stored on
I 04-4-001 TEST MODE CLEAR (ENGINE) multi-finishers are not cleared. ✔ ✔
I 04-4-011 ERROR CLEAR (ENGINE) Forces errors affecting the engine to be cleared. ✔ ✔
Forcibly clears error information about no ink detected errors (S035-2072 to 2076 and S035-2082 to 2086).
I 04-4-012 INK DETECT ERROR CLEAR ✔ ✔
* Switch power OFF and then ON after executing this test mode to clear the error message.
Clears the information for the recovery operation control.

I 04-4-021 RECOVERY DATA CLEAR ✔ ✔
* Switch power OFF and then ON after executing this test mode.
Clears the replacement counter (* 1) and cleaning counter (* 2) for the following parts of the paper feed tray.
- Pickup roller
- Scraper roller
- Stripper pad
*1
I 04-4-110 REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-PFT (ALL) ✔ ✔
Replacement counter: "Current counter" printed by TM0-04-3-050 "PREV MAINT CHECK PRINT (REPLACE)".
*2
Cleaning counter: "Current counter" printed by TM0-04-3-051 "PREV MAINT CHECK PRINT (CLEAN)".
See "Replacement" and "Overseas" in "information print output material.xls" for the relation between each test mode and part number of REPLACE COUNT
CLEAR continuing from this test mode.
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-PFT Clears the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the pickup roller of the paper feed tray.
I 04-4-111 ✔ ✔
(PICKUP) * Refer to TM0-04-4-110 "Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)" for details.
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-PFT Clears the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the scraper roller of the paper feed tray.
I 04-4-112 ✔ ✔
(SCRAPER) * Refer to TM0-04-4-110 "Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)" for details.

Clears the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the stripper pad of the paper feed tray.
I 04-4-113 REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-PFT (S. PAD) ✔ ✔
* Refer to TM0-04-4-110 "Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)" for details.
Clears the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the following parts of the tray 1.
- Pickup roller
I 04-4-120 REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-TRAY 1 (ALL) - Scraper roller ✔ ✔
- Stripper pad
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-TRAY 1 Clears the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the pickup roller of the tray 1.
I 04-4-121 ✔ ✔
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-TRAY 1 Clears the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the scraper roller of the tray 1.
I 04-4-122 ✔ ✔
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-TRAY 1 (S. Clears the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the stripper pad of the tray 1.
I 04-4-123 ✔ ✔
PAD) * Refer to TM0-04-4-110 "Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)" for details.
Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the following components of Tray 2.
- Pickup roller
I 04-4-130 REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-TRAY 2 (ALL) - Scraper roller ✔ ✔
- Stripper pad
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-TRAY 2 Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the pickup roller of Tray 2.
I 04-4-131 ✔ ✔
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-TRAY 2 Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the scraper roller of Tray 2.
I 04-4-132 ✔ ✔
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-TRAY 2 (S. Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the stripper pad of Tray 2.
I 04-4-133 ✔ ✔
Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the following components of Tray 3.
- Pickup roller
I 04-4-140 REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-TRAY 3 (ALL) ✔
- Scraper roller
- Stripper pad * Refer to TM0-04-4-110 "Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)" for details.
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-TRAY 3 Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the pickup roller of Tray 3.
I 04-4-141 ✔
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-TRAY 3 Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the scraper roller of Tray 3.
I 04-4-142 ✔
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-TRAY 3 (S. Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the stripper pad of Tray 3.
I 04-4-143 ✔
Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the following components of the vertical transfer unit.
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-VERT TRAN - Vertical transfer roller (driven)
I 04-4-150 ✔ ✔
(ALL) - Vertical transfer roller (follower)

REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-VERT TRAN Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the vertical transfer roller (driven) of the vertical transfer unit.
I 04-4-151 ✔ ✔
(DRV) * Refer to TM0-04-4-110 "Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)" for details.
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-VERT TRAN Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the vertical transfer roller (follower) of the vertical transfer unit.
I 04-4-152 ✔ ✔
(DRVN) * Refer to TM0-04-4-110 "Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)" for details.
Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the following components of the registration unit.
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-REGIST - Registration roller
I 04-4-160 ✔ ✔
(ALL) - Guide roller
*Refer to TM0-04-4-110 "Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)" for details.
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-REGIST Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the registration roller of the registration unit.
I 04-4-161 ✔ ✔
(TIMING) * Refer to TM0-04-4-110 "Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)" for details.
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-REGIST Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the guide roller of the registration unit.
I 04-4-162 ✔ ✔
(GUIDE) * Refer to TM0-04-4-110 "Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)" for details.
Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the following components of the BP.
- Transfer belt
I 04-4-170 REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-BP (ALL) ✔ ✔
- KG roller
* Refer to TM0-04-4-110 "REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-PFT (ALL)" for more information.
Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the transfer belt of the BP.
I 04-4-171 REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-BP (BELT) ✔ ✔
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-BP (KG Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the KG roller of the BP.
I 04-4-172 ✔ ✔
ROLLER) * Refer to TM0-04-4-110 "Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)" for details.
Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the following components of the downward transfer unit.
- Downward transport roller 1 (driven)
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-DESCEND - Downward transport roller 1 (follower)
I 04-4-180 ✔ ✔
(ALL) - Downward transport roller 2 (driven)
- Downward transport roller 2 (follower)
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-DESCEND Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the downward transport roller 1 (driven) of the downward transfer unit.
I 04-4-181 ✔ ✔
(DRV1) * Refer to TM0-04-4-110 "Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)" for details.
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-DESCEND Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the downward transport roller 1 (follower) of the downward transfer unit.
I 04-4-182 ✔ ✔
(DRVN1) * Refer to TM0-04-4-110 "Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)" for details.
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-DESCEND Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the downward transport roller 2 (driven) of the downward transfer unit.
I 04-4-183 ✔ ✔
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-DESCEND Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the downward transport roller 2 (follower) of the downward transfer unit.
I 04-4-184 ✔ ✔
Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the following components of the switchback transfer unit.
- SB roller (driven)
I 04-4-190 REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-SB (ALL) ✔
- SB roller (follower)

Clear the replacement counter for the following components of the switchback transfer unit.
I 04-4-190 REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-SB (ALL) - SB roller (follower) ✔
- Re-feed roller (driven)
Re-feed roller (follower) * Refer to TM0-04-4-110 “Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)” for details.
Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the SB roller (driven) of the switchback transfer unit.
I 04-4-191 REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-SB (DRV) ✔ ✔
Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the SB roller (follower) of the switchback transfer unit.
I 04-4-192 REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-SB (DRVN) ✔ ✔
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-SB-RE-FEED Clear the replacement counter (*) for the re-feed roller (driven) of the switchback transfer unit.
I 04-4-193 ✔
(DRIVEN) * Refer to TM0-04-4-110 "Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)" for details.
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-SB-RE-FEED Clear the replacement counter (*) for the re-feed roller (follower) of the switchback transfer unit.
I 04-4-194 ✔
(FOLLOWER) * Refer to TM0-04-4-110 "Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)" for details.
Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the following components of the duplex transfer unit.
- Duplex transport roller 1 (driven)
- Duplex transport roller 1 (follower)
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-LOWER - Duplex transport roller 2 (follower)
I 04-4-200 ✔
(ALL) - Duplex transport roller 3 (driven)
Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the following components of the horizontal transfer unit.
- Horizontal transport roller 1 (driven)
- Horizontal transport roller 1 (follower)
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-
I 04-4-200 - Horizontal transport roller 2 (follower) ✔
HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT (ALL)
- Horizontal transport roller 4 (follower) * Refer to TM0-04-4-110 “Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)” for details.
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-LOWER Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the duplex transport roller 1 (driven) of the duplex transfer unit.
I 04-4-201 ✔
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR- Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the horizontal transport roller 1 (driven) of the horizontal transfer unit.
I 04-4-201 ✔
HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT (DRV1) * Refer to TM0-04-4-110 “Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)” for details.
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-LOWER Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the duplex transport roller 1 (follower) of the duplex transfer unit.
I 04-4-202 ✔

REPLACE COUNT CLEAR- Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the horizontal transport roller 1 (follower) of the horizontal transfer unit.
I 04-4-202 ✔
HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT (DRVN1) * Refer to TM0-04-4-110 “Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)” for details.
I 04-4-203 ✔
I 04-4-203 ✔
I 04-4-204 ✔
I 04-4-204 ✔
I 04-4-205 ✔
I 04-4-205 ✔
I 04-4-206 ✔
I 04-4-206 ✔
I 04-4-207 ✔
I 04-4-207 ✔
I 04-4-208 ✔
I 04-4-208 ✔
Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the following components of the elevation transfer unit.
- Elevation transport roller 1 (driven)
- Elevation transport roller 1 (follower)
I 04-4-210 REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-ELEV (ALL) ✔ ✔
Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the elevation transport roller 1 (driven) of the elevation transfer unit.
I 04-4-211 REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-ELEV (DRV1) ✔ ✔
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-ELEV Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the elevation transport roller 1 (follower) of the elevation transfer unit.
I 04-4-212 ✔ ✔

Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the elevation transport roller 2 (driven) of the elevation transfer unit.
I 04-4-213 REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-ELEV (DRV2) ✔ ✔
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-ELEV Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the elevation transport roller 2 (follower) of the elevation transfer unit.
I 04-4-214 ✔ ✔
Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the following components of the FD paper ejection unit.
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-FD EJECT - FD paper ejection roller (driven)
I 04-4-220 ✔ ✔
(ALL) - FD paper ejection roller (follower)
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-FD EJECT Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the FD paper ejection roller (driven) of the FD paper ejection unit.
I 04-4-221 ✔ ✔
(DRV) * Refer to TM0-04-4-110 "Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)" for details.
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-FD EJECT Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the FD paper ejection roller (follower) of the FD paper ejection unit.
I 04-4-222 ✔ ✔
(DRVN) * Refer to TM0-04-4-110 "Replacement clear - standard paper feed tray (bulk)" for details.
Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the following components of the FU transfer unit.
- FU transport roller 1 (driven)
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-FU TRANF - FU transport roller 1 (follower)
I 04-4-230 ✔ ✔
(ALL) - FU transport roller 2 (driven)
- FU transport roller 2 (follower)
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-FU TRANF Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the FU transport roller 1 (driven) of the FU transfer unit.
I 04-4-231 ✔ ✔
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-FU TRANF Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the FU transport roller 1 (follower) of the FU transfer unit.
I 04-4-232 ✔ ✔
REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-FU TRANF Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the FU transport roller 2 (driven) of the FU transfer unit.
I 04-4-233 ✔ ✔

REPLACE COUNT CLEAR-FU TRANF Clear the replacement counter and cleaning counter for the FU transport roller 2 (follower) of the FU transfer unit.
I 04-4-234 ✔ ✔
Clear the cleaning counter (*) for the following components of the vertical transfer unit.
- Vertical transfer roller (driven)
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-VERT TRANF - Vertical transfer roller (follower)
I 04-4-250 ✔ ✔
(ALL) * Cleaning Counter: "Current Counter" printed with TM0-04-3-051 "PREV MAINT CHECK PRINT (CLEAN)".
For the relationship between each TM of clear cleaning and the component numbers that follow from this TM on, refer to "cleaning" and "overseas" in
"information print output material.xls".
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-VERT TRANF Clear the cleaning counter for the vertical transfer roller (driven) of the vertical transfer unit.
I 04-4-251 ✔ ✔
(DRV) * Refer to TM0-04-4-250 "Cleaning clear - vertical transfer unit (bulk)" for details.
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-VERT TRANF Clear the cleaning counter for the vertical transfer roller (follower) of the vertical transfer unit.
I 04-4-252 ✔ ✔
(DRVN) * Refer to TM0-04-4-250 "Cleaning clear - vertical transfer unit (bulk)" for details.
Clear the cleaning counter for the following components of the registration unit.
- Registration roller
I 04-4-260 CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-REGIST (ALL) ✔ ✔
- Guide roller
* Refer to TM0-04-4-250 "Cleaning clear - vertical transfer unit (bulk)" for details.
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-REGIST Clear the cleaning counter for the registration roller of the registration unit.
I 04-4-261 ✔ ✔
(TIMING) * Refer to TM0-04-4-250 "Cleaning clear - vertical transfer unit (bulk)" for details.
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-REGIST Clear the cleaning counter for the guide roller of the registration unit.
I 04-4-262 ✔ ✔
(GUIDE) * Refer to TM0-04-4-250 "Cleaning clear - vertical transfer unit (bulk)" for details.
Clear the cleaning counter for the following components of the BP.
- Transfer belt
I 04-4-270 CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-BP (ALL) ✔ ✔
- KG roller
Clear the cleaning counter for the transfer belt of the BP.
I 04-4-271 CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-BP (BELT) ✔ ✔
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-BP (KG Clear the cleaning counter for the KG roller of the BP.
I 04-4-272 ✔ ✔
ROLLER) * Refer to TM0-04-4-250 "Cleaning clear - vertical transfer unit (bulk)" for details.
Clear the cleaning counter for the following components of the downward transfer unit.
- Downward transport roller 1 (driven)
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-DESCEND - Downward transport roller 1 (follower)
I 04-4-280 ✔ ✔
(ALL) - Downward transport roller 2 (driven)
- Downward transport roller 2 (follower)

CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-DESCEND Clear the cleaning counter for the downward transport roller 1 (driven) of the downward transfer unit.
I 04-4-281 ✔ ✔
(DRV1) * Refer to TM0-04-4-250 "Cleaning clear - vertical transfer unit (bulk)" for details.
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-DESCEND Clear the cleaning counter for the downward transport roller 1 (follower) of the downward transfer unit.
I 04-4-282 ✔ ✔
(DRVN1) * Refer to TM0-04-4-250 "Cleaning clear - vertical transfer unit (bulk)" for details.
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-DESCEND Clear the cleaning counter for the downward transport roller 2 (driven) of the downward transfer unit.
I 04-4-283 ✔ ✔
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-DESCEND Clear the cleaning counter for the downward transport roller 2 (follower) of the downward transfer unit.
I 04-4-284 ✔ ✔
Clear the cleaning counter for the following components of the inverted transfer unit.
I 04-4-290 CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-SB (ALL) ✔
- SB roller (follower)
Clear the cleaning counter for the following components of the inverted transfer unit.
I 04-4-290 CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-SB (ALL) - SB roller (follower) ✔
- Re-feed roller (driven)
Re-feed roller (follower) * Refer to TM0-04-4-250 “Cleaning clear - vertical transfer unit (bulk)” for details.
Clear the cleaning counter for the SB roller (driven) of the inverted transfer unit.
I 04-4-291 CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-SB (DRV) ✔ ✔
Clear the cleaning counter for the SB roller (follower) of the inverted transfer unit.
I 04-4-292 CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-SB (DRVN) ✔ ✔
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-SB-RE-FEED Clear the cleaning counter for the re-feed roller (driven) of the switchback transfer unit.
I 04-4-293 ✔
(DRIVEN) * Refer to TM0-04-4-250 "Cleaning clear - vertical transfer unit (bulk)" for details.
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-SB-RE-FEED Clear the cleaning counter for the re-feed roller (follower) of the switchback transfer unit.
I 04-4-294 ✔
(FOLLOWER) * Refer to TM0-04-4-250 "Cleaning clear - vertical transfer unit (bulk)" for details.
Clear the cleaning counter for the following components of the duplex transfer unit.
I 04-4-300 CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-LOWER (ALL) ✔

Clear the cleaning counter for the following components of the horizontal transfer unit.
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-HORIZONTAL - Horizontal transport roller 2 (follower)
I 04-4-300 ✔
TRANSPORT (ALL) - Horizontal transport roller 3 (driven)
* Refer to TM0-04-4-250 “Cleaning clear - vertical transfer unit (bulk)” for details.
Clear the cleaning counter for the duplex transport roller 1 (driven) of the duplex transfer unit.
I 04-4-301 CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-LOWER (DRV1) ✔
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-HORIZONTAL Clear the cleaning counter for the horizontal transport roller 1 (driven) of the horizontal transfer unit.
I 04-4-301 ✔
TRANSPORT (DRV1) * Refer to TM0-04-4-250 “Cleaning clear - vertical transfer unit (bulk)” for details.
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-LOWER Clear the cleaning counter for the duplex transport roller 1 (follower) of the duplex transfer unit.
I 04-4-302 ✔
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-HORIZONTAL Clear the cleaning counter for the horizontal transport roller 1 (follower) of the horizontal transfer unit.
I 04-4-302 ✔
TRANSPORT (DRVN1) * Refer to TM0-04-4-250 “Cleaning clear - vertical transfer unit (bulk)” for details.
I 04-4-303 ✔
I 04-4-304 ✔
I 04-4-304 ✔
I 04-4-305 ✔
I 04-4-306 ✔
I 04-4-306 ✔

I 04-4-307 ✔
I 04-4-308 ✔
I 04-4-308 ✔
Clear the cleaning counter for the following components of the elevation transfer unit.
I 04-4-310 CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-ELEV (ALL) ✔ ✔
Clear the cleaning counter for the elevation transport roller 1 (driven) of the elevation transfer unit.
I 04-4-311 CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-ELEV (DRV1) ✔ ✔
Clear the cleaning counter for the elevation transport roller 1 (follower) of the elevation transfer unit.
I 04-4-312 CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-ELEV (DRVN1) ✔ ✔
Clear the cleaning counter for the elevation transport roller 2 (driven) of the elevation transfer unit.
I 04-4-313 CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-ELEV (DRV2) ✔ ✔
Clear the cleaning counter for the elevation transport roller 2 (follower) of the elevation transfer unit.
I 04-4-314 CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-ELEV (DRVN2) ✔ ✔
Clear the cleaning counter for the following components of the FD paper ejection unit.
- FD paper ejection roller (driven)
I 04-4-320 CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-FD EJECT (ALL) ✔ ✔
- FD paper ejection roller (follower)
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-FD EJECT Clear the cleaning counter for the FD paper ejection roller (driven) of the FD paper ejection unit.
I 04-4-321 ✔ ✔
(DRV) * Refer to TM0-04-4-250 "Cleaning clear - vertical transfer unit (bulk)" for details.
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-FD EJECT Clear the cleaning counter for the FD paper ejection roller (follower) of the FD paper ejection unit.
I 04-4-322 ✔ ✔
(DRVN) * Refer to TM0-04-4-250 "Cleaning clear - vertical transfer unit (bulk)" for details.
Clear the cleaning counter for the following components of the FU transfer unit.
- FU transport roller 1 (driven)
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-FU TRANF - FU transport roller 1 (follower)
I 04-4-330 ✔ ✔
(ALL) - FU transport roller 2 (driven)
- FU transport roller 2 (follower)
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-FU TRANF Clear the cleaning counter for the FU transport roller 1 (driven) of the FU transfer unit.
I 04-4-331 ✔ ✔

CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-FU TRANF Clear the cleaning counter for the FU transport roller 1 (driven) of the FU transfer unit.
I 04-4-332 ✔ ✔
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-FU TRANF Clear the cleaning counter for the FU transport roller 2 (follower) of the FU transfer unit.
I 04-4-333 ✔ ✔
CLEAN COUNT CLEAR-FU TRANF Clear the cleaning counter for the FU transport roller 2 (follower) of the FU transfer unit.
I 04-4-334 ✔ ✔
Transport section
I 06-4-001 BELT STRETCH DATA CLEAR Clear the belt compensation initial value, acquired value, acquired value A, acquired value B, and acquired value C within the flash memory to 0. ✔ ✔
Scanner
Return all of the setting values of the TM of the scanner that are out of range to their initial values.
I 21-4-001 SCANNER OVER PARAMETER CLEAR ✔ ✔
* Also return the data saved on the EEPROM to the initial value.
Scanner
Return all of the setting values of the TM of the scanner that are other than their initial values to their initial values.
* Also return the data saved on the EEPROM to the initial value.
* Do not return the following TM of the scanner to their initial values. TM0-21-6-021 "FB SCAN DEFAULT HORIZON POSITION"
TM0-21-6-022 "FB SCAN DEFAULT START POSITION" TM0-21-6-023 "FB SCAN DEFAULT IMAGE ELONGATION"
TM0-21-6-043 "AF SCAN DEFAULT CARRIAGE POSITION" TM0-21-6-076 "Color Profile Selection"
* In order to enable the following TM setting values of "Initial Value Settings of the Image Control", it is necessary to switch the power OFF, then ON. TM0-
I 21-4-002 SCANNER TEST PARAMETER CLEAR ✔ ✔
21-6-111 "DUO BASIS SET -COPY"
TM0-21-6-112 "DUO BASIS SET -SCAN"
TM0-21-6-116 "DEFAULT EDGE ENHANCEMENT -COPY" TM0-21-6-117 "DEFAULT EDGE ENHANCEMENT -SCAN" TM0-21-6-121 "DEFAULT MOIRE
REMOVE -COPY"
TM0-21-6-122 "DEFAULT MOIRE REMOVE -SCAN"
TM0-21-6-131 "Base color elimination initial value - copy" TM0-21-6-132 "Base color elimination initial value - scanner"
Force the scanner jam to be cleared.

* As the scanner jam error will be forced to be cleared, be sure to remove the original that is causing the scanner jam prior to executing this TM (remove the
I 21-4-006 SCANNER JAM CLEAR ✔ ✔
paper on the original transport path of the AF). If the original is not removed, the scanner jam error will be cleared despite being in a state of a scanner jam
and this will make it impossible to detect scanner jams that occur thereafter.
I 23-4-001 TM PARAMETER CLEAR Return the finisher TM parameter area to the initial value. ✔ ✔
I 23-4-002 TM-HFSI PARAMETER CLEAR Return the finisher TM HFSI area to the initial value. ✔ ✔
STACKER SUB PADDLE COUNT

I 23-4-006 Clear the count of the stacker sub paddle ✔ ✔
CLEAR
I 23-4-007 STACKER PADDLE COUNT CLEAR Clear the count of the stacker paddle ✔ ✔
I 23-4-008 BOOKLET PADDLE COUNT CLEAR Clear the count of the booklet paddle ✔ ✔
FACE DOWN FINISHER
I 24-4-001 FDF ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENT VALUE Initialize the distance between the left and right alignment plates. ✔ ✔
I 24-4-002 FDF PAPER FEED PAGE COUNT Clear the paper feed page counter. ✔ ✔
I 24-4-003 FDF STAPLER JOB COUNT Clear the stapler job counter. ✔ ✔

I 24-4-004 INITIALIZE FDF SETTING VALUES Set the adjustment values saved to the FDF EEPROM to their default values as a batch. ✔ ✔
Initialize the EEPROM inside the HCF.

I 29-4-001 INITIALIZE HCF EEPROM ✔
If the EEPROM is not initialized, initialize the entire area of the EEPROM to the specified value.
Initialize the EEPROM inside the HCS.

I 30-4-001 INITIALIZE HCS EEPROM ✔
If the EEPROM is not initialized, initialize the entire area of the EEPROM to the specified value.

I 33-4-001 WEF PARAMETER INTIALIZE Return all adjustment values to their initial values and save them to the EEPROM. ✔
Perfect Binder
I 34-4-001 CLEAR PB COUNT 4 Clear case binding finisher count 4 (the cover inserter count). ✔

Type Test mode No. Test mode name Action Remarks FW GD
PMS section
Confirm the version of the DIALL package data.
M 01-5-001 DIALL PACKAGE DATA VERSION ✔
* X.Y.Z Example) Ver.123.456.789 is to be displayed as 123.456.789.
Confirm the version of the package data.

M 01-5-001 PACKAGE DATA VERSION ✔
* X.Y.Z Example) Ver.123.456.789 is to be displayed as 123.456.789.
Confirm the version of the PMS firmware.

M 01-5-002 PMS FIRMWARE VERSION ✔ ✔
* Refer to TM0-01-5-001 "PACKAGE DATA VERSION" for the content of display.
Confirm the version of the panel firmware.

M 01-5-003 PANEL FIRMWARE VERSION ✔ ✔
Confirm the version of the remote control communication module.

* This menu can be executed only when TM0-01-6-041 "REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTION
SELECTION" is enabled.
M 01-5-004 REMOTE CTRL COM MODULE VERSION ✔ ✔
When Enable, this TM is displayed in the menu. Execution by inputting the TM number shall
also be possible.
When disabled, it will not appear in the menu list of this menu. Execution by inputting the TM
number shall also be unavailable.
Display/print a record of errors that have occurred up to the current point in the normal mode.
Display/print a maximum of 64 errors.
Errors can be displayed/printed upon being filtered based on each type of error (multiple
selections allowed).
The items to display are the error number, error type name, and error occurrence date/time.
The items to print are the error number, error type name, error occurrence date/time, paper feed
M 01-5-011 ERROR HISTORY DISPLAY ✔ ✔
tray, paper output tray, paper size, and the total count value.
If the information of records contain no entries, print "No Records (English)".
The error record is to retain a maximum of 1000 entries in order of those that the newest for the
types of "S", "U", "Z", "X", "Y", "W", and "I" combined.
* The print conditions are the same as TM0-01-3-021 "COUNT INFORMATION PRINT".
* Refer to "Information print output material.xls" for the layout of print contents.
Display the value that is output with TM0-01-3-023 "TEST MODE CONFIG PRINT 2". The
M 01-5-016 TEST MODE CONFIG 2 contents to display are the TM number, TM name, and setting value. ✔ ✔
* For production and development TMs, only numbers and setting values are printed.
Display the value of the total count saved by the PMS

M 01-5-021 TOTAL COUNT DISPLAY (PMS) * The master material is the count value retained by the engine unit. Use as a remedy in cases ✔ ✔
when a failure has occurred on the side of the engine.
Display the value of the detailed count 1 saved by the PMS

M 01-5-022 DETAIL COUNT 1 DISPLAY (PMS) * The master material is the count value retained by the engine unit. Use as a remedy in cases ✔ ✔








PMS section













Display the value of the maintenance count/standard paper feed tray saved by the PMS
MAINTENANCE COUNT P-FEED TRAY
M 01-5-043 * The master material is the count value retained by the engine unit. Use as a remedy in cases ✔ ✔
(PMS)
Display the value of the maintenance count/Tray 1 saved by the PMS

M 01-5-044 MAINTENANCE COUNT TRAY1 (PMS) * The master material is the count value retained by the engine unit. Use as a remedy in cases ✔ ✔

M 01-5-045 MAINTENANCE COUNT TRAY2 (PMS) * The master material is the count value retained by the engine unit. Use as a remedy in cases ✔ ✔

M 01-5-046 MAINTENANCE COUNT TRAY3 (PMS) * The master material is the count value retained by the engine unit. Use as a remedy in cases ✔
Display the value of the maintenance count/paper inverting unit saved by the PMS
MAINTENANCE COUNT SWITCHBACK
(PMS)
Display the value of the maintenance count/FD paper receiving tray saved by the PMS
M 01-5-048 MAINTENANCE COUNT FD EJECT (PMS) * The master material is the count value retained by the engine unit. Use as a remedy in cases ✔ ✔
Display the value of the maintenance count/FU paper receiving tray saved by the PMS
M 01-5-049 MAINTENANCE COUNT FU EJECT (PMS) * The master material is the count value retained by the engine unit. Use as a remedy in cases ✔ ✔

Display the value of the finisher count 1 saved by the PMS

M 01-5-050 FINISHER COUNT 1 DISPLAY (PMS) * The master material is the count value retained by the engine unit. Use as a remedy in cases ✔ ✔
PMS section






Display the value of the cleaning count/extra saved by the PMS

EXTRA CLEANING COUNT DISPLAY
(PMS)
Display the value of the cleaning count/strong saved by the PMS

STRONG CLEANING COUNT DISPLAY
(PMS)
Display the value of the cleaning count/normal saved by the PMS

NORMAL CLEANING COUNT DISPLAY
(PMS)

Display the URL of the remote control server. The URL is as follows:
http://risoremoteagent.com/
* This menu can be executed only when TM0-01-6-041 "REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTION
SELECTION" is enabled.
M 01-5-066 RISO REMOTE SERVER URL ✔ ✔
When Enable, this TM is displayed in the menu. Execution by inputting the TM number shall
also be possible.
When disabled, it will not appear in the menu list of this menu. Execution by inputting the TM
number shall also be unavailable.
Display the HDD access speed for when the Hdparam -ft /dev/sda command is executed.
As a minimum of 7 seconds is required to measure the HDD access speed, display "0" until the
M 01-5-071 HDD ACCESS SPEED CHECK measurement is completed. ✔ ✔
As there will be some errors with the measurement, there will be a variance of a dozen or so MB
each time the command is executed.
Display the date and time at which the automatic restoration has occurred and the date and time
of the return destination.
M 01-5-072 HDD AUTOMATIC RECOVERY HISTORY * The content displayed here is the record of restorations for the PMS database that have been ✔ ✔
executed upon being determined that the database is broken when the main unit is activated
(and when data for performing the restoration properly exists).
Display the value of the maintenance count/Large-capacity paper feed unit saved by the PMS
M 01-5-081 MAINTENANCE COUNT HCF (PMS) * The master material is the count value retained by the engine unit. Use as a remedy in cases ✔
Display the value of the mail finisher count (the number of created mail items) saved by the
M 01-5-082 MAIL FINISHER COUNT (PMS) ✔
PMS 0 to 9,999,999: Count value
Confirm the version of the engine package data.

M 04-5-001 ENGINE PACKAGE DATA VERSION ✔ ✔
Confirm the version of the SH2A (engine control PCB CPU) firmware of the engine unit.
M 04-5-002 SH2A FIRMWARE VERSION (ENGINE) ✔ ✔
Confirm the version of the paper transport RX firmware of the engine unit.
M 04-5-003 RX FIRMWARE VERSION (ENGINE) ✔ ✔
M 04-5-004 FPGA VERSION Confirm the version of the FPGA. ✔ ✔
M 04-5-005 ENGINE CTRL PCB VERSION Confirm the version of the engine control PCB. ✔ ✔
M 04-5-006 IP PCB VERSION Confirm the version of the recording data generation PCB. ✔ ✔
Confirm the version of head control PCB 2.

(Head control PCB connecting with the engine control PCB. Head control PCBs are labeled 0
M 04-5-007 HEAD DRIVE PCB 2 VERSION ✔
and 1 in order from that which is closer to the engine PCB.)
(PCB of K/C with 4C units, K/R or K/B with 2C units, and K with 1C units.)


(Head control PCB connecting with the engine control PCB. Head control PCBs are labeled 2,
1, and 0 in order from that which is closer to the engine PCB.)
(K with 5C units)
Confirm the version of the SH2A loader.

M 04-5-009 SH2A LOADER VERSION (ENGINE) ✔ ✔
TAG CTRL FIRMWARE VERSION Confirm the version of the tag control microcomputer firmware of the engine unit.
M 04-5-010 ✔ ✔
(ENGINE) * Refer to TM0-01-5-001 "PACKAGE DATA VERSION" for the content of display.
Confirm the version of the tag control microcomputer loader of the engine unit.
M 04-5-011 TAG CTRL LOADER VERSION (ENGINE) ✔ ✔
SH2A BOOT PROGRAM VERSION Confirm the version of the SH2A boot program of the engine unit.
M 04-5-012 ✔ ✔
FPGA DATA (NORMAL) VERSION Confirm the version of the FPGA data of the engine unit.
M 04-5-013 ✔ ✔
FINISHER FIRMWARE VERSION Confirm the version of the multifunction finisher firmware.
M 04-5-015 ✔ ✔

(Head control PCB connecting with the head control PCB 0. Head control PCBs are labeled 0
and 1 in order from that which is closer to the engine PCB.)
(PCBs of the M/Y or the R/Y of 4C units. None with 2C units and 1C units.)

(Head control PCB connecting with the head control PCB 2. Head control PCBs are labeled 2,
(C/M or C/R with 5C units)

(Head control PCB connecting with the head control PCB 1. Head control PCBs are labeled 2,
(Y/Gr with 5C units)
The configuration version of the FPGA on the head control PCB that is in the very front when
M 04-5-018 HEAD DRIVE FPGA 2 VERSION ✔ ✔
looking from the side of the standard paper feed tray
The configuration version of the FPGA on the head control PCB that is in the second position
M 04-5-019 HEAD DRIVE FPGA 1 VERSION ✔ ✔
from the front when looking from the side of the standard paper feed tray
The configuration version of the FPGA on the head control PCB that is in the third position from
M 04-5-020 HEAD DRIVE FPGA 0 VERSION ✔
the front when looking from the side of the standard paper feed tray
M 04-5-021 TOTAL COUNT DISPLAY (ENGINE) Display the value of the total count saved by the engine ✔ ✔

M 04-5-022 DETAIL COUNT 1 DISPLAY (ENGINE) Display the value of detailed count 1 saved by the engine ✔ ✔
MAINTENANCE COUNT P-FEED TRAY Display the value of the maintenance count for the standard paper feed tray saved by the
M 04-5-043 ✔ ✔
(ENG) engine

M 04-5-044 MAINTENANCE COUNT TRAY1 (ENGINE) Display the value of the maintenance count for Tray 1 saved by the engine ✔ ✔
M 04-5-045 MAINTENANCE COUNT TRAY2 (ENGINE) Display the value of the maintenance count for Tray 2 saved by the engine ✔ ✔
M 04-5-046 MAINTENANCE COUNT TRAY3 (ENGINE) Display the value of the maintenance count for Tray 3 saved by the engine. ✔
MAINTENANCE COUNT SWITCHBACK Display the value of the maintenance count for the paper duplex transport unit saved by the
M 04-5-047 ✔ ✔
(ENG) engine
MAINTENANCE COUNT FD EJECT
M 04-5-048 Display the value of the maintenance count for the FD paper ejection tray saved by the engine ✔ ✔
(ENGINE)
MAINTENANCE COUNT FU EJECT
M 04-5-049 Display the value of the maintenance count for the FU paper ejection tray saved by the engine ✔ ✔
(ENGINE)
M 04-5-050 FINISHER COUNT 1 DISPLAY (ENGINE) Display the value of finisher count 1 saved by the engine ✔ ✔
EXTRA CLEANING COUNT DISPLAY

M 04-5-058 Display the value of the cleaning count / extra saved by the engine ✔ ✔
(ENG)
STRONG CLEANING COUNT DISPLAY
M 04-5-059 Display the value of the cleaning count / strong saved by the engine ✔ ✔
(ENG)
NORMAL CLEANING COUNT DISPLAY
M 04-5-060 Display the value of the cleaning count / normal saved by the engine ✔ ✔
(ENG)
M 04-5-061 BELT ENCODER COUNT INITIAL Display BELT ENCODER COUNT INITIAL. ✔ ✔
M 04-5-062 BELT ENCODER COUNT ACQUISITION Display BELT ENCODER COUNT ACQUISITION. ✔ ✔
M 04-5-063 BELT ENCODER COUNT ACQUISITION A Display BELT ENCODER COUNT ACQUISITION A. ✔ ✔
M 04-5-064 BELT ENCODER COUNT ACQUISITION B Display BELT ENCODER COUNT ACQUISITION B. ✔ ✔
M 04-5-065 BELT ENCODER COUNT ACQUISITION C Display BELT ENCODER COUNT ACQUISITION C. ✔ ✔

M 04-5-066 BELT MAINTENANCE COUNT Display the maintenance count for the belt. ✔ ✔
Output the paper width acquired with confirmation of the CIS operation (TM0-04-3-021 "CIS
M 04-5-071 CIS PAPER WIDTH DETECT ✔ ✔
OPERATION CHECK")
REAR CIS PAPER EDGE POSITION Output the rear (left) CIS paper edge position acquired with confirmation of the CIS operation
M 04-5-072 ✔ ✔
DETECT (TM0-04-3-021 "CIS OPERATION CHECK")
Output the rear (left) CIS paper level acquired with confirmation of the CIS operation (TM0-04-3-
M 04-5-073 REAR CIS PAPER LEVEL DETECT ✔ ✔
021 "CIS OPERATION CHECK")
Output the rear (left) CIS belt level acquired with confirmation of the CIS operation (TM0-04-3-
M 04-5-074 REAR LEFT CIS PAPER LEVEL DETECT ✔ ✔
021 "CIS OPERATION CHECK")
M 04-5-075 REAR CIS THRESHOLD Display the threshold value of the rear (left) CIS ✔ ✔
Display the offset voltage of the rear (left) CIS saved in a nonvolatile manner during shading
M 04-5-076 REAR CIS OFFSET VOLTAGE (INITIAL) ✔ ✔
compensation.
Display the offset voltage of the rear (left) CIS saved in a nonvolatile manner during initialization
M 04-5-077 REAR CIS OFFSET VOLTAGE (ADJUST) of the CIS. However, if print had not been performed after turning the power ON, display the ✔ ✔
value of "REAR CIS OFFSET VOLTAGE (INITIAL)"
Output the criteria paper level of the rear (left) CIS acquired with TM0-04-3-022 "REAR CIS
M 04-5-078 REAR CIS CRITERIA PAPER LEVEL ✔ ✔
SHADING COMPASATION".
FRONT CIS PAPER EDGE POSITION Output the front CIS paper edge position acquired with confirmation of the CIS operation (TM0-
M 04-5-082 ✔
DETECT 04-3-021)
M 04-5-083 FRONT CIS PAPER LEVEL DETECT Output the front CIS paper level acquired with confirmation of the CIS operation (TM0-04-3-021) ✔
M 04-5-084 FRONT CIS BELT LEVEL DETECT Output the front CIS belt level acquired with confirmation of the CIS operation (TM0-04-3-021) ✔
M 04-5-085 FRONT CIS THRESHOLD Display the threshold value of the front CIS ✔
Display the offset voltage of the front CIS saved in a nonvolatile manner during shading
M 04-5-086 FRONT CIS OFFSET VOLTAGE (INITIAL) ✔
compensation.
Display the offset voltage of the front CIS saved in a nonvolatile manner during initialization of
M 04-5-087 FRONT CIS OFFSET VOLTAGE (ADJUST) the CIS. However, if print had not been performed after turning the power ON, display the value ✔
of "FRONT CIS OFFSET VOLTAGE (INITIAL)"
Output the criteria paper level of the front CIS acquired with front/rear CIS shading
M 04-5-088 FRONT CIS CRITERIA PAPER LEVEL ✔
compensation (TM0-04-3-024) or with front CIS shading compensation (TM0-04-3-023).

The MCU version on the head control PCB that is in the very front when looking from the side of
M 04-5-090 HEAD DRIVE MCU 2 VERSION ✔ ✔
the standard paper feed tray
The MCU version on the head control PCB that is in the second position when looking from the
M 04-5-091 HEAD DRIVE MCU 1 VERSION ✔ ✔
side of the standard paper feed tray
The MCU version on the head control PCB that is in the third position when looking from the
M 04-5-092 HEAD DRIVE MCU 0 VERSION ✔
side of the standard paper feed tray
M 04-5-093 OPTION PCB FIRMWARE VERSION The version of the communication control MCU on the option control PCB ✔ ✔
M 04-5-094 OPTION PCB LOADER VERSION The loader version of the communication control MCU on the option control PCB ✔ ✔
Display the value of the maintenance count of the large-capacity paper feed unit saved by the
M 04-5-101 MAINTENANCE COUNT HCF (ENGINE) ✔
engine
Display the value of the mail finisher count (the number of created mail items) saved by the
M 04-5-102 MAIL FINISHER COUNT (ENGINE) ✔
engine 0 to 9,999,999: Count value
Display the value of case binding finisher count 1 (the binding count) saved by the engine. 0 to
M 04-5-103 CASE BINDING FINISHER COUNT 1 ✔
9,999,999: Count value
Display the value of case binding finisher count 2 (the cover cutting count) saved by the engine.
M 04-5-104 CASE BINDING FINISHER COUNT 2 ✔
0 to 9,999,999: Count value
Display the value of case binding finisher count 3 (the count of glue supply operations) saved by
M 04-5-105 CASE BINDING FINISHER COUNT 3 the engine. ✔
0 to 9,999,999: Count value
Paper feed section

P-FEED TRAY PAPER WIDTH VOLUME
M 05-5-001 Display the AD value of the standard paper feed tray. ✔ ✔
AD

P-FEED TRAY PAPER WIDTH DETECT

M 05-5-002 Display the paper width potentiometer of the standard paper feed tray in units of 0.1 mm. ✔ ✔
CHECK
Display the paper ID that the machine has detected. (Value detected by the sensor) 0: No size,
1: A3, 2: A4, 3: A4-LEF, 4: A5, 5: A5-LEF, 6: A6, 7: A6-LEF, 8: B4, 9: B5, 10: B5-LEF, 11: B6,
12: B6-LEF,
13: Foolscap, 14: Ledger, 15: Legal, 16: Letter, 17: Letter-R, 18: Statement, 19: Statement-R,
20: A3W, 21: Card, 22: Square 0, 23: Square 1, 24: Square 2, 25: Square 3, 26: Long 3, 27:
Long 4,
28: C4, 29: C5, 30: C6, 31: DL-R,
32: Envelope 9 x 12 inch,
M 05-5-006 P-FEED TRAY PAPER SIZE ID ✔ ✔
34: No. 10 envelope 4.125 x 9.5 inch,
51: Custom size S, 52: Custom size L, 53: Unknown, 54: Auto,
100: User defined paper size 1,
104: User defined paper size 5
12: B6-LEF,
Long 4,
28: C4, 29: C5, 30: C6, 31: DL-R,
M 05-5-007 TRAY1 PAPER SIZE ID ✔ ✔

Paper feed section
12: B6-LEF,
Long 4,
28: C4, 29: C5, 30: C6, 31: DL-R,
M 05-5-008 TRAY2 PAPER SIZE ID ✔ ✔
12: B6-LEF,
Long 4,
28: C4, 29: C5, 30: C6, 31: DL-R,
32 Envelope 9 x 12 inch,
M 05-5-009 TRAY3 PAPER SIZE ID ✔
34: No. 10 envelope 4.125 x 9.5 inch
M 05-5-011 P-FEED TRAY PAPER VOLUME Paper feed tray remaining paper (%) ✔

Tray 1 remaining paper (%) Display 0 when unable to detect.

M 05-5-012 TRAY1 PAPER VOLUME ✔ ✔
* The tray being empty of paper cannot be detected unless the elevator is moved

M 05-5-013 TRAY2 PAPER VOLUME ✔ ✔

M 05-5-014 TRAY3 PAPER VOLUME ✔
M 05-5-021 REGIST SENSOR EMIT Display the luminous energy of the registration sensor ✔ ✔
M 06-5-001 TOP EDGE SENSOR 1 EMIT Display the luminous energy of top edge sensor 1 ✔ ✔
M 06-5-002 TOP EDGE SENSOR 2 EMIT Display the luminous energy of top edge sensor 2 ✔ ✔
Display the final peak luminous energy of top edge sensor 2 acquired with TM0-06-3-001 "TOP
M 06-5-003 TOP EDGE SENSOR 2 PEAK ✔ ✔
EDGE SENSOR 2 AUTO ADJUST"
Rotate the transfer belt unit and display the speed.

M 06-5-006 BP SPEED ✔ ✔
Follows the setting value of TM0-04-6-101 "TM PAPER FEED SPEED SETTING" for the speed.

Print head area
The head temperature is displayed with a cycle of 2 seconds.

Display 999 when not equipped with a thermistor or when an abnormal temperature has been
detected.
Display 350 for heads that are not connected.
The display format is as follows.

Upper side is inflow side & lower side is outflow side of the Heads.
【4 color machine, 2 color machine】 (※)
HEAD
K K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6
(※) M also applicable to the following:
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6
· R of KCRY machine
M 08-5-001 HEAD TEMPERATURE C C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 ✔
· R of KR machine
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
· B of KB machine
M M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
Y Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6
Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6
【1 color machine】
HEAD K K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16
K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16
K21 K22 K23 K24 K25 K26
K21 K22 K23 K24 K25 K26
The head temperature is displayed with a cycle of 2 seconds.

detected.
Display 350 for heads that are not connected.

Upper side is inflow side & lower side is outflow side of the Heads.
HEAD
K K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16
K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 (※) P also applicable to the following:
M 08-5-001 HEAD TEMPERATURE K21 K22 K23 K24 K25 K26 · R of KCMYR machine ✔
K21 K22 K23 K24 K25 K26 · Gr of KCMYGr machine
C C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
M M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
Y Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6
Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6
P P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6

Display the head voltage in a cycle of 2 seconds.

When an abnormal voltage is detected or the unconnected head is displayed as "999".
M 08-5-002 HEAD VOLTAGE ✔ ✔
The display format is the same as 0-08-5-001 "HEAD TEMPERATURE".
However, the upper row shows the plus side and the lower row shows the minus side.
M 08-5-006 MD recovery cleaning count Display the number of times execution for MD recovery has been performed. ✔ ✔
Display the temperature of the ink temperature thermistor (4 pieces *), the head temperature
sensor, and the heater temperature thermistor (1 piece) in 2 second cycle.

(1) Ink temperature sensor
M 09-5-001 INK/HEAD/HEATER TEMPERATURE Same as 0-09-5-002 "INK TEMPERATURE" ✔
(2) Head temperature sensor
Same as 0-08-5-001 "HEAD TEMPERATURE"
(3) Heater temperature sensor (hh)
HEATER hh
* Two for 2 color machine, one for 1 color machine (K machine)
Display the temperature of the ink temperature thermistor (5 pieces), the head temperature
sensor, and the heater temperature thermistor (1 piece) in 2 second cycle.

(1) Ink temperature sensor
Same as 0-09-5-002 "INK TEMPERATURE"
M 09-5-001 INK/HEAD/HEATER TEMPERATURE ✔
(2) Head temperature sensor
Same as 0-08-5-001 "HEAD TEMPERATURE"
(3) Heater temperature sensor (hh)
HEATER hh
* Two for 2 color machine, one for 1 color machine (K machine)

Display the temperature of the ink. Cycles of 2 seconds.

Display 999 when not equipped with a thermistor or when an abnormal temperature has been * M is also applicable to the following:
detected. - R of KCRY units
M 09-5-002 INK TEMPERATURE The display format is as follows. - R of KR units ✔
A space is used to separate each ink of K, C, M, Y.* - B of KB units
INK K C M Y (←Top is text) - K2 of K units
K C M Y (←Bottom is number)
Display the temperature of the ink. Cycles of 2 seconds.

detected. * P is also applicable to the following:
M 09-5-002 INK TEMPERATURE The display format is as follows. - R of KCMYR units ✔
A space is used to separate each ink of K, C, M, Y, P.* - Gr of KCMYGr units
INK K C M Y P (←Top is text)
K C M Y P (←Bottom is number)
Display the pressurization pressure data (AD value) under atmospheric pressure. A value of
M 09-5-003 Pressurization pressure data (AD value) ✔ ✔
621±81 is normal.
Negative pressurization pressure data (AD Display the negative pressurization pressure data (AD value) under atmospheric pressure. A
M 09-5-004 ✔ ✔
value) value of 621±81 is normal.
Display the continued time of ink circulation by the external filter executed by TM0-09-3-070
TM external filter ink circulation "External filter ink circulation".
M 09-5-010 ✔ ✔
implementation time display The time displayed is the time when the previous external ink circulation was performed. (The
time for cooling ink circulation is not included)
Displays the most recent initial ink filling repetition count. - This is reset when the setting value
of TM0-09-6-052 "TM INITIAL INK FILLING REPETITION MODE COUNT" is reached and
TM0-09-
3-013 "INITIAL INK FILLING REPETITION MODE" is executed. (It is reset when the test mode
TM INITIAL INK FILLING REPETITION
M 09-5-012 is executed after it is executed the specified number of times.) ✔
MODE EXECUTION COUNT DISPLAY
- Executing TM0-09-3-011 "INK INITIAL FILLING" also adds to the count.
- Executing the initial ink filling processing when the power supply activates also adds to the
count. (When TM0-09-6-017 "HEAD REPLACE MODE" is enabled.) This value is stored in a
non-volatile manner.

Tag control
Display the current model registration status. The factory setting is "0". 0: Provisional
M 11-5-001 MACHINE REGISTERING CONDITION registration ✔ ✔
1: Permanent registration
Indicates which model is actually in operation. The factory setting is "0". 0: No applicable model
M 11-5-002 MACHINE OPERATION ID ✔ ✔
1 through 255: Machine type ID
* Real = Indicates the model card that is currently attached to the machine. Display the
registration status of the model card
M 11-5-003 MACHINE CARD CONDITION ✔ ✔
0: Provisional registration
1: Permanent registration
* Real = Indicates the model card that is currently attached to the machine. 0: No applicable
M 11-5-004 MACHINE ID model ✔ ✔
* Real = Indicates the model card that is currently attached to the machine. 0: No applicable
M 11-5-005 MACHINE ACTION ID model ✔ ✔
M 11-5-011 TAG SERIAL 1 :FIRST 4 DIGIT INTERIM Main unit serial record within tag 1: Display the first 4 digits (for provisional registration). ✔ ✔
M 11-5-012 TAG SERIAL 1:SECOND 4 DIGIT INTERIM Main unit serial record within tag 1: Display the bottom 4 digits (for provisional registration). ✔ ✔
M 11-5-013 TAG SERIAL 2 :FIRST4 DIGIT INTERIM Main unit serial record within tag 2: Display the first 4 digits (for provisional registration). ✔ ✔
M 11-5-014 TAG SERIAL 2 :SECOND 4 DIGIT INTERIM Main unit serial record within tag 2: Display the bottom 4 digits (for provisional registration). ✔ ✔
M 11-5-016 TAG SERIAL 3 :SECOND 4 DIGIT INTERIM Main unit serial record within tag 3: Display the bottom 4 digits (for provisional registration). ✔ ✔
M 11-5-018 TAG SERIAL 4 :SECOND4 DIGIT INTERIM Main unit serial record within tag 4: Display the bottom 4 digits (for provisional registration). ✔ ✔
M 11-5-020 TAG SERIAL 5 :SECOND4 DIGIT INTERIM Main unit serial record within tag 5: Display the bottom 4 digits (for provisional registration). ✔ ✔
M 11-5-021 TAG SERIAL 1 :FIRST 4 DIGIT FINAL Main unit serial record within tag 1: Display the first 4 digits (for permanent registration). ✔ ✔
M 11-5-022 TAG SERIAL 1 :SECOND 4 DIGIT FINAL Main unit serial record within tag 1: Display the bottom 4 digits (for permanent registration). ✔ ✔

Tag control
M 11-5-041 INTERIM OPERATION TIME - MACHINE Display the total operation time with provisional registration. ✔ ✔
M 11-5-042 INTERIM OPERATION TIME - CARD 1 Display the provisional registration operation time (card: connection 1). ✔ ✔
M 11-5-051 INK VOLUME DISPLAY C Display the remaining amount of ink (C) recorded on the tag. ✔ ✔

- R for KCRY model
M 11-5-052 INK VOLUME DISPLAY M (R,B) Display the remaining amount of ink (M) recorded on the tag. ✔
- R for KR model
- B for KB model
M 11-5-052 INK VOLUME DISPLAY M (R,B) Display the remaining amount of ink (M) recorded on the tag. ✔
M 11-5-053 INK VOLUME DISPLAY Y Display the remaining amount of ink (Y) recorded on the tag. ✔ ✔
M 11-5-054 INK VOLUME DISPLAY K Display the remaining amount of ink (K) recorded on the tag. ✔ ✔

Display the remaining amount of ink (P) recorded on the tag. This is also applicable to the
following:
M 11-5-055 INK VOLUME DISPLAY P (R, GR) ✔
- R of KCMYR units
Scanner
Confirm the version of the scanner firmware.

M 21-5-001 SCANNER FIRMWARE VERSION ✔ ✔
Confirm the version of the AF firmware.

M 21-5-002 AF FIRMWARE VERSION ✔ ✔
Display the error number and error type name of the error that is currently occurring on the
M 21-5-006 SCANNER ERROR ✔ ✔
scanner.
Display the No. and setting value of the TM of the scanner for which the setting value is out of
M 21-5-011 SCANNER OVER PARAMETER ✔ ✔
range.
Display the No. and setting value of the TM of the scanner for which the setting value is other
M 21-5-012 SCANNER TEST PARAMETER ✔ ✔
than the initial value.
Display the size of the original that has been loaded onto the FB. The IDs for each original size
are as follows
00: No paper, 01: A3, 02: B4, 03: A4, 04: A4-LEF, 05: B5, 06: B5-LEF,
M 21-5-016 FB ORIGINAL SIZE ID DISPLAY ✔ ✔
07: A5, 08: A5-LEF, 13: Ledger, 14: Legal, 15: Letter, 16: Letter-LEF,
17: Statement, 18: Statement-LEF, 19: Foolscap, 31: Custom sized paper, 255: Unknown (with
or without)
Display the size of the original that has been loaded onto the Auto document feeder. The IDs for
each original size are as follows
00: No paper, 01: A3, 02: B4, 03: A4, 04: A4-LEF, 05: B5, 06: B5-LEF,
M 21-5-017 AF ORIGINAL SIZE ID DISPLAY ✔ ✔
07: A5, 08: A5-LEF, 09: B6, 11: Postcard, 13: Ledger, 14: Legal,
15: Letter, 16: Letter-LEF, 17: Statement, 18: Statement-LEF,
19: Foolscap, 31: Custom sized paper, 255: Unknown (with or without)
Display the value of the total counter of the scanner.

M 21-5-021 SCANNER TOTAL COUNT DISPLAY * Display the counter value saved on the EEPROM. ✔ ✔
* Count up at the timing when a scan is completed.
Display the FB counter display of the scanner.

M 21-5-022 FB SCAN COUNT DISPLAY * Display the counter value saved on the EEPROM. ✔ ✔
* Count up at the timing when an FB scan is completed.

Display the AF counter display of the scanner.

* Display the counter value saved on the EEPROM of the AF.
* Count up on the side of the AF. The timing at which the counter value is saved on the
M 21-5-023 AF SCAN COUNT DISPLAY ✔ ✔
EEPROM of the AF is upon completion of paper output for every 5 scans and upon completion
of paper output for the final original. For example, if an original of 8 sheets is loaded and a jam
occurs with the 7th sheet, the counter value will only increase by 5.
Depending on the value configured with TM0-21-6-071 "WHITE LEVEL THRESHOLD" -01 "R",
display whether white level compensation for red is ON or OFF.
M 21-5-031 WHITE LEVEL CHECK_RED ✔ ✔
0: OFF
1: ON
Scanner
Depending on the value configured with TM0-21-6-071 "WHITE LEVEL THRESHOLD" -02 "G",
display whether white level compensation for green is ON or OFF.
M 21-5-032 WHITE LEVEL CHECK_GREEN ✔ ✔
0: OFF
1: ON
Depending on the value configured with TM0-21-6-071 "WHITE LEVEL THRESHOLD" -03 "B",
display whether white level compensation for blue is ON or OFF.
M 21-5-033 WHITE LEVEL CHECK_BLUE ✔ ✔
0: OFF
1: ON
Display the 4-digit serial no. of the color profile that has been downloaded onto the custom area
M 21-5-034 COLOR PROFILE S/N of the scanner. ✔ ✔
Display "0000" for the serial No. if the serial number has not been downloaded.
Depending on the value configured with TM0-21-6-072 "WHITE LEVEL THRESHOLD (BACK)"
-01 "R", display whether white level compensation for red is ON or OFF.
M 21-5-041 WHITE LEVEL CHECK_RED (BACK) ✔ ✔
0: OFF
1: ON
-02 "G", display whether white level compensation for green is ON or OFF.
M 21-5-042 WHITE LEVEL CHECK_GREEN (BACK) ✔ ✔
0: OFF
1: ON
-03 "B", display whether white level compensation for blue is ON or OFF.
M 21-5-043 WHITE LEVEL CHECK_BLUE (BACK) ✔ ✔
0: OFF
1: ON

M 23-5-001 STACKER SUB PADDLE COUNT Displays the stacker sub paddle count. ✔ ✔
M 23-5-002 STACKER PADDLE COUNT Displays the stacker paddle count. ✔ ✔
M 23-5-003 BOOKLET PADDLE COUNT Displays the booklet paddle count. ✔ ✔
FACE DOWN FINISHER
M 24-5-001 FDF MAIN MICON FIRMWARE VERSION Displays the version of the firmware used for the face down finisher. ✔ ✔
M 24-5-002 FDF MAIN MICON LOADER VERSION Displays the version of the loader of the face down finisher. ✔ ✔
This is the number of pages that have been ejected to the offset staple tray. It is the number of
M 24-5-003 FDF PAPER FEED PAGE COUNT ✔ ✔
pages since the last time the count was cleared.
This is the number of times that staple processing has been performed by the offset staple tray.
M 24-5-004 FDF STAPLER JOB COUNT ✔ ✔
It is the value since the last time the count was cleared.
M 24-5-005 TOTAL FDF PAPER FEED PAGE COUNT This is the total number of pages that have been ejected to the offset staple tray. ✔ ✔
This is the total number of sets of times that staple processing has been performed by the offset
M 24-5-006 TOTAL FDF STAPLER JOB COUNT ✔ ✔
staple tray.
This is the number of times that the stapler slide being used by the offset staple tray has been
FDF STAPLER SLIDE MOVEMENT
M 24-5-007 moved. ✔ ✔
COUNT
(The number of staple cable operations.)
Coin / Card vendor
Checks the coin vendor firmware version.

*If no coin vendor firmware is installed, "0.0.0" is displayed on the panel when this TM is
M 26-5-001 COIN VENDOR FIRMWARE VERSION executed. ✔ ✔
* When both the coin and key/card vendor are installed, only the version information on the
vendor side enabled with the main unit on is displayed. If disabled when the power is turned on,
"0.0.0" is displayed.
Checks the card vendor firmware version.

*If no coin vendor firmware is installed, "0.0.0" is displayed on the panel when this TM is
M 26-5-002 CARD VENDOR FIRMWARE VERSION executed. ✔ ✔
* When both the coin and key/card vendor are installed, only the version information on the
vendor side enabled with the main unit on is displayed. If disabled when the power is turned on,
"0.0.0" is displayed.

Displays the content related to the IC card set in TM0-27-3-001 "AUTHENTICATION SERVER
M 27-5-001 IC CARD CONFIG ✔ ✔
CONFIG IMPORT" or TM0-27-6-004 "IC CARD CONFIG."
This can be used to check the version of the option firmware.

M 29-5-001 HCF SH MAIN FIRMWARE VERSION ✔
* SH main firmware of the large-capacity paper feed unit

M 29-5-002 HCF SH LOADER FIRMWARE VERSION ✔
* SH loader firmware of the large-capacity paper feed unit
HCF PAPER FEED TRAY PAPER VOLUME

M 29-5-006 Displays the remaining paper (%) in the large-capacity paper feed unit. ✔
CHECK
12:
B6-LEF,13: Foolscap,
14: Ledger, 15: Legal, 16: Letter, 17: Letter-R, 18: Statement, 19: Statement-R,
Long 4,
28: C4, 29: C5, 30: C6, 31: DL-R,
M 29-5-007 HCF PAPER FEED TRAY PAPER SIZE ID ✔
32 Envelope 9 x 12 inch, 33: Envelope 10 x 13 inch,
34: No. 10 envelope 4.125 x 9.5 inch
HCF PAPER FEED TRAY PAPER WIDTH

M 29-5-008 Displays, in units of 0.1 mm, the paper width volume of the large-capacity paper feed unit. ✔
SETTING VALUE CHECK
HCF PAPER FEED TRAY PAPER WIDTH

M 29-5-009 Displays the paper guide AD value of the large-capacity paper feed unit. ✔
VR CHECK
HCF PAPER FEED TRAY GUIDE WIDTH

M 29-5-010 Large-capacity paper feed unit guide width AD value (210 mm) set with calibration ✔
AD VALUE (210 MM)

AD VALUE (297 MM)

AD VALUE (105 MM)

AD VALUE (279 MM)


AD VALUE (216 MM)

AD VALUE (108 MM)

M 30-5-001 HCS SH MAIN FIRMWARE VERSION ✔
* Large-capacity paper ejection unit

M 30-5-002 HCS SH LOADER FIRMWARE VERSION ✔
* Large-capacity paper ejection unit
HCS FU ROUTE MAINTENANCE

M 30-5-006 Displays the counter to use as the guideline for HCS FU route roller replacement. ✔
COUNTER DISPLAY
HCS FD ROUTE MAINTENANCE

M 30-5-007 Displays the counter to use as the guideline for HCS FD route roller replacement. ✔
COUNTER DISPLAY
Displays the total of the values of "TM0-30-5-006 HCS FU ROUTE MAINTENANCE COUNTER
HCS ALL ROUTES MAINTENANCE
M 30-5-008 DISPLAY" and ✔
COUNTER DISPLAY
"TM0-30-5-007 HCS FD ROUTE MAINTENANCE COUNTER DISPLAY".
Postscript option
Displays whether the activation card is activated or not activated. If activated, "1" is displayed; if
M 31-5-001 ACTIVATION CARD STATUS not activated, "0." ✔ ✔
* Executing this TM requires an activation card to be installed.
Security Option
Checks the security firmware version.

* W.X.Y.Z. Example) version 123.456.789.123 is displayed as "123456789123".
M 32-5-001 SECURITY FIRMWARE VERSION ✔
* When you execute this test mode, "0.0.0.0" is displayed on the panel if no security options are
installed.
M 33-5-001 MM FIRMWARE VERSION CHECK Confirm the version of the mail finisher firmware. ✔
M 33-5-002 MM LOADER VERSION CHECK Confirm the version of the mail finisher loader. ✔
M 33-5-006 MM MAIL ITEM COUNT DISPLAY Displays the count of mail items. ✔

M 33-5-011 MM TEMPERATURE DISPLAY Displays the temperature of the temperature sensor. ✔
Perfect Binder
M 34-5-001 PB FIRMWARE VERSION CHECK Displays the firmware version provided by notification from the PB. ✔
M 34-5-002 PB LOADER PROGRAM VERSION CHECK Displays the firmware version provided by notification from the PB. ✔
M 34-5-006 TOTAL PB BOUND BOOKLET COUNT Displays the total number of bound booklets. This is the total number of ejected booklets. ✔
TOTAL PB TRANSPORTED SHEET Displays the total number of transported sheets.

M 34-5-007 ✔
COUNT This is the total number of sheets that have passed the body ejection sensor.
Displays the total number of covers that have been fed from the cover inserter.
TOTAL PB COVER INSERTER PAPER
M 34-5-008 (This is the total number of covers that have passed by the cover passage detection sensor.) ✔
FEED COUNT
Replace the cover roller when this count reaches 200,000 covers.
PB GLUE AMOUNT UPPER LIMIT Temperature detection

M 34-5-011 ✔
DETECTION (THERMISTOR) The displayed value is 10 times the temperature.
PB GLUE AMOUNT LOWER LIMIT Temperature detection

M 34-5-012 ✔
PB GLUE ROLLER TEMPERATURE Temperature detection

M 34-5-013 ✔
PB GLUE TANK TEMPERATURE Temperature detection

M 34-5-014 ✔
Displays the measured thickness data, which is the result of executing "TM0-34-3-003 PB
PB BODY THICKNESS MEASUREMENT
M 34-5-021 BODY THICKNESS MEASUREMENT". Thickness (unit: 0.1 mm) ✔
RESULT OUTPUT (0.1 MM)
The displayed value is 10 times the value in millimeters.
PB BODY THICKNESS MEASUREMENT Displays the measured thickness data, which is the result of executing "TM0-34-3-003 PB
M 34-5-022 ✔
RESULT OUTPUT (PULSE) BODY THICKNESS MEASUREMENT". Thickness (unit: pulse value)

Typ Test Test mode Default Minimu Maximu

No. Type Step Unit Description How to Use Remarks FW GD
e mode name Setting m m
PMS section
Sets GMT (time zone).

*GMT can be set from the introduction wizard.
1: GMT-12:00, 2: GMT-11:00, 3: GMT-10:00, 4: GMT-09:00,
Domestic
5: GMT-08:00, 6: GMT-07:00, 7: GMT-06:00, 8: GMT-05:00,
: 28
9: GMT-04:00, 10: GMT-03:30, 11: GMT-03:00, 12: GMT-02:00, When the user made wrong setting
GMT TIME ZONE Overseas
E 01-6-001 － - 1 33 1 - 13: GMT-01:00, 14:GMT 00:00 (Greenwich Mean Time: London) , from the introduction wizard or when ✔ ✔
SELECTION : 14 intentionally changing the GMT
15: GMT+01:00, 16: GMT+02:00, 17: GMT+03:00, 18:GMT+03:30,
China
19: GMT+04:00, 20: GMT+04:30, 21: GMT+05:00, 22: GMT+05:30,
: 27
23:GMT+05:45, 24: GMT+06:00, 25: GMT+06:30, 26: GMT+07:00,
27: GMT+08:00, 28:GMT+09:00 (Tokyo, Seoul), 29: GMT+09:30,
30: GMT+10:00, 31: GMT+11:00, 32:GMT+12:00, 33: GMT+13:00
JOB DATA When changing the number of Setting values are

Set the number of overwriting at the time of "Overwrite erasure remaing
E 01-6-002 DELETE NUMBER － - 1 1 3 1 Times overwriting at the time of "Overwrite applied when the ✔ ✔
data". erasure remaing data". power is rebooted.
SET
SELECTED DATA When changing the number of Setting values are

Set the number of times of overwriting at the time of "Overwrite erasure all
E 01-6-003 DELETE NUMBER － - 1 1 3 1 Times overwriting at the time of "Overwrite applied when the ✔ ✔
data". erasure all data". power is rebooted.
SET
Sets the network link mode.

0: Auto
NETWORK LINK 1: 10Full
When the setting made by the user
E 01-6-011 MODE － - 0 0 5 1 - 2: 10Half ✔ ✔
function is unknown
SELECTION 3: 100Full
4: 100Half
5: 1000Full
Specifies whether to enable the standard MIB of the SNMP communication.

If TM0-01-6-015 "SNMP COMMUNICATION SELECT
(PRIVATE)" is 0, this item is automatically set to OFF even if TM0-01-6-014
"SNMP COMMUNICATION SELECT
SNMP
(STANDARD)" is other than 0. When switching the access privilege
COMMUNICATION
E 01-6-014 － - 1 0 2 1 - *The setting of this TM is enabled only when the SNMP is set to ON in the for the inquiry for the standard MIB of ✔ ✔
SELECT the SNMP communication
administrator menu.
(STANDARD)
0: OFF (Prohibiting the acquisition of the MIB information by SNMP to
address the market where the acquisition of external data is prohibited.)
1: Read Only (Allowing Read by SNMP from the standard MIB information)
2: Read/Write (Allowing Read/Write of data by SNMP)


Specifies whether to enable the PrivateMIB of the SNMP communication.

If TM0-01-6-014 "SNMP COMMUNICATION SELECT (STANDARD)" is 0,
this item is automatically set to OFF even if TM0-01- 6-015 "SNMP
SNMP COMMUNICATION SELECT (PRIVATE)" is other than 0.
When switching the access privilege
COMMUNICATION *The setting of this TM is enabled only when the SNMP is set to ON in the
E 01-6-015 － - 1 0 2 1 - for the inquiry for the PrivateMIB of ✔ ✔
SELECT administrator menu. the SNMP communication
(PRIVATE) 0: OFF (Prohibiting the acquisition of the MIB information by SNMP to
address the market where the acquisition of external data is prohibited.) 1:
Read Only (Allowing Read by SNMP from the PrivateMIB information)
2: Read/Write (Allowing Read/Write of data by SNMP)
Switches the count-up timing of the SNMP information.

・jmJobImpressionsCompleted (the number of prints by job)
・jmJobImpressionsPerCopyRequested (the planned
SNMP COUNT
number of prints of the job) When switching the count-up timing
E 01-6-016 TIMING － - 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
*The setting of this TM is enabled only when the SNMP is set to ON in the of the SNMP information
SELECTION
administrator menu.
0: Count up when discharging from the main unit.
1: Count up when discharging from each post-processing device.
Specifies whether to allow or prohibit FTP users to use/ from using

The setting values are
FTP USER anonymous. When prohibiting a user using a
reflected when the
E 01-6-022 ANONYMOUS － - 0 0 1 1 - 0: Allow (The following function regarding FTP is available.) vulnerable FTP port from using ✔ ✔
normal mode is
ENABLE 1: Prohibit (The following function regarding FTP is unavailable.) anonymous
entered.
・A prn file is directly sent to a printer via FTP
Email send
1 0 0 1 1 - SSL v3 has
setting vulnerabilities, so we
Specifies whether to enable SSL v3.0 in the encrypted connection with the strongly recommend
When it is necessary to use SSL v3.0
server. that you avoid using it
E 01-6-023 SSL V3.0 ENABLE in the encrypted connection with the ✔ ✔
0: Prohibit with the CVE-2014-
server
1: Allow 3566. Therefore, there
normally is no need to
2 RA function 0 0 1 1 - use SSL v3.


Specifies the availability of the USB port.

Regardless of the setting of this TM, connection with an IC card reader or Note that in [Home
Domestic
scanner, and firmware download is possible. Screen Customization]
:1 - [Display Setting] of
*This TM makes only the TM number be displayed on the panel. (The name
Overseas the administrator menu,
is not displayed.)
USB PORT :0 When changing the availability of the if the USB of
E 01-6-026 － - 0 1 1 - 0: Prohibit (The following functions regarding the USB port is unavailable.) ✔ ✔
ENABLE China USB port this TM is set to "0", no
1: Allow (The following functions regarding the USB port is available.) function button (from
: Refer to * in
・USB memory print Copy through USB) is
the
・Scan To USB displayed on the home
description.
・Export of CSV files screen.
* Mailing log file can be used even if "0: prohibited"
Specifies the availability of the USB port.

Regardless of the setting of this TM, connection with an IC card reader or When changing the availability of the
scanner, and firmware download is possible. USB port
*This TM makes only the TM number be displayed on the panel. (The name Note that in [Home Screen
Customization] - [Display Setting] of
USB PORT is not displayed.) 0: Prohibit (The following functions regarding the USB port
E 01-6-026 － - 1 0 1 1 - the administrator menu, if ✔
ENABLE is unavailable.) the USB of this TM is set to “0”, no
1: Allow (The following functions regarding the USB port is available.) function button (from Copy through
・USB memory print USB) is displayed on the home
・Scan To USB screen.
・Export of CSV files
Adjusts the waiting time from when a USB memory is set for PMS until when
the PMS recognizes the USB memory.
The waiting time can be set in seconds.
When establishing communication
When set to 0, there is no waiting time. When 1 or more, the USB memory
USB DETECT with the USB memory takes too long
E 01-6-027 － 0 1 1 - 1 sec will be recognized after the specified waiting time has passed. ✔ ✔
WAITING TIME for the USB memory to be
This setting value indicates the waiting time from when the USB device recognized
driver recognizes the USB mass storage device until when the
communication in the SCSI layer is performed. A small waiting time may
cause some USB memory not to be recognized.


Changing this setting switches the file formats when information is

downloaded (including export) and imported in the CSV format.
Functions that support the CSV format:
・Accounting information
・User setting information
・Charge count
Domestic
・Details count
:1
CSV FILE ・Others When changing the file format
Overseas
E 01-6-031 ENCODE － - 0 1 1 - *Note that the defaults differ between the Domestic (destination) and the (character code) when importing or ✔ ✔
:0 exporting a CSV file
SELECTION Overseas (destination).
China
*Windows-31J: This is the character code that Microsoft and OEM vendors
:0
of MS-DOS have uniquely extended Shift-JIS. This code is also called
Microsoft Code Page 932.
* This TM is not displayed in the menu. Only when the TM number is input,
this test shall be executable.
0: Unicode (UTF-8)
1: Windows-31J
Specifies the method of encoding the header of the sender/receiver when

When changing the method of
sending a scan file by e-mail.
MAIL HEADER encoding the header of the
E 01-6-032 － - 0 0 1 1 - * This TM is not displayed in the menu. ✔ ✔
ENCODE sender/receiver when sending a scan
0: UTF-8 encoding is not performed. file by e-mail
1: UTF-8 encoding is performed.
Specifies the method of encoding the attachment name when sending a

When changing the method of
scan file by e-mail.
MAIL FILE encoding the attachment name when
E 01-6-033 － - 0 0 1 1 - * This TM is not displayed in the menu. ✔ ✔
ENCODE sending a scan file by
0: UTF-8 encoding is not performed. e-mail
1: UTF-8 encoding is performed.
REMOTE
CONTROL When switching the Enable/ Disable
E 01-6-041 － - 0 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
FUNCTION of the RA function
SELECTION


Specifies whether to send the count information of the RA function.

*When the TM0-01-6-041 "REMOTE CONTROL
FUNCTION SELECTION" is changed from [Disable] to [Enable], this setting
returns to the default.
* This TM can be executed only when TM0-01-6-041 "REMOTE CONTROL
FUNCTION SELECTION" is When switching the availability of
REMOTE COUNT
E 01-6-042 － - 0 0 1 1 - enabled. sending the count information in the ✔ ✔
INFORMATION
When Enable, this TM is displayed in the menu. Execution by inputting the RA function
TM number shall also be possible.
When Disable, this TM is not displayed in the menu. Execution by inputting
the TM number shall also be unavailable.
0: Disable
1: Enable
RA function
Sets the time (hour) to send the count information when TM0-01-6-042
"REMOTE COUNT INFORMATION" is set
to [Enable].
*Send the information at this time (hour) combined with the minutes set in
TM0-01-6-044 "REMOTE COUNT INFO TRANS SET (MIN)."
FUNCTION SELECTION" is changed from [Disable] to [Enable], this setting When setting the transmission time
REMOTE COUNT
returns to the default. (hour) with TM0-01-
E 01-6-043 INFO TRANS SET － - 0 0 23 1 Hour ✔ ✔
*Only when both TM0-01-6-041 "REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTION 6-042 "REMOTE COUNT
(HOUR) INFORMATION" set to [Enable]
SELECTION" and TM0-01-6-042 "REMOTE
COUNT INFORMATION" are enabled, this TM shall be executable.
When both TM0-01-6-041 "REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTION SELECTION"
and TM0-01-6-042 "REMOTE
COUNT INFORMATION" are enabled, this TM is displayed in the menu.
Execution by inputting the TM number shall also be possible.
In other cases, this TM is not displayed in the menu. Execution by inputting


RA function
Specifies the time (minutes) to send the count information when TM0-01-6-
042 "REMOTE COUNT INFORMATION" is set to [Enable].
*Send the information at this time (minutes) combined with TM0-01-6-043
"REMOTE COUNT INFO TRANS SET (HOUR)
*When the TM0-01-6-041 "RA function remote management setting" is
changed from [Disable] to [Enable], this setting returns to the default. When setting the transmission time
REMOTE COUNT
*Only when both TM0-01-6-041 "REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTION (minutes) with TM0-01-
E 01-6-044 INFO TRANS SET － - 0 0 59 1 Minutes ✔ ✔
SELECTION" and TM0-01-6-042 "REMOTE 6-042 "REMOTE COUNT
(MIN) INFORMATION" set to [Enable]
COUNT INFORMATION" are enabled, this TM shall be executable.
When both TM0-01-6-041 "REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTION SELECTION"
and TM0-01-6-042 "REMOTE
COUNT INFORMATION" are enabled, this TM is displayed in the menu.
Execution by inputting the TM number shall also be possible.
RA function
Sets whether to send the ink volume information when an error occurs due
to an empty ink cartridge.
REMOTE INK When switching the availability of
* This TM can be executed only when TM0-01-6-041 "REMOTE CONTROL
E 01-6-045 VOLUME － - 0 0 1 1 - sending the ink volume information in ✔ ✔
FUNCTION SELECTION" is enabled. the RA function
INFORMATION
When Enable, this TM is displayed in the menu. Execution by inputting the
0: Disable
1: Enable
RA function
Specifies the connected time (time period before timeout occurs) of the
communication line between the main unit (WEB transmission module) and
the management server from when the communication with the
management server was established.
When changing the timeout setting of
REMOTE *When the TM0-01-6-041 "REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTION SELECTION"
the communication with the
E 01-6-046 COMMUNICATION － - 1 1 9 1 Minutes is changed from [Disable] to [Enable], this setting returns to the default. ✔ ✔
management server in the RA
TIMEOUT (MIN) * This TM can be executed only when TM0-01-6-041 "REMOTE CONTROL function
FUNCTION SELECTION" is enabled.
When Enable, this TM is displayed in the menu. Execution by inputting the


[UI_ID] PN-439 [UI_ID]

RA function PN-TE-013
Displays the soft
Specifies the comment text to attach when sending the information on the
keyboard.
main unit to the management server. Up to 60 single-byte alphanumeric
Even if the [Cancel]
characters can be input. This item can be left blank. button is pressed, a
* This TM can be executed only when TM0-01-6-041 "REMOTE CONTROL confirmation window for
REMOTE When attaching a comment to the
FUNCTION SELECTION" is enabled. discarding the inputs is
E 01-6-047 TRANSMIT － - - - - - - main unit information to be sent in the ✔ ✔
When Enable, this TM is displayed in the menu. Execution by inputting the not displayed.
COMMENT RA function
TM number shall also be possible. (Different from the
normal mode) The [OK]
button is always
enabled. (Sames as
*When executing the TM, the comment set at the previous execution is the setting items that
displayed. (Blank for the first-time execution) allow 0 characters in
the normal mode)
Specifies whether to enable the REv information for the RA function.

* This TM is not displayed in the menu. Only when the TM number is input,
REMOTE REV this test shall be executable. When switching the Enable/ Disable
E 01-6-051 FUCNTION ON/ － - 0 0 1 1 - The menu name shall not be displayed on the execution screen. (To not be of the Rev information in the RA ✔ ✔
OFF known what test is conducted) function
0: Disable
1: Enable
RA function
Specifies whether to send the REv information (error information, job
record).
* This TM can be executed only when both TM0-01-6- 051 "REMOTE REV
When switching the availability of
REMOTE ERROR FUCNTION ON/OFF" and TM0-01-6-041 "REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTION
sending the Rev information (error
E 01-6-052 HISTORY － - 0 0 1 1 - SELECTION" are enabled. ✔ ✔
information, job record) in the RA
INFORMATION When both TM0-01-6-051 "REMOTE REV FUCNTION ON/OFF" and TM0- function
01-6-041 "REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTION SELECTION" are enabled, this
TM is displayed in the menu. Execution by inputting the TM number shall
also be possible.
0: Disable
1: Enable


Selects an event of the REv information in the RA function.

*Only when TM0-01-6-051 "REMOTE REV FUCNTION
ON/OFF" is enabled, this TM shall be executable. When Enable, this TM is
displayed in the menu. Execution by inputting the TM number shall also be
possible.
REMOTE REV
When disabled, it will not appear in the menu list of this menu. Execution by When changing the number of events
EVENT
E 01-6-053 － - 0 0 1 1 - inputting the TM number shall also be unavailable. of the Rev information update in the ✔ ✔
EXTENSION RA function
0: Normal
SELECTION
(An event is made to occur when: the power is turned on; an error is
occurred; and a manual event is set.)
1: Extension
(An event is made to occur when: the power is turned on; an error is
occurred; a manual event is set; and print operation starts.)
Makes a manual event occur by inputting and determining the three four-
digit event codes of the REv information of the RA function.
REMOTE When changing the manual event
E 01-6-054 MANUAL EVENT － - 0 0 9999 1 - timing of the Rev information update ✔ ✔
displayed in the menu. Execution by inputting the TM number shall also be in the RA function
CODE1 SETTING
possible.
CODE2 SETTING
possible.
CODE3 SETTING
possible.


Switches the setting of authentication for the LDAP server in external server
authentication.
AUTHENTICATIO When changing the authentication
0: "Connection method: Non SSL/TLS; Authentication method: SASL;
E 01-6-061 N SERVER － - 0 0 1 1 - method (security setting) of the ✔ ✔
Security setting: Encryption" external server authentication
CONNECTION
1: "Connection method: Non SSL/TLS; Authentication method: SASL;
Security setting: Signature"
Switches whether to perform user authentication when outputting an

unauthorized job.
When "Allow" is selected, an OpenPrint job can be output without user
authentication.
UNAUTHORIZED * This TM is not displayed in the menu. It can be executed only by inputting
When switching the availability of
E 01-6-063 JOB OUTPUT － - 0 0 1 1 - the TM number using the numeric keypad, and the test name is not ✔
outputting an unauthorized job.
ON/OFF displayed in the execution screen. (To not to be known what TM is
executed.)
0: Prohibit (An OpenPrint job is not output)

1: Allow (An OpenPrint job is output)
When the staple setting is other than OFF, switch whether implementing the
offset sheet discharge operation.
STAPLE-OFFSET
E 01-6-064 － - 0 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
EJECT SELECT In the case of the staple setting is other than OFF and ejecting to Multi-
finisher:
0: Set offset eject setting = [per sorting break]
1: Set offset eject setting = [OFF]
Domestic
:1 Specifies whether to display the "Supply stock management" item in the When switching the display or hide
SUPPLY STOCK
Overseas administrator menu. the setting for the "Supply stock
E 01-6-073 DISPLAY － - 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
:0 0: Not display management" in the administrator
SELECTION menu.
China 1: Display
:0


Displays or hides the [Storage] button in the [Home Screen Customization] Note that in [Home
in the administrator menu. Screen Customization]
Domestic - [Display Setting] of
0: Hide -> The [Storage] button is hidden. All the folder functions becomes
:1 the administrator
BOX FUNCTION "Disable."
Overseas menu, if the storage of
E 01-6-075 DISPLAY － - 0 1 1 - 1: Display -> The [Storage] button is displayed. When disabling the folder function ✔ ✔
:1 this TM is set to "0", no
SELECTION *This TM makes only the TM number be displayed on the panel. (The name function button (from
China
is hidden.) Copy through USB) is
:0
0: Hide displayed on the home
1: Display screen.
Switches the Auto Shutoff function.

0: Hide
Domestic The "Auto Power-OFF Setting" is not displayed in the administrator menu.
:0 Operation is performed with the Auto Shutoff function set to "Disable."
AUTO SHUTOFF When restricting the display of the
Overseas Regardless of the setting value, "Enable" or "Disable", of the Auto Shutoff in
E 01-6-076 DISPLAY － - 0 1 1 - "Auto Shutoff" function in the ✔ ✔
:1 the administrator menu, operation is performed with this function set to administrator menu
SELECTION
China "Disable."
:1 1: The "Auto Power-OFF Setting" is displayed in the administrator menu.
The "Enable" or "Disable" button of the Auto Shutoff setting and the
transition time can be set.
Volatile save (The

Sets the screen shot function to Enable or Disable.
SCREEN SHOT To use the screen shot function, set default value is
E 01-6-077 － - 0 0 1 1 - 0: Disable ✔ ✔
ON/OFF "1 = Enable." restored by turning the
1: Enable power off)
Switches the "Cloud Linking Setting" on the administrator menu as well as

Use this when you receive requests
switches whether the cloud function is displayed. When this is enabled, the
CLOUD LINK from users to print data from cloud
E 01-6-078 － - 0 0 1 1 - setting screen and the function listed above are displayed. ✔
DISPLAY SWITCH storage services or to save scanned
0: Disable (hide) data.
1: Enable (display)
Specify whether to enable the archive saving function.

* This test mode only displays the test mode number on the panel. (The
name is hidden.)
ENABLE/DISABLE * The setting of this test mode is only enabled when TM0-31-6-001
E 01-6-079 － - 1 0 1 1 - ✔
ARCHIVE SAVING "EXTERNAL CI CONNECTION
SETTING" is set to "1: Connected".
0: Disable (Make it impossible to execute the archive saving function.)
1: Enable (Make it possible to execute the archive saving function.)


Specifies whether to display the charge count information in the

administrator menu.
When set to OFF, the charge count cannot be displayed, printed, or saved
in a USB device.
Sellout When set to ON, the charge count is displayed, printed, and saved in a USB
:0 device in the count method in accordance with the specified [Type].
Domestic *For details, see the "Counter specifications." When changing the availability of
displaying the "Charge count"
COUNT CHARGE Charge 0: OFF
E 01-6-081 － - 0 8 1 - information in the administrator ✔ ✔
SELECTION :1 1: ON (TypeA) menu, and count method when the
Overseas/ 2: ON (TypeB) information is displayed
China Charge 3: ON (TypeC)
:2 4: ON (TypeD)
5: ON (TypeE)
6: ON (TypeF)
7: ON (TypeG)
8: ON (TypeH)
If you set this to "Display", "Mail Creation Log Settings" will be displayed on
the administrator menu.
DISPLAY MAIL If you set this to "Hide", "Mail Creation Log Settings" will not be displayed on
When you want to switch whether
CREATION LOG the administrator menu. * If [0: Hide] is selected for the setting value of this
E 01-6-082 － - 1 0 1 1 - "Mail Creation Log Settings" is ✔
SETTINGS test mode, the log accumulation setting accessed with "Mail Creation Log displayed on the administrator menu
BUTTON Settings" on the administrator menu will be changed to "OFF" (overwrite).
0: Hide
1: Display
Switch whether to reset the thickness setting of the paper type when the
ENABLE/DISABLE power supply turns ON.
E 01-6-083 PAPER FEED － - 0 0 1 1 - ■ Options ✔ ✔
SETTING RESET 0: Do not reset the thickness setting of the paper type (conventional control)
1: Reset the thickness setting of the paper type
ENABLE/ DISABLE When you want to switch settings so

Specify whether to perform consecutive printing for booklets.
JOB that staple processing can be
E 01-6-085 － - 1 0 1 1 - ■ Options ✔ ✔
CONCATENATION performed without continuing to use
0: Disable consecutive job printing 1: Enable consecutive job printing the settings from the previous job
WITH BOOKLETS


Switch printing count at "black & white count" or "full color count" for K + Gr,
Gr when the color mode is monochrome or auto.
When changing the count of printing
PRINT COUNT
E 01-6-090 － - 1 0 1 1 - of K + Gr, Gr in "black & white" / "full ✔
SELECT K+Gr/Gr Counts printing with K + Gr, Gr: color".
0: Counts as "black & white"prints.
1: Counts as "full color"prints.
0: Mono-color (default), 1: Color

When 0: Mono-color print is handled as mono-color print.
Domestic
Even if color print is prohibited, mono-color print is available.
:0
The count limit of print allows the mono-color print count to be added to the When changing whether mono- color
MONOCOLOR Overseas
E 01-6-091 － - 0 1 1 - mono-color print count. print is counted as mono- color print ✔ ✔
LIMIT SELECTION :1 or color print
When 1: Mono-color print is handled as color print. When color print is
China
prohibited, mono-color print is unavailable.
:1
The count limit of print allows the mono-color print count to be added to the
color print count.
Specify whether to use color mode: indigo blue. When you specify [1: Allow],
When you want to switch between
ENABLE INDIGO "Enable Indigo Blue" is displayed in the administrator menu.
E 01-6-093 － - 0 0 1 1 - using and not using color mode: ✔
BLUE 0: Prohibit indigo blue depending on the user
1: Allow
Adjusts the time to blink the icon of remaining ink volume indication on the
panel.
Setting value * 5% = Remaining ink volume for the icon to start blinking When adjusting the time to blink the
INK VOLUME For example, with set to "2," the icon starts blinking when the remaining ink icon on the panel when the actual ink
E 01-6-095 1 K 2 2 5 1 0.05 ✔ ✔
DISPLAY ADJUST volume becomes "2 * 5% = 10%." consumption does not match the
For example, with set to "5," the icon starts blinking when the remaining ink remaining volume indication.
volume becomes "5 * 5% = 25%."
The type of setting value indicates the ink icon (ink color).
E 2 C 2 2 5 1 0.05 ✔ ✔
E 3 M(R,B) 2 2 5 1 0.05 ✔ ✔
E 4 Y 2 2 5 1 0.05 ✔ ✔


Sets the choice of paper type to be displayed or hidden.

For example, if the setting value type "U1" is set to "1 = Display," "U1" is When setting the paper type to be
PAPER FEED
displayed for the paper type. displayed or hidden for the choice of
E 01-6-101 DISPLAY 1 U1 0 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
0: Hide the feed control setting of the paper
SELECTION tray
1: Display
The type of the setting value indicates the paper type.
E 2 U2 0 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 U3 0 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 U4 0 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 U5 0 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
Domestic
:1
Overseas
E 6 LW Paper 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
:0
China
:0
Domestic
:1
Overseas
E 7 Rough Paper 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
:0
China
:0
When "1: Display" is selected, "Slow printing mode" is displayed on the

Domestic
printing screen. This TM does not
:1
SLOW PRINTING "0: Do not display", "Slow printing mode" is not displayed on the printing When switching display / non-display affect other than the
Overseas
E 01-6-103 MODE DISPLAY － - 0 1 1 - screen. of "Slow printing mode" button on ongoing printing ✔ ✔
:1 printing screen. screen.
SELECT
China
0: Hide
:1
1: Display


Domestic
Switch display / non-display of the confirmation screen for the Box folder When displaying a confirmation
:0
SAVED FOLDER where the number of files reaches the upper limit. screen that informing the upper limit
Overseas
E 01-6-105 JOB MAX － - 0 1 1 - when you select a Box folder where ✔ ✔
:0 the number of files reaches the upper
DISPLAY SELECT 0: Hide
China limit.
1: Display
:0
Domestic When set to "1: Display," "Envelope Processing Setting" is displayed in the
:0 administrator menu.
ENVELOPE FEED When displaying or hiding the
Overseas When set to "0: Display," "Envelope Processing Setting" is not displayed in
E 01-6-111 SETTING BUTN － - 0 1 1 - "Envelope Feed Options" button in ✔ ✔
:1 the administrator menu. the administrator menu
DISPLAY
China 0: Hide
:1 1: Display
Domestic When set this TM to "1 = Display," "Feed Control" is displayed under the
:0 "Envelope Processing Setting" in the admin menu.
ENVELOPE FEED When displaying or hiding the "Feed
Overseas When set this TM to "0 = Hide," "Feed Control" is not displayed under the
E 01-6-112 CONTROL BUTN － - 0 1 1 - Control" item under the "Envelope ✔ ✔
:1 "Envelope Processing Setting" in the admin menu. Feed Options" in the admin menu
DISPLAY
China 0: Hide
:1 1: Display
SWITCH
Switches the interface that is used in linking with an external system. 0: Used when you want to change the
EXTERNAL
E 01-6-121 － - 0 0 2 1 - Paper cutting I/F device that is connected by way of ✔ ✔
SYSTEM LINKING external system linking
1: General-purpose MPS I/F (Brocade) 2: Browser linking (SKYCOM, CEC)
I/F
POST-
Switch between connecting and not connecting a general-purpose post
PROCESSING Used when you want to connect a
processing device.
E 01-6-131 DEVICE － - 0 0 1 1 - general-purpose post processing ✔
0: Not connected device
CONNECTION
1: Connected (signal wire control method)
SETTING


Used when you want to connect a

Set the paper pitch when an ejection destination other than the multifunction general-purpose post processing
finisher, the staple offset unit, the large-capacity paper ejection unit, the device and set the paper pitch to a
POST-
mailing finisher, or the case binding finisher has been specified. value that conforms to the post
PROCESSING
E 01-6-136 － - 0 0 60000 1 0.1ms This test mode setting value becomes the actual paper pitch. The printer processing device ✔
DEVICE PAPER Used when you connect a general-
operates with the largest paper pitch after comparing the standard paper
PITCH SETTING purpose post processing device and
pitch, the paper pitch that can be set for each paper type (standard paper
find that post processing cannot be
pitch + compensating data), and the paper pitch set with this test mode.
performed due to the paper pitch
When outputting image data from RIP, if the memory area has sufficient free
INTERNAL RIP space, the image data are saved in the memory.
To increase the performance of RIP,
E 01-6-141 IMAGE MEMORY － - 1 0 1 1 - If not sufficient space, the data are saved in the HDD. 0: Disable 1: Enable ✔ ✔
set 1 for this item.
SAVE ON *1: When set to Enable, make sure to specify an appropriate value (400 MB
or more is recommended) for the internal RIP image memory size.
INTERNAL RIP
To increase the performance of RIP,
E 01-6-142 MEMORY AREA － - 400 0 10000 1 Mbyte Sets the maximum size of the memory area that is used by RIP. ✔ ✔
increase this value.
SIZE
INTERNAL RIP
Sets the maximum size of the memory area where image data output from To increase the performance of RIP
E 01-6-143 IMAGE MEMORY － - 600 0 10000 1 Mbyte ✔ ✔
the RIP engine are saved. processing, increase this value.
SIZE
To increase the performance of RIP

INTERNAL RIP processing, change this value.
Compresses Packbits when outputting image data from the RIP engine to (Reference)
IMAGE
E 01-6-144 － - 0 0 1 1 - the memory. Which one is faster, Not compress or ✔ ✔
COMPRESSION Compress, depends on the content
0: Not compress 1: Compress
ON (MEMORY) of job data or system configuration
(CPU, HDD).
To increase the performance of RIP

processing, change this value.
Which one is faster, Not compress or
INTERNAL RIP Compress, depends on the content
Compresses Packbits when outputting image data from the RIP engine to
IMAGE of job data or system configuration.
E 01-6-145 － - 0 0 1 1 - the HDD. ✔ ✔
COMPRESSION (Reference)
0: Not compress 1: Compress Which one is faster, Not compress or
ON (HDD)
Compress, depends on the content
of job data or system configuration
(CPU, HDD).


Image Adjustment
Sets ON or OFF for the connection compensation process. With "0: Volatile save (The
CONNECT
Connection process ON," the connection compensation process is enabled. When analyzing the tone, image, and default value is
E 02-6-001 PROCESS － - 0 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
0: Connection process ON ink droplet. restored by turning the
SELECTION power off)
1: Connection process OFF
Sets the print position fixing mode. When set to "1: Fixing mode ON," the
Volatile save (The
FIXED PRINT image data are lined up from the left end in the nozzle column. The offset
When analyzing the tone, image, and default value is
E 02-6-002 POSITION － - 0 0 1 1 - setting is disabled. ✔ ✔
ink droplet. restored by turning the
SELECTION 0: Fixing mode OFF power off)
1: Fixing mode ON
Sets the density compensation. When set to "0: Density compensation ON,"
Volatile save (The
HEAD EDGE the density is compensated
default value is
E 02-6-003 DENSITY ON/OFF － - 0 0 1 1 - based on the setting value of the head edge density compensation. When analyzing the tone and image. ✔ ✔
restored by turning the
SELECTION 0: Density compensation ON power off)
1: Density compensation OFF
IMAGE
Adjusts the image elongation & shrinkage in the subscanning direction
E 02-6-005 EXPANSION － - 1000 960 1040 1 0.001 When analyzing the tone and image. ✔ ✔
(transfer direction).
CORRECTION
PAPER FEED
TRAY IMAGE Parameter to align the centers of the image and paper Increasing the value
E 02-6-006 － - 0 -100 100 1 0.1mm When analyzing the tone and image. ✔ ✔
CENTER MASK misaligns the image to the right.
OFF
Value to be compared with the total count and for I001 "Maintenance call" to
be output
To notify when to perform
MAINTENANCE 10000 When the counter reaches "The TM setting * 10000," I001 "Maintenance
E 04-6-001 － - 0 0 9999 1 maintenance, set the number of ✔ ✔
CALL SETTING sheets call" is issued. sheets to notify.
When the TM setting is "0," I001 "Maintenance call" is
not issued.
If the power supply is turned off with "1: ON" set, the power turns off with the
mechanical condition (position) remaining the same. At the time of maintenance, a
service engineer uses the test mode Volatile save (The
MAINTENANCE This applies to the following mechanical parts:
to create a desired mechanical default value is
E 04-6-002 POWER OFF － - 0 0 1 1 - ・Ink pan ✔ ✔
condition and restored by turning the
SELECTION ・Transfer belt unit maintains this condition when the power off)
0: OFF power is off.
1: ON


CHARGE COUNT Switches the count-up timing of the charge count.

When switching the count-up timing
E 04-6-003 TIMING － - 1 0 1 1 - 0: Count up when discharging from the main unit. ✔ ✔
of the charge count.
SELECTION 1: Count up when discharging from each post- processing device.
When performing continuous print by

intermittently transmitting jobs (When
jobs are intermittently transmitted,
PRINT JOB STOP stopping/starting print takes time,
Sets the delay time before stopping the print process. Adjustable in the
E 04-6-004 TIMING DELAY － - 0 0 60 1 sec causing the downtime to increase. ✔ ✔
range from 0 to 60 seconds. Delaying the completion timing of
SETTING
print
stop can eliminate the downtime
before print starts.
Specifies whether to display units that are not available for use, and the
error count before it is displayed.
When the setting value is changed, the error count is cleared. (The count is
reset to 0 and counting is restarted.) (*1)
0: Not display units that are not available for use Use this not to display units that are
1 - 5: Set the error count (number of error occurrences) for units that are not available for use, or
DISABLED UNIT
E 04-6-005 － - 3 0 5 1 Times not available for use to be displayed (*2) increase or decrease the number of ✔ ✔
DISPLAY SELECT error occurrences to display units that
*1 Notes on changing the setting value
Because the error count is reset to 0, even if units indicated as "not are not available for use.
available for use" exist, all the units will be operational.
*2 For details on the count of error occurrences, refer to "Printer Main Unit,"
"Machine Infor", and "Connection Options/Status" in the "Function
Specifications."
When there are no staples:

NO STAPLES 0: A no staples error is displayed even if the job does not require staples. When you want to change the timing
E 04-6-007 ERROR DISPLAY － - 0 0 1 1 - (The error is displayed upon the completion of the job.) with which the no staples error is ✔ ✔
SETTING 1: A no staples error is only displayed when the job requires staples. displayed
(The error is displayed prior to the execution of the job.)
MECHANISM
1 Lock 800 100 20000 1 ms ✔
OPERATION
COMPLETION Set the time to wait from the releasing of the solenoid by way of the Used when making adjustments for
E 04-6-008 WAIT TIME FOR open/close operation of the front cover lock solenoid to the start of reading solenoid and mechanism operation
FRONT COVER with the U-shaped sensor for lock plate orientation monitoring. defects
LOCK DRIVE
2 Unlock 800 100 20000 1 ms ✔
CONTROL


Used in situations such as when

NUMBER OF making adjustments for operation
FRONT COVER defects in the front cover lock
Set the number of times to automatically retry the unlocking or locking of the solenoid mechanism. Also used in
LOCK DRIVE
E 04-6-009 － - 5 1 20 1 Times front cover when the front cover lock operation is defective due to the situations such as when ✔
CONTROL implementing temporary
operation of the front cover lock solenoid.
OPERATION countermeasures up to part
RETRIES replacement in the event of operation
defects.
Enables or disables the belt profile.

BELT PROFILE When checking the effectiveness of
E 04-6-011 － - 1 0 1 1 - 0: Disable ✔ ✔
ON/OFF the tone and profile
1: Enable
Sets the belt profile data after Fourier transform. In TM0-04-3-041 "Belt At the time of belt replacement, BP
replacement, and shipment
profile data development,"
BELT PROFILE adjustment, make setting to adjust
E 04-6-012 1 No.1 0 0 9999 1 - inverse Fourier transform is applied to the setting value, and the resultant ✔ ✔
DATA INPUT the variation of BP and execute TM0-
value is saved as compensation data. 04-3-041 "Belt profile data
The type of the setting value indicates index number of the data. development."
E 2 No.2 0 0 9999 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 No.3 0 0 9999 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 No.4 0 0 9999 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 No.5 0 0 9999 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 No.6 0 0 9999 1 - ✔ ✔
E 7 No.7 0 0 9999 1 - ✔ ✔
E 8 No.8 0 0 9999 1 - ✔ ✔
E 9 No.9 0 0 9999 1 - ✔ ✔
E 10 No.10 0 0 9999 1 - ✔ ✔
E 11 No.11 0 0 9999 1 - ✔ ✔
E 12 No.12 0 0 9999 1 - ✔ ✔
BELT PROFILE Specifies the check digit of the belt profile data after Fourier transform. Use the setting value to check the
E 04-6-013 CHECK DIGIT － - 0 0 9999 1 - The setting value is used to check the correctness of the data when TM0- correctness of the data for TM0-04-3- ✔ ✔
INPUT 04-3-041 "Belt profile data development" is executed. 041 "Belt profile data development."
Enables or disables the roller profile.

ROLLER PROFILE When checking the effectiveness of
E 04-6-021 － - 1 0 1 1 - 0: Disable ✔ ✔
ON/OFF the tone and profile
1: Enable


At the time of belt replacement, BP

ROLLER PROFILE Specifies the amplitude of the roller profile.
adjustment, make setting to adjust
E 04-6-022 AMPLITUDE － - 0 0 9999 1 - The setting value is saved as compensation data in TM0-04-3-028 ✔ ✔
the variation of BP
INPUT "ROLLER PROFILE DATA DEVELOPMENT." and execute TM0-04-3-028 "ROLLER
PROFILE DATA DEVELOPMENT."
At the time of belt replacement, BP

Sets the phase of the roller profile.
ROLLER PROFILE adjustment, make setting to adjust
E 04-6-023 － - 0 0 9999 1 - The setting value is saved as compensation data in TM0-04-3-028 ✔ ✔
PHASE INPUT the variation of BP
"ROLLER PROFILE DATA DEVELOPMENT." and execute TM0-04-3-028 "ROLLER
PROFILE DATA DEVELOPMENT."
CIS P-EDGE POS

DATA The sample quantity of prints to be used as the criteria to calculate the paper When changing the criteria of the belt
E 04-6-031 － - 9 2 10 1 - ✔ ✔
REFERENCE edge position from the paper edge position detected by CIS. stain detection in CIS
NUMBER
The sample quantity of prints to be excluded from the sample TM0-04-6-031

CIS P-EDGE POS
"CIS P-EDGE POS DATA When changing the criteria of the belt
E 04-6-032 DATA EXCLUDE － - 4 1 9 1 - ✔ ✔
REFERENCE NUMBER" to calculate the paper edge position from the paper stain detection in CIS
NUMBER
edge position detected by CIS.
BELT STAIN
Detection level of the belt stain by CIS. When changing the criteria of the belt
E 04-6-033 DETECT － - 5 0 100 1 - ✔ ✔
When set to "0," the belt stain detection is disabled. stain detection in CIS
FREQUENCY
BELT STAIN
Specifies the threshold level for belt stain detection by CIS. When changing the criteria of the belt
E 04-6-034 DETECT － - 33 0 100 1 - ✔ ✔
Save the setting value to a non-volatile memory. stain detection in CIS
THRESHOLD


Specifies whether to use the image center position adjustment and side
When switching the control between
mask amount adjustment by CIS.
the image center position adjustment
E 04-6-036 CIS MASK MODE 1 Standard 1 0 1 1 - 0: Not use ✔ ✔
and side mask amount adjustment by
1: Use CIS
E 2 Thin 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 Thick 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 Envelope 0 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 Card 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 U1 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 7 U2 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 8 U3 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 9 U4 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 10 U5 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 11 LW Paper 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 12 Rough Paper 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
CIS IMAGE
When the image center position of
E 04-6-041 CENTER － - 0 -100 100 1 0.1mm Parameter used only when the image center cannot be aligned ✔ ✔
CIS is misaligned
POSITION
CIS SIDE MASK When changing the side mask

E 04-6-043 － - 0 -100 100 1 0.1mm Adjusts the CIS side mask with the same setting for all the colors. ✔
ADJUST amount of CIS
CIS SIDE MASK Adjusts the CIS side mask with the
E 04-6-043 － - 0 -100 100 1 0.1mm CIS SIDE MASK ADJUST (LEFT) ✔
ADJUST (LEFT) same setting for all the colors.
CIS SIDE MASK Adjusts the right side of the CIS side mask with the same setting for all the
E 04-6-044 － - 0 -100 100 1 0.1mm ✔
ADJUST (RIGHT) colors.
TRAY1 IMAGE
Adjustment of the image center position when paper is fed from Tray 1 with When adjusting the image center
E 04-6-046 CENTER MASK － - 0 -100 100 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
the side mask processing set to OFF position of the paper fed from Tray 1
OFF
TRAY2 IMAGE
E 04-6-047 CENTER MASK － - 0 -100 100 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
OFF
TRAY3 IMAGE
E 04-6-048 CENTER MASK － - 0 -100 100 1 0.2mm ✔
OFF
Def must be smaller by

Applies the set image mask amount to the paper on the paper feeding table When changing the image mask 1 mm for the margin
ENVELOPE amount at the leading edge for the not to become larger
where "Envelope" is set for the thickness of the paper type.
E 04-6-051 IMAGE MASK － - 90 5 100 1 0.1mm paper on the paper feeding table than 10 mm as ✔ ✔
Note that this setting is not applicable for TM0-04-3-031 "HEAD TEST where "Envelope" is set for the described in "Function
(TOP)
PATTERN PRINT." thickness of the paper type Specifications (Product
Specifications)."


Def must be smaller by

Applies the set image mask amount to the paper on the paper feeding table When changing the image mask 1 mm for the margin
ENVELOPE amount at the trailing edge for the not to become larger
E 04-6-052 IMAGE MASK － - 90 5 100 1 0.1mm paper on the paper feeding table than 10 mm as ✔ ✔
Note that this setting is not applicable for TM0-04-3-031 "HEAD TEST where "Envelope" is set for the described in "Function
(BOTTOM)
PATTERN PRINT." thickness of the paper type. Specifications (Product
Specifications)."
Applies the set image mask amount to the paper on the paper feeding table
Note that this setting is not applicable for the print operation in the unit Def must be smaller by
check system. When changing the image mask 1 mm for the margin
ENVELOPE amount on the right side for the paper not to become larger
*For the following print operations in the unit check system, mask is applied
E 04-6-053 IMAGE MASK － - 90 5 250 1 0.1mm on the paper feeding table where than 10 mm as ✔ ✔
on a head basis. "Envelope" is set for the thickness of described in "Function
(RIGHT)
・TM0-04-3-026 "ROLLER PROFILE PHASE PRINT" the paper type. Specifications (Product
・TM0-04-3-027 "ROLLER PROFILE AMPLITUDE Specifications)."
PRINT"
・TM0-04-3-031 "HEAD TEST PATTERN PRINT"
Applies the set image mask amount to the paper on the paper feeding table
Note that this setting is not applicable for the print operation in the unit Def must be smaller by
check system. When changing the image mask 1 mm for the margin
ENVELOPE amount on the left side for the paper not to become larger
*For the following print operations in the unit check system, mask is applied
E 04-6-054 IMAGE MASK － - 90 5 250 1 0.1mm on the paper feeding table where than 10 mm as ✔ ✔
on a head basis. "Envelope" is set for the thickness of described in "Function
(LEFT)
・TM0-04-3-026 "ROLLER PROFILE PHASE PRINT" the paper type. Specifications (Product
・TM0-04-3-027 "ROLLER PROFILE AMPLITUDE Specifications)."
PRINT"
・TM0-04-3-031 "HEAD TEST PATTERN PRINT"
Switch between connecting and not connecting a general-purpose post

OPTION Used when you want to connect a
processing device.
E 04-6-058 CONNECT － - 0 0 1 1 - general-purpose post processing ✔ ✔
0: Not connected device
SELECT
1: Connected (signal wire control method)


Set the paper pitch when an ejection destination other than the multifunction Used when you want to connect a
finisher, the staple offset unit, the large-capacity paper ejection unit, the general-purpose post processing
mailing finisher, or the case binding finisher has been specified. device and set the paper pitch to a
value that conforms to the post
OPTION PAPER This test mode setting value becomes the actual paper pitch.
E 04-6-059 － - 0 0 60000 1 0.1ms processing device ✔ ✔
PITCH SET The printer operates with the largest paper pitch after comparing the Used when you connect a general-
standard paper pitch, the paper pitch that can be set for each paper type purpose post processing device and
(standard paper pitch + compensating data), and the paper pitch set with find that post processing cannot be
this test mode. performed due to the paper pitch
TM PRINT: PRINT When changing the number of paper

Uses for TM0-04-3-031 "HEAD TEST PATTERN PRINT."
E 04-6-061 QUANTITY － - 1 1 9999 1 Sheet sheets to be fed in TM0-04- 3-031 ✔ ✔
Specify the number of paper sheets to be fed. "HEAD TEST PATTERN PRINT."
SETTING
When changing the ejection

TTM PRINT: Uses for TM0-04-3-031 "HEAD TEST PATTERN PRINT."
destination of paper to be fed in TM0-
E 04-6-062 OUTPUT － - 1 0 1 1 - 0: FU ✔ ✔
04-3-031 "HEAD TEST PATTERN
DESTINATION 1: FD PRINT"
When switching the setting of

TM PRINT: Duplex/Simplex for print in TM0- 04-
E 04-6-063 － - 0 0 1 1 - 0: Simplex ✔ ✔
DUPLEX/SIMPLEX 3-031 "HEAD TEST PATTERN
1: Duplex PRINT"
Uses for TM0-04-3-031 "HEAD TEST PATTERN PRINT." When changing the feed source of
TM PRINT: PAPER
0: Paper Feeding Table 1: Tray 1 (upper tray) paper to be fed in TM0-04-
E 04-6-064 FEED TRAY － - 0 0 4 1 - ✔ ✔
2: Tray 2 (middle tray) 3: Tray 3 (lower tray) 3-031 "HEAD TEST PATTERN
SELECTION PRINT"
4: High Capacity Feeder


The print patterns for the setting values are shown below. The setting is left
blank for some values (e.g.: "1").
*1 Repeat of horizontal
<4-color machine>
1 line discharge and
2: -K (100%), 3: C- (100%), 4: -M (100%), 5: Y- (100%), 9: Y-C- (100%), 12: 3 line non-discharge
-K (4L *1), 13: C- (4L), 14: -M (4L), 15: Y- (4L), 18: CK (4L), 19: -M-M (4L), This also applies to the
20: Y-C- (4L), 22: -K (8L), 23: C- (8L), 24: -M (8L), 25: Y- (8L), 28: CK (8L), other "*L."
29: -M-K (8L), 30: CK (8L), 32: -K (1_6 *2), 33: C-(1_6), 34: -M (1_6), 35: Y- *2 Repeat of vertical 1
(1_6), 38: CK (1_6), 39: -M-K (1_6), 40: YM (1_6), 42: -K (1_3), 43: C- line discharge and 6
(1_3), 44: -M(1_3), 45: Y- (1_3), 48: CK (1_3), 49: -M-K (1_3), 50: YM (1_3), line non-discharge.
TM PRINT: PRINT When changing the print pattern to This also applied to the
52: -K (grid *3), 53: C- (grid), 54: -M (grid), 55: Y- (grid), 58: *4
E 04-6-065 HEAD TEST － - 1 1 58 1- be printed in TM0-04-3-031 "HEAD other "1_*." ✔
<2-color machine> TEST PATTERN PRINT" *3 Staggered (50%)
PATTERN
2: -K (100%), 4: R- (100%), 11: RK (100%), 12: -K (4L), 14: R- (4L), 19: RK pattern per dot
(4L), 22: -K (8L), 24: R- (8L), 29: RK (8L), 32: -K (1_6), 34: R- (1_6), 39: RK *4 For horizontal 8L
(1_6), 42: -K(1_12), 44: R- (1_12), 49: RK (1_12), 52: -K (grid), 54: R- (grid), and vertical 1_7, all the
58: *4 colors are discharged.
<Mono-color machine> For horizontal, the
discharge lines are
2: -K1 (100%), 7: K2- (100%), 10: K1K2 (100%), 12: -K1(4L), 17: K2- (4L),
shifted each other by 1
21: K2K1 (4L), 22: -K1 (8L), 27: K2-(8L), 31: K2K1 (8L), 32: -K1 (1_6), 37: line.
K2- (1_6), 41:K2K1 (1_6), 42: -K1 (1_12), 47: K2- (1_12), 51: K2K1 (1_12),
52: -K1 (grid), 57: K2- (grid), 58: *4
*: The details are described in the Remarks column.
Uses for TM0-04-3-031 “HEAD TEST PATTERN PRINT.”

The print patterns for the setting values are shown below. The setting is left
blank for some values (e.g.: “1”).
<4-color machine> 2: -K (100%), 3: C- (100%), 4: -M (100%), 5: Y- (100%),
6: P- (100%), 7: K2- (100%), 9: Y-C- (100%), 10: -K2K1 (100%), 12: -K (4L
*1), 13: C- (4L), 14: -M (4L), 15: Y- (4L), 16: P- (4L), 17: K2- (4L), 18: C-K1
(4L), 19: -M-M (4L), 20: Y-C- (4L), 22: -K (8L), 23: C- (8L), 24: -M (8L), 25:
Y- (8L), 26: P- (8L), 27: K2- (8L), 28: C-K1 (8L), 29: -M-K1 (8L), 30: CK (8L),
32: -K (1_6 *2), 33: C- (1_6), 34: -M (1_6), 35: Y- (1_6), 36: P- (1_6), 37:
K2- (1_6), 38: C-K1 (1_6), 39: -M-K1 (1_6), 40: YM (1_6), 42: -K (1_3), 43:
C- (1_3), 44: -M (1_3), 45: Y- (1_3), 48: CK (1_3), 49: -M-K (1_3), 50: YM
(1_3), 52: -K1 (grid *3), 53: C- (grid), 54: -M (grid), 55: Y- (grid), 56: P-
TM PRINT: PRINT (grid), 57: K2- (grid) 58: *4 When changing the print pattern to
E 04-6-065 HEAD TEST － - 1 1 58 1- <2-color machine> 2: -K (100%), 4: R- (100%), 11: RK (100%), 12: -K (4L), be printed in TM0-04-3-031 “HEAD ✔
PATTERN 14: R- (4L), 19: RK (4L), 22: -K (8L), 24: R- (8L), 29: RK (8L), 32: -K (1_6), TEST PATTERN PRINT”
34: R- (1_6), 39: RK (1_6), 42: -K (1_12), 44: R- (1_12), 49: RK (1_12), 52:
-K (grid), 54: R- (grid), 58: *4 Mono-color machine> 2: -K1 (100%), 7: K2-
(100%), 10: K1K2 (100%), 12: -K1(4L), 17: K2- (4L), 21: K2K1 (4L), 22: -K1
(8L), 27: K2- (8L), 31: K2K1 (8L), 32: -K1 (1_6), 37: K2- (1_6), 41: K2K1
(1_6), 42: -K1 (1_12), 47: K2- (1_12), 51: K2K1
(1_12), 52: -K1 (grid), 57: K2- (grid), 58: *4
*1 Repeat of horizontal 1 line discharge and 3 line non- discharge This also
applies to the other “*L.” *2 Repeat of vertical 1 line discharge and 6 line
non-discharge.
This also applied to the other “1_*.” *3 Staggered (50%) pattern per dot *4
For horizontal 8L and vertical 1_7, all the colors are discharged. For
horizontal, the discharge lines are shifted each other by 1 line.



*Uses for connecting to multi-finisher when "0: FU" is set in TM0-04-6-062 When changing the ejection
"TM PRINT: OUTPUT DESTINATION." destination of paper to be fed in TM0-
TM PRINT: EJECT
E 04-6-071 － - 0 0 3 1 - 0: Top tray 04-3-031 "HEAD TEST ✔ ✔
TRAY SELECTION PATTERN PRINT" to each tray of the
1: Stacking tray
2: Booklet tray multi-finisher
3: Threefold tray
Uses for TM0-04-3-031 "HEAD TEST PATTERN PRINT." When changing the setting of
TM PRINT: FIN *Uses for connecting to multi-finisher when "0: FU" is set in TM0-04-6-062 Offset/No Offset with the multi-
E 04-6-072 OFFSET EJECT － - 0 0 1 1 - "TM PRINT: OUTPUT DESTINATION." finisher for paper to be fed in TM0- ✔ ✔
SELECTION 0: OFF 04-3-031 "HEAD TEST PATTERN
1: ON PRINT."
TM PRINT: FIN *Uses for connecting to multi-finisher when "0: FU" is set in TM0-04-6-062 Staple/No Staple with the multi-
E 04-6-073 STAPLE － - 0 0 3 1 - "TM PRINT: OUTPUT DESTINATION." finisher for paper to be fed in TM0- ✔ ✔
SELECTION 0: OFF 04-3-031 "HEAD TEST PATTERN
1: One place at the front 2: Two places at center 3: One place at the back PRINT."

*Uses for connecting to multi-finisher when "0: FU" is set in TM0-04-6-062 When changing the setting of
TM PRINT: FIN Punch/No Punch with the multi-
"TM PRINT: OUTPUT DESTINATION."
E 04-6-074 PUNCHER － - 0 0 2 1 - finisher for paper to be fed in TM0- ✔ ✔
0: OFF 04-3-031 "HEAD TEST PATTERN
SELECTION
1: Two holes PRINT."
2: Three holes/Four holes

TM PRINT: FIN Booklet/No Booklet with the multi-
"TM PRINT: OUTPUT DESTINATION."
E 04-6-075 BOOKLET － - 0 0 2 1 - finisher for paper to be fed in TM0- ✔ ✔
0: OFF 04-3-031 "HEAD TEST PATTERN
SELECTION
1: Twofold PRINT."
2: Twofold + Staple



TM PRINT: FIN
"TM PRINT: OUTPUT DESTINATION." Fold/No Fold with the multi- finisher
E 04-6-076 FOLDING － - 0 0 4 1 - ✔ ✔
0: OFF for paper to be fed in TM0-04-3-031
SELECTION "HEAD TEST PATTERN PRINT."
1: Z-folding (Tri-folding "Z") 2: Z-folding (Tri-folding "C") 3: Z-folding
4: Saddle folding
TM PRINT: FDF Sets the switching between Non Sort and Offset, and the number of offset Offset/No Offset with FDF and the
E 04-6-081 NON SORT/ － - 0 0 999 1 - copies. number of offset copies for paper to ✔ ✔
OFFSET SELEC 0: Non Sort be fed in TM0-04-3-031 "HEAD
1-999: Offset copies TEST PATTERN PRINT"

Specifies the ON or OFF of the staple.
*Note that this is disabled when the TM0-04-6-081 "TM PRINT: FDF NON When changing the setting of
TM PRINT: FDF
SORT/OFFSET SELEC" is set to a Staple/No Staple with FDF for paper
E 04-6-082 STAPLE － - 0 0 3 1 - ✔ ✔
value between "1" and "999." (Operation with "0: OFF" is performed.) to be fed in TM0-04-3-031 "HEAD
SELECTION TEST PATTERN PRINT"
0: OFF
1: Bind at 1 place at the back 2: Bind at 1 place at the front 3: Bind at 2
places

Set the number of copies for staple.
When changing the number of copies
TM PRINT: FDF *Note that this is disabled when the TM0-04-6-081 "TM PRINT: FDF NON
Number for staple for paper to be fed in TM0-
E 04-6-083 STAPLE PRINT － - 1 1 55 1 SORT/OFFSET SELEC" is set to a ✔ ✔
of copies 04-3-031 "HEAD TEST PATTERN
SETTING value between "1" and "999." PRINT"
*This is enabled only when TM0-04-6-082 "TM PRINT: FDF STAPLE
SELECTION" is set to a value between "1" and "3."
Uses for TM0-04-3-032 "PRINT OPERATION".

0: Disable; Paper pitch and transfer speed according to the print condition
TM PAPER FEED: When changing the paper pitch and
1: Enable; The settings for TM0-04-6-092 "TM PAPER FEED: PAPER
E 04-6-091 P-PITCH&SPEED － - 0 0 1 1 - transfer speed for paper to be fed in ✔ ✔
PITCH SETTING TM0-04-3-032 "PRINT OPERATION"
SELEC
" and TM0-04-6-093 "TM PAPER FEED: SPEED
SETTING" are applied to the paper pitch and transfer speed.
TM PAPER FEED: Uses for TM0-04-3-032 "PRINT OPERATION". When changing the paper pitch for
E 04-6-092 PAPER PITCH － - 720 0 4000 1 0.1 ms This value is reflected only when TM0-04-6-091 "TM PAPER FEED: P- paper to be fed in TM0-04-3- 032 ✔ ✔
SETTING PITCH&SPEED SELEC" = 1. "PRINT OPERATION"


Uses for TM0-04-3-032 "PRINT OPERATION". When changing the transfer speed
TM PAPER FEED:
E 04-6-093 － - 515 300 1500 1 mm/s This value is reflected only when TM0-04-6-091 "TM PAPER FEED: P- for paper to be fed in TM0- 04-3-032 ✔ ✔
SPEED SETTING "PRINT OPERATION"
PITCH&SPEED SELEC" = 1.
When changing the speed for TM0-

TM PAPER FEED Sets the speed for TM0-06-5-006 "BP SPEED" and TM0-06-2-011
E 04-6-101 － - 515 197 665 1 mm/s 06-5-006 "BP SPEED" and TM0-06- ✔
SPEED SETTING "TRANSFER BELT MOTOR." 2-011 "TRANSFER BELT MOTOR"
When changing the speed for TM0-

TM PAPER FEED Sets the speed for TM0-06-5-006 “BP SPEED” and TM0-06-2-011
E 04-6-101 － - 700 300 700 1 mm/s 06-5-006 “BP SPEED” and TM0-06- ✔
SPEED SETTING “TRANSFER BELT MOTOR.” 2-011 “TRANSFER BELT MOTOR”
Sets the upper limit position of the paper feeding table.

When changing the upper limit
PAPER FEED 0: Up
position of the paper feeding table to
E 05-6-001 TRAY UPPER 1 Standard 1 0 2 1 - 1: Middle ✔ ✔
change the paper feeding
LIMIT POSITION 2: Down performance
E 2 Thin 1 0 2 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 Thick 0 0 2 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 Envelope 1 0 2 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 Card 0 0 2 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 U1 1 0 2 1 - ✔ ✔
E 7 U2 1 0 2 1 - ✔ ✔
E 8 U3 1 0 2 1 - ✔ ✔
E 9 U4 1 0 2 1 - ✔ ✔
E 10 U5 1 0 2 1 - ✔ ✔
E 11 LW Paper 1 0 2 1 - ✔ ✔
E 12 Rough Paper 1 0 2 1 - ✔ ✔
Sets the tray downward movement time when the paper volume in Tray 1
and 2 is between 50 and 100%.
When set to "0," the tray downward movement is disabled. When changing the tray downward
TRAY DESCEND
E 05-6-006 － - 20 0 40 1 0.1sec *To prevent parts from interfering from each other that occurs when movement time to prevent parts from ✔ ✔
DURATION interfering each other
removing a tray, move the tray downward in the standby status before the
time set in this test mode is reached and keep the tray in that position until
the next transfer reservation is activated.
Sets which paper size is to be recognized when custom sized paper is

When switching the custom sized
TRAY CUSTOM detected in Tray 1 or 2.
E 05-6-007 － - 0 0 1 1 - paper: L or S, to handle for the ✔ ✔
SIZE SELECTION 0: Custom sized paper L custom sized paper loaded in the tray
1: Custom sized paper S


REGIST HIT
When changing the contact timing
TIMING Adjusts the timing for the leading edge of the paper to contact the stopped
E 05-6-011 1 Standard 0 -20 20 1 ms when paper is fed from the paper ✔ ✔
ADJUSTMENT- registration roller when paper is fed from the paper feeding table. feeding table
PFT
E 2 Thin 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 3 Thick 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 4 Envelope 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 5 Card 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
Paper feed section
E 6 U1 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 7 U2 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 8 U3 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 9 U4 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 10 U5 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 11 LW Paper 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 12 Rough Paper 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
REGIST HIT
TIMING Adjusts the timing for the leading edge of the paper to contact the stopped When changing the contact timing
E 05-6-012 1 Standard 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
ADJUSTMENT- registration roller when paper is fed from Tray 1. when paper is fed from Tray 1
TRAY 1
E 2 Thin 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 3 U1 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 4 U2 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 5 U3 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 6 U4 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 7 U5 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 8 LW Paper 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 9 Rough Paper 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
REGIST HIT
E 05-6-013 1 Standard 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
ADJUSTMENT- registration roller when paper is fed from Tray 2. when paper is fed from Tray 2
TRAY 2
E 2 Thin 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 3 U1 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 4 U2 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 5 U3 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 6 U4 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 7 U5 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 8 LW Paper 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 9 Rough Paper 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔ ✔
REGIST HIT
E 05-6-014 1 Standard 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔
ADJUSTMENT- registration roller when paper is fed from Tray 3. when paper is fed from Tray 3.
TRAY 3
E 2 Thin 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔
E 3 U1 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔
E 4 U2 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔
E 5 U3 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔
E 6 U4 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔
E 7 U5 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔
E 8 LW Paper 0 -20 20 1 ms ✔


Adjusts the timing when to turn the paper feed motor to ON. Relatively
P-FEED TRAY When adjusting the paper buckle
changes timing when to turn the paper feed motor to ON for the start timing
E 05-6-016 PAPER FEED 1 U1 0 -30 30 1 ms amount when paper is fed from the ✔ ✔
of the registration motor. Do not change the interval from ON to OFF of the paper feeding table
START TIMING
paper feed motor.
E 2 U2 0 -30 30 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 3 U3 0 -30 30 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 4 U4 0 -30 30 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 5 U5 0 -30 30 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 6 LW Paper 0 -30 30 1 ms ✔ ✔
Paper feed section
E 7 Rough Paper 0 -30 30 1 ms ✔ ✔
Adjusts this item when the following

occurs when paper is fed from the
paper feeding table: paper buckle
noise, print misalignment due to
PFT PAPER Sets the paper buckle amount. skewed paper, or Z-folding due to too
E 05-6-017 1 Standard 10 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
BUCKLE Adjusts the timing when to turn the paper feed motor OFF. much paper buckle.
When paper buckle noise or Z-folding
occurs, adjust this
setting to the - side, and when skew
adjustment is defective, to the + side.
E 2 Thin 10 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 3 Thick 10 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 4 Envelope 10 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 5 Card 10 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 6 U1 10 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 7 U2 10 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 8 U3 10 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 9 U4 10 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 10 U5 10 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 11 LW Paper 10 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 12 Rough Paper 10 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔



occurs when re-feed paper is fed:
paper buckle noise, print
misalignment due to skewed paper,
or Z-folding due to too much paper
E 05-6-018 RE-FEED BUCKLE 1 Standard 6 -10 20 1 mm Sets the buckle when re-feeding. ✔
buckle.
occurs, adjust this
E 2 Thin 6 0 20 1 mm ✔
E 3 Thick 6 0 20 1 mm ✔
E 4 Envelope 6 0 20 1 mm ✔
E 5 Card 6 0 20 1 mm ✔
E 6 U1 6 0 20 1 mm ✔
E 7 U2 6 0 20 1 mm ✔
E 8 U3 6 0 20 1 mm ✔
E 9 U4 6 0 20 1 mm ✔
E 10 U5 6 0 20 1 mm ✔
E 11 LW Paper 6 0 20 1 mm ✔
E 12 Rough Paper 6 0 20 1 mm ✔



E 05-6-018 RE-FEED BUCKLE 1 Standard 6 -10 20 1 mm Sets the buckle when re-feeding. ✔
buckle.
occurs, adjust this
Paper feed section

E 2 Thin 6 0 20 1 mm ✔
E 3 Thick 6 0 20 1 mm ✔
E 4 Envelope 6 0 20 1 mm ✔
E 5 Card 6 0 20 1 mm ✔
E 6 U1 6 0 20 1 mm ✔
E 7 U2 6 0 20 1 mm ✔
E 8 U3 6 0 20 1 mm ✔
E 9 U4 6 0 20 1 mm ✔
E 10 U5 6 0 20 1 mm ✔
E 11 LW Paper 6 0 20 1 mm ✔

occurs when paper is fed from Tray
1: paper buckle noise, print
TRAY1 SHORT
E 05-6-019 1 Standard 6 -10 20 1 mm Sets the paper buckle amount when short paper is fed from Tray 1. buckle. ✔ ✔
PAPER BUCKLE When paper buckle noise or Z-folding
occurs, adjust this
setting to the - side, and when
skew adjustment is defective, to the
+ side.
E 2 Thin 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 3 U1 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 4 U2 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 5 U3 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 6 U4 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 7 U5 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 8 LW Paper 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 9 Rough Paper 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔



TRAY1 LONG or Z-folding due to too much paper
E 05-6-020 1 Standard 8 -10 20 1 mm Sets the paper buckle amount when long paper is fed from Tray 1. ✔ ✔
PAPER BUCKLE buckle.
occurs, adjust this
E 2 Thin 8 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 3 U1 8 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 4 U2 8 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 5 U3 8 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 6 U4 8 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 7 U5 8 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 8 LW Paper 8 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 9 Rough Paper 8 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
Paper feed section

TRAY2 SHORT or Z-folding due to too much paper
E 05-6-021 1 Standard 6 -10 20 1 mm Sets the paper buckle amount when short paper is fed from Tray 2. ✔ ✔
occurs, adjust this
E 2 Thin 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 3 U1 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 4 U2 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 5 U3 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 6 U4 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 7 U5 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 8 LW Paper 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 9 Rough Paper 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔ ✔



E 05-6-022 1 Standard 6 -10 20 1 mm Sets the paper buckle amount when long paper is fed from Tray 2. ✔
occurs, adjust this
E 2 Thin 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 3 U1 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 4 U2 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 5 U3 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 6 U4 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 7 U5 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 8 LW Paper 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 9 Rough Paper 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔

occurs, adjust this
E 2 Thin 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 3 U1 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 4 U2 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 5 U3 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 6 U4 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 7 U5 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 8 LW Paper 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔


Paper feed section

TRAY3 SHORT or Z-folding due to too much paper
E 05-6-023 1 Standard 6 -10 20 1 mm Sets the paper buckle amount when short paper is fed from Tray 3. ✔
occurs, adjust this
E 2 Thin 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 3 U1 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 4 U2 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 5 U3 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 6 U4 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 7 U5 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 8 LW Paper 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔

occurs, adjust this
E 2 Thin 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 3 U1 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 4 U2 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 5 U3 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 6 U4 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 7 U5 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 8 LW Paper 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔



RE-FEED PAPER or Z-folding due to too much paper
E 05-6-025 1 Standard 6 -10 20 1 mm Sets the buckle when re-feeding short paper. ✔
BUCKLE buckle.
occurs, adjust this
E 2 Thin 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 3 Thick 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 4 Envelope 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 5 Card 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 6 U1 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 7 U2 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 8 U3 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 9 U4 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 10 U5 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
E 11 LW Paper 6 -10 20 1 mm ✔
Paper feed section
P-FEED TRAY Specifies ON of OFF of the assist control when paper is fed from the paper
When switching On/OFF of the assist
ASSIST feeding table.
E 05-6-026 1 Standard 1 0 1 1 - control for paper feeding from the ✔ ✔
CONTROL 0: OFF paper feeding table
ON/OFF 1: ON
E 2 Thin 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 Thick 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 Envelope 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 Card 0 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 U1 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 7 U2 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 8 U3 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 9 U4 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 10 U5 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 11 LW Paper 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 12 Rough Paper 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔


TRAY1 ASSIST Specifies ON or OFF of the assist control when paper is fed from Tray 1. When switching ON/OFF of the
E 05-6-027 CONTROL ON/ 1 Standard 1 0 1 1 - 0: OFF assist control for paper feeding from ✔ ✔
OFF 1: ON Tray 1
E 2 Thin 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 U1 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 U2 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 U3 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 U4 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 7 U5 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 8 LW Paper 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 9 Rough Paper 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 05-6-028 CONTROL ON/ 1 Standard 1 0 1 1 - 0: OFF assist control for paper feeding from ✔ ✔
OFF 1: ON Tray 2
E 2 Thin 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 U1 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 U2 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 U3 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 U4 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 7 U5 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 8 LW Paper 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 9 Rough Paper 1 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
E 05-6-029 CONTROL ON/ 1 Standard 1 0 1 1 - 0: OFF assist control for paper feeding from ✔
OFF 1: ON Tray 3
E 2 Thin 1 0 1 1 - ✔
E 3 U1 1 0 1 1 - ✔
E 4 U2 1 0 1 1 - ✔
E 5 U3 1 0 1 1 - ✔
E 6 U4 1 0 1 1 - ✔
E 7 U5 1 0 1 1 - ✔
E 8 LW Paper 1 0 1 1 - ✔


Paper feed section
When paper buckle noise is loud

Note that a large value
when paper is fed from the paper
PFT ASSIST on the - side causes
E 05-6-031 1 Standard 7 -100 100 1 ms Sets PFT ASSIST START TIME. feeding table, adjust the start time of ✔ ✔
START TIME paper buckle to be
the paper feeding table assist control
insufficiently formed.
to the - side.
E 2 Thin 7 -100 100 1 ms ✔ ✔

E 3 Thick 7 -100 100 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 4 Envelope 7 -100 100 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 5 Card 7 -100 100 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 6 U1 7 -100 100 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 7 U2 7 -100 100 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 8 U3 7 -100 100 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 9 U4 7 -100 100 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 10 U5 7 -100 100 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 11 LW Paper 7 -100 100 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 12 Rough Paper 7 -100 100 1 ms ✔ ✔
PFT ASSIST Sets the timing with which to stop the paper feed tray assist as a length of
E 05-6-032 1 Standard 110 0 300 1 0.1mm ✔
STOP TIME time from the deceleration of the registration motor.
E 2 Thin 110 0 300 1 0.1mm ✔

E 3 Thick 110 0 300 1 0.1mm ✔
E 4 Envelope 110 0 300 1 0.1mm ✔
E 5 Card 110 0 300 1 0.1mm ✔
E 6 U1 110 0 300 1 0.1mm ✔
E 7 U2 110 0 300 1 0.1mm ✔
E 8 U3 110 0 300 1 0.1mm ✔
E 9 U4 110 0 300 1 0.1mm ✔
E 10 U5 110 0 300 1 0.1mm ✔
E 11 LW Paper 110 0 300 1 0.1mm ✔
When there is variation in the

POST REGIST transport rate of the first paper feed
and noise or defective skew
SENSOR Adjusts the first paper feed theoretical transport rate after the registration
E 05-6-036 － - 65 50 150 1 % adjustment occurs due to paper ✔ ✔
P-TRANSFER sensor arrives. buckle, change the first paper feed
ADJUST theoretical transport rate to adjust the
paper buckle amount.


RE-FEED When the paper transport rate is low

Adjusts the arrival timing of re-feed paper that is used when the duplex and the paper buckle of re- feed
ARRIVAL TIMING
E 05-6-047 1 Standard 30 -50 50 1 ms transport speed is calculated. paper is small, make the feeding ✔ ✔
ADJUST (SHORT timing of the re-feed paper earlier (-
PAPER) side).
E 2 Thin 30 -50 50 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 3 Thick 30 -50 50 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 4 Card 30 -50 50 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 5 U1 30 -50 50 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 6 U2 30 -50 50 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 7 U3 30 -50 50 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 8 U4 30 -50 50 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 9 U5 30 -50 50 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 10 LW Paper 30 -50 50 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 11 Rough Paper 30 -50 50 1 ms ✔ ✔
Paper feed section
RE-FEED When the paper transport rate is low

Adjusts the arrival timing of re-feed paper that is used when the duplex
ARRIVAL TIMING and the paper buckle of refeed paper
E 05-6-048 1 Standard 0 -50 50 1 ms transport speed is calculated. ✔
ADJUST (LONG is small, make the feeding timing of
The type of the setting value indicates the paper type. the re-feed paper earlier (- side).
PAPER)
E 2 Thin 0 -50 50 1 ms ✔
E 3 Thick 0 -50 50 1 ms ✔
E 4 U1 0 -50 50 1 ms ✔
E 5 U2 0 -50 50 1 ms ✔
E 6 U3 0 -50 50 1 ms ✔
E 7 U4 0 -50 50 1 ms ✔
E 8 U5 0 -50 50 1 ms ✔
E 9 LW Paper 110 -50 50 1 ms ✔
When replacing the sensor or when

REGIST SENSOR Sets REGIST SENSOR EMIT.
E 05-6-056 － - 128 0 255 1 - automatic adjustment does not work ✔ ✔
EMIT As the this value increases, the luminous energy becomes larger. well


LOW-SPEED Adjusts the feeding speed of the paper when it contacts the registration
Paper feed When you want to reduce the
E 05-6-060 CONTACT SPEED 1 0 -300 300 1 mm/s roller. ✔
tray collision sound.
ADJUST The type of the setting value indicates the paper feed source.
E 2 Tray 1 0 -300 300 1 mm/s ✔

E 3 Tray 2 0 -300 300 1 mm/s ✔
E 4 Tray 3 0 -300 300 1 mm/s ✔
E 5 Re-feed 0 -300 300 1 mm/s ✔
Large-
E 6 0 -300 300 1 mm/s ✔
capacity
When image misalignment occurs

(for the specified paper buckle to be
REGIST MOTOR Adjusts the speed of the registration motor by using the speed of the form between the registration and
E 05-6-061 － - 2 -20 20 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
SPEED ADJUST transfer belt as the criteria. BP), enter a value on the + side to
increase the linear speed of the
registration roller,
Enter a value for additive or subtractive for the setting value in ＴＭ 0-05-6- When further adjusting the value set
REGIST MOTOR
E 05-6-062 1 LW Paper 4 -99 99 1 mm/s 061 "REGIST MOTOR SPEED ADJUST." in Ｔ M0-05-6-061 "REGIST MOTOR ✔ ✔
SPEED ADJUST SPEED ADJUST"
E 2 Rough Paper 4 -99 99 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
When the image is misaligned due to

insufficient feed amount of the
REGIST MOTOR
registration roller with low transport
E 05-6-063 STOP POSITION － - 0 -20 20 1 mm Sets the stop position of the registration motor. ✔ ✔
rate, increase the feed
ADJUST amount (+ side) of the registration
roller.
REGIST MOTOR
Enter a value for additive or subtractive for the setting value in TM0-05-6- When further adjusting the value set
SPEED ADJUST Paper feed
E 05-6-064 1 6 -99 99 1 mm/s 061 "REGIST MOTOR SPEED ADJUST." The type of the setting value in TM0-05-6-061 "REGIST MOTOR ✔
(PAPER FEED tray SPEED ADJUST"
indicates the paper feed source.
SOURCE)


Transport section
Other than
Envelope/Ligh
tweight/Stand Specifies the airflow of the transfer belt fan using the duty radio of PWM.
BP FAN AIRFLOW *At the time of version upgrade, the setting values are retained.
E 06-6-001 1 ard paper/IJ 70 1 100 1 % ✔ ✔
SETTING
paper
The type of setting value that has been applied is determined with the
following steps.
1. When thickness of paper type is envelope
When noise or paper wrinkle on the
→02: Envelope 1 or 03 Envelope 2
BP occurs, adjust the suction of the
2. When type of paper type is light-weight paper BP.
→04: Light-weight paper
3. When thickness of paper type is (standard or thin) and type of paper type
is (standard or IJ paper (not including IJ matte paper))
E 2 Envelope 1 45 1 100 1 % ✔ ✔
→06: Standard/IJ paper
4. Other than above (IJ matte paper here)
E 3 Envelope 2 45 1 100 1 % →01: Not envelope/light-weight/Standard/IJ paper ✔ ✔
E 4 LW Paper 45 1 100 1 % ✔ ✔
Standard
E 6 70 1 100 1 % ✔ ✔
paper/IJ paper
Sets the paper length by which the setting of the transfer belt fan is
changed.
*When a setting value between 1 and 550 is set in this test mode, the Duty
BP FAN SPECIAL When changing the airflow of the BP
E 06-6-002 － - 0 0 550 1 mm value of the transfer belt fan set in TM0-06-6-003 "BP FAN SPECIAL DUTY" ✔ ✔
SETTING fan according to the paper length
is reflected at the same time when the paper length is set.
0: Use the value set in TM0-06-6-001 "BP FAN AIRFLOW SETTING."
1-550: Use the value set in TM0-06-6-003 "BP FAN SPECIAL DUTY."
When setting the BP fan airflow,

BP FAN SPECIAL Sets the Duty value of the transfer belt fan when a value between 1 and 550 which is changed according to the
E 06-6-003 － - 100 0 100 1 % ✔
DUTY is set in TM0-06-6-002 "BP FAN SPECIAL SETTING." value set in M0-06-6-002 "BP FAN
SPECIAL SETTING"
When setting the BP fan airflow,

BP FAN SPECIAL Sets the Duty value of the transfer belt fan when a value between 1 and 550 which is changed according to the
E 06-6-003 － - 100 0 100 1 % ✔
DUTY is set in TM0-06-6-002 “BP FAN SPECIAL SETTING.” value set in M0-06-6-002 “BP FAN
SPECIAL SETTING”


When noise on 1C units or paper

Specifies the airflow of the transfer belt fan of the first envelope gap using wrinkling on the BP occurs, adjust
BP FAN AIRFLOW
E 06-6-004 1 Envelope 1 60 1 100 1 % the duty ratio of PWM. the suction of the BP. ✔ ✔
SETTING (1C) When satellite image quality is
* At the time of version upgrade, the setting values are retained.
affected heavily.
Use this setting when multiple paper

MULTIPLE FEED Specifies the luminous energy by which multiple paper feed is determined by
Standard feed is wrongly detected or there is
E 06-6-005 LUMINOUS 1 30 10 50 1 % the top edge sensor 1. ✔ ✔
paper variation in luminous energy
THRESHOLD The type of the setting value indicates the paper type. depending on the paper type.
E 2 IJ paper 30 10 50 1 % ✔ ✔
E 3 Matte-IJ 30 10 50 1 % ✔ ✔
E 4 Card-IJ 30 10 50 1 % ✔ ✔
E 5 High quality 30 10 50 1 % ✔ ✔
E 6 LW Paper 30 10 50 1 % ✔ ✔
E 7 Rough Paper 30 10 50 1 % ✔ ✔
MULTIPLE PAPER
Sets when to start the multiple paper feed detection processing. This setting
FEED When you want to perform
is applied when the multiple paper feed detection function is enabled.
E 06-6-006 DETECTION － - 1 0 1 1 - evaluations by switching when the ✔ ✔
0: Detect from the first sheet multiple paper feed detection starts
START TIMING
1: Detect from the second sheet
SETTING
Adjusts the speed of the BP transport motor. Execute TM0-06-3-006 "BP

MOTOR SPEED AUTO
BP MTR SPEED When you want to adjust the speed
E 06-6-007 － - 0 -500 500 1 0.0001 ADJUST" to overwrite the setting value with the adjustment result. ✔ ✔
ADJ of the BP transport motor.
The setting value of this test mode is added to or
subtracted from the prescribed speed.
TOP EDGE When replacing the sensor or when

Sets TOP EDGE SENSOR 1 EMIT.
E 06-6-011 SENSOR 1 － - 128 0 255 1 - automatic adjustment does not work ✔ ✔
As the this value increases, the luminous energy becomes larger. well
SETTING
TOP EDGE When replacing the sensor or when

Sets TOP EDGE SENSOR 2 EMIT.
E 06-6-012 SENSOR 2 － - 128 0 255 1 - automatic adjustment does not work ✔ ✔
As the this value increases, the luminous energy becomes larger. well
SETTING


Transport section
When ejecting paper that cannot be

TOP EDGE
Adjusts the ejection timing value (distance between the top edge sensor 1 detected by the top edge sensor 2,
E 06-6-013 SENSOR 1 PRINT － - 0 -1000 1000 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
and the head) for the top edge sensor 1. increase (+ side) or decrease (- side)
ST TIMIG ADJ the margin.
TOP EDGE
Adjusts the ejection timing value (distance between the top edge sensor 2 When ejecting paper, increase (+
E 06-6-014 SENSOR 2 PRINT － - 0 -1000 1000 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
and the head) for the top edge sensor 2. side) or decrease (- side) the margin.
ST TIMIG ADJ
REGISTRATION Perform this adjustment in situations

MOTOR Adjust the timing with which to decelerate the registration motor from the top such as when images are not printed
E 06-6-017 － - 0 -200 200 1 0.1ms ✔
DECELERATION speed. correctly on the leading edge of the
TIMING ADJUST paper.
SWITCHBACK Specifies the weight amount when the switchback action is changed from When checking the trend difference
E 06-6-021 WAITING TIME － - 0 -20 20 1 ms forward to reverse. due to fine adjustment for the paper ✔
SETTING *The negative setting value should be set to 0. timing
SWITCHBACK Specifies the weight amount when the switchback action is changed from When checking the trend difference
E 06-6-021 WAITING TIME － - 20 -20 20 1 ms forward to reverse. due to fine adjustment for the paper ✔
SETTING *The negative setting value should be set to 0. timing
When switchback congestion occurs

or re-feed paper is not reached, enter
SWITCHBACK
a value on the negative side to make
E 06-6-022 ROLL ROTATION － - 12 0 100 1 mm Specifies the Switchback roller paper trailing edge length. ✔
the paper feed distance longer at the
SETTING time
of switchback.


When switchback congestion occurs

SWITCHBACK or re-feed paper is not reached, enter
E 06-6-022 ROLL ROTATION － - 20 0 100 1 mm Specifies the Switchback roller paper trailing edge length. a value on the negative side to make ✔
SETTING the paper feed distance longer at the
time of switchback.
Adjusts the receiving speed of the switchback motor using the print speed Use this setting when the motor
SB MOTOR
as the criteria. speed on the later in the transport
E 06-6-025 RECIVE SPEED － - -10 -50 50 1 0.001 ✔ ✔
Receiving speed [mm/s] = Print speed [mm/s] * (1000 + setting value of this path is not best suited for the print
ADJUSTMENT speed.
TM) / 1000
Compensates the paper pitch (interval between papers to be fed) when

When adjusting the paper pitch for
PFT PAPER paper for simplex print is fed. The actual paper pitch is the specified value
E 06-6-031 1 Standard 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms simplex print when paper is fed from ✔ ✔
PITCH-SIMPLEX plus setting value of this TM for each model. the paper feeding table
E 2 Thin 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔

E 3 Thick 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔
E 4 Envelope 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔
E 5 Card 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔
E 6 LW Paper 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔
E 7 Rough Paper 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔

TRAY1 PAPER paper for simplex print is fed from Tray 1. The actual paper pitch is the
PITCH -SIMPLEX specified value plus setting value of this TM for each model. Tray 1
E 2 Thin 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔

E 3 LW Paper 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔
E 4 Rough Paper 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔



PITCH -SIMPLEX specified value plus setting value of this TM for each model. Tray 2
E 2 Thin 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔

E 3 LW Paper 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔
Transport section
E 4 Rough Paper 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔

E 06-6-034 1 Standard 0 0 2000 1 0.1ms simplex print when paper is fed from ✔
PITCH-SIMPLEX specified value plus setting value of this TM for each model. Tray 3.
E 2 Thin 0 0 2000 1 0.1ms ✔

E 3 LW Paper 0 0 2000 1 0.1ms ✔

PAPER FEED When adjusting the paper pitch for
paper for duplex print is fed from the paper feeding table. The actual paper
E 06-6-036 TRAY PAPER 1 Standard 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms duplex print when paper is fed from ✔ ✔
pitch is the specified value plus setting value of this TM for each model. the paper feeding table
PITCH -DUPLEX
E 2 Thin 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔

E 3 Thick 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔
E 4 Card 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔
E 5 LW Paper 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔
E 6 Rough Paper 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔

TRAY1 PAPER paper for duplex print is fed from Tray 1. The actual paper pitch is the
E 06-6-037 1 Standard 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms duplex print when paper is fed from ✔ ✔
PITCH -DUPLEX specified value plus setting value of this TM for each model. Tray 1
E 2 Thin 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔

E 3 LW Paper 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔
E 4 Rough Paper 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔



E 06-6-038 1 Standard 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms duplex print when paper is fed from ✔ ✔
PITCH -DUPLEX specified value plus setting value of this TM for each model. Tray 2
E 2 Thin 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔

E 3 LW Paper 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔
E 4 Rough Paper 0 0 2000 1 0.1 ms ✔ ✔

E 06-6-039 1 Standard 0 0 2000 1 0.1ms duplex print when paper is fed from ✔
PITCH -DUPLEX specified value plus setting value of this TM for each model. The type of the Tray 3
setting value indicates the paper type.
E 2 Thin 0 0 2000 1 0.1ms ✔

E 3 LW Paper 0 0 2000 1 0.1ms ✔
Sets the length of the envelope margin. When the flap length of an envelope
ENVELOPE FLAP
E 06-6-041 － - 420 0 720 1 0.1mm *If there is a difference of 10 mm or more between the setting value and the is 42 mm or more, increase (+ side) ✔ ✔
WIDTH the length of the margin.
actual length of paper feed, the W056-1300 error will occur.
The median value of

the paper pitch is the
When the leading edge of the paper default with the suction
FD EJECT ejected with FD is cut or JAM occurs time of solenoid taken
E 06-6-051 FLIPPER ON － - -20 -100 100 1 ms Sets when to turn ON the FD paper ejection flipper. in the section, into consideration. ✔
TIMING decrease (+ side) the operation Theoretically, when the
speed. paper pitch is shifted by
1/2 (29.6 ms), the part
contacts the paper.


The median value of

FD EJECT ejected with FD is cut or JAM occurs time of solenoid taken
E 06-6-051 FLIPPER ON － - -20 -300 300 1 ms Sets when to turn ON the FD paper ejection flipper. in the section, into consideration. ✔
1/2 (29.6 ms), the part
contacts the paper.
The median value of

When the leading edge of the paper default with the return
FD EJECT is cut after one side has been printed time of solenoid taken
E 06-6-052 FLIPPER OFF － - 0 -100 100 1 ms Sets when to turn OFF the FD paper ejection flipper. in duplex print, or when JAM occurs into consideration. ✔
TIMING in the section, decrease (+ side) the Theoretically, when the
operation speed. paper pitch is shifted by
1/2 (29.6 ms), the part
contacts the paper.
Sets when to turn OFF the FD paper ejection flipper. When the leading edge of the paper
FD EJECT The median value of the paper pitch is the default with the return time of is cut after one side has been printed
E 06-6-052 FLIPPER OFF － - -60 -300 300 1 ms solenoid taken into consideration. in duplex print, or when JAM occurs ✔
TIMING Theoretically, when the paper pitch is shifted by 1/2 (29.6 ms), the part in the section, decrease (+ side) the
contacts the paper. operation speed.
The median value of

FU EJECT ejected with FU is cut or JAM occurs time of solenoid taken
E 06-6-056 FLIPPER ON － - 0 -100 100 1 ms Sets when to turn ON the FU paper ejection flipper. in the section, into consideration. ✔
1/2 (29.6 ms), the part
contacts the paper.


Sets when to turn ON the FU paper ejection flipper. When the leading edge of the paper
FU EJECT The median value of the paper pitch is the default with the suction time of ejected with FU is cut or JAM occurs
E 06-6-056 FLIPPER ON － - 0 -300 300 1 ms solenoid taken into consideration. in the section, ✔
TIMING Theoretically, when the paper pitch is shifted by 1/2 (29.6 ms), the part decrease (+ side) the operation
contacts the paper. speed.
The median value of

With FU connected, when the leading
default with the return
edge of the paper is cut after one
FU EJECT time of solenoid taken
side has been printed in duplex print,
E 06-6-057 FLIPPER OFF － - 0 -100 100 1 ms Sets when to turn OFF the FU paper ejection flipper. into consideration. ✔
or when JAM occurs in the section,
TIMING Theoretically, when the
decrease (+ side) the operation
paper pitch is shifted by
speed.
1/2 (29.6 ms), the part
contacts the paper.
Sets when to turn OFF the FU paper ejection flipper. With FU connected, when the leading
edge of the paper is cut after one
FU EJECT The median value of the paper pitch is the default with the return time of
side has been printed in duplex print,
E 06-6-057 FLIPPER OFF － - 40 -300 300 1 ms solenoid taken into consideration. ✔
or when JAM occurs in the section,
TIMING Theoretically, when the paper pitch is shifted by 1/2 (29.6 ms), the part decrease (+ side) the operation
contacts the paper. speed.


Switch recovery control at jam occurrence.

JAM RECOVERY
When changing the recovery
E 06-6-061 PAPER EJECT － - 0 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
0: Ejects all the possible papers remained in the printer. (def) operation when jam occurs.
SELECT
1: Emergency stop
Adjusts the receiving speed of the upward/downward motor using the print Use this setting when the motor
UPWARD/
speed as the criteria. speed on the later in the transport
E 06-6-071 DOWNWARD － - -10 -50 50 1 0.001 ✔ ✔
MOTOR RECEIVE speed.
TM) / 1000
PAPER Use this in situations such as when

Adjust the receiving speed of paper elevation motor 1 with the printing the motor speed on the downstream
ELEVATION
speed as the reference. side of the transport path is not
E 06-6-072 MOTOR 1 － - -5 -50 50 1 0.001 ✔
Receiving speed [mm/s] = Printing speed [mm/s] × (1000 appropriate for the printing speed
RECEIVING (when images are not printed
+ the setting value of this TM) ÷ 1000
SPEED ADJUST correctly).
PAPER Use this in situations such as when

Adjust the receiving speed of paper elevation motor 2 with the printing the motor speed on the downstream
ELEVATION
E 06-6-073 MOTOR 2 － - -5 -50 50 1 0.001 ✔
HORIZONTAL Use this in situations such as when

Adjust the receiving speed of horizontal transport motor 1 with the printing the motor speed on the downstream
TRANSPORT
E 06-6-074 MOTOR 1 － - -5 -50 50 1 0.001 ✔


Adjusts the receiving speed of the FD paper ejection motor using the print Use this setting when the motor
FD EJECTION
speed as the criteria. speed on the later in the transport
E 07-6-001 MOTOR RECIVE － - -10 -50 50 1 0.001 ✔ ✔
SPEED ADJUST speed.
TM) / 1000
Selects paper used for setting the criteria of FD paper ejection motor speed.
0: Standard
FD EJECT ROLL 1: Thick When specifying the criteria of FD
E 07-6-002 1 U1 0 0 4 1 - ✔ ✔
BASIS SPEED 2: Thin paper ejection motor speed
3: Card
4: Envelope
E 2 U2 0 0 4 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 U3 0 0 4 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 U4 0 0 4 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 U5 0 0 4 1 - ✔ ✔
Use this setting when JAM occurs at

the FD paper ejection. Compensate
FD EJECT SPEED Compensates the speed set in TM0-07-6-001 "FD EJECT SPEED." the DF paper ejection speed by
E 07-6-003 1 Standard 0 -300 300 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
COMPENSATION The type of the setting value indicates the paper type. setting a positive value for non-arrival
jam, and a negative value for original
remaining jam.
E 2 Thin 0 -300 300 1 mm/s ✔ ✔

E 3 Thick 0 -300 300 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 4 Envelope 0 -300 300 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 5 Card 0 -300 300 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 6 U1 0 -300 300 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 7 U2 0 -300 300 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 8 U3 0 -300 300 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 9 U4 0 -300 300 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 10 U5 0 -300 300 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 11 LW Paper 0 -300 300 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 12 Rough Paper 0 -300 300 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
FD PAPER
EJECTION PAPER Sets the specified position for "No. 0-07-3-002 FD PAPER EJECTION Used when making fine adjustments
E 07-6-004 - - 1000 1000 3540 1 0.1mm ✔
GUIDE SPECIFIED PAPER GUIDE CUSTOM". to the paper guide settings
POSITION


Specify the method of operating the FD paper ejection motor.

0: Follow the operation specifications.
FD EJECT 1: Use the setting values of the test mode When changing the method of
E 07-6-005 MOTOR ACTION － - 0 0 1 1 - *For simplex transport, use the setting values of TM0- 07-6-006 "FD EJECT operating the FD paper ejection ✔ ✔
SELECTION MOTOR SPEED (SIMPLEX)," and motor and evaluating the result
for duplex transport, TM0-07-6-007 "FD EJECT MOTOR SPEED
(DUPLEX)."
For simplex paper feed, sets the speed after the speed of the FD paper
FD EJECT When adjusting the speed of the FD
ejection motor is changed.
E 07-6-006 MOTOR SPEED － - 515 300 1000 1 mm/s paper ejection motor for simplex ✔
This setting value is enabled when TM0-07-6-005 "FD EJECT MOTOR paper feed
(DUPLEX)
ACTION SELECTION" is set to "1."
For simplex paper feed, sets the speed after the speed of the FD paper
E 07-6-006 MOTOR SPEED － - 1000 300 1500 1 mm/s paper ejection motor for simplex ✔
This setting value is enabled when TM0-07-6-005 “FD EJECT MOTOR paper feed
(SIMPLEX)
ACTION SELECTION” is set to “1.”
For duplex paper feed, sets the speed after the speed of the FD paper
E 07-6-007 MOTOR SPEED － - 515 300 1000 1 mm/s paper ejection motor for duplex paper ✔
This setting value is enabled when TM0-07-6-005 "FD EJECT MOTOR feed
(SIMPLEX)
ACTION SELECTION" is set to "1."
For duplex paper feed, sets the speed after the speed of the FD paper
E 07-6-007 MOTOR SPEED － - 1000 300 1500 1 mm/s paper ejection motor for duplex paper ✔
This setting value is enabled when TM0-07-6-005 “FD EJECT MOTOR feed
(DUPLEX)
ACTION SELECTION” is set to “1.”


Sets the FD eject speed (*) when the Paper type-Type is Standard, IJ paper,
or High quality, and the Paper type: Thickness is Standard. Use this setting when a paper
*Transfer speed after the FD paper ejection sensor passes (speed of ejection is defective (full is detected
by the ejected paper alignment or
FD EJECT SPEED acceleration and deceleration control)
E 07-6-008 1 A3 350 300 1000 1 mm/s paper rear end charge) due to the ✔
(NORMAL) For the transfer speed when paper is received from the upward transport, Paper type: Type, Paper type:
use the setting value in TTM0-07- 6-001 "FD EJECT SPEED." Thickness, or individual difference of
The type of the setting value indicates the paper size. "A3" indicates A3, the unit.
A3W, Ledger, Sq0, or Sq1.
E 2 B4 350 300 1000 1 mm/s "B4" represents B4, Legal, Foolscap, and C4. ✔
E 3 A4 400 300 1000 1 mm/s "A4" represents A4, and Letter. ✔
E 4 B5 400 300 1000 1 mm/s "B5" represents B5 and C5. ✔
A4 long-edge
E 5 400 300 1000 1 mm/s "A4 Landscape" represents A4 Landscape and Letter Landscape. ✔
feed
B5
E 6 400 300 1000 1 mm/s "B5 Landscape" represents B5 Landscape. ✔
Landscape
E 7 A5 400 300 1000 1 mm/s "A5" represents A5 and Statement. ✔
E 8 B6 400 300 1000 1 mm/s "B6" represents B6. ✔
A5
E 9 400 300 1000 1 mm/s "A5 Landscape" represents A5 Landscape. ✔
Landscape
E 10 A6 400 300 1000 1 mm/s "A6" represents A6, Post Card, C6, and DL Landscape. ✔
custom sized
E 11 515 300 1000 1 mm/s "Non-standard" represents Irregular. ✔
paper


Sets the FD eject speed (*) when the Paper type-Type is Standard, IJ paper, Use this setting when a paper
or High quality, and the Paper type: Thickness is Standard. ejection is defective (full is detected
FD EJECT SPEED * Transport speed after the trailing edge of the paper leaves the BP transfer
(NORMAL) belt (speed of acceleration and deceleration control) Paper type: Type, Paper type:
The type of the setting value indicates the paper size. Thickness, or individual difference of
“A3” indicates A3, A3W, Ledger, Sq0, or Sq1. the unit.
E 2 B4 960 300 1500 1 mm/s “B4” represents B4, Legal, Foolscap, and C4. ✔
E 3 A4 1000 300 1500 1 mm/s “A4” represents A4, and Letter. ✔
E 4 B5 1000 300 1500 1 mm/s “B5” represents B5 and C5. ✔
A4 long-edge
E 5 970 300 1500 1 mm/s “A4 Landscape” represents A4 Landscape and Letter Landscape. ✔
feed
B5
E 6 1040 300 1500 1 mm/s “B5 Landscape” represents B5 Landscape. ✔
Landscape
E 7 A5 1000 300 1500 1 mm/s “A5” represents A5 and Statement. ✔
E 8 B6 1000 300 1500 1 mm/s “B6” represents B6. ✔
A5
E 9 1000 300 1500 1 mm/s “A5 Landscape” represents A5 Landscape. ✔
Landscape
custom sized
E 11 1000 300 1500 1 mm/s “Non-standard” represents Irregular. ✔
paper


Use this setting when a paper

Sets the FD eject speed* when IJ matte paper is selected for Paper type- ejection is defective (full is detected
Type and Standard is selected for Paper type-Thickness. by the ejected paper alignment or
FD EJECT SPEED
E 07-6-009 1 A3 350 300 1000 1 mm/s *See TM0-07-6-008 "FD EJECT SPEED (NORMAL)." paper rear end charge) due to the ✔
(IJ PAPER) Paper type: Type, Paper type:
The type of the setting value indicates the paper size. "A3" indicates A3,
A3W, Ledger, Sq0, or Sq1. Thickness, or individual difference of
the unit.
A4 long-edge
feed
B5
Landscape
A5
Landscape
custom sized
paper



FD EJECT SPEED
E 07-6-009 1 A3 1000 300 1500 1 mm/s *See TM0-07-6-008 “FD EJECT SPEED (NORMAL).” paper rear end charge) due to the ✔
(IJ PAPER) Paper type: Type, Paper type:
The type of the setting value indicates the paper size. “A3” indicates A3,
the unit.
A4 long-edge
feed
B5
Landscape
A5
Landscape
custom sized
paper


Sets the FD eject speed*2 when LW paper is selected for Paper type- Use this setting when a paper
Type*1. ejection is defective (full is detected
*1: When LW paper is selected for Paper type-Type, Paper type-Thickness by the ejected paper alignment or
FD EJECT SPEED
E 07-6-010 1 A3 450 300 1000 1 mm/s is not selectable. See "Paper type" in "Function Specifications." paper rear end charge) due to the ✔
(LW PAPER) Paper type: Type, Paper type:
*2: See TM0-07-6-008 "FD EJECT SPEED (NORMAL)."
The type of the setting value indicates the paper size. "A3" indicates A3, Thickness, or individual difference of
the unit.
A4 long-edge
feed
B5
Landscape
A5
Landscape
custom sized
paper


FD EJECT SPEED
E 07-6-010 1 A3 1080 300 1500 1 mm/s is not selectable. paper rear end charge) due to the ✔
(LW PAPER) Paper type: Type, Paper type:
*2: See TM0-07-6-008 “FD EJECT SPEED (NORMAL).”
The type of the setting value indicates the paper size. “A3” indicates A3, Thickness, or individual difference of
the unit.
A4 long-edge
feed
B5
Landscape
A5
Landscape
custom sized
paper


Sets the FD eject speed*2 when Thiner is selected for Paper type- Use this setting when a paper
Thickness*1. ejection is defective (full is detected
*1 Use this TM setting value when Thiner is selected for Paper type- by the ejected paper alignment or
FD EJECT SPEED
E 07-6-011 1 A3 450 300 1000 1 mm/s Thickness regardless of selected paper for Paper type-Type. paper rear end charge) due to the ✔
(THIN) Paper type: Type, Paper type:
the unit.
A4 long-edge
feed
B5
Landscape
A5
Landscape
custom sized
paper


FD EJECT SPEED
(THIN) Paper type: Type, Paper type:
the unit.
A4 long-edge
feed
B5
Landscape
A5
Landscape
custom sized
paper


Sets the FD eject speed* when Standard, IJ paper, IJ matte paper, or High Use this setting when a paper
quality is selected for Paper type- Type and Thicker is selected for Paper ejection is defective (full is detected
FD EJECT SPEED type-Thickness.
(THICK) *See TM0-07-6-008 "FD EJECT SPEED (NORMAL)." Paper type: Type, Paper type:
A3W, Ledger, Sq0, or Sq1. the unit.
A4 long-edge
feed
B5
Landscape
A5
Landscape
custom sized
paper


FD EJECT SPEED type-Thickness.
(THICK) *See TM0-07-6-008 “FD EJECT SPEED (NORMAL).” Paper type: Type, Paper type:
A4 long-edge
feed
B5
Landscape
A5
Landscape
custom sized
paper


Sets the FD eject speed*2 when Envelope is selected for Paper type- Use this setting when a paper
*1: Use this TM setting value when Envelope is selected for Paper type- by the ejected paper alignment or
FD EJECT SPEED
(ENVELOPE) Paper type: Type, Paper type:
the unit.
A4 long-edge
feed
B5
Landscape
A5
Landscape
custom sized
paper


Sets the FD eject speed*2 when Envelope is selected for Paper type- Use this setting when a paper
*1: Use this TM setting value when Envelope is selected for Paper type- by the ejected paper alignment or
FD EJECT SPEED
(ENVELOPE) Paper type: Type, Paper type:
the unit.
A4 long-edge
feed
B5
Landscape
A5
Landscape
custom sized
paper


Sets the FD eject speed*2 when the following options are selected for Paper
type.
- Card-IJ for Type and Standard for Thickness Use this setting when a paper
- Card-IJ for Type and Thicker for Thickness ejection is defective (full is detected
FD EJECT SPEED - Post Card for Thickness*1
(POST CARD) *1 Use this TM value when Post Card is selected for Paper type-Thickness Paper type: Type, Paper type:
regardless of selected paper for Paper type-Type. Thickness, or individual difference of
*2: See TM0-07-6-008 "FD EJECT SPEED (NORMAL)." the unit.
A4 long-edge
feed
B5
Landscape
A5
Landscape
custom sized
paper


type.
- Card-IJ for Type and Standard for Thickness Use this setting when a paper
- Card-IJ for Type and Thicker for Thickness ejection is defective (full is detected
FD EJECT SPEED - Post Card for Thickness*1
(POST CARD) *1 Use this TM value when Post Card is selected for Paper type-Thickness Paper type: Type, Paper type:
*2: See TM0-07-6-008 “FD EJECT SPEED (NORMAL).” the unit.
The type of the setting value indicates the paper size. “A3” indicates A3,
A4 long-edge
feed
B5
Landscape
A5
Landscape
custom sized
paper


Sets the FD eject speed*2 when Rough paper is selected for Paper type- Use this setting when a paper
*1: When Rough paper is selected for Paper type-Type, Paper type- by the ejected paper alignment or
FD EJECT SPEED
E 07-6-015 1 A3 450 300 1000 1 mm/s Thickness is not selectable. See "Paper type" in "Function Specifications." paper rear end charge) due to the ✔
(ROUGH PAPER) Paper type: Type, Paper type:
the unit.
A4 long-edge
feed
B5
Landscape
A5
Landscape
custom sized
paper


Sets the FD eject speed*2 when Rough paper is selected for Paper type- Use this setting when a paper
*1: When Rough paper is selected for Paper type-Type, Paper type- by the ejected paper alignment or
FD EJECT SPEED
E 07-6-015 1 A3 450 300 1000 1 mm/s Thickness is not selectable. See "Paper type" in "Function Specifications." paper rear end charge) due to the ✔ ✔
(ROUGH PAPER) Paper type: Type, Paper type:
the unit.
E 2 B4 450 300 1000 1 mm/s "B4" represents B4, Legal, Foolscap, and C4. ✔ ✔
E 3 A4 515 300 1000 1 mm/s "A4" represents A4, and Letter. ✔ ✔
E 4 B5 515 300 1000 1 mm/s "B5" represents B5 and C5. ✔ ✔
A4 long-edge
E 5 515 300 1000 1 mm/s "A4 Landscape" represents A4 Landscape and Letter Landscape. ✔ ✔
feed
B5
E 6 515 300 1000 1 mm/s "B5 Landscape" represents B5 Landscape. ✔ ✔
Landscape
E 7 A5 515 300 1000 1 mm/s "A5" represents A5 and Statement. ✔ ✔
E 8 B6 515 300 1000 1 mm/s "B6" represents B6. ✔ ✔
A5
E 9 515 300 1000 1 mm/s "A5 Landscape" represents A5 Landscape. ✔ ✔
Landscape
E 10 A6 515 300 1000 1 mm/s "A6" represents A6, Post Card, C6, and DL Landscape. ✔ ✔
custom sized
E 11 515 300 1000 1 mm/s "Non-standard" represents Irregular. ✔ ✔
paper
If a non-arrival error occurs and a low

FD EJECT
Sets the non-arrival jam compensating data for the FD paper ejection paper feed speed ratio is assumed,
E 07-6-016 SENSOR JAM － - 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔ ✔
sensor. lower the detection timing (to the
-NON ARRIVAL positive side).
If an original remaining error occurs

FD EJECT
Sets the original remaining jam compensating data for the FD paper ejection and a low paper feed speed ratio is
E 07-6-017 SENSOR JAM － - 100 -100 100 1 ms ✔ ✔
sensor. assumed, lower the detection timing
-STILL PRESENT (to the positive side).


Set when an FD paper ejection jam

occurs as a result of envelopes Criteria to clear the
colliding with the scanner table counter that counts the
Sets whether or not to notify full FD paper ejection tray if the number of because too many envelopes have full detection sheet
been placed in the FD ejection unit. number: Power off,
FD ENVELOPE sheets has reached the "full detection sheet number" at FD paper ejection
With or Instead of using the full FD paper transition to sleep,
E 07-6-018 FULL DETECED 1 0 0 1 1 - for envelopes with the scanner connected. ✔ ✔
without notice ejection detection sensor for full when an error occurs
NOTICE 0: Do not notify detection, using the number of The counter continues
1: Notify ejected sheets for full detection to increase until the
allows detection of full FD paper above clearing criteria
ejection before FD paper ejection jam are met.
occurs.
Full detection
E 2 500 1 1000 1 Sheet ✔ ✔
sheet number
FD PAPER
EJECTION PAPER
E 07-6-019 GUIDE HOME － - 0 -500 500 1 0.1mm FD paper ejection paper guide position correction (home position correction) ✔
POSITION
CORRECTION
FD PAPER
EJECTION PAPER
GUIDE POST FD paper ejection paper guide position correction (home position correction)
E 07-6-020 － - 0 -500 500 1 0.1mm ✔
CARD HOME for post cards
POSITION
CORRECTION
Sets the speed for FU paper ejection.

E 07-6-021 FU EJECT SPEED 1 First sheet 509 300 1500 1 mm/s Aligns ejected sheets. ✔ ✔
The setting value type shows the number of FU ejected sheets.
E 2 Second sheet 509 300 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
FU PAPER
EJECTION Adjusts the receiving speed for the FU paper ejection motor with reference Use this setting when the motor
MOTOR to the print speed. speed on the later in the transport
E 07-6-022 － - -10 -50 50 1 0.001 ✔ ✔
RECEIVING Receiving speed [mm/s] = Print speed [mm/s] * (1000 + setting value of this path is not best suited for the print
SPEED TM) / 1000 speed.
ADJUSTMENT


Sets the face up paper ejection speed. The type of the setting value
FU EJECT SPEED indicates the applicable paper size and whether the printing is simplex or When adjusting the ejected paper
E 07-6-023 1 A3 850 0 1500 1 mm/s ✔
(FIRST SHEET) duplex. alignment
"A3" indicates A3, A3W, Ledger, Sq0, or Sq1.
A4
"A4 Landscape (simplex)" represents simplex (one- sided) printing on A4
E 4 Landscape 800 0 1500 1 mm/s ✔
Landscape and Letter Landscape.
(simplex)
A4
"A4 Landscape (duplex)" represents duplex (two-sided) printing on A4
E 5 Landscape 750 0 1500 1 mm/s ✔
(duplex)
B5
"B5 Landscape (simplex)" represents simplex (one- sided) printing on B5
E 7 Landscape 800 0 1500 1 mm/s ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
B5
"B5 Landscape (duplex)" represents duplex (two-sided) printing on B5
E 8 Landscape 750 0 1500 1 mm/s ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)

A5
E 10 Landscape 850 0 1500 1 mm/s ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
A5
E 11 Landscape 850 0 1500 1 mm/s ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
Custom sized
paper


Sets the face up paper ejection speed. The type of the setting value
FU EJECT SPEED
indicates the paper size, transfer direction, and whether the printing is When adjusting the ejected paper
E 07-6-024 (FROM SECOND 1 A3 850 0 1500 1 mm/s ✔
simplex or duplex. alignment
SHEET)
"A3" indicates A3, A3W, Ledger, Sq0, or Sq1.
A4
E 4 Landscape 800 0 1500 1 mm/s ✔
(simplex)
A4
E 5 Landscape 750 0 1500 1 mm/s ✔
(duplex)
B5
E 7 Landscape 800 0 1500 1 mm/s ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
B5
E 8 Landscape 750 0 1500 1 mm/s ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
A5
E 10 Landscape 850 0 1500 1 mm/s ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
A5
E 11 Landscape 850 0 1500 1 mm/s ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
Custom sized
paper
Sets the mode of action for the FU ejection jump motor. 0: Conform to
FU EJECT JUMP
operating specifications Switches the mode of action for the
E 07-6-026 MOTOR ACTION － - 0 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
1: Use the setting value of TM0-07-6-027 "FU EJECT JUMP MOTOR FU ejection jump motor.
SELECTION
SPEED SETTING."


Adjusts the FU ejection jump motor

FU EJECT JUMP Sets FU EJECT JUMP MOTOR SPEED SETTING.
speed when the speed is switched
E 07-6-027 MOTOR SPEED 1 Standard 850 177 1500 1 mm/s This setting value is enabled when TM0-07-6-026 "FU EJECT JUMP ✔ ✔
for TM0-07-6-026 "FU EJECT JUMP
SETTING MOTOR ACTION SELECTION" is set to "1." MOTOR ACTION SELECTION."
E 2 Thin 850 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔

E 3 Thick 850 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 4 Envelope 850 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 5 Card 850 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 6 U1 850 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 7 U2 850 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 8 U3 850 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 9 U4 850 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 10 U5 850 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 11 LW Paper 850 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 12 Rough Paper 850 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
If color shifts occur at paper ends

FU EJECT JUMP
Sets the FU paper eject jump motor speed relative to the printer when a when they are ejected from the
E 07-6-028 MOTOR SPEED － - 990 800 1200 2 0.001 ✔ ✔
multi-finisher is connected. finisher, increase the FU jump roller
CORRECT speed (to the positive side).
When you want to adjust the speed

Sets the speed of the FU paper ejection jump motor starting from the of the FU paper ejection jump motor
FU EJECT JUMP
second sheet that is ejected. when the speed has been changed
E 07-6-029 MOTOR SPEED 1 Standard 900 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
This setting value is enabled when TM0-07-6-026 "FU EJECT JUMP with TM0-07-6- 026 "FU EJECT
(2ND LTR) JUMP MOTOR ACTION
MOTOR ACTION SELECTION" is set to "1."
SELECTION."
E 2 Thin 900 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔

E 3 Thick 900 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 4 Envelope 900 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 5 Card 900 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 6 U1 800 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 7 U2 800 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 8 U3 800 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 9 U4 800 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 10 U5 800 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 11 LW Paper 900 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 12 Rough Paper 900 177 1500 1 mm/s ✔ ✔


If a non-arrival error occurs and a low

FU EJECT
Sets the non-arrival jam compensating data for the FU paper ejection paper feed speed ratio is assumed,
E 07-6-036 SENSOR JAM － - 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔ ✔
sensor. lower the detection timing (to the
-NON ARRIVAL positive side).
If an original remaining error occurs

FU EJECT
Sets the original remaining jam compensating data for the FU paper ejection and a low paper feed speed ratio is
E 07-6-037 SENSOR JAM － - 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔ ✔
sensor. assumed, lower the detection timing
-STILL PRESENT (to the positive side).
FU PAPER Sets the specified position for "No. 0-07-3-012 FU PAPER EJECTION When this is used during fine
EJECTION WING WING CUSTOM". adjustments to the wing settings,
E 07-6-041 － - 2970 720 3500 1 0.1mm ✔
CUSTOM * When the paper guide on the other side is focused on, the movement enter a value on the + side to widen
SETTING amount is half of the setting value. the wing width.
Switch the test mode that is used to position the FU paper ejection wing.
FU PAPER 0: The test mode value that is used is determined by the combination of
EJECTION WING LEF, SEF, simplex, and duplex (No. 0-07-6-043 is used). When adjusting the ejected paper
E 07-6-042 － - 1 0 1 1 - ✔
POSITION 1: The test mode value that is used is determined by the combination of the alignment
SETTING SWITCH paper type thickness, paper size, LEF, SEF, simplex, and duplex (No. 0-07-
6-047 to 0-07- 6-056 are used).
Set the FU paper ejection wing position that is used when "No. 0-07-6-042
FU PAPER
POSITION SETTING SWITCH" is 0. The type of the setting value indicates When adjusting the ejected paper
E 07-6-043 EJECTION WING 1 LEF-simplex -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
the transfer direction and whether the printing is simplex or duplex. * When alignment
POSITION
the paper guide on the other side is focused on, the movement amount is
half of the setting value.
E 2 LEF-duplex -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔

E 3 SEF-simplex -400 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
E 4 SEF-duplex -400 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔


FU PAPER POSITION SETTING SWITCH" is 1 and the paper type thickness is
EJECTION WING "Standard". The type of the setting value indicates the applicable paper size When adjusting the ejected paper
E 07-6-047 1 A3 -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
POSITION and whether the printing is simplex or duplex. alignment
(STANDARD) "A3" indicates A3, A3W, Ledger, Sq0, or Sq1. * When the paper guide on
the other side is focused on, the movement amount is half of the setting
value.
E 2 B4 -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm "B4" represents B4, Legal, Foolscap, and C4. ✔
E 3 A4 -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm "A4" represents A4, Letter, and Legal. ✔
A4
E 4 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(simplex)
A4
E 5 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(duplex)
E 6 B5 -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm "B5" represents B5 and C5. ✔
B5
E 7 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
B5
E 8 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
E 9 A5 -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm "A5" represents A5 and Statement. ✔
A5
E 10 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
A5
E 11 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
E 12 B6 -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm "B6" represents B6. ✔
E 13 A6 -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm "A6" represents A6, Post Card, C6, and DL Landscape. ✔
Custom sized
E 14 -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm "Non-standard" represents Irregular. ✔
paper


POSITION SETTING SWITCH" is 1 and the paper type thickness is "Thin".
FU PAPER
The type of the setting value indicates the applicable paper size and whether When adjusting the ejected paper
E 07-6-048 EJECTION WING 1 A3 -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
the printing is simplex or duplex. alignment
POSITION (THIN)
"A3" indicates A3, A3W, Ledger, Sq0, or Sq1. * When the paper guide on
value.
A4
E 4 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(simplex)
A4
E 5 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(duplex)
B5
E 7 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
B5
E 8 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
A5
E 10 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
A5
E 11 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
Custom sized
paper


FU PAPER POSITION SETTING SWITCH" is 1 and the paper type thickness is "Thick".
EJECTION WING The type of the setting value indicates the applicable paper size and whether When adjusting the ejected paper
E 07-6-049 1 A3 -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
POSITION the printing is simplex or duplex. alignment
(THICK) "A3" indicates A3, A3W, Ledger, Sq0, or Sq1. * When the paper guide on
value.
E 2 B4 -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm "B4" represents B4, Legal, Foolscap, C4, and Kaku2. ✔
E 3 A4 -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm "A4" represents A4, Letter, Legal, and Kaku3. ✔
A4
E 4 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(simplex)
A4
E 5 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(duplex)
B5
E 7 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
B5
E 8 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
A5
E 10 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
A5
E 11 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
Custom sized
paper


FU PAPER POSITION SETTING SWITCH" is 1 and the paper type thickness is
EJECTION WING "Envelope". The type of the setting value indicates the applicable paper size When adjusting the ejected paper
E 07-6-050 1 A3 -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
POSITION and whether the printing is simplex or duplex. alignment
(ENVELOPE) "A3" indicates A3, A3W, Ledger, Sq0, or Sq1. * When the paper guide on
value.
A4
E 4 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(simplex)
A4
E 5 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(duplex)
B5
E 7 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
B5
E 8 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
A5
E 10 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
A5
E 11 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
Custom sized
paper


POSITION SETTING SWITCH" is 1 and the paper type thickness is "Card".
FU PAPER
The type of the setting value indicates the applicable paper size and whether When adjusting the ejected paper
E 07-6-051 EJECTION WING 1 A3 -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
the printing is simplex or duplex. alignment
POSITION (CARD)
value.
A4
E 4 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(simplex)
A4
E 5 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(duplex)
B5
E 7 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
B5
E 8 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)

A5
E 10 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
A5
E 11 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
Custom sized
paper
FU PAPER EJECTION WING POSITION SETTING SWITCH" is 1 and the
FU PAPER
paper type thickness is "LW Paper". The type of the setting value indicates
EJECTION WING When adjusting the ejected paper
E 07-6-052 1 A3 -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm the applicable paper size and whether the printing is simplex or duplex. ✔
POSITION (LW alignment
PAPER)
value.


A4
E 4 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(simplex)
A4
E 5 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(duplex)
B5
E 7 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
B5
E 8 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
A5
E 10 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
A5
E 11 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
Custom sized
paper


FU PAPER paper type thickness is "U1". The type of the setting value indicates the
When adjusting the ejected paper
E 07-6-054 EJECTION WING 1 A3 -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm applicable paper size and whether the printing is simplex or duplex. ✔
alignment
POSITION (U1) "A3" indicates A3, A3W, Ledger, Sq0, or Sq1. * When the paper guide on
value.
A4
E 4 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(simplex)
A4
E 5 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(duplex)
B5
E 7 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
B5
E 8 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
A5
E 10 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
A5
E 11 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
Custom sized
paper


alignment
value.
A4
E 4 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(simplex)
A4
E 5 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(duplex)
B5
E 7 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
B5
E 8 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)

A5
E 10 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
A5
E 11 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
Custom sized
paper
alignment
value.


A4
E 4 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(simplex)
A4
E 5 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(duplex)
B5
E 7 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
B5
E 8 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
A5
E 10 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
A5
E 11 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
Custom sized
paper
alignment
value.
A4
E 4 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(simplex)
A4
E 5 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(duplex)


B5
E 7 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
B5
E 8 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)

A5
E 10 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
A5
E 11 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
Custom sized
paper


alignment
value.
A4
E 4 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(simplex)
A4
E 5 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
(duplex)

B5
E 7 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
B5
E 8 Landscape -450 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)

A5
E 10 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(simplex)
A5
E 11 Landscape -500 -700 500 1 0.1mm ✔
Landscape.
(duplex)
Custom sized
paper


Sets the FD eject speed (*) when the Paper type-Type is Standard, IJ paper, Use this setting when a paper
or High quality, and the Paper type: Thickness is Standard. ejection is defective (full is detected
* Transport speed after the trailing edge of the paper leaves horizontal paper
1 A3 970 300 1500 1 mm/s paper rear end charge) due to the ✔
transfer roller 3 (speed of acceleration and deceleration control) Paper type: Type, Paper type:
2 B4 930 300 1500 1 mm/s "B4" represents B4, Legal, Foolscap, and C4. ✔
3 A4 970 300 1500 1 mm/s "A4" represents A4,and Letter. ✔
FD EJECT SPEED 4 B5 970 300 1500 1 mm/s "B5" represents B5 and C5. ✔
E 07-6-061 (NORMAL) -
DUPLEX A4
5 940 300 1500 1 mm/s "A4 Landscape" represents A4 Landscape and Letter Landscape. ✔
Landscape
B5
6 1010 300 1500 1 mm/s "B5 Landscape" represents B5 Landscape. ✔
Landscape
7 A5 970 300 1500 1 mm/s "A5" represents A5 and Statement. ✔
8 B6 970 300 1500 1 mm/s "B6" represents B6. ✔
A5
9 970 300 1500 1 mm/s "A5 Landscape" represents A5 Landscape. ✔
Landscape
10 A6 970 300 1500 1 mm/s "A6" represents A6, Post Card, C6, and DL Landscape. ✔
Custom sized
11 970 300 1500 1 mm/s "Non-standard" represents Irregular. ✔
paper

1 A3 970 300 1500 1 mm/s *See TM0-07-6-008 "FD EJECT SPEED (NORMAL)." paper rear end charge) due to the ✔
The type of the setting value indicates the paper size. "A3" indicates A3, Paper type: Type, Paper type:
the unit.
FD EJECT SPEED 2 B4 930 300 1500 1 mm/s "B4" represents B4, Legal, Foolscap, C4, and Kaku2. ✔
E 07-6-062 (IJ PAPER) - 3 A4 970 300 1500 1 mm/s "A4" represents A4, Letter, and Kaku3. ✔
DUPLEX 4 B5 970 300 1500 1 mm/s "B5" represents B5 and C5. ✔
A4
Landscape
B5
Landscape
A5
Landscape
Custom sized
paper


1 A3 1050 300 1500 1 mm/s is not selectable. See "Paper type" in "Function Specifications." paper rear end charge) due to the ✔
*2: See TM0-07-6-008 "FD EJECT SPEED (NORMAL)." Paper type: Type, Paper type:
the unit.
FD EJECT SPEED 3 A4 1000 300 1500 1 mm/s "A4" represents A4, and Letter. ✔
E 07-6-063 (LW PAPER) - 4 B5 980 300 1500 1 mm/s "B5" represents B5 and C5. ✔
DUPLEX A4
Landscape
B5
Landscape
A5
Landscape
Custom sized
paper


1 A3 1050 300 1500 1 mm/s Thickness regardless of selected paper for Paper type-Type. paper rear end charge) due to the ✔
*2: See TM0-07-6-008 "FD EJECT SPEED (NORMAL)." Paper type: Type, Paper type:
the unit.
3 A4 1000 300 1500 1 mm/s "A4" represents A4, and Letter. ✔
FD EJECT SPEED 4 B5 980 300 1500 1 mm/s "B5" represents B5 and C5. ✔
E 07-6-064
(THIN) - DUPLEX A4
Landscape
B5
Landscape
A5
Landscape
10 A6 970 300 1500 1 mm/s "A6" represents A6, Post Card, C6, and DL Landscape.u4. ✔
Custom sized
paper
type-Thickness.
*See TM0-07-6-008 "FD EJECT SPEED (NORMAL)." Paper type: Type, Paper type:
3 A4 870 300 1500 1 mm/s "A4" represents A4, and Letter. ✔
4 B5 870 300 1500 1 mm/s "B5" represents B5 and C5. ✔
A4
FD EJECT SPEED Landscape
E 07-6-065
(THICK) - DUPLEX
B5
Landscape
A5
Landscape
Custom sized
paper


type.
- Card IJ for Type and Standard for Thickness Use this setting when a paper
- Card IJ for Type and Thicker for Thickness ejection is defective (full is detected
- Post Card for Thickness*1
*1 Use this TM value when Post Card is selected for Paper type-Thickness Paper type: Type, Paper type:
*2: See TM0-07-6-008 "FD EJECT SPEED (NORMAL)." the unit.
FD EJECT SPEED
E 07-6-066 (POST CARD) - 2 B4 970 300 1500 1 mm/s "B4" represents B4, Legal, Foolscap, and C4. ✔
DUPLEX 3 A4 970 300 1500 1 mm/s "A4" represents A4, and Letter. ✔
4 B5 970 300 1500 1 mm/s "B5" represents B5 and C5. ✔
A4
Landscape
B5
Landscape
A5
Landscape
Custom sized
paper
Print head area
HEAD PRESSURE Sets the mode to let the BP standby at the lower limit position before the Volatile save (The
CHECK heads are pressurized in order to view the pressure apply position. Switches whether or not to view the default value is
E 08-6-001 － - 0 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
OPERATION 0: Normal cleaning sequence pressure apply position of the head. restored by turning the
MODE 1: Cleaning sequence to view the pressure apply position power off)


Change the minimum number of sheets for cleaning cycles.

This TM is designed to change the minimum number of sheets for cleaning
cycles on the Admin Menu. The value set by this TM will be applied when
the cleaning cycle setting screen on the Admin Menu is displayed the next
time.
Note: The value of this TM is used to initialize the unit as the default value
CLEANING CYCLE when TEST MODE CLEAR or FACTORY DEFAULT is executed.
Changes the minimum number of
E 09-6-001 MINIMUM － - 0 0 1 1 - [Supplement] ✔ ✔
sheets for cleaning cycles.
QUANTITY When this TM is executed to set the value to "0" with a value less than 500
sheets (either of 400, 300, 200, or 100) set for the cleaning cycle setting on
the Admin Menu, the value less than 500 set for the cleaning cycle setting
on the Admin Menu is cleared and the value is changed to the default value
based on the tag setting.
0: 500 sheets
1: 100 sheets
NORMAL Sets whether or not to perform normal cleaning (enable/ disable).

Switches whether or not to perform
E 09-6-002 CLEANING ON/ － - 1 0 1 1 - 0: Disable ✔ ✔
normal cleaning.
OFF 1: Enable
STRONG Sets whether or not to perform hyper cleaning (enable/ disable).

E 09-6-003 CLEANING ON/ － - 0 0 1 1 - 0: Disable ✔ ✔
hyper cleaning.
OFF 1: Enable
EXTRA Sets whether or not to perform extra cleaning (enable/ disable).

E 09-6-004 CLEANING － - 0 0 1 1 - 0: Disable ✔ ✔
extra cleaning.
ON/OFF 1: Enable
CLEANING Sets the execution timing of cleaning.

Changes the execution timing of
E 09-6-005 TIMING － - 1 0 1 1 - 0: When print starts ✔ ✔
cleaning.
SELECTION 1: When the unit is turned on
NORMAL Sets the time to execute normal cleaning (elapsed time since the last Changes the interval until the next
E 09-6-006 CLEANING LEAVE － - 8 8 240 8 Hours cleaning is completed). Extra cleaning, hyper cleaning, and normal cleaning normal cleaning starts after normal ✔ ✔
TIME have decreasing cleaning execution priorities. cleaning is completed.
STRONG Sets the time to execute hyper cleaning (elapsed time since the last cleaning Changes the interval until the next
E 09-6-007 CLEANING LEAVE － - 7 7 60 1 Days is completed). Extra cleaning, hyper cleaning, and normal cleaning have hyper cleaning starts after hyper ✔ ✔
TIME decreasing cleaning execution priorities. cleaning is completed.


Sets the time to execute extra cleaning (elapsed time since the last cleaning
EXTRA Changes the interval until the next
is completed). Extra cleaning, hyper cleaning, and normal cleaning have
E 09-6-008 CLEANING LEAVE － - 90 5 120 5 Days extra cleaning starts after extra ✔ ✔
decreasing cleaning is completed.
TIME
cleaning execution priorities.
After card paper is fed, paper dust

which contains flake from the back or
0: No cleaning option selected for each type of paper (the same as EX) paper fiber may stick on the heads or
CLEANING 1: Execute hyper cleaning after card paper is fed* the cleaning wiper. This causes
scratched head nozzle surfaces and
SELECTION *: Hyper cleaning is performed for the next cleaning action after paper is fed
E 09-6-009 － - 0 0 1 1 - results in poor image quality and ✔ ✔
AFTER CARD with Paper type set to Card paper. excessive amount of ink drops from
PAPER FEED (Applied to automatic cleaning and recovery cleaning after the power is the heads.
turned on, etc.) Set this TM to 1 to prevent scratched
head nozzle surfaces for users who
frequently use card paper.
Sets the number of printable pages when the ink temperature is in a low
temperature range from the lowest temperature for print (T2) to the
temperature for shifting to normal operation (T11).
If a value other than 0 is set, the printer prints the number of pages
specified with the setting value even at low temperature.
LOW Note that print at low temperature may cause smears with ink mist, poor
TEMPERATURE image quality, and stops due to insufficient power errors with high coverage
E 09-6-011 － - 0 0 9999 1 Pages Use to print even at low temperature. ✔ ✔
MAX PRINT rate of originals.
QUANTITY Note: The number of pages are counted when paper is ejected and print is
stopped after the ink temperature is confirmed.
If the ink temperature has reached the temperature for shifting to normal
operation (T11) or higher, the
printer operates normally and continues to print without stopping print at the
number of pages set by this TM.
Sets the head gap when Standard is selected for Paper type-Thickness. 0:
Standard
1: Card paper
HEAD GAP
E 09-6-015 － - 0 0 3 1 - 2: Envelope 1 Changes the head gap. ✔
(STANDARD)
3: Envelope 2 * This test mode number and name are not displayed on the
panel. (All non-display)


Sets the head gap.

0: Standard
Changes the head gap for each
E 09-6-016 HEAD GAP 1 Standard 0 0 3 1 - 1: Card paper ✔
paper.
2: Envelope 1
3: Envelope 2
E 2 Thin 0 0 3 1 - ✔
E 3 Thick 1 0 3 1 - ✔
E 4 Envelope 2 0 3 1 - ✔
E 5 Card 1 0 3 1 - ✔
E 6 U1 0 0 3 1 - ✔
E 7 U2 0 0 3 1 - ✔
E 8 U3 0 0 3 1 - ✔
E 9 U4 0 0 3 1 - ✔
E 10 U5 0 0 3 1 - ✔
E 11 LW Paper 0 0 3 1 - ✔
E 12 Rough Paper 0 0 3 1 - ✔
HEAD GAP
Sets the head gap. 0: Standard 1: Card paper
(OTHER TYPES Changes the head gap for each
E 09-6-016 2 Thin 0 0 3 1 - 2: Envelope 1 ✔
THAN paper.
3: Envelope 2 * The type of the setting value indicates the paper type.
STANDARD)
E 3 Thick 1 0 3 1 - ✔
E 4 Envelope 2 0 3 1 - ✔
E 5 Card 1 0 3 1 - ✔
E 6 U1 0 0 3 1 - ✔
E 7 U2 0 0 3 1 - ✔
E 8 U3 0 0 3 1 - ✔
E 9 U4 0 0 3 1 - ✔
E 10 U5 0 0 3 1 - ✔
E 11 LW Paper 0 0 3 1 - ✔
Enable when replacing the heads or the circulation system.

When the power is turned on with the mode enabled, ink initial filling is
HEAD REPLACE When replacing the heads or the
E 09-6-017 － - 0 0 1 1 - executed. ✔ ✔
MODE circulation system.
0: Disable
1: Enable
Detects for a stretched belt at a specified interval and compensates head

Switches whether or not to
DROP TIMING ejections.
E 09-6-018 － - 1 0 1 1 - compensate head ejections when the ✔ ✔
BELT STRETCH 0: Compensate unit is replaced.
1: Do not compensate


This mode makes it possible to print even when the horizontal transport unit
is removed.
HEAD When you set this to ON, the count-up timing of the charge count will be set
E 09-6-019 ADJUSTMENT － - 0 0 1 1 - to "Count up when discharging from the main unit." regardless of the setting Used when adjusting the heads ✔
PRINT SETTING of TM0-04- 6-003 "CHARGE COUNT TIMING SELECTION".
0: OFF
1: ON
Switching "Enable" when liquid level balance is expected to be unevened due to

machine transportation.
It is set to "Enable" when transporting
TRANSPORT INK This test mode circulate the ink and replenish the ink when necessary and keep on
the printer from one location to
E 09-6-020 CIRCULATION － - 0 0 1 1 - circulating the ink until the ink level detection in all the ink tanks become normal. ✔ ✔
another, the ink volume between
RECOVERY tanks become uneven.
0: Disable
1: Enable
Sets the compensating data for ink remaining volume calculation processing If deviations occur between the
related to ink consumption processing. actual ink consumption and
INK VOLUME
E 09-6-021 1 K 10 8 12 1 0.1 times The compensation is performed by applying the setting value of this TM at remaining volume display, ✔ ✔
CORRECTION compensate the subtraction value to
ink subtraction processing.
The setting value types represent ink colors. reduce the difference.
E 2 C 10 8 12 1 0.1 times ✔ ✔
Also applicable to the

following.
E 3 M(R,B) 10 8 12 1 0.1 times - R for KCRY model ✔ ✔
- R for KR model
- B for KB model
E 4 Y 10 8 12 1 0.1 times ✔ ✔
Disables ink temperature adjustment during test modes. Stops adjustment

during ink temperature adjustment or prevents ink temperature adjustment
Volatile save (The
INK from being started during non-adjustment status. Switches the ink temperature
default value is
E 09-6-025 TEMPERATURE － - 0 0 1 1 - Note: The setting value of this test returns to "0: Enable" when the printer adjustment to enable/disable during ✔ ✔
ADJUST ON/OFF goes out from test mode. test modes for operation check.
power off)
0: Enable
1: Disable


When you want to perform

INK evaluations by switching whether to
Sets whether to execute the ink temperature adjustment operation.
TEMPERATURE execute the ink temperature
E 09-6-026 － - 0 0 1 1 - 0: Execute ✔ ✔
ADJUST adjustment operation.
1: Do not execute Setting values are applied when the
OPERATION
power is rebooted.
INK CIRCULATION
DURATION FOR
Sets the circulation duration for TM0-09-3-069 "INK CIRCULATION FOR
E 09-6-050 TM EXTERNAL － - 2 1 30 1 Minutes ✔ ✔
EXTERNAL FILTER AIR REMOVAL."
FILTER AIR
REMOVAL
INK CIRCULATION
DURATION FOR Sets the circulation duration for TM0-09-3-070 "INK CIRCULATION FOR
E 09-6-051 － - 120 1 600 1 Minutes ✔ ✔
TM EXTERNAL EXTERNAL FILTER."
FILTER
TM INITIAL INK
FILLING Set the number of repetitions to perform with TM0-09-3- 013 "INITIAL INK
E 09-6-052 － - 8 1 50 1 Times ✔ ✔
REPETITION FILLING REPETITION MODE".
MODE COUNT
TM STRONG
MAINTENANCE
WITHOUT Set the repetition count for TM0-09-3-006 "STRONG MAINTENANCE
E 09-6-053 － - 5 1 50 1 Times ✔
OPENING THE WITHOUT OPENING THE INK- SUPPLY VALVE."
INK-SUPPLY
VALVE_COUNT
When you want to change the time

INK PAN MOTOR from the INK PAN MOTOR OPEN
This is the time from the INK PAN MOTOR OPEN POS SENSOR turning
E 09-6-060 OPEN POSITION － - 60 0 500 10 ms POS SENSOR turning ON to the ✔
ON to the start of the drive stop processing of the ink pan motor. start of the drive stop
STOP DELAY
processing of the ink pan motor
INK PAN
STORAGE PAUSE This is the time from the start to the stop of movement of the ink pan to the When you want to adjust the tilt of
E 09-6-061 1 Extra 2000 1000 3000 10 ms storage position. ✔ ✔
POSITION TILT the ink pan pause position
ADJUST (This is the drive time of the ink pan motor until the pause position is
reached during the movement from the open position to the storage
position.)
"Extra" is extra cleaning and initial filling.

E 2 Strong 2000 1000 3000 10 ms "Strong" is a strong cleaning. ✔ ✔


When you want to adjust the light

INK PAN MOTOR blockage amount of the INK PAN
MOTOR STRAGE POS
STORAGE This is the time from the INK PAN MOTOR STRAGE POS SENSOR turning
E 09-6-062 － - 0 0 500 10 ms SENSOR, such as when a light ✔ ✔
POSITION STOP ON to the start of the drive stop processing of the ink pan motor. blockage error occurs on the INK
DELAY PAN MOTOR STRAGE POS
SENSOR
WITH OR
WITHOUT Sets whether or not to flush for color mixing prevention.
Use to prevent flushing for operation
E 09-6-091 FLUSHING FOR － - 0 0 1 1 - 0: Flush ✔ ✔
check.
COLOR MIXING 1: Do not flush
PREVENTION
FLUSHING DROP Use to change the number of drops

Sets the number of drops per pixel for flushing. Set the value to make the
E 09-6-095 NUMBER － - 1 1 11 1 drop per pixel for flushing for operation ✔ ✔
flushing conditions best suited. check.
SETTING
NUMBER OF
FLUSHED LINES
Sets the number of lines to be flushed. Set the value to make the flushing Use to change the number of lines
E 09-6-096 FOR COLOR － - 15 3 1000 1 line ✔ ✔
conditions best suited. for flushing for operation check.
MIXING
PREVENTION.
Moves the BP to the fixed position when the power is turned off. (The BP
needs to be fixed during transportation because of on-vehicle printer.) Saves
BP POWER OFF Moves the BP to the fixed position
the setting value as non-volatile data.
E 09-6-101 POSITION － - 0 0 1 1 - when the main unit is packed in a ✔ ✔
0: Move to the normal position simple manner.
SELECTION
1: Move to the fixed position
2: Move to the maintenance position
Moves the BP to the fixed position when the power is turned off. (For
Volatile save (The
BP POWER OFF reduced workload for packing) Moves the BP to the fixed position
default value is
E 09-6-102 POS SELECTION － - 0 0 1 1 - Saves the setting value as volatile data. when the main unit is packed in a ✔ ✔
-ONE TIME 0: Move to the normal position simple manner.
power off)
1: Move to the fixed position


MD RECOVERY Changes the times of the head test

The number of sheets printed for the head test pattern print in the MD
E 09-6-111 -PRINT QTY － - 1 1 10 1 Sheet pattern print in the MD recovery ✔ ✔
recovery action. action.
SETTING
MD RECOVERY Changes the repeated times, a set of

In the MD recovery action, the times repeated automatically in which a set of
E 09-6-112 -REPEAT QTY － - 3 1 20 1 Times print and normal cleaning of the MD ✔ ✔
print and normal cleaning is counted as one time. recovery action.
SETTING
MD RECOVERY
Changes the number of repeated
E 09-6-113 -ACTION QTY － - 2 1 5 1 Times The number of repeated times of the MD recovery action. ✔ ✔
times of the MD recovery action.
SETTING
MD RECOVERY Changes the repeated times of

The number of repeated times of the MD recovery action in the recovery
E 09-6-114 -CLEANING QTY － - 1 1 5 1 Times recovery cleaning in the MD recovery ✔ ✔
cleaning. action.
SETTING
Sets the head gap for print of the following test modes in the MD recovery
action.
- TM0-09-3-078 "K-MD RECOVERY ACTION"
- TM0-09-3-079 "C-MD RECOVERY ACTION"
- TM0-09-3-080 "M-MD RECOVERY ACTION"
MD RECOVERY
- TM0-09-3-081 "Y-MD RECOVERY ACTION" Changes the head gap in the MD
E 09-6-115 -HEAD GAP － - 3 0 3 1 - ✔ ✔
- TM0-09-3-082 “P (R, Gr)-MD RECOVERY PRINT ACTION” recovery action.
SELECTION
- TM0-09-3-083 "K2-MD RECOVERY PRINT ACTION"
0: Standard
1: Card paper
2: Envelope 1 position
3: Envelope 2 position
Sets the duration of TM0-09-3-068 "INK CIRCULATION ACTION."

(When TM0-09-3-068 "INK CIRCULATION ACTION" Changes the acting duration of TM0-
INK CICULATION
E 09-6-131 － - 10 1 1440 1 Minutes is performed, the ink path pressure is moved to the "NOZZLE PRESSURE - 09-3-068 "INK CIRCULATION ✔ ✔
DURATION
PRINT". This test mode sets the continuous print pressure duration after the ACTION."
mode is shifted to NOZZLE PRESSURE - PRINT.
SWITCHING 0: Drive the heating precursor and the head cooling fan according to the
HEATING traditional specifications. Minimizes drive noises while the
E 09-6-140 － - 0 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
PRECURSOR TO 1: Do not drive the heating precursor. The head cooling fan is not driven printer is idle.
ON/OFF when print is not performed.


SWITCHING
STANDBY MODE 0: Perform ink temperature adjustment even when the printer is in idle
TEMPERATURE (traditional temperature adjustment control) Minimizes drive noises while the
E 09-6-141 － - 0 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
ADJUSTING 1: Do not perform ink temperature adjustment when the printer is idle and printer is idle.
ACTION TO ON/ perform after print starts.
OFF
IF unit
DECURLER
Switches whether or not to detect motor lock of the decurler motor.
MOTOR LOCK
E 10-6-001 － - 1 0 1 1 - 0: Do not detect ✔ ✔
DETECTION
1: Detect
SETTING
Tag control
Sets whether or not to configure as ink kit dedicated printer.

* This test mode number and name are not displayed on the panel. (All non-
INK KIT SPECIAL display) Switches between normal and ink kit
E 11-6-001 － - 0 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
CONFIGRATION * Execute this test mode by directly entering the number. dedicated printers.
0: Standard; both ink kit and standard ink can be used 1: Ink kit only; use
only ink kits


Scanner
Sets whether or not to connect to the scanner.

0: No scanner connected; copy and scanner modes are not available for
use. Items related to the scanner of the administrator settings are also not
available for use. Note: When the setting value is "0," no scanner related
Note that setting the
functions are displayed even if the scanner is actually connected. No
setting value of this TM
communication with the scanner is made. No error related to the scanner is
to "0" hides all the
displayed. function buttons on the
1: Scanner connected (for copying and scanning); copy and scanner modes Home Screen (Copy
SCANNER are available for use. Items related to the scanner of the administrator Switches the scanner connection through USB) when
E 21-6-001 － - 0 0 2 1 - ✔ ✔
SELECTION settings are also available for use. status and available functions. only the copy and scan
"1" is not allowed for Chinese models. If "1" is selected and set, "2" is set. options are turned on
for the "Display Setting"
2: Scanner connected (for copying); copy mode is available for use. Items
on the "Home Screen
related to the copier of the administrator settings are also available for use.
Customization" of the
Items related to scan mode of the administrator settings are not available for Admin Menu.
use.
0: No scanner connected
1: Scanner connected (for copying and scanning) 2: Scanner connected (for
copying)
Locks/unlocks the scanner action (permit/prohibit the actions).

When "1 = Prohibit actions" is set, actions other than download of normal
mode (FB/AF) and AF initialization, and TM0-21-6-002 "SCANNER
LOCK/UNLOCK
SCANNER SELECTION" do not operate.
Switches actions to permit/prohibit to
E 21-6-002 LOCK/UNLOCK － - 0 0 1 1 - When actions other than download of normal mode (FB/ AF) and AF ✔ ✔
fix the scanner carriage.
SELECTION initialization, and TM0-21-6-002 "SCANNER LOCK/UNLOCK SELECTION"
are instructed, an error (U006-4330 "Scanner lock action is prohibited" is
issued.
0: Permit actions
1: Prohibit actions
Allows you to set the time until the FB print head carriage (AFE) enters
POWER DOWN
E 21-6-004 － - 300 0 6000 1 - power down (power saving) mode with the pressure plate (AF) open. ✔ ✔
MODE TIMEOUT
Setting time unit: Seconds


Scanner
Adjusts the horizontal position for scanning documents on the FB.

With "Minimum value = 81," the image shifts -2.0 mm from the home
FB SCAN
See the position. With "Maximum value = 175" the image shifts +2.0 mm from the
HORIZON 0.04233 Corrects shifted horizontal positions
E 21-6-011 － - "Description" 81 175 1 home position. ✔ ✔
POSITION mm (main scanning) for FB scanning.
column. Negative values shift the image to the left and positive values to the right.
ADJUST
Default:
Setting value for TM0-21-6-021 "FB SCAN DEFAULT HORIZON POSITION"
Adjusts the scan starting position (amount of scan skip) for scanning
documents on the FB.
FB SCAN START See the position. With "Maximum value = 158" the image shifts +2.6 mm from the Corrects shifted scan starting
0.0847m
E 21-6-012 POSITION － - "Description" 98 158 1 home position. positions (amount of scan skip) for ✔ ✔
m FB scanning.
ADJUST column. Negative values shift the image to the rear edge and positive values to the
front edge.
Default:
Setting value for TM0-21-6-022 "FB SCAN DEFAULT START POSITION"
Adjusts the speed (elongation/shrinkage) for scanning documents on the

FB.
Adjusts the speed of the FB read pulse motor. Setting unit: 1 (0.1%)
With "Minimum value = 123," the speed decreases by
FB SCAN IMAGE See the
-0.5% from the standard. With "Maximum value = 133," the speed increases Corrects elongated/shrunk images for
E 21-6-013 ELONGATION － - "Description" 123 133 1 0.001 ✔ ✔
by +0.5% from the standard. FB scanning.
ADJUST column.
Negative values elongate the image and positive values shrink the image.
Default:
Setting value for TM0-21-6-023 "FB SCAN DEFAULT IMAGE
ELONGATION"


Sets the default value for TM0-21-6-011 "FB SCAN HORIZON POSITION
ADJUST."
* The setting retains the default value even if TM0-21-4- 002 "SCANNER
FB SCAN TEST PARAMETER CLEAR" is executed.
Changes the default value for TM0-
DEFAULT 0.04233 A default value definition test is used in scanner production and the default
E 21-6-021 － - 128 81 175 1 21-6-011 "FB SCAN ✔ ✔
HORIZON mm value setting test is used in the field. HORIZON POSITION ADJUST."
POSITION Use the default value for the test used in the field for scanner control.
Once the default value definition test is set, the default value setting test
sets the setting value as the default value (the setting value of the test to set
the default value).
Sets the default value for TM0-21-6-012 "FB SCAN START POSITION
ADJUST."
FB SCAN * The setting retains the default value even if TM0-21- 4-002 "SCANNER Changes the default value for TM0-
0.0847m
E 21-6-022 DEFAULT START － - 128 98 158 1 TEST PARAMETER CLEAR" is 21-6-012 "FB SCAN START ✔ ✔
m POSITION ADJUST."
POSITION executed.
See the description for TM0-21-6-021"FB SCAN DEFAULT HORIZON
POSITION."
Sets the default value for TM0-21-6-013 "FB SCAN IMAGE ELONGATION
ADJUST."
FB SCAN Changes the default value for TM0-
E 21-6-023 DEFAULT IMAGE － - 128 123 133 1 0.001 21-6-013 "FB SCAN IMAGE ✔ ✔
TEST PARAMETER CLEAR" is executed. ELONGATION ADJUST."
ELONGATION
See the description for TM0-21-6-021"FB SCAN DEFAULT HORIZON
POSITION."
Scanner
Adjusts the horizontal position for scanning documents using the AF.
AF SCAN With "Minimum value = 81," the image shifts -2.0 mm from the home
HORIZON 0.04233 position. With "Maximum value = 175" the image shifts +2.0 mm from the Corrects shifted horizontal positions
E 21-6-031 1 Front 128 81 175 1 ✔ ✔
POSITION mm home position. (main scanning) for AF scanning.
ADJUST Negative values shift the image to the right and positive values to the left.
The type of setting value indicates the surface that will be scanned.
0.04233
E 2 Back 128 81 175 1 ✔ ✔
mm


documents (surfaces) using the AF.
With "Minimum value = -40," the image shifts -4.0 mm from the home
AF SCAN START Corrects shifted scan starting
position. With "Maximum value = 40" the image shifts +4.0 mm from the
E 21-6-032 POSITION 1 High speed 0 -40 40 1 0.1mm positions (amount of scan skip) of the ✔ ✔
home position. surface for AF scanning.
ADJUST (F)
Negative values shift the image to the rear edge and positive values to the
front edge.
The setting value type represents the speed mode.
E 2 Low speed 0 -40 40 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
documents (backs) using the AF.
With "Minimum value = -40," the image shifts -4.0 mm from the home
E 21-6-033 POSITION 1 High speed 0 -40 40 1 0.1mm positions (amount of scan skip) of the ✔ ✔
home position. back for AF scanning.
ADJUST (B)
Negative values shift the image to the front edge and positive values to the
rear edge.
E 2 Low speed 0 -40 40 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
Adjusts the speed (elongation/shrinkage) for scanning documents (surfaces)

using the AF.
Adjusts the speed of the AF read pulse motor. Setting unit: 1 (0.01%)
With "Minimum value = -127," the speed decreases by
-1.27% from the standard. With "Maximum value = 127," the speed
AF SCAN IMAGE See the increases by +1.27% from the standard.
Corrects elongated/shrunk surface
E 21-6-034 ELONGATION 1 High speed "Description" -127 127 1 0.0001 Negative values elongate the image and positive values shrink the image. ✔ ✔
images for AF scanning.
ADJUST (F) column. Note: The surface and back are set individually.
Note: The setting value is saved in the EEPROM for the AF.
Default:
Setting value for TM0-21-6-041 "AF SCAN DEFAULT IMAGE
ELONGATION (F)"
See the
E 2 Low speed "Description" -127 127 1 0.0001 ✔ ✔
column.


Scanner
Adjusts the speed (elongation/shrinkage) for scanning documents (backs)

using the AF.
Adjusts the speed of the AF read pulse motor. Setting unit: 1 (0.01%)
With "Minimum value = -127," the speed decreases by
-1.27% from the standard. With "Maximum value = 127," the speed
AF SCAN IMAGE See the
increases by +1.27% from the standard. Corrects elongated/shrunk back
E 21-6-035 ELONGATION 1 High speed "Description" -127 127 1 0.0001 ✔ ✔
Negative values elongate the image and positive values shrink the image. images for AF scanning.
ADJUST (B) column.
Note: The surface and back are set individually.
Default:
Setting value for TM0-21-6-042 "AF SCAN DEFAULT IMAGE
ELONGATION (B)"
See the
E 2 Low speed "Description" -127 127 1 0.0001 ✔ ✔
column.
Adjusts the print head carriage position for scanning documents using the
AF.
AF SCAN home position.
See the
CARRIAGE 0.0847m Negative values shift the image to the rear edge and positive values to the Adjusts the print head carriage
E 21-6-036 － - "Description" 98 158 1 ✔ ✔
POSITION m front edge. position for AF scanning.
column.
ADJUST Note: The setting value is saved in the EEPROM for the FB instead of the
EEPROM for the AF.
Default:
Setting value for TM0-21-6-043 "AF SCAN DEFAULT CARRIAGE
POSITION"
Adjusts the calibration starting position for the AF back scanning equipment.
Allows you to adjust the calibration
AF CALIBRATION If the setting value is decreased, scanning of the white plate starts earlier
position to operate normally when
E 21-6-037 START POSITION － - 0 -100 100 1 mm and the calibrated position is shifted to the top side. ✔ ✔
scanned back images with the AF
ADJUST If the setting value is increased, scanning of the white plate starts later and have inappropriate density.
the calibrated position is shifted to the bottom side.


Sets the default value for TM0-21-6-034 "AF SCAN IMAGE ELONGATION
ADJUST (F)."
AF SCAN Changes the default value for TM0-
E 21-6-041 DEFAULT IMAGE 1 High speed 0 -127 127 1 0.0001 21-6-034 "AF SCAN IMAGE ✔ ✔
TEST PARAMETER CLEAR" is executed. ELONGATION ADJUST (F)."
ELONGATION (F)
E 2 Low speed -127 127 1 0.0001 ✔ ✔
Sets the default value for TM0-21-6-035 "AF SCAN IMAGE ELONGATION
AF SCAN ADJUST (B)." Changes the default value for TM0-
E 21-6-042 DEFAULT IMAGE － - 0 -127 127 1 0.0001 * The setting retains the default value even if TM0-21-4-002 "SCANNER 21-6-035 "AF SCAN IMAGE ✔ ✔
ELONGATION (B) TEST PARAMETER CLEAR" is executed. ELONGATION ADJUST (B)."
Sets the default value for TM0-21-6-036 "AF SCAN CARRIAGE POSITION
AF SCAN
ADJUST." Changes the default value for TM0-
DEFAULT 0.0847m
E 21-6-043 － - 128 98 158 1 * The setting retains the default value even if TM0-21-4-002 "SCANNER 21-6-036 "AF SCAN ✔ ✔
CARRIAGE m CARRIAGE POSITION ADJUST."
TEST PARAMETER CLEAR" is executed.
POSITION
Scanner
Adjusts the scan starting position (amount of scan skip) for scanning post
cards (surfaces) using the AF.
With "Minimum value = 0," the image shifts -5.0 mm from the home position.
With "Maximum value = 100" the image shifts +5.0 mm from the home
E 21-6-046 POSITION ADJ 1 High speed 50 0 100 1 0.1mm positions (amount of scan skip) of ✔ ✔
position. post card surfaces for AF scanning.
(CARD/F)
front edge.
E 2 Low speed 50 0 100 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔


Adjusts the scan starting position (amount of scan skip) for scanning post
cards (surfaces) using the AF.
With "Minimum value = 0," the image shifts -5.0 mm from the home position.
With "Maximum value = 100" the image shifts +5.0 mm from the home
E 21-6-047 POSITION ADJ 1 High speed 50 0 100 1 0.1mm positions (amount of scan skip) of ✔ ✔
position. post card backs for AF scanning.
(CARD/B)
front edge.
E 2 Low speed 50 0 100 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
Adjusts the speed (elongation/shrinkage) for scanning post cards using the
AF.
Adjusts the speed of the AF read pulse motor. With "Minimum value = 0,"
the speed decreases by
AF SCAN IMAGE
-10.00% from the standard. With "Maximum value Corrects elongated/shrunk images for
E 21-6-048 ELONGATION 1 High speed 1000 0 1300 1 0.0001 ✔ ✔
= 1300," the speed increases by +3.00% from the standard. scanning post cards with the AF.
ADJ (CARD)
Negative values elongate the image and positive values shrink the image.
Note: Both the surface and back use the setting value of this TM.
E 2 Low speed 1000 0 1300 1 0.0001 ✔ ✔
IMAGE
ELONGATION Zooms scanned data horizontally in copy/scanner modes. Corrects elongated/shrunk main
E 21-6-051 1 Front 1000 960 1040 1 0.001 ✔ ✔
CORRECTION- The type of setting value indicates the surface that will be scanned. scanning sizes.
HORIZON
E 2 Back 1000 960 1040 1 0.001 ✔ ✔


Sets whether or not to add a one pixel horizontal fine black line to scanned
image data.
Adds a one pixel horizontal fine black line to scanned image data. The fine
black line is horizontally placed at 148.5 mm from the left document end
(original stop position) - the horizontal center of A3). The position of the fine
black line does not change even if other test mode setting values are
changed.
HORIZONTAL Note: This TM only sets print with or without the fine black line. To obtain For fine adjustment of scanner
E 21-6-053 － - 0 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
LINE ON/OFF printed matters actually with the fine black line, scan/copy in normal mode. settings including position alignment.
Note: The default test mode value (print without fine black line) is restored
by turning the power off.
The setting value is not saved in the EEPROM because the default test
mode value is restored by turning the power off.
Note: This mode is enabled only with the reproduction ratio "100%."
0: Without fine black line
1: With fine black line
Scanner
Sets whether or not to add a one pixel vertical fine black line to scanned
image data.
Adds a one pixel vertical fine black line to scanned image data. The fine
black line is vertically placed at 10 mm from the document top (original stop
position). The position of the fine black line does not change even if other
test mode setting values are changed.
Note: This TM only sets print with or without the fine black line. To obtain
VERTICAL LINE For fine adjustment of scanner
E 21-6-054 － - 0 0 1 1 - printed matters actually with the fine black line, scan/copy in normal mode. ✔ ✔
ON/OFF settings including position alignment.
Note: The default test mode value (print without fine black line) is restored
by turning the power off.
The setting value is not saved in the EEPROM because the default test
mode value is restored by turning the power off.
Note: This mode is enabled only with the reproduction ratio "100%."
0: Without fine black line
1: With fine black line
Sets COPY MODE MASK AMOUNT.

Setting value "0" applies no mask.
Prevents the shadows of stoppers or
COPY MODE Note: Masking prevents the shadows of the stoppers or documents.
E 21-6-056 － - 1 0 5 1 mm documents due to small mask ✔ ✔
MASK AMOUNT For FB scanning, the two edges of documents touching the stoppers are amount for copy.
masked.
For AF scanning, the four edges of documents are masked.


Prevents the shadows of stoppers or

SCAN MODE Sets SCAN MODE MASK AMOUNT.
E 21-6-057 － - 1 0 5 1 mm documents due to small mask ✔ ✔
MASK AMOUNT Setting value "0" applies no mask. amount for scan.
Changes the LED luminous energy of the collar scanner depending on the
setting value. Analyzes causes of image defects by
Note: The greater the value is, the larger (more bright) the LED luminous changing LED luminous energy. (If
Volatile save (The
SCANNER LED energy is. changing the LED luminous energy
default value is
E 21-6-059 LIGHT VOLUME 1 FB 50 1 100 1 - Note: The value set in the test mode is reset by turning off the power. does not improve an image defect, ✔ ✔
ADJUST Note: The test mode setting value is not saved. (Not saved in the scanner you can judge it is caused by
power off)
EEPROM either.) something other than LED luminous
energy.
The setting value type represents the scanning action. "AF (F300)"
represents AF scan surface 300 dpi.
E 2 AF (F300) 50 1 100 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 AF (F600) 50 1 100 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 AF (B300) 50 1 100 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 AF (B600) 50 1 100 1 - ✔ ✔
Sets whether or not to detect disturbance light (at large angles) when the
middle angle sensor is turned off, and the mode of detection.
EXTRANEOUS
0: Do not detect Switches modes of disturbance light
E 21-6-060 LIGHT DETECT － - 3 0 3 1 - ✔ ✔
1: Detect - Max. brightness detection mode detection.
MODE SELECT
2: Detect - Brightness variation detection mode 3: Detect - Max. brightness
detection mode and brightness variation detection mode
Scanner
Sets the analog gain adjustment value for FB scanning. Save the setting
value on the EEPROM and operate with the setting value until the next
analog gain value adjustment.
Note that the next analog gain value adjustment is performed without using Changes the analog gain adjustment
ANALOG GAIN
E 21-6-061 1 R0 0 0 12 1 - the set value. value when scanner errors occur to ✔ ✔
ADJUST investigate the cause.
After analog gain value adjustment is performed, the setting value is
changed to the value as a result of adjustment.
The value saved in the EEPROM is also changed. The type of setting value
indicates the data.
E 2 G0 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 B0 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 R1 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 G1 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 B1 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔


Configure the digital gain value adjustment at the time of the FB scan.
Save the setting value on the EEPROM and operate with the setting value
until the next digital gain value adjustment. In the event that a scanner- related
However, the next digital gain value adjustment is to be performed without error has occurred, change the
Digital gain value
E 21-6-062 1 R0 0 0 127 1 - using the setting value. adjustment value of the digital gain ✔ ✔
adjustment and conduct an investigation of the
After the digital gain value adjustment, change the setting value to the value
resulting from the adjustment. The value saved in the EEPROM is also cause of the problem.
changed.
The type of setting value indicates the data.
E 2 G0 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 B0 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 R1 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 G1 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 B1 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
Configure the analog gain value adjustment at the time of the front surface
300 dpi scan.
until the next analog gain value adjustment.
ANALOG GAIN Changes the analog gain adjustment
Note that the next analog gain value adjustment is performed without using
E 21-6-063 ADJUST 1 R0 0 0 12 1 - value when scanner errors occur to ✔ ✔
the set value. investigate the cause.
(FRONT/300DPI)
indicates the data.
E 2 G0 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 B0 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 R1 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 G1 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 B1 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
Configure the digital gain value adjustment at the time of the front surface
300 dpi scan.
Digital gain value error has occurred, change the
However, the next digital gain value adjustment is to be performed without
E 21-6-064 adjustment (front 1 R0 0 0 127 1 - adjustment value of the digital gain ✔ ✔
using the setting value. and conduct an investigation of the
surface) (300 dpi)
After the digital gain value adjustment, change the setting value to the value cause of the problem.
resulting from the adjustment. The value saved in the EEPROM is also
changed.


E 2 G0 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 B0 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 R1 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 G1 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 B1 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
Configure the analog gain value adjustment at the time of the front surface
600 dpi scan.
(FRONT/600DPI)
indicates the data.
E 2 G0 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 B0 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 R1 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 G1 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 B1 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔


Configure the digital gain value adjustment at the time of the front surface
600 dpi scan.
Digital gain value error has occurred, change the
E 21-6-066 adjustment (front 1 R0 0 0 127 1 - adjustment value of the digital gain ✔ ✔
surface) (600 dpi)
changed.
E 2 G0 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 B0 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 R1 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 G1 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 B1 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
Configure the analog gain value adjustment at the time of the rear surface
300 dpi scan.
(BACK/300DPI)
indicates the data.
E 2 G0 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 B0 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 R1 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 G1 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 B1 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔


Scanner
Configure the digital gain value adjustment at the time of the rear surface
300 dpi scan.
DIGITAL error has occurred, change the
E 21-6-068 GAIN ADJUST 1 R0 0 0 127 1 - adjustment value of the digital gain ✔ ✔
(BACK/300DPI)
changed.
E 2 G0 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 B0 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 R1 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 G1 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 B1 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
Configure the analog gain value adjustment at the time of the rear surface
600 dpi scan.
(BACK/600DPI)
indicates the data.
E 2 G0 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 B0 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 R1 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 G1 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 B1 0 0 12 1 - ✔ ✔
Configure the digital gain value adjustment at the time of the rear surface
600 dpi scan.
DIGITAL error has occurred, change the
E 21-6-070 GAIN ADJUST 1 R0 0 0 127 1 - adjustment value of the digital gain ✔ ✔
(BACK/600DPI)
changed.


E 2 G0 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 B0 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 R1 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 G1 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 B1 0 0 127 1 - ✔ ✔
Configure the threshold value for the white level compensation process. When wanting to change the
threshold values for the ON/OFF of
The white level compensation process is OFF if the "White Level Criteria
WHITE LEVEL the white level compensation process
E 21-6-071 1 R 16 0 256 1 - Plate Change Volume" acquired with the profile mode is less than or equal to ✔ ✔
THRESHOLD for each color and improve the image
the value configured with this TM. in cases when a defective image has
The type of setting value indicates the data. occurred.
E 2 G 16 0 256 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 B 16 0 256 1 - ✔ ✔
Scanner
Configure the threshold value for the white level compensation process (rear When wanting to change the
surface). threshold values for the ON/OFF of
WHITE LEVEL
The white level compensation process (rear surface) is OFF if the "White the white level compensation process
E 21-6-072 THRESHOLD 1 R 16 0 256 1 - ✔ ✔
Level Criteria Plate Change Volume (Rear Surface)" acquired with the profile for each color and improve the image
(BACK) in cases when a defective image has
mode is less than or equal to the value configured with this TM.
occurred.
E 2 G 16 0 256 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 B 16 0 256 1 - ✔ ✔
Configure whether to use the downloaded color profile with the custom area.
Switch the reference target of the color profile data to use with the scan. Do not initialize the
setting values even
COLOR PROFILE * The setting retains the default value even if TM0-21-4- 002 "SCANNER When wanting to change the color
E 21-6-076 － - 0 0 1 1 - when the test mode for ✔ ✔
SELECTION TEST PARAMETER CLEAR" is executed. profile.
initializing the setting
0: Standard values is executed.
1: Custom
Configure the offset values for copying/ACS/total number of color pixels

ACS COLOR threshold values. When wanting to adjust the threshold
value for the total number of color
PIXEL This offset value is a value that is used to adjust the threshold value for the
E 21-6-081 1 Front 0 -11 85 1 - pixels and improve the defective ✔ ✔
THRESHOLD total number of color pixels in the copying mode and the greater the value is, image in cases when a defective
-COPY the more likely the image will be recognized as being monochrome. image has occurred during copying.
E 2 Back 0 -11 85 1 - ✔ ✔


Configure the offset values for scanning/ACS/total number of color pixels

ACS COLOR threshold values. When wanting to adjust the threshold
value for the total number of color
PIXEL This offset value is a value that is used to adjust the threshold value for the
E 21-6-082 1 Front 0 -11 85 1 - pixels and improve the defective ✔ ✔
THRESHOLD total number of color pixels in the scanner mode and the greater the value image in cases when a defective
-SCAN is, the more likely the image will be recognized as being monochrome. image has occurred during scanning.
E 2 Back 0 -11 85 1 - ✔ ✔
Configure the offset values for the threshold value of the ACS/brightness
while in the copying mode. When wanting to adjust the threshold
ACS LUMI This offset value is a value that is used to adjust the threshold value for value for the brightness and improve
E 21-6-083 THRESHOLD 1 Front 0 -30 21 1 - determining the darker end of blue/ green based colors for every pixel while the defective image in cases when a ✔ ✔
OFFSET-COPY in the copying mode and the greater the value is, the more likely the image defective image has occurred during
will be recognized as being a light blue/green based color image. copying.
E 2 Back 0 -30 21 1 - ✔ ✔
Configure the offset values for the threshold value of the ACS/brightness
while in the scanner mode. When wanting to adjust the threshold
ACS LUMI This offset value is a value that is used to adjust the threshold value for value for the brightness and improve
E 21-6-084 THRESHOLD 1 Front 0 -30 21 1 - determining the darker end of blue/ green based colors for every pixel while the defective image in cases when a ✔ ✔
OFFSET-SCAN in the scanner mode and the greater the value is, the more likely the image defective image has occurred during
will be recognized as being a light blue/green based color image. scanning.
E 2 Back 0 -30 21 1 - ✔ ✔


Scanner
Configure the offset values of ACS/distance (first) from the achromatic color When wanting to adjust the distance
ACS axis while in the copying mode. This offset value is a value that is used to (first) from the achromatic color axis
ACHROMATIC adjust the threshold value for determining the color of every and
E 21-6-085 1 Front 0 -14 100 1 - ✔ ✔
COLOR1 OFFSET pixel in the copying mode and the greater the value is, the more likely the improve the defective image in cases
-COPY pixels will be recognized as being monochrome. when a defective image has occurred
during copying.
E 2 Back 0 -14 100 1 - ✔ ✔
Configure the offset values of ACS/distance (first) from the achromatic color When wanting to adjust the distance
ACS axis while in the scanner mode. (first) from the achromatic color axis
ACHROMATIC This offset value is a value that is used to adjust the threshold value for and
E 21-6-086 1 Front 0 -14 100 1 - ✔ ✔
COLOR1 OFFSET determining the color of every pixel in the scanner mode and the greater the improve the defective image in cases
-SCAN value is, the more likely the pixels will be recognized as being monochrome. when a defective image has occurred
during scanning.
E 2 Back 0 -14 100 1 - ✔ ✔
Configure the offset values of ACS/distance (second) from the achromatic

color axis while in the copying mode. When wanting to adjust the distance
ACS
This offset value is a value that is used to adjust the threshold value for (second) from the achromatic color
ACHROMATIC
E 21-6-087 1 Front 0 0 100 1 - determining the darker end of blue/ green based colors for every pixel while axis and improve the defective image ✔ ✔
COLOR2 OFFSET in cases when a defective image has
in the copying mode and the greater the value is, the more likely the
-COPY occurred during copying.
blue/green based pixels will be recognized as being monochrome.
E 2 Back 0 0 100 1 - ✔ ✔
Configure the offset values of ACS/distance (second) from the achromatic

color axis while in the scanner mode. When wanting to adjust the distance
ACS
This offset value is a value that is used to adjust the threshold value for (second) from the achromatic color
ACHROMATIC
E 21-6-088 1 Front 0 0 100 1 - determining the darker end of blue/ green based colors for every pixel while axis and improve the defective image ✔ ✔
COLOR2 OFFSET in cases when a defective image has
in the scanner mode and the greater the value is, the more likely the
-SCAN occurred during scanning.
blue/green based pixels will be recognized as being monochrome.
E 2 Back 0 0 100 1 - ✔ ✔


Configure the offset value for determining the text/ halftone of image area
IMAGE separation. When wanting to adjust the threshold
value for determining halftone images
THRESHOLD- This offset value is a value that is used to adjust the results of image area
E 21-6-096 － - 0 -325 325 1 - and improve the defective image in ✔ ✔
LINE/DOT separation and the greater the value is, the more likely the image will be cases when a defective image has
OFFSET VLU recognized as being halftone while the smaller the value is, the more likely occurred.
the image will be recognized as being text.
Configure the offset value for determining the halftone/ photo of image area
separation. When wanting to adjust the threshold
IMAGE
This offset value is a value that is used to adjust the results of image area value for determining photos and
THRESHOLD-
E 21-6-097 － - 0 -45 45 1 - separation and, in relation to the area determined as being halftone/photo, improve the defective image in cases ✔ ✔
PHOTO/DOT when a defective image has
the greater the value is, the more likely the image will be recognized as
OFFSET VLU occurred.
being a photo while the smaller the value is, the more likely the image will be
recognized as being halftone.
Scanner
Configure the criteria for the "Scanning Level Density Function".

Change the amount of change in the density adjusted with the "Scanning
Level Density Function". The image will become lighter with - and darker When wanting to change the
Scanning Level
E 21-6-101 － - 0 -2 2 1 - with +. threshold value for the scanning level ✔ ✔
Density Criteria density criteria.
* "Scanning Level Density Function" [3] of test mode setting value [-1] will
produce an image that is lighter than with "Scanning Level Density Function"
[3] of test mode setting value [0].
Configure PLAIN BINARY THRESHOLD for text/ monochrome (binarized) in

the scanner mode.
When wanting to change PLAIN
PLAIN BINARY Setting a smaller value will make the image lighter and improve dark
E 21-6-106 1 Front 0 -128 127 1 - BINARY THRESHOLD when ✔ ✔
THRESHOLD smudging while setting a larger value will make the image darker and scanning.
improve fading.
E 2 Back 0 -128 127 1 - ✔ ✔


Configure the initial values of the Duo mode for "Image Control" in the
copying mode.
* In order to enable the settings of the offset value and initial value of "Image
Control" of the following TM, it is necessary to switch the power OFF, then
ON.
TM0-21-6-111 "DUO BASIS SET -COPY" TM0-21-6-112 "DUO BASIS SET -
SCAN"
TM0-21-6-116 "DEFAULT EDGE ENHANCEMENT
-COPY"
TM0-21-6-117 "DEFAULT EDGE ENHANCEMENT
When wanting to change the initial
-SCAN"
value of the duo mode processing
TM0-21-6-121 "DEFAULT MOIRE REMOVE -COPY" TM0-21-6-122
criteria when copying.
"DEFAULT MOIRE REMOVE -SCAN" [*Precaution when changing
TM0-21-6-131 "Base color elimination initial value - copy" settings*]
Text and Setting values are
DUO BASIS SET TM0-21-6-132 "Base color elimination initial value - scanner" It takes up to 10 seconds to save the
E 21-6-111 1 photo / some 4 1 7 1- applied when the ✔ ✔
-COPY TM0-21-6-133 "Base color elimination initial value - copy (rear surface)" setting values. Do not exit the test
errors power is rebooted.
TM0-21-6-134 "Base color elimination initial value - scanner (rear surface)" mode screen for 10 seconds.
(Other test modes can be executed.)
At a timing when the setting value of the test mode has been confirmed,
The setting values will not be saved
send the setting value from the controller to the scanner. The scanner saves
and applied if you exit the test mode
the received setting values on the EEPROM. screen before saving has completed.
However, as the initial values for "Image Control" are sent from the scanner
to the controller with initial
communication, the initial values for "Image Control" are not changed at the
timing when the setting values of the test mode are confirmed.
In order to change the initial values for the "Image Control", initial
communication of the PMS and scanner (by switching the power of the
scanner OFF, then ON) is required.
The types of setting values are the settings of the "Original Type" and "Dot
Process". When "Original Type
= Text", there is no "Dot Process".
Text and
E 2 photo / 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
halftone dots
E 3 Text 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
Photo / some
E 4 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
errors
Photo /
E 5 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
halftone dots
Map / some
E 6 6 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
errors
Map / halftone
E 7 6 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
dots


When wanting to change the initial

value of the duo mode processing
criteria when scanning.
Configure the initial values of the text and photo processing criteria for [*Precaution when changing
settings*]
"Image Control" in the scanner mode. Setting values are
DUO BASIS SET Text and It takes up to 10 seconds to save the
E 21-6-112 1 4 1 7 1 - * Refer to TM0-21-6-111 "DUO BASIS SET -COPY" for the applied when the ✔ ✔
-SCAN photo setting values. Do not exit the test
timing at which setting values will be reflected. power is rebooted.
mode screen for 10 seconds.
The type of setting value is the settings of the "Original Type". (Other test modes can be executed.)
The setting values will not be saved
and applied if you exit the test mode
screen before saving has completed.
E 2 Text 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 photo mode 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
Configure the initial values of edge enhancement for "Image Control" in the
copying mode.
* Refer to TM0-21-6-111 "DUO BASIS SET -COPY" for
Text and
DEFAULT EDGE the timing at which setting values will be reflected. The types of setting When wanting to change the initial Setting values are
photo with
E 21-6-116 ENHANCEMENT 1 4 1 7 1 - values are the settings of the "Original Type", "Color Mode", and "Dot value of edge enhancement when applied when the ✔ ✔
some color copying. power is rebooted.
-COPY Process".
errors
When "Original Type = Text", there is no "Dot Process". "Color Mode =
Monochrome" is applicable to not only monochrome images but also single
color images (for example, single color of magenta, etc.).
Text and
photo with
E 2 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
color
halftone dots
Text and
photo with
E 3 some 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
monochrome
errors
Text and
photo with
E 4 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
monochrome
halftone dots
E 5 Text in color 5 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
Text in
E 6 5 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
monochrome
Photo with
E 7 some color 1 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
errors


Photo with
E 8 color 1 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
halftone dots
Photo with
some
E 9 1 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
monochrome
errors
Photo with
E 10 monochrome 1 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
halftone dots
Map / some
E 11 6 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
errors
Map / halftone
E 12 6 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
dots
Scanner
Configure the initial values of edge enhancement for "Image Control" in the
DEFAULT EDGE scanner mode. When wanting to change the initial Setting values are
Text and
E 21-6-117 ENHANCEMENT 1 4 1 7 1 - * Refer to TM0-21-6-111 "DUO BASIS SET -COPY" for the timing at which value of edge enhancement when applied when the ✔ ✔
photo / color
-SCAN setting values will be reflected. The type of setting values are the settings of scanning. power is rebooted.
the "Original Type" and "Color Mode".
Text and
E 2 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
photo / gray
Text and
E 3 photo / 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
monochrome
E 4 Line/Color 7 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 Line/Gray 7 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 Line/Black 7 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
E 7 Photo/Color 1 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
E 8 Photo/Gray 1 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
E 9 Photo/Black 1 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
Configure the initial values of moire elimination for "Image Control" in the
copying mode.
* Refer to TM0-21-6-111 "DUO BASIS SET -COPY" for
Text and
the timing at which setting values will be reflected. The types of setting When wanting to change the initial Setting values are
DEFAULT MOIRE photo with
E 21-6-121 1 4 1 7 1 - values are the settings of the "Original Type", "Color Mode", and "Dot value of moire elimination when applied when the ✔ ✔
REMOVE -COPY some color copying. power is rebooted.
Process".
errors
When "Original Type = Text", there is no "Dot Process". "Color Mode =
Text and
photo with
E 2 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
color
halftone dots


Text and
photo with
E 3 some 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
monochrome
errors
Text and
photo with
E 4 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
monochrome
halftone dots
E 5 Text in color 1 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
Text in
E 6 1 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
monochrome
Photo with
E 7 some color 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
errors
Photo with
E 8 color 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
halftone dots
Photo with
some
E 9 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
monochrome
errors
Photo with
E 10 monochrome 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
halftone dots
Map / some
E 11 1 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
errors
Map / halftone
E 12 1 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
dots
Scanner
Configure the initial values of moire elimination for "Image Control" in the
scanner mode. When wanting to change the initial Setting values are
DEFAULT MOIRE Text and
E 21-6-122 1 4 1 7 1 - * Refer to TM0-21-6-111 "DUO BASIS SET -COPY" for value of moire elimination when applied when the ✔ ✔
REMOVE -SCAN photo / color
the timing at which setting values will be reflected. The type of setting values scanning. power is rebooted.
are the settings of the "Original Type" and "Color Mode".
Text and
E 2 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
photo / gray
Text and
E 3 photo / 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
monochrome


E 4 Line/Color 1 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 Line/Gray 1 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 Line/Black 1 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
E 7 Photo/Color 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
E 8 Photo/Gray 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
E 9 Photo/Black 4 1 7 1 - ✔ ✔
Configure the initial values of base color elimination in the copying mode.
* Refer to TM0-21-6-111 "DUO BASIS SET -COPY" for the timing at which
setting values will be reflected.
Base color When wanting to change the initial Setting values are
0: Set the initial value of base color elimination to [Auto]. 1 through 7:
E 21-6-131 elimination initial 1 Full color 0 0 7 1 - value of base color elimination when applied when the ✔ ✔
Manually set the initial value of base color elimination to [1 through 7]. copying. power is rebooted.
value - copy
The type of setting value is the setting of the "Color Mode". "Color Mode =
E 2 monochrome 0 0 7 1 - ✔ ✔
Configure the initial values of base color elimination in the scanner mode.
setting values will be reflected.
Base color When wanting to change the initial Setting values are
E 21-6-132 elimination initial 1 Full color 0 0 7 1 - value of base color elimination when applied when the ✔ ✔
Manually set the initial value of base color elimination to [1 through 7]. scanning. power is rebooted.
value - scanner
E 2 Gray 0 0 7 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 Black 0 0 7 1 - ✔ ✔
Configure the initial values of base color elimination in the copying mode for
the rear surface.
Base color
setting values will be reflected. When wanting to change the initial Setting values are
elimination initial
E 21-6-133 1 Full color 0 0 7 1 - 0: Set the initial value of base color elimination to [Auto]. 1 through 7: value of base color elimination when applied when the ✔ ✔
value - copy (rear copying. power is rebooted.
Manually set the initial value of base color elimination to [1 through 7].
surface)
E 2 monochrome 0 0 7 1 - ✔ ✔


Scanner
Configure the initial values of base color elimination in the scanner mode for
the rear surface.
Base color
* Refer to TM0-21-6-111 "DUO BASIS SET -COPY" for the timing at which When wanting to change the initial Setting values are
elimination initial
E 21-6-134 1 Full color 0 0 7 1 - setting values will be reflected. value of base color elimination when applied when the ✔ ✔
value - scanner scanning. power is rebooted.
(rear surface)
Manually set the initial value of base color elimination to [1 through 7].
The type of setting value is the setting of the "Color Mode".
E 2 Gray 0 0 7 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 Black 0 0 7 1 - ✔ ✔
Configure the base color density frequency threshold value 1 when "Base
Color Level = Auto" and "Color Mode = Monochrome". In cases when base color elimination
Base Color Level
In the case of an original that is smaller than a standard paper size, is required but the base color is not
(auto) frequency
E 21-6-136 － - 80 0 255 1 - depending on the area of the pressure board being scanned, the base color eliminated with the original when ✔ ✔
threshold value 1 - "Base Color Level = Auto" and "Color
may not be cut with auto monochrome base color elimination. In such case,
monochrome Mode = Monochrome".
make this value larger. However, if the value is too large, there may be
cases when base color elimination is not applied even with white paper.
Color Level = Auto" and "Color Mode = Monochrome". In cases when base color elimination
Base Color Level
In cases when the original is a full size photo, there is the possibility that the is not required but the base color is
(auto) frequency
E 21-6-137 － - 120 0 255 1 - base color is eliminated with auto monochrome base color elimination eliminated with the original when ✔ ✔
threshold value 2 - "Base Color Level = Auto" and "Color
despite such base color elimination not being desired. In such case, make
monochrome Mode = Monochrome".
this value larger. However, if the value is too large, there may be cases
where it will become more difficult to cut darker base color levels.
Configure the base color density boundary value when "Base Color Level =
Auto" and "Color Mode = Monochrome".
Base Color Level This value is the boundary value of the input density subject to base color Configure the density boundary value
(auto) density elimination and when this value is greater, the original of a base color of of base color elimination when "Base
E 21-6-138 － - 20 0 31 1 - ✔ ✔
boundary value - higher density Color Level = Auto" and "Color Mode
monochrome than the current state is eliminated, and when this value is smaller, the = Monochrome".
original of a base color of a lighter density than the current state is
eliminated.


Configure the offset value for the amount of base color elimination when
"Base Color Level = Auto".
Change this offset value when wanting to the change the amount of base
color elimination when "Base Color Level = Auto". The greater the value the When wanting to change the amount
Base Color Level
E 21-6-139 1 Full color 0 -64 64 1 - greater the amount that will be automatically eliminated and the smaller the of base color elimination when "Base ✔ ✔
(auto) offset value Color Level = Auto".
value, the smaller the amount that will be eliminated.
E 2 monochrome 0 -64 64 1 - ✔ ✔
Scanner
Configure the offset value for base color elimination β when "Base Color
Level = Auto".
Change this offset value when wanting to the change the smoothness of the
Base Color Level output of highlights when "Base Color Elimination = Auto". The greater the When wanting to the change the
E 21-6-140 (auto) β offset 1 Full color 40 0 127 1 - value the smoother the highlights but lighter overall, and the smaller the output and smoothness of highlights ✔ ✔
value value the more rapid the highlights. when "Base Color Level = Auto".
E 2 monochrome 0 -128 127 1 - ✔ ✔
Base Color Level Color Level = Auto" and "Color Mode = Monochrome" for the rear surface. In cases when base color elimination
(auto) frequency In the case of an original that is smaller than a standard paper size, is required but the base color is not
E 21-6-141 threshold value 1 - － - 80 0 255 1 - depending on the area of the pressure board being scanned, the base color eliminated with the original when ✔ ✔
monochrome (rear may not be cut with auto monochrome base color elimination. In such case, "Base Color Level = Auto" and "Color
surface) make this value larger. However, if the value is too large, there may be Mode = Monochrome".
cases when base color elimination is not applied even with white paper.
Base Color Level Color Level = Auto" and "Color Mode = Monochrome" for the rear surface. In cases when base color elimination
(auto) frequency In cases when the original is a full size photo, there is the possibility that the is not required but the base color is
E 21-6-142 threshold value 2 - － - 120 0 255 1 - base color is eliminated with auto monochrome base color elimination eliminated with the original when ✔ ✔
monochrome (rear despite such base color elimination not being desired. In such case, make "Base Color Level = Auto" and "Color
surface) this value larger. However, if the value is too large, there may be cases Mode = Monochrome".
where it will become more difficult to cut darker base color levels.


Configure the base color density boundary value when "Base Color Level =
Auto" and "Color Mode = Monochrome" for the rear surface.
Base Color Level
This value is the boundary value of the input density subject to base color Configure the density boundary value
(auto) density
elimination and when this value is greater, the original of a base color of of base color elimination when "Base
E 21-6-143 boundary value - － - 20 0 31 1 - ✔ ✔
higher density Color Level = Auto" and "Color Mode
monochrome (rear = Monochrome".
than the current state is eliminated, and when this value is smaller, the
surface)
original of a base color of a lighter density than the current state is
eliminated.
"Base Color Level = Auto" for the rear surface.
color elimination when "Base Color Level
Base Color Level When wanting to change the amount
= Auto". The greater the value the greater the amount that will be
E 21-6-144 (auto) offset value 1 Full color 0 -64 64 1 - of base color elimination when "Base ✔ ✔
automatically eliminated and the smaller the value, the smaller the amount Color Level = Auto".
(rear surface)
that will be eliminated.
E 2 monochrome 0 -64 64 1 - ✔ ✔
Scanner
Level = Auto" for the rear surface. Change this offset value when wanting to
Base Color Level the change the smoothness of the output of highlights when "Base Color
When wanting to the change the
(auto) β offset Elimination = Auto". The greater the value the smoother the highlights but
E 21-6-145 1 Full color 0 0 127 1 - output and smoothness of highlights ✔ ✔
value (rear lighter overall, and the smaller the value the more rapid the highlights. when "Base Color Level = Auto".
surface) The type of setting value is the setting of the "Color Mode". "Color Mode =
E 2 monochrome 0 -128 127 1 - ✔ ✔


"Base Color Level = Manual (1 through 7)".
Base Color Level color elimination for level "1 through 7" when "Base Color Level = Manual". When wanting to change the amount
E 21-6-151 (manual) offset 1 Full color 0 -64 64 1 - The greater the value the greater the amount that will be eliminated and the of base color elimination when "Base ✔ ✔
value smaller the value, the smaller the amount that will be eliminated. Color Level = Manual (1 through 7)".
E 2 monochrome 0 -64 64 1 - ✔ ✔
Level = Manual (1 through 7)".
output of highlights when "Base Color Elimination = Manual". The greater When wanting to the change the
Base Color Level
the value output and smoothness of highlights
E 21-6-152 (manual) β offset 1 Full color 0 -128 127 1 - ✔ ✔
the smoother the highlights but lighter overall, and the smaller the value the when "Base Color Level = Manual (1
value through 7)".
more rapid the highlights.
E 2 monochrome 0 -128 127 1 - ✔ ✔
"Base Color Elimination = Manual (1 through 7)" for the rear surface.
Base Color Level
color elimination for level "1 through 7" when "Base Color Level = Manual". When wanting to change the amount
(manual) offset
E 21-6-153 1 Full color 0 -64 64 1 - The greater the value the greater the amount that will be eliminated and the of base color elimination when "Base ✔ ✔
value (rear Color Level = Manual (1 through 7)".
smaller the value, the smaller the amount that will be eliminated.
surface)
E 2 monochrome 0 -64 64 1 - ✔ ✔


Scanner
Level = Manual (1 through 7)" for the rear surface.
Base Color Level output of highlights when "Base Color Elimination = Manual". The greater When wanting to the change the
(manual) β offset the value output and smoothness of highlights
E 21-6-154 1 Full color 0 -128 127 1 - ✔ ✔
value (rear the smoother the highlights but lighter overall, and the smaller the value the when "Base Color Level = Manual (1
surface) more rapid the highlights. through 7)".
E 2 monochrome 0 -128 127 1 - ✔ ✔
Configure the resolution of the TM that will perform SCANNER TEST

PATTERN PRINT / FB scan / AF
scan.
* With the operation of TM0-21-3-021 "SCANNER TEST PATTERN PRINT",
TEST MODE When wanting to change the
in cases when [2] [3] is configured with this TM, the setting will be ignored
E 21-6-161 PRINT － - 0 0 3 1 - resolution to use when using the ✔ ✔
and operation will be with a resolution of 300 dpi x 300 dpi. scanner in the test mode.
-RESOLUTION
0: 300 dpi x 300 dpi
1: 300 dpi x 600 dpi
2: 600 dpi x 300 dpi
3: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Configure the scan size of the TM that will perform SCANNER TEST
PATTERN PRINT / FB scan / AF scan.
0: A3, 1: B4, 2: A4, 3: A4-LEF, 4: B5, 5: B5-LEF, 6: A3W (303 mm x 432
TEST MODE When wanting to change the scan
mm),
E 21-6-162 PRINT -SCAN － - 0 0 18 1 - size to use when using the scanner ✔ ✔
7: Foolscap, 8: Ledger, 9: Legal, 10: Letter, 11: Letter-LEF, 12: Statement, in the test mode.
SIZE
13: Statement-LEF, 14: A5, 15: A5-LEF, 16: B6, 17: B6-LEF, 18: Postcard
*6: A3W (303 mm x 432 mm) is the maximum range that the scanner is able
to scan.
Configure the surface to scan with the TM that will perform the operation of
TEST MODE When wanting to change the surface
AF original transport (inclusive of AF scan).
E 21-6-163 PRINT -AF SCAN － - 0 0 1 1 - to scan when using the scanner in ✔ ✔
0: Simplex (front surface only) the test mode.
SPLX/DPLX
1: Duplex


SCANNER Adjusts the document size detection position. (This is the distance from the
DOCUMENT SIZE contact position.) Specify a small setting value (to the top side) to reduce the Reading size detection position
E 21-6-171 － - 20 20 50 1 mm ✔ ✔
DETECTION carriage movement time. Specify a large setting value to enable detection at adjustment
POSITION the flat surface of the pressure plate, which prevents document curling.
DOCUMENT
Set whether to perform countermeasures against document misalignment.
MISALIGNMENT
E 21-6-172 － - 0 0 1 1 - 0: Do not perform countermeasures against document misalignment Size detection control change ✔ ✔
COUNTERMEASU
1: Perform countermeasures against document misalignment
RES
DOCUMENT Set whether to perform document pattern countermeasures over a large

PATTERN angle area.
E 21-6-173 － - 0 0 1 1 - Size detection control change ✔ ✔
COUNTERMEASU 0: Do not perform document pattern countermeasures 1: Perform document
RES pattern countermeasures
Scanner
PRESURE PLATE Switch the pressure plate lifting detection mode. 0: Do not detect pressure
LIFTING plate lifting
E 21-6-175 DETECTION － - 2 0 2 1 - 1: Detect pressure plate lifting (do not display the reading size) Size detection control change ✔ ✔
MODE 2: Detect pressure plate lifting (uses the detection result at the middle angle
SWITCHING for the reading size)
UPPER LIMIT OF Set the reading size to judge as being irregular. Sizes less than the set value
E 21-6-176 IRREGULAR 1 mm 120 100 148 1 mm will be judged as being irregular. The type of the setting value indicates the Regular draw-in table adjustment ✔ ✔
READING SIZE unit of the reading size to detect.
E 2 inch 120 100 140 1 mm ✔ ✔

Configure the timing of the Booklet Tray Belt for a Booklet Job.
0 - 4: Original timing for both Tray Belt ON/OFF.
5 and up: when the number of sheets is 9 or less, or 16 or more, Tray Belt
ON/OFF at the conventional timing, when the number of sheets is 10
through 15, the timing for Tray Belt ON is changed to the prescribed timing
When wanting to change the timing Setting values are
BOOKLET TRAY while the timing for Tray Belt OFF is changed to the prescribed timing until
E 23-6-001 1 to 297.0 mm 210 0 255 1 2.5 ms of the booklet tray belt in accordance applied when the ✔ ✔
BELT TIMING the Booklet No Paper SNR turns ON and after this has turned ON, a value with the paper length. power is rebooted.
of the time you wish to configure to this TM divided by 2.5 ms is input.
The type of setting value indicates the paper length. " - 297.0 mm" for a
paper length of 297.0 mm or less.
" - 364.0 mm" for a paper length greater than 297.0 mm yet 364.0 mm or
less.


E 2 to 364.0 mm 177 0 255 1 - ✔ ✔
E 3 to 389.0 mm 177 0 255 1 - ✔ ✔
Exceeds
E 4 24 0 255 1 - ✔ ✔
389.0 mm
Sets Offset operation for sheet discharge paper. Setting values are
SHEET EJECT For switching between Offset/Do not
E 23-6-003 － - 1 0 1 1 - 0: Offset applied when the ✔ ✔
OFFSET ACTION Offset for discharging paper.
1: Do not Offset power is rebooted.
Change paper width exceeding 297 mm to paper exceeding 310 mm for

Setting values are
SHEET EJECT sheet discharge paper conditions during unstapling. For changing discharge paper
E 23-6-005 － - 0 0 1 1 - applied when the ✔ ✔
CONDITION 0: Paper exceeding 297 mm conditions during unstapling.
power is rebooted.
1: Paper exceeding 310 mm
Adjusts the automatic adjustment amount for staple position for each sheet
when stapling a booklet.
- When the staple is above the fold position: enter the misalignment amount
BOOKLET
(mm) x 10* in the current NVM value - the value. For adjusting the staple position Setting values are
STAPLE
E 23-6-006 1 3 sheets 100 0 200 1 0.1 mm - When the staple is below the fold position: enter the misalignment amount according to the fold position for applied when the ✔ ✔
POSITION each sheet when stapling a booklet. power is rebooted.
(mm) x 10* in the current NVM value + the value.
ADJUST
*Because 0.1 mm = 1 Pulse conversion. Adjustment amount 1 = 1 Pulse
The setting value type indicates the number of stapled sheets. "8 - 9 sheets"
is the more than 8 sheets adjustment value.
E 2 4 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔

E 3 5-7 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 8-9 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 10-11 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 12-14 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 7 16-17 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 8 18-19 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 9 20-21 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 10 22-23 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 11 24-25 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
Fine adjustment of fold position adjustment amount for each sheet of paper
shorter than B4S when stapling a booklet.
When the lower section is long: enter the misalignment amount (mm) x 10* x For adjusting the staple position
according to the fold position for Setting values are
BOOKLET FOLD 0.5 in the current NVM value + the value.
E 23-6-007 1 3 sheets 100 0 200 1 0.1 mm each sheet when stapling a applied when the ✔ ✔
ADJUST (SMALL) When the upper section is long: enter the misalignment amount (mm) x 10* booklet (paper length shorter than power is rebooted.
x 0.5 in the current NVM value - the value. B4S).
- 11 sheets" is the 10, 11 sheet adjustment value.
E 2 4 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔

E 3 5-7 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 8-9 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔


E 5 10-11 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 12-14 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 7 15 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 8 16-17 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 9 18-19 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 10 20-21 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 11 22-23 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 12 24-25 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
Fine adjustment of fold position adjustment amount for each sheet of paper
longer than B4S when stapling a booklet.
When the lower section is long: enter the misalignment amount (mm) x 10* x For adjusting the staple position
0.5 in the current NVM value + the value. according to the fold position for Setting values are
BOOKLET FOLD
E 23-6-008 1 3 sheets 100 0 200 1 - When the upper section is long: enter the misalignment amount (mm) x 10* each sheet when stapling a applied when the ✔ ✔
ADJUST (LARGE) booklet (paper length longer than power is rebooted.
x 0.5 in the current NVM value - the value.
*Because 0.1 mm = 1 Pulse conversion. Adjustment amount 1 = 1 Pulse B4S).
The setting value type indicates the number of folds.
"8 - 9 sheets" is the more than 8 sheets adjustment value.
E 2 4 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔

E 3 5-7 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 4 8-9 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 5 10-11 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 6 12-14 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 7 15 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 8 16-17 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 9 18-19 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 10 20-21 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 11 22-23 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
E 12 24-25 sheets 100 0 200 1 - ✔ ✔
BOOKLET FULL Setting values are

Number Sets the quantity for detecting full booklet. 1 set is 16 sheets or more. For changing the detect booklet full
E 23-6-009 DETECT -MORE 1 Less than B4 15 10 100 1 applied when the ✔ ✔
of copies The type of the setting value indicates the paper size. quantity for 16 sheets or more.
THAN 16 power is rebooted.
Number
E 2 B4 or more 15 10 100 1 ✔ ✔
of copies
Setting values are

BOOKLET FULL Number Sets the quantity for detecting full booklet. 1 set is 15 sheets. For changing the detect booklet full
E 23-6-010 1 Less than B4 20 10 100 1 applied when the ✔ ✔
DETECT 15 of copies The type of the setting value indicates the paper size. quantity for 15 sheets.
power is rebooted.
Number
E 2 B4 or more 20 10 100 1 ✔ ✔
of copies


BOOKLET FULL Booklet Full detect quantity subtractive setting when using a mix paper with If you want to change the Booklet Full
detect quantity when using mixed Setting values are
DETECT Number card stock
E 23-6-011 － - 5 0 20 1 paper with card stock, set a applied when the ✔ ✔
SUBTRACT of copies The Full detection quantity decreases the setting value for this TM when subtractive value in the Booklet Full power is rebooted.
(THICK) using a mixed paper with card stock. detect quantity.
STACK TRAY For adjusting the Pitch additive time Setting values are
Adjusts the set space Pitch additive time for Stacker discharge and paper
E 23-6-012 EJECT PITCH － - 30 0 300 1 - for paper length of A4S or longer applied when the ✔ ✔
A4S size and longer. when discharging to the stack tray. power is rebooted.
ADD TIME
Adjusts the start time of the tamping operation.

The setting value type indicates the condition difference. Setting values are
TAMPING START For adjusting the start time of the
E 23-6-013 1 Condition 1 30 0 50 1 - Condition 1: applied when the ✔ ✔
ADJUST tamping operation.
Each sheet/set first paper/no punch/paper length ≦ 298 mm/paper width ≧ power is rebooted.
235 mm/Z-folding, non card paper
Condition 2:
Each sheet/non-set first paper/no punch/paper length
E 2 Condition 2 0 0 50 1 - ✔ ✔
≦ 298 mm/paper width ≧ 235 mm/Z-folding, non card
paper
Condition 3:
E 3 Condition 3 0 0 50 1 - Each sheet/set first paper/with punch (other than ((paper ✔ ✔
length ≦ 298 mm/paper width ≧ 235 mm)))
Condition 4:
E 4 Condition 4 30 0 105 1 - Each sheet/no punch/paper length ≦ 298 mm/paper ✔ ✔
width ≧ 235 mm/Z-folding, non card paper


Configure the timing of the Booklet Tray Belt for a Booklet Job.
When main document contains card paper 1 and 2.
0 - 4: Original timing for both Tray Belt ON/OFF.
5 and up: when the number of sheets is 9 or less, or 16 or more, Tray Belt
ON/OFF at the conventional timing, when the number of sheets is 10
For changing the booklet tray belt
through 15, the timing for Tray Belt ON is changed to the prescribed timing Setting values are
BOOKLET TRAY timing to match the paper length
E 23-6-014 1 to 297.0 mm 180 0 255 1 2.5 ms while the timing for Tray Belt OFF is changed to the prescribed timing until applied when the ✔ ✔
BELT TIMING when the main document contains
the Booklet No Paper SNR turns ON and after this has turned ON, a value power is rebooted.
card paper.
of the time you wish to configure to this TM divided by 2.5 ms is input.
The type of setting value indicates the paper length. " - 297.0 mm" for a
paper length of 297.0 mm or less.
less.
E 2 to 364.0 mm 177 0 255 1 - ✔ ✔

E 3 to 389.0 mm 177 0 255 1 - ✔ ✔
Exceeds
E 4 24 0 255 1 - ✔ ✔
389.0 mm
Booklet Tray Belt ON timing setting for Booklet Job. Sets timing from
Booklet Folder Exit Snr ON to Tray Belt ON.
For changing the booklet tray belt ON
When main document contains card paper 1 and 2. Setting value 1 = 2.5 ms Setting values are
BOOKLET TRAY timing to match the paper length
E 23-6-015 1 to 297.0 mm 531 300 1000 1 2.5ms The type of setting value indicates the paper length. " - 297.0 mm" for a applied when the ✔ ✔
BELT ON TIMING when the main document contains
paper length of 297.0 mm or less. power is rebooted.
card paper.
less.
E 2 to 364.0 mm 676 300 1000 1 2.5ms ✔ ✔

E 3 to 389.0 mm 676 300 1000 1 2.5ms ✔ ✔
Exceeds
E 4 656 300 1000 1 2.5ms ✔ ✔
389.0 mm
Loss of synchronism countermeasure for discharging card paper from the

transport motor.
FIN TRANSPORT Setting values are
0: Execute Current Low control Adjustment when the transport motor
E 23-6-017 MOTOR STEP － - 1 0 1 1 - applied when the ✔ ✔
1: Current Low control not executed (Card 2/Index Paper card 2 only)* experiences loss of synchronism.
OUT power is rebooted.
*Only when the media type in the multi-finisher is Card 2/Index Paper card 2,
Current Low control is not executed.
Broken gear countermeasure when punch motor sensor is malfunctioning.

When the setting is enabled, the HOME SNR ON trigger is stopped and a For switching jam detect modes
Setting values are
PUNCH MOTOR jam is detected when the motor sensor does not respond during punch when the sensor is malfunctioning to
SENSOR DEFECT operation. prevent broken gears due to punch
power is rebooted.
0: Disable motor sensor malfunction.
1: Enable


UNSTAPLE Sets number of thick paper stock 1 unstaple set eject sheets. Setting values are
For changing the number of thick
E 23-6-019 EJECT LIMIT 1 ≦ 216mm 10 2 25 1 - The type of setting value indicates the paper length. applied when the ✔ ✔
paper stock 1 unstaple eject sheets.
(THICK PAPER1) " ≦ 216 mm" is 216 mm or shorter paper length. power is rebooted.
E 2 >216mm 10 2 25 1 - ✔ ✔
UNSTAPLE Sets number of unstaple set eject sheets. Setting values are
For changing the number of unstaple
E 23-6-020 EJECT LIMIT 1 ≦ 216mm 25 2 50 1 Sheet The type of setting value indicates the paper length. applied when the ✔ ✔
eject sheets.
SETTING " ≦ 216 mm" is 216 mm or shorter paper length. power is rebooted.
E 2 >216mm 25 2 50 1 Sheet ✔ ✔
For switching between whether or not

to issue full error detect when there is
Sets whether or not to issue full error detect when there is paper in the stack paper in the stack tray while the
tray while the flapper is down (30 or less LEF Staple sheets not containing flapper is down (30 or less LEF
Setting values are
MIX SIZE FULL Z-fold), and paper (unstapled paper, stapled set exceeding 30 sheets, SEF Staple sheets not containing Z-fold),
DETECT 2 paper) is ejected into the stack tray during flapper UP conditions. and paper (unstapled paper, stapled
power is rebooted.
- Area of effect: Stacking tray set
exceeding 30 sheets, SEF paper) is
0: Do not detect 1: Detect
ejected into the stack tray during
flapper UP conditions.
OFF After TOP Tray Full SNR ON: Apply NVM setting timer value filter and
For changing the top tray full reset Setting values are
TOP TRAY FULL do not detect OFF.
E 23-6-023 － - 4 1 10 1 100ms time (time until TOP Tray Full SNR applied when the ✔ ✔
CLEAR TIME When NVM setting timer value or more is OFF, the Full detect timer is reset. OFF). power is rebooted.
1 ＝ 100 msec


Allows Z-fold paper High Stack when Z-fold High Stack spacers are
attached.
However, when the allow setting for this TM is activated,
TM0-23-6-148 "Z-FOLD 100SHEET STACK PERMIT
Setting values are
Z-FOLD 50 SHEET " should be set to do not allow. For allowing/not allowing 50 sheets
STACK It is also necessary to change the following TM restrictions. for the Z-folding stack.
power is rebooted.
TM0-23-6-070 "Z-fold limit stack tray"-2 "A3S/17S" TM0-23-6-070 "Z-fold
limit stack tray"-1 "B4S"
0: Do not allow
1: Allow
Setting values are

SIZE DETECT For switching methods for paper size
E 23-6-025 － - 0 0 1 0 - 0: Automatic 1: Enter size applied when the ✔ ✔
SELECTION detection.
power is rebooted.
Setting values are

PUNCHER 0: 1 Automatic detect (2/4 Puncher, US2/3 hole puncher
E 23-6-027 － - 0 0 1 1 - For switching punch position settings. applied when the ✔ ✔
SELECTION 1: Swedish 4 hole puncher settings power is rebooted.
Punch hole side registration direction position adjustment

PUNCH SIDE 1 pulse = 0.125 mm Setting values are
For adjusting the punch hole side
E 23-6-028 REGISTRATION 1 Condition 1 97 10 170 1 0.125mm The setting value type indicates condition differences. applied when the ✔ ✔
registration direction position.
ADJUST Condition 1: power is rebooted.
Paper width 297 mm
Condition 2:
2/3 Puncher: 203 mm ≦ paper width ≦ 285 mm 2/4 Puncher: 216 mm ＜
E 2 Condition 2 94 10 170 1 0.125mm ✔ ✔
paper width ≦ 285 mm
SW4 Puncher: 230 mm ＜ paper width ≦ 285 mm
Condition 3:
E 3 Condition 3 82 10 170 1 0.125mm 2/4 Puncher: 203 mm ＜ paper width ≦ 216 mm ✔ ✔
SW4 Puncher: 203 mm ＜ paper width ≦ 230 mm
Adjusts compile exit sensor Off (including 15 ms filter) sub paddle clutch On
Setting values are
PUNCH CLUTCH timing for buffer sheets. For adjusting the sub paddle clutch
E 23-6-029 1 With punch 28 0 40 1 2.5ms applied when the ✔ ✔
ON TIMING 1 = 2.5 ms ON timing for buffer sheets.
power is rebooted.
The setting value type indicates with or without punches.


E 2 No punch 24 0 40 1 2.5ms ✔ ✔
For switching between Allowed/ Not Setting values are

STACK TRAY Allows stack tray down operation for cycle down. 0: Allowed
E 23-6-030 － - 0 0 1 1 - allowed stack tray down operation for applied when the ✔ ✔
DOWN ADJUST 1: Not allowed cycle down. power is rebooted.
Motor reverse screw compensation loop amount adjustment for punch

mode.
Except for 2/3 puncher: 203 mm ≦ paper width ＜ 223 mm, 2/4 puncher For adjusting the motor reverse Setting values are
PUNCH RESERVE
E 23-6-031 1 ≦ 216mm 38 8 68 1 - 216 mm ＜ paper width ≦ 235 mm. screw compensation loop amount applied when the ✔ ✔
ADJUST1 during punch mode. power is rebooted.
The 3-hole default value is 30
The type of setting value indicates the paper length.
" ≦ 216 mm" is 216 mm or shorter paper length.
E 2 >216mm 34 8 68 1 - ✔ ✔
Motor reverse screw compensation loop amount adjustment for punch

mode.
2/3 puncher: 203 mm ≦ paper width ≦ 223 mm, 2/4 puncher 216 mm ＜ For adjusting the motor reverse Setting values are
PUNCH REVERSE
E 23-6-032 1 ≦ 216mm 47 8 68 1 - paper width ≦ 235 mm paper. screw compensation loop amount applied when the ✔ ✔
ADJUST2 during punch mode. power is rebooted.
The 3-hole default value is 43
The type of setting value indicates the paper length.
" ≦ 216 mm" is 216 mm or shorter paper length.
E 2 >216mm 39 8 68 1 - The 3-hole default value is 35 ✔ ✔
Setting values are

PUNCH DUST For changing the number of punch
E 23-6-033 － - 10000 0 65535 1 Times PUNCH DUST NEAR FULL ADJUST applied when the ✔ ✔
FULL ADJUST dustbox near full detections
power is rebooted.


Changes the maximum sheet

restriction for each staple operation
when staples are damaged or staple
Setting values are
errors occur.
E 23-6-034 STAPLE LIMIT 100 － - 100 50 150 1 Sheet Number of staple restriction sheets for 100 sheet cartridge applied when the ✔ ✔
* Set to the same setting value as 0-
power is rebooted.
23-6-053 "Maximum STP sheets".
(If the values are different, the
smaller value is used.)
Changes the maximum sheet

Setting values are
restriction for each staple operation
E 23-6-035 STAPLE LIMIT 50 － - 50 25 75 1 Sheet Number of staple restriction sheets for 50 sheet cartridge applied when the ✔ ✔
when staples are damaged or staple
power is rebooted.
errors occur.
Rear staple position adjustment

For adjusting the rear staple position Setting values are
REAR STAPLE The type of the setting value indicates the paper size. "A4L/A3S" is
E 23-6-036 1 A4L/A3S 100 50 150 1 - during stapling when the staple applied when the ✔ ✔
POSITION A4LEF/A3SEF. position is out of specified range. power is rebooted.
"1" and "Except for A4L/A3S 2" are differences in conditions.
E 2 Condition 1 100 50 150 1 - Condition 1: Wider than a paper width of 250 mm, except for A4LEF/A3SEF. ✔ ✔
E 3 Condition 2 100 50 150 1 - Condition 2: Paper width of 250 mm or less, except for A4LEF/A3SEF. ✔ ✔
Setting values are

TAMPING HOME For adjusting the tamping home
E 23-6-037 － - 26 2 50 1 pulse TAMPING HOME ADJUST applied when the ✔ ✔
ADJUST position.
power is rebooted.
For adjusting the compile exit role

COMPILE EXIT Setting values are
Compile exit role deceleration adjustment 1 = 1 Pulse deceleration so that paper does not
E 23-6-038 ROLL SLOW － - 3 1 41 1 0.52mm applied when the ✔ ✔
1 pulse = 0.52 mm fly out when being discharged to the
ADJUST power is rebooted.
compiler.
Unstaple eject operation mode Setting values are

EJECT MODE For changing the unstaple eject
E 23-6-039 － - 0 0 1 1 - 0: Set eject applied when the ✔ ✔
SELECTION mode.
1: Sheet eject power is rebooted.
Eject roll reverse timing adjustment Setting values are

EJECT ROLL For adjusting the eject roll reverse
E 23-6-040 － - 92 92 152 1 0.361mm 1 = 1 Pulse /10 pulse unit applied when the ✔ ✔
REVERSE TIMING timing.
1 pulse = 0.361 mm power is rebooted.


Setting values are

NO PAPER Partway take out sensor continuous OFF detect time adjustment For adjusting the partway take out
E 23-6-041 － - 1 1 60 1 100ms applied when the ✔ ✔
PERIOD 1: 100 ms sensor continuous OFF detect time.
power is rebooted.
Booklet Tray belt long turn operation authorization setting during Cycle Down For switching the booklet automatic Setting values are
BOOKLET BELT
E 23-6-042 － - 0 0 1 1 - 0: Allowed feed operation setting during cycle applied when the ✔ ✔
SETTING down. power is rebooted.
1: Not allowed
Movement amount compensation from compile position to fold position (in

fastener OFF mode) to paper lead direction fold position. (Fold position
BOOKLET Setting values are
compensation) For compensating the booklet fold
E 23-6-043 COMPILE FOLD 1 Less than B4 100 0 200 1 0.1mm applied when the ✔ ✔
1 = 1 Pulse position.
POSITION power is rebooted.
1 Pulse = 0.1 mm
The type of the setting value indicates the paper size.
E 2 B4 or more 100 0 200 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
For adjusting the compile paddle

Setting values are
COMPILE Sets COMPILE PADDLE UP LIMIT. height raise timing during miss-
E 23-6-044 － - 50 10 90 1 Sheet applied when the ✔ ✔
PADDLE UP LIMIT 1 = sheets registration and when pages are
power is rebooted.
missing.
For adjusting the sub paddle height

Setting values are
SUB PADDLE UP Sets SUB PADDLE UP LIMIT. raise timing during discharge
E 23-6-045 － - 50 10 90 1 Sheet applied when the ✔ ✔
LIMIT 1 = sheets problems due to leading edge of the
power is rebooted.
paper contact.
For changing the stacker tray Setting values are

S-STAPLE STACK Number
E 23-6-046 － - 200 1 155 1 Stacker tray capacity restriction quantity for single staple sets capacity restriction quantity for single applied when the ✔ ✔
TRAY LIMIT of copies staple paper bundles. power is rebooted.
For changing the stacker tray

S-STAPLE STACK Setting values are
Number Stacker tray capacity restriction quantity for single staple sets when stack capacity restriction quantity for single
E 23-6-047 TRAY LIMIT (FLAP － - 100 1 255 1 applied when the ✔ ✔
of copies tray flapper is Up staple paper bundles when the stack
UP) power is rebooted.
tray flapper is Up..
For changing the stacker tray Setting values are

D-STAPLE STACK Number
E 23-6-048 － - 200 1 255 1 Stacker tray capacity restriction quantity for dual staple sets capacity restriction quantity for dual applied when the ✔ ✔
TRAY LIMIT of copies staple paper bundles. power is rebooted.


For changing the stacker tray

D-STAPLE STACK Setting values are
Number Stacker tray capacity restriction quantity for dual staple sets when stack tray capacity restriction quantity for dual
E 23-6-049 TRAY LIMIT (FLAP － - 100 1 255 1 applied when the ✔ ✔
of copies flapper is Up staple paper bundles when the stack
UP) power is rebooted.
tray flapper is Up..
Sets whether or not to detect a full error when the mix full detect position is For switching between detect/ do not
exceeded and paper in the topmost position with a width or length exceeding detect a full error when the mix full
Setting values are
18 mm is loaded. detect position is exceeded and
E 23-6-050 MIX SIZE FULL1 － - 0 0 1 1 - applied when the ✔ ✔
- Area of effect: Finisher full discharge tray paper in the topmost position with a
power is rebooted.
0: Detect width or length exceeding 18 mm is
loaded.
1: Do not detect
TAIL EDGE Tray height adjustment function setting for SET trailing edge (Tray bank) For switching between enable/ Setting values are
E 23-6-051 DETECT TRAY － - 0 0 1 1 - 0: Enable disable Tray height adjustment applied when the ✔ ✔
HIGHT ADJUST 1: Disable function for SET trailing edge. power is rebooted.
Buffer sheet overlay amount adjustment and reverse pulse for each size +
For adjusting the Buffer sheet overlay Setting values are
BUFFER SHEET NVM value
E 23-6-052 1 No punch 42 0 80 1 Pulse amount adjustment (reverse pulse applied when the ✔ ✔
REVERCE 1 = 1 Pulse amount). power is rebooted.
The setting value type indicates with or without punches.
E 2 With punch 29 0 80 1 Pulse ✔ ✔
For changing the maximum number

of sheets that can be stapled.
Sets the maximum number of stapled sheets. Setting values are
Maximum STP * Set to the same setting value as 0-
E 23-6-053 1 Small size 100 0 200 1 Sheet The type of the setting value indicates the paper size. "Small size" is applied when the ✔ ✔
sheets 23-6-034 "STAPLE LIMIT 100".
A4LEF/LETTER LEF or lower. power is rebooted.
(If the values are different, the
smaller value is used.)
E 2 Large size 65 0 200 1 Sheet ✔ ✔
Adjusts the fold position for booklet staple mode 2 sheet folds.
When the lower section is long: enter the misalignment amount (mm) x 10* x
0.5 in the current NVM value + the value. Setting values are
BOOKLET FOLD For adjusting the fold position for 2
E 23-6-054 1 SMALL 100 0 200 1 0.1 mm When the upper section is long: enter the misalignment amount (mm) x 10* applied when the ✔ ✔
ADJUST fold booklets.
x 0.5 in the current NVM value - the value. power is rebooted.
E 2 LARGE 100 0 200 1 Pulse ✔ ✔


Adjusts the staple position for booklet staple mode 2 sheet folds.
- When the staple is above the fold position: enter the misalignment amount
(mm) x 10* in the current NVM value - the value. Setting values are
BOOKLET For adjusting the staple position for 2
E 23-6-055 1 SMALL 100 0 200 1 0.1 mm - When the staple is below the fold position: enter the misalignment amount applied when the ✔ ✔
STAPLE ADJUST fold booklets.
(mm) x 10* in the current NVM value + the value. power is rebooted.
E 2 LARGE 100 0 200 1 Pulse ✔ ✔
Compensates the tamping amount

for the rear side only during normal
Compensates the tamping amount for the rear side only during normal Setting values are
BOOKLET REAR 0.2618m tamping for booklet compile when
E 23-6-056 － - 20 5 35 1 tamping for booklet compile. applied when the ✔ ✔
TAMP ADJUST m adjustment is necessary for poor
1=1Pulse 1Pulse=0.2618mm power is rebooted.
booklet paper alignment and fold
precision is out of specified range.
For changing MAX BI-FOLDING

during booklet stapling. Setting values are
BOOKLET
E 23-6-057 － - 15 2 25 1 Sheet Maximum number of joined folds for stapling in booklet mode. * Set to the same setting value as 0- applied when the ✔ ✔
STAPLE LIMIT 23-6-181 "Booklet Staple Maximum power is rebooted.
Value (for Machine)".
Setting values are

BOOKLET For changing MAX BI-FOLDING
E 23-6-058 － - 5 1 15 1 Sheet Maximum number of joined folds for unstapling in booklet mode. applied when the ✔ ✔
UNSTAPLE LIMIT during booklet unstapling.
power is rebooted.
Movement amount per sheet compensation adjustment value from compile

BOOKLET position to fold position (in fastener OFF mode) to paper lead direction fold
Setting values are
COMPILE FOLD position. For compensating the booklet (two
E 23-6-059 1 2 sheets 100 0 200 1 0.1mm applied when the ✔ ✔
POSITION Adjusts the compensating data for two sheet folds. 1 = 1 Pulse 1 sheet folds) fold position.
power is rebooted.
ADJUST Pulse = 0.1 mm
The setting value type indicates the number of sheets.
E 2 3 sheets 100 0 200 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
Other paper discharge sheet specification for subtracting the number of Z- For changing the number of
Setting values are
Z-FOLD STACK fold sheets from paper discharged to the stacker tray. discharged sheets to subtracting the
E 23-6-060 1 A3S/17S 100 0 255 1 Sheet applied when the ✔ ✔
TRAY SETTING The setting value type indicates the paper size of paper discharged into the number of Z-fold sheets from paper
power is rebooted.
stack tray. "A3S/17S" is A3SEF/11x17SEF. discharged to the stack tray.
E 2 B4S 150 0 255 1 Sheet ✔ ✔


Compensates for the first fold roll position and paper lead stop position for
Setting values are
Z-folds.
E 23-6-062 Z-FOLD1 ADJUST 1 8 open GCO 50 10 90 1 0.1mm For adjusting the first Z-fold position. applied when the ✔ ✔
1 = 1 Pulse 1 Pulse = 0.1 mm power is rebooted.
E 2 8 open 50 10 90 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 3 A3 50 10 90 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 4 11x17 50 10 90 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 5 B4 50 15 90 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
Compensates for the second fold roll position and paper lead stop position
for Z-folds. Setting values are
For adjusting the second Z-fold
E 23-6-063 Z-FOLD2 ADJUST 1 8 open GCO 50 10 90 1 0.1mm 1 = 1 Pulse applied when the ✔ ✔
position.
1 Pulse = 0.1 mm power is rebooted.
E 2 8 open 50 10 90 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 3 A3 50 10 90 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 4 11x17 50 10 90 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 5 B4 50 10 90 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
For changing the BUFFER SHEET

BUFFER SHEET TIMING setting for the second sheet when discharging two TIMING in order to carry out second Setting values are
BUFFER SHEET
E 23-6-064 － - 60 10 200 1 2.5ms buffer sheets. sheet discharge command applied when the ✔ ✔
TIMING notification when discharging two power is rebooted.
1 ＝ 2.5 msec
buffer sheets.
Changes the maximum number of

Setting values are
folded sheets for bi-fold booklets
E 23-6-065 MAX BI-FOLDING － - 1 1 15 1 Sheet Maximum number of folded sheets when discharging bi- folds. applied when the ✔ ✔
when it is necessary to improve poor
power is rebooted.
booklet folds due to paper.
Compensates for the fold roll position and paper lead stop position for Env-C
folds. Setting values are
ENV-C
E 23-6-066 1 A4S 50 10 90 1 0.2 mm 1 = 2 Pulse For adjusting the Env-C fold position. applied when the ✔ ✔
FOLD1ADJUST power is rebooted.
1 Pulse = 0.1 mm
Other than
E 2 50 10 90 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
A4S


Compensates for the fold roll position and paper lead stop position for Env-C
folds. Setting values are
ENV-C FOLD2
E 23-6-067 1 A4S 50 10 90 1 0.1mm 1 = 1 Pulse For adjusting the Env-C fold position. applied when the ✔ ✔
1 Pulse = 0.1 mm
Other than
E 2 50 10 90 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
A4S
Paper sending (Mot stop amount after hitting the End guide) adjustment For adjusting the sending amount
(Mot stop amount after hitting the Setting values are
PAPER ADD FEED amount.
E 23-6-068 － - 18 0 36 1 0.5mm End guide) in order to adjust the applied when the ✔ ✔
ADJUST 1=1Pulse paper bend amount for the first fold power is rebooted.
1Pulse=0.5mm roll.
Adjusts the paper screw

compensation time (time from NP
Time from NP release open 100 ms ON to NIP release open 100 ms ON to NIP)
Setting values are
Adjusts Skew compensation Roll NIP release timing 1: 10 ms before beginning paper folding when
E 23-6-069 ROLL NIP TIMING 1 A4S/LET S 21 2 48 1 10ms applied when the ✔ ✔
The type of the setting value indicates the paper size. "A4S/LET S" is paper folding (other than
power is rebooted.
A4SEF/LETTER SEF. Z-fold and booklet folds) precision is
out of specified range due to the
paper skew.
Except for
E 2 21 2 48 1 10ms ✔ ✔
A4S/LET S
Number of Z-fold paper discharge restriction sheets to stack tray. For changing the number of stacker Setting values are
Z-FOLD LIMIT
E 23-6-070 1 B4S 20 2 255 1 Sheet The setting value type indicates the Z-fold paper size. "A3S/17S" is tray discharge restriction sheets for applied when the ✔ ✔
STACK TRAY Z-fold paper bundles. power is rebooted.
A3SEF/11x17SEF.
E 2 A3S/17S 30 2 255 1 Sheet ✔ ✔
For changing the number of top tray Setting values are

Z-FOLD LIMIT
E 23-6-071 － - 20 0 20 1 Sheet Number of Z-fold paper discharge restriction sheets to top tray. discharge restriction sheets for Z-fold applied when the ✔ ✔
TOP TRAY paper bundles. power is rebooted.


When the sub paddle support action

causes a discharge malfunction while
discharging thin paper of B5LFF size
Adjusts start timing for sub paddle support action. 1 = 2.5 ms or smaller from the compile exit roll,
Setting values are
SUB PADDLE The setting value type indicates the condition difference. change the sub paddle support
E 23-6-072 1 Condition 1 8 1 48 1 2.5ms applied when the ✔ ✔
TIMING Condition 1: action timing. (Limited to thin paper
power is rebooted.
paper size B5LEF and below, and thin paper type. feed with a paper size feed direction
length of 182 mm or less and with a
width direction length of 257 mm or
less)
Condition 2:
E 2 Condition 2 1 1 48 1 2.5ms ✔ ✔
paper size B5LEF and below, and standard paper type.
Condition 3:
E 3 Condition 3 8 1 48 1 2.5ms ✔ ✔
Paper size is larger than B5LEF.
Adjusts the time until the side

registration sensor begins detecting
PUNCH SIDE Adjusts the time until punch side registration detect operation starts for left edge of paper after punch OUT Setting values are
E 23-6-073 REGI TIMING A4/ － - 8 1 255 1 10ms A4SEF/LET SEF 2 hole paper. sensor ON detects paper when applied when the ✔ ✔
LET 1 ＝ 10 msec punch hole position precision is power is rebooted.
outside specified range for
A4SEF/LET SEF paper (2 hole).
IOT: Added tamping operations for normal booklet tamping (except for
BOOKLET ADD Pinot) Setting values are
E 23-6-074 TAMPING － - 0 0 2 1 Times (Operation carried out for B4SEF size or larger and when the current booklet For adding tamping to booklets. applied when the ✔ ✔
SETTING1 sheets > = TM0-23-6-076 "BOOKLET ADD TAMPING ". power is rebooted.
NVM value = 0, no added tamping.)
IOT: Added tamping operations for booklet staple hold (except for Pinot)
(Operation carried out for B4SEF size or larger and when the current booklet For adding tamping to booklet staple
E 23-6-075 STAPLE HOLD － - 0 0 10 1 Times applied when the ✔ ✔
sheets > = TM0-23-6-076 "BOOKLET ADD TAMPING ". NVM value = 0, no hold. power is rebooted.
ADD TAMPING
added tamping.)


IOT: Regulation number of sheets for non-Pinot booklet tamping adding

(normal tamping, final tamping, staple hold, fold position before staple).
(B4SEF size and higher)
Executes added tamping operation when discharging booklets with more For changing the regulation number Setting values are
BOOKLET ADD
E 23-6-076 － - 6 0 25 1 Sheet than the regulation sheets. (Common to all tamping) of sheets when carrying out added applied when the ✔ ✔
TAMPING
However, added tamping is not executed when NVM value = 0. (Regardless tamping operations for booklets. power is rebooted.
of the values for TM0-23-6-074 "BOOKLET ADD TAMPING SETTING1",
TM0-23-6- 075 "BOOKLET STAPLE HOLD ADD TAMPING ", and TM0-23-
6-168 "BOOKLET STAPLE TAMPING ADD NUMBER")
Setting for StapleSet Tray height adjustment Snr HeightSnr that does not
STACK HIGHT Setting values are
include Stacker discharge Z-fold For switching tray height adjustment
E 23-6-077 SENSOR1 － - 0 0 1 1 - applied when the ✔ ✔
0: Not allowed (Carries out HeightSnr2 height adjustment) sensors during stack tray stapling.
ENABLE power is rebooted.
1: Allowed (Carries out HeightSnr1 height adjustment)
PADDLE Setting values are

Paper width threshold value for executing paddle support action. For changing the paper width for
E 23-6-078 SUPPORT SET － - 235 204 254 1 - applied when the ✔ ✔
Not executed for value of less than 235 mm. carrying out paddle support action.
WIDTH 2 power is rebooted.
For changing the number of

conversion sheets for 1 sheet of Z- Setting values are
Z-FOLD NUMBER Number of conversion sheets for 1 sheet of Z-fold paper The type of the
E 23-6-079 1 A3/11x17 10 1 20 1 Sheet fold paper to prevent discharge applied when the ✔ ✔
CONVERSION setting value indicates the paper size. malfunction while loading paper into power is rebooted.
the stack tray for Z-fold paper mix.
E 2 B4/8 open 20 1 20 1 Sheet ✔ ✔
For changing the punch time record Setting values are

E 23-6-081 PUNCH TIME － - 0 0 65535 1 Times Punch full detect Punch time record and evaluation of punch full applied when the ✔ ✔
detection. power is rebooted.
STACK TRAY For changing the staple quantity and Setting values are
Number
E 23-6-082 EJECTED STAPLE － - 0 0 255 1 Staple quantity for paper ejected to the stack tray evaluation of paper ejection to stack applied when the ✔ ✔
of copies tray. power is rebooted.
NUMBER
Setting values are

STACK TRAY TOP Top paper width in stack tray 0 ｘ 0000 to 0 ｘ FFFF For changing the top paper width in
E 23-6-083 － - 0 0 65535 1 0.1mm applied when the ✔ ✔
WIDTH 1 = 0.1 mm the stack tray and evaluation.
power is rebooted.


Setting values are

STACK TRAY TOP Top paper length in stack tray 0 ｘ 0000 to 0 ｘ FFFF For changing the top paper length in
LENGTH 1 = 0.1 mm the stack tray and evaluation.
power is rebooted.
Setting values are

STACK TRAY Maximum paper width in stack tray 0 ｘ 0000 to 0 ｘ FFFF For changing the maximum paper
MAX WIDTH 1 = 0.1 mm width in the stack tray and evaluation.
power is rebooted.
For changing the maximum Setting values are

STACK TRAY Maximum paper length in stack tray 0 ｘ 0000 to 0 ｘ FFFF
E 23-6-086 － - 0 0 65535 1 0.1mm paper length in the stack tray and applied when the ✔ ✔
MAX LENGTH 1 = 0.1 mm evaluation. power is rebooted.
Specifies the excess raise/lower amount for miss- registration measure

operations due to excess raising and lowering of the end guide small size For adjusting the end guide raise/
BOOKLET END Setting values are
booklet discharge. lower amount for booklet (small)
E 23-6-087 GUIDE POSITION － - 60 30 255 1 0.1mm applied when the ✔ ✔
1 = 0.1 mm miss-registration prevention
Enable when TM0-23-6-145 "BOOKLET (SMALL) MISREGI MEASURE" is operation.
set to "1: Yes".
Indicates the Z-fold paper discharge status to the stack tray

For changing the Z-fold paper Setting values are
STACK TRAY 0: Not discharged 1: Discharged
E 23-6-088 1 A3S/17S 0 0 1 1 - discharge status to the stack tray and applied when the ✔ ✔
EJECT Z-FOLD The type of the setting value indicates the paper size. "A3S/17S" is evaluation. power is rebooted.
A3SEF/11x17SEF.
E 2 B4 0 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
Sets compile paddle down/up operation start timing every 5 seconds for 60th For changing the compile paddle
COMPILE sheet and later down/up operation start timing every Setting values are
E 23-6-089 PADDLE UP 1 <330mm 90 4 255 1 5ms 1 = 5 ms 5 seconds for 60th sheet and later applied when the ✔ ✔
TIMING The type of setting value indicates the paper length. when a curl in the leading edge of the power is rebooted.
" ≦ 330 mm" is less than 330 mm paper length. causes a stock failure at the end wall.
E 2 ≧ 330 mm 120 4 255 1 5ms ✔ ✔
Notification to IOT when a 2/3 hole puncher is attached. Setting values are
2/3 PUNCH AUTO
E 23-6-090 － - 1 0 1 1 - 0: 3 hole puncher For changing the puncher type. applied when the ✔ ✔
CHANGE power is rebooted.
1: 2/3 hole puncher


PUNCH Puncher initialization control for mix jobs Setting values are
For changing whether or not to
E 23-6-091 INITIALIZE MIX － - 1 0 255 1 - 0: Not allowed applied when the ✔ ✔
initialize the mix job puncher.
JOB 1: Allowed power is rebooted.
STACK TRAY Stack tray eject discharge speed control paper restriction sheets. For changing the number of sheets Setting values are
E 23-6-092 EJECT SPEED 1 ≦ 216mm 60 1 255 1 Sheet The type of setting value indicates the paper length. when switching discharge speed to applied when the ✔ ✔
SETTING " ≦ 216 mm" is 216 mm or shorter paper length. stack tray. power is rebooted.
E 2 >216mm 30 1 255 1 Sheet ✔ ✔
Compensates for the fold roll position and paper lead stop position for Env-Z
Setting values are
ENVELOPE-Z folds.
E 23-6-093 1 LET S 50 10 90 1 0.1mm For adjusting the Env-Z fold position. applied when the ✔ ✔
FOLD ADJUST1 1 = 1 Pulse 1 Pulse = 0.1 mm power is rebooted.
Other than
E 2 50 10 90 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
A4S
Compensates for the fold roll position and paper lead stop position for Env-Z
Setting values are
ENVELOPE-Z folds.
E 23-6-094 1 LET S 50 10 90 1 0.1mm For adjusting the Env-Z fold position. applied when the ✔ ✔
FOLD ADJUST2 1 = 1 Pulse 1 Pulse = 0.1 mm power is rebooted.
Other than
E 2 50 10 90 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
A4S
Setting values are

CENTER STAPLE For adjusting the center staple
E 23-6-095 － - 100 50 150 1 - CENTER STAPLE ADJUST applied when the ✔ ✔
ADJUST position.
power is rebooted.
Setting values are

SET CLAMP TIME Set clamp operations (lower value) For changing and evaluating the
E 23-6-096 － - 0 0 65535 1 Times applied when the ✔ ✔
(LOW) Total operations = upper value x 65535 + lower value number of set clamp operations.
power is rebooted.
Setting values are

SET CLAMP TIME Set clamp operations (upper value) For changing and evaluating the
(TOP) Total operations = upper value x 65535 + lower value number of set clamp operations.
power is rebooted.


Setting values are

PAPER FEED PAPER FEED TIME (LOW) For changing and evaluating the total
TIME (LOW) Total operations = upper value x 65535 + lower value number of paper run sheets.
power is rebooted.
Setting values are

PAPER FEED PAPER FEED TIME (TOP) For changing and evaluating the total
TIME (TOP) Total operations = upper value x 65535 + lower value number of paper run sheets.
power is rebooted.
Adjusts the raising compile height

Condition: Sets number of sheets for paddle solenoid ON (move to UP timing when miss-registration and
COMPILE Setting values are
position) operation for thin paper with a feed direction length of 182 mm or missing papers occur due to poor
E 23-6-101 PUDDLE UP (THIN － - 30 10 50 1 Sheet applied when the ✔ ✔
more and a width direction length of 257 mm or less (B5LEF or less), with compile paper feed when there are
PAPER) power is rebooted.
the above conditions except for Z-fold. multiple thin papers loaded in the
compile tray.


Paddle solenoid ON/OFF operation setting every 5 seconds for 50 sheets or

COMPILE more For changing the paddle vertical
movement area of application every 5 Setting values are
PUDDLE 0: Operate all
E 23-6-102 － - 0 0 3 1 - seconds when 50 or more sheets are applied when the ✔ ✔
UP/DOWN (THIN 1: Do not operate thin paper, B5LEF or lower, other than Z-fold loaded in order to improve 50 sheet power is rebooted.
PAPER) 2: Do not operate thin paper or regular paper, B5LEF and below, other than or more compiler containment.
Z-fold
Changes stamper operation for B5LEF or lower size (except for Z-fold).
TAMPING For changing the tamper operation Setting values are
0: Current status
E 23-6-103 SELECTION (THIN － - 0 0 2 1 - for B5LEF or lower size (except for Z- applied when the ✔ ✔
1: Applies for thin paper fold) to improve paper alignment. power is rebooted.
PAPER)
2: Applies for thin paper or normal paper
Specifies booklet paper pass motor deceleration for each paper feed tray
when accepting card paper to the booklet compiler.
For paper feed to other than interposer tray, the speeds for paper feed from For changing booklet paper pass
BOOKLET P- Setting values are
the interposer tray are as follows. motor deceleration speed for each
E 23-6-104 PATH MOTOR － - 0 0 3 1 - applied when the ✔ ✔
0: 50 mm/s deceleration, 50mm/s deceleration paper feed tray to improve
SPEED (THICK) power is rebooted.
1: 50 mm/s deceleration, 250mm/s deceleration containment in the booklet compiler.
2: 250 mm/s deceleration, 50 mm/s deceleration
3: 250 mm/s deceleration, 250 mm/s deceleration
STACK TRAY For changing the Z-fold sheets and Setting values are
E 23-6-105 EJECTED Z-FOLD － - 0 0 255 1 Sheet Number of Z-fold sheets discharged to stacker tray evaluation of paper discharge to applied when the ✔ ✔
NUMBER stack tray. power is rebooted.
Job discharge destination information directly before power is turned OFF

1: Top tray For changing the job discharge Setting values are
E 23-6-106 DESTINATION ID － - 1 1 4 1 - 2: Stack destination information directly before applied when the ✔ ✔
3: Booklet power is turned OFF and evaluation. power is rebooted.
4: Folding
STACK TRAY
Record the stack tray flapper status directly before turning the power OFF For changing the stack tray flapper Setting values are
FLAPPER
E 23-6-107 － - 0 0 1 1 - 0: Down status directly before power is turned applied when the ✔ ✔
STATUS AT OFF and evaluation. power is rebooted.
1: Up
POWER OFF


Specify execution of miss-registration prevention operation (after final

tamping, the tamper is moved 20 mm to the front, preventing paper from
sticking to
the compiler surface when moving back to the original position) for small
BOOKLET size paper (paper length less than 356.8 mm) during booklet staple jobs. For switching between whether or not Setting values are
E 23-6-108 MISREGI AVOID － - 0 0 3 1 - Select normal 1 high-speed mode to use preventative operation. 2 and 3 are to execute booklet miss- applied when the ✔ ✔
SETTING available for selection when miss-registration in high-speed mode worsens. registration preventative measure. power is rebooted.
0: Do not use preventative operation
1: Preventative operation in Profile 1 (high speed)
2: Preventative operation in Profile 2 (medium speed)
3: Preventative operation in Profile 3 (low speed)
STACK TRAY Indicates the discharge status of the single staple set from the stack tray. For changing the discharge status to Setting values are
E 23-6-109 EJECT STATE (S- － - 0 0 1 1 - 0: Not discharged stack tray quantity for single staple applied when the ✔ ✔
STAPLE) 1: Discharged paper bundles and for evaluation.. power is rebooted.
STACK TRAY Indicates the discharge status of the dual staple set from the stack tray. For changing the discharge status to Setting values are
E 23-6-110 EJECT STATE (D- － - 0 0 1 1 - 0: Not discharged stack tray quantity for dual staple applied when the ✔ ✔
STAPLE) 1: Discharged paper bundles and for evaluation.. power is rebooted.
Indicates the discharge status of the dual staple set from the stack tray not For changing the discharge status to
STACK TRAY Setting values are
including Z-fold.. stack tray quantity for staple paper
E 23-6-111 EJECT STATE － - 0 0 1 1 - applied when the ✔ ✔
0: Not discharged bundles not including Z-fold paper
(NON Z-F STP) power is rebooted.
1: Discharged and for evaluation..
For changing puncher operation

PUNCHER Setting values are
position status directly before the
E 23-6-112 POSTION － - 0 0 3 1 - Puncher operation position status directly before the power is turned OFF applied when the ✔ ✔
power is turned OFF, and for
STATUS power is rebooted.
evaluation.
Buffer paper automatic discharge time setting

BUFFER PAPER Setting values are
(If the set time passes and the next paper does not come in after paper For changing the buffer paper
E 23-6-113 AUTO EJECT － - 3 1 10 1 sec applied when the ✔ ✔
comes into the multi-finisher, it is automatically discharged.) automatic discharge time.
TIME power is rebooted.
1 = 1sec


Sets the folder C solenoid on start time for folder entrance sensor during C- For adjusting the folder C solenoid
FOLDER C operation start time when a Nip Setting values are
folding.
E 23-6-114 SOLENOID ON 1 A4 86 0 160 1 2.5ms failure causes a paper jam before the applied when the ✔ ✔
1 = 2.5 ms second fold during an inside third fold power is rebooted.
TIME
The type of the setting value indicates the paper size. (or Env-C fold) operation.
E 2 LET 86 0 160 1 2.5ms ✔ ✔

Except for
E 3 120 60 160 1 2.5ms ✔ ✔
A4/LET
Setting values are

D-STAPLE MOVE For changing the front end movement
E 23-6-116 － - 20 0 40 1 0.157mm Front end movement amount adjustment for dual staple 1 = 0.157 applied when the ✔ ✔
ADJUST (FRONT) amount adjustment for dual staple.
power is rebooted.
D-STAPLE MOVE For changing the dual width Setting values are
E 23-6-117 ADJUST (D- － - 20 1 40 1 0.157mm Dual width movement amount adjustment for dual staple 1 = 0.157 movement amount adjustment for applied when the ✔ ✔
WIDTH) dual staple. power is rebooted.
STACK HEIGHT Setting values are

For switching between enable/
E 23-6-118 SENSOR 3 － - 0 0 1 1 - Stack height sensor 3 enable settings 0: Enable 1: Disable applied when the ✔ ✔
disable for stack height sensor 3.
ENABLE power is rebooted.
BOOKLET
Adjusts the FS direction position for booklet staple positions. When a value Setting values are
STAPLE POS 0.2618m For changing the FS direction
E 23-6-120 － - 30 0 50 1 larger than 30 is set, the staple position is adjusted to the front end. applied when the ✔ ✔
ADJUST FS- m position for booklet staple positions.
1=1Pulse 1Pulse=0.2618mm power is rebooted.
DIRECT
STACK HEIGHT Stack height tray sensor 2 height adjustment setting for sheet discharge For adjusting the stack height tray Setting values are
E 23-6-121 SENSOR 2 － - 0 0 1 1 - 0: Disable sensor 2 height adjustment setting applied when the ✔ ✔
ENABLE 1: Enable for sheet discharge. power is rebooted.
Setting for whether or not to carry out an envelope folder tray full count For setting whether or not to carry
ENV FOLDER Setting values are
according to number of discharged sheets out an envelope folder tray full count
E 23-6-122 TRAY FULL － - 0 0 1 1 - applied when the ✔ ✔
0: Do not detect number of discharged sheets (disable) according to the number of
COUNT ENABLE power is rebooted.
1: Detect number of discharged sheets (enable) discharged sheets.


Sheet number detection setting depending on the eject number when a full When you want to change the
ENV FOLDER Setting values are
folder envelope tray is detected. detected number of sheets
E 23-6-123 TRAY FULL － - 30 10 40 1 Sheet applied when the ✔ ✔
TM0-23-6-122: Enabled when "ENV FOLDER TRAY FULL COUNT depending on the eject number when
DETECT COUNT power is rebooted.
ENABLE" is set to "1". a full folder envelope tray is detected.
To prevent stacking tray and compile miss-registration, change the tamping

STACK TRAY operation and improve miss- registration. For when you want to enable/ disable Setting values are
E 23-6-124 MISREGI AVOID － - 0 0 1 1 - 0: Enable stack tray miss- registration applied when the ✔ ✔
ENABLE 1: Disable prevention operation. power is rebooted.
Productivity will be slightly reduced.
Setting values are

Check the value when you want to
E 23-6-125 IPL VERSION － - 0 0 0 1 - Shows the IPL version. applied when the ✔ ✔
confirm the IPL version.
power is rebooted.
Setting values are

Z-FOLD TIME Number of Z-folding operations (Low) For changing and evaluating the
(LOW) Total number of operations = Top x 65535 + Low number of Z-folding operations.
power is rebooted.
Setting values are

Z-FOLD TIME Number of Z-folding operations (Top) For changing and evaluating the
(TOP) Total number of operations = Top x 65535 + Low number of Z-folding operations.
power is rebooted.
Setting values are

12-227 DISABLE Replace 12-227 fail with 12-110 jam For replacing 12-227 fail with 12-
SELECTION 0: disable 1: enable 110 jam.
power is rebooted.
PADDLE Paper width threshold value for executing paddle support action. For when you want to change the Setting values are
E 23-6-129 SUPPORT SET － - 235 204 254 1 mm Not executed for value of less than 235 mm. Also changes the damper paper width threshold value for applied when the ✔ ✔
WIDTH action threshold value. executing paddle support action. power is rebooted.


Card stock setting 1

0: Card stock 1 normal operation (no buffer, no push prevention action)
Setting values are
THICK PAPER 1 1: Card stock 1 operates as card stock 2 (no buffer, with push prevention
E 23-6-130 － - 1 0 2 1 - For changing card stock 1 operation. applied when the ✔ ✔
SELECTION action), however, only enabled for Pinot/Chamonix/Chandon or Teak Staple power is rebooted.
Job
2: Card 1 operates the same as card 2 regardless of the model
Paper back setting

Setting values are
REUSED PAPER 0: Paper back operates same as normal paper
E 23-6-131 － - 0 0 1 1 - For paper back operation. applied when the ✔ ✔
SELECTION 1: Paper back operates same as card stock 2 (no buffer, with push power is rebooted.
prevention action)
BUFFER DISABLE SELECTION SETTINGS

Setting values are
BUFFER DISABLE 0: Normal paper, with paper back buffer For switching between with or without
SELECTION 1: Normal paper, no paper back buffer, recycled paper in NVM, and card 2 paper back buffer.
power is rebooted.
takes priority when paper back is set as card 2.
Setting for allowing a staple option when a Z-folding paper is included in the For enabling/disabling the staple
option when a Z-folding paper is Setting values are
Z-FOLD STAPLE 50-pin staple cartridge even when the number conversion is 50 or more.
E 23-6-134 － - 0 0 1 1 - included in the 50-pin staple cartridge applied when the ✔ ✔
50PIN PERMIT 0: Disable and the number conversion is 50 or power is rebooted.
1: Enable more.
Thickness 2 for a paper width of less than 235 mm (235 mm can be

PADDLE changed in a separate NVM), with or without paddle support action 1 setting Setting values are
To change with or without paddle
E 23-6-135 SUPPORT 1 － - 1 0 1 1 - (support action). applied when the ✔ ✔
support action (support action).
(THICK PAPER 2) 0: With power is rebooted.
1: Without
Sets with or without tamper press action for paper thickness 2. Setting values are
TAMPER HOLD For changing with or without tamper
E 23-6-136 － - 1 0 1 1 - 0: With applied when the ✔ ✔
(THICK PAPER 2) press action for thickness 2.
1: Without power is rebooted.


Sets with or without tamper press action for Z-folding paper. Setting values are
TAMPER HOLD For changing with or without tamper
E 23-6-137 － - 1 0 1 1 - 0: With applied when the ✔ ✔
(Z-FOLD) press action for Z-folding.
1: Without power is rebooted.
100 For adjusting the folder C solenoid

NNV Setting for adjusting the time from folder entrance sensor ON to folder operation start time when a Nip Setting values are
C-FOLD AP
E 23-6-138 1 LET S 0 160 1 2.5 ms C solenoid ON for Z folder C fold. failure causes a paper jam before the applied when the ✔ ✔
SOLENOID ON (Z) specification: second fold during an outside third power is rebooted.
80 fold (or Env-2 fold) operation.
100
AP
E 2 A4S 0 160 1 Hours ✔ ✔
specification:
80
100 For adjusting the folder C solenoid

C-FOLD Setting for adjusting the time from folder entrance sensor ON to folder C operation start time when a Nip Setting values are
AP
E 23-6-139 SOLENOID ON 1 B4S 0 160 1 2.5 ms solenoid ON for Z fold folder C fold. failure causes a paper jam before the applied when the ✔ ✔
specification: second fold during Z-folding (or single power is rebooted.
(ZF) The type of the setting value indicates the paper size.
80 sleeve fold) operation.
100
AP
E 2 8KTFX 0 160 1 Hours ✔ ✔
specification:
80
100
AP
E 3 8KGCO 0 160 1 Hours ✔ ✔
specification:
80
100
AP
E 4 A3S 0 160 1 Hours ✔ ✔
specification:
80
100
AP
E 5 11x17S 0 160 1 Hours ✔ ✔
specification:
80
For changing the folder C solenoid

C-FOLD Setting values are
ON time when a Nip failure causes a
E 23-6-140 SOLENOID TIME － - 100 0 160 1 2.5 ms ENV Time settings for turning folder C solenoid ON for Z/Z-folding. applied when the ✔ ✔
paper jam before the second fold
(Z/ZF) power is rebooted.
during ENV-Z or Z-folding operation.


Changes the eject clamp-up operation start time (eject clamp-up motor). T For improve containment of set first
Setting values are
EJECT CLAMP UP ms change for time from set first compiler exit sensor OFF. paper in the compiler by changing the
E 23-6-141 1 No punch 47 42 50 1 2.5 ms applied when the ✔ ✔
TIMING Default T = Set 115 ms as NMV value 3. When NVM1 is changed it varies time from set first compiler exit
power is rebooted.
2.5 ms. sensor OFF.
E 2 With punch 49 45 53 1 - ✔ ✔
IOT paper punch side position adjustment (adjust punch position in the front
direction)
PUNCH SIDE 1 = 1 pulse 1 pulse = 0.125 mm Setting values are
For changing the IOT paper punch
E 23-6-142 ADJUST IOT 1 Condition 1 0 0 24 1 0.125mm The setting value type indicates the difference in conditions. applied when the ✔ ✔
side position to the front direction.
(FRONT) Condition 1: power is rebooted.
2/4 hole puncher: 216 ＜ width ≦ 230
2/3 hole puncher: 203 ≦ width ≦ 223
Condition 2:
E 2 Condition 2 0 0 24 1 0.125mm 2/4 hole puncher: 230 ＜ width ≦ 250 ✔ ✔
Condition 3:
Condition 4:
Condition 5:
E 5 Condition 5 0 0 24 1 0.125mm 2/4 hole puncher: 285 ＜ width ＜ 297 ✔ ✔
2/3 hole puncher: 285 ＜ width ＜ 297
Condition 6:
E 6 Condition 6 0 0 24 1 0.125mm ✔ ✔
2/4 hole puncher: width = 297 2/3 hole puncher: width = 297
IOT paper punch side position adjustment (adjust punch position in the rear
PUNCH SIDE Setting values are
direction) For changing the IOT paper punch
E 23-6-143 ADJUST IOT － - 0 0 24 1 0.125mm applied when the ✔ ✔
2/4 hole puncher: paper width ≦ 216 mm side position to the rear direction.
(REAR) power is rebooted.
1 = 1 pulse 1 pulse = 0.125 mm
Sets the paper ejection speed to the compile tray for 1 sheet of paper
(except for Z-folding).
For changing the paper ejection
COMPILE TRAY 1: 544 PPS (285 mm/sec) Setting values are
speed to a tray for specific paper
E 23-6-144 EXIT SPEED 1 Thin 4 1 4 1 - 2: 735 pps (384.8 mm/sec) applied when the ✔ ✔
when effects of the nip roll indicate
ADJUST 3: 830 pps (434.6 mm/sec) power is rebooted.
that paper is flying off.
4: 1010 pps (528.8 mm/sec)
E 2 Standard 3 1 4 1 - ✔ ✔


Sets whether or not to execute a miss-registration counter operation for

moving the end guide staple for small size booklet ejection staple jobs, and
For switching between with or without
BOOKLET for Setting values are
miss-registration prevention operation
E 23-6-145 (SMALL) MISREGI － - 1 0 1 1 - excessively moving the end guide up and down during end guide folding applied when the ✔ ✔
when
MEASURE position movement for un-staple/bifold jobs. power is rebooted.
stapling a booklet (small size).
0: No
1: Yes
Check the value when you want to Setting values are

Indicates the Finisher Soft Version Patch Level (D2 Fin :V8.1 and later
E 23-6-146 PATCH LEVEL － - 0 0 0 1 - confirm the software version patch applied when the ✔ ✔
can be set) level. power is rebooted.
Setting for number of Unstaple Set Eject sheets (for preventing paper from
UNSTAPLE For changing the number of Setting values are
sticking together due to static electricity due to paper change) during
E 23-6-147 EJECT NUMBER － - 5 2 50 1 Sheet unstapled sheets when mixed paper applied when the ✔ ✔
Unstaple when the paper length is > 216 mm and paper types are mixed types are used. power is rebooted.
(MIX)
within 1Set and IOT Tray is changed.
Enable Z-folding paper HighStack when using the Z-folding 100 sheet stack
flapper
Z-FOLD Setting values are
0: Not allowed For allowing/not allowing 100 sheets
E 23-6-148 100SHEET STACK － - 0 0 1 1 - applied when the ✔ ✔
1: Allow for the Z-folding stack.
PERMIT power is rebooted.
When this TM is set to 1: Allow, TM0-23-6-024 "Z-FOLD 50 SHEET
STACK" must be set to Not allowed.
Tarzan Z-fold paper jam measure

0: Normal operation
1: Execute measure operation
Execute measure operation For switching between whether or not Setting values are
Z-HOLD PAPER
E 23-6-149 － - 0 0 1 1 - (1) When flapper up condition is achieved, flapper up operation is not to execute Z-fold paper jam applied when the ✔ ✔
JAM MEASURE prevention measure. power is rebooted.
carried out when a staple job containing a previous Z-fold is ejected
(2) Set as MixFull when the staple job begins in flapper up condition
This TM is enabled when TM0-23-6-148 "Z-FOLD 100SHEET STACK
PERMIT" is set to "1: Allow".
STACK TRAY For changing the stack tray offset Setting values are
E 23-6-150 OFFSET － - 0 0 4 1 - Store stack tray offset position when power is OFF. position information and carrying out applied when the ✔ ✔
POSITION an evaluation. power is rebooted.


STACK TRAY For changing quantity of staple sets Setting values are
Record number of ejected sheets from stack tray staple set containing Z-fold
E 23-6-151 ELECTED Z-HOLD － - 0 0 255 1 Sheet ejected to stack tray that includes Z- applied when the ✔ ✔
1 = 1 sheet fold and carrying out an evaluation. power is rebooted.
STP NUMBER
For changing the total number of Setting values are

STACK TRAY
E 23-6-152 － - 0 0 65535 1 Sheet Total number of sheets accumulated in the stack tray 1 = 1 sheet sheets accumulated in the stack tray applied when the ✔ ✔
LOAD NUMBER and carrying out an evaluation. power is rebooted.
Staple set ejection quantity limit not including Z-fold when the flapper is
FLAPPER UP raised For changing the staple set ejection Setting values are
Number
E 23-6-153 EJECTED STAPLE － - 60 0 200 1 1 = 1 portion quantity limit not including Z-fold applied when the ✔ ✔
of copies when the flapper is raised power is rebooted.
NUMBER This TM is enabled when TM0-23-6-148 "Z-FOLD 100SHEET STACK
Pitch adjustment value for the space between the previous Z-fold paper and Setting values are
Z-FOLD PAPER For changing the sheet space pitch
E 23-6-155 1 A3S 2206 0 65535 1 ms current paper with a Z-fold 1 = 1 ms applied when the ✔ ✔
PITCH SETTING for Z-fold paper.
The setting value type indicates the previous paper size. power is rebooted.
E 2 11x17S 2246 0 65535 1 ms ✔ ✔

E 3 B4S 2024 0 65535 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 4 8 opening S 2107 0 65535 1 ms ✔ ✔
Pitch adjustment value for the space between the previous Z-fold paper and For changing the sheet space pitch Setting values are
NO Z-FOLD
E 23-6-156 1 A3S 5513 0 65535 1 ms current paper without a Z-fold 1 = 1 ms for paper with a Z-fold and paper applied when the ✔ ✔
PAPER PITCH without a Z-fold. power is rebooted.
The setting value type indicates the previous paper size.
E 2 11x17S 5531 0 65535 1 ms ✔ ✔

E 3 B4S 5422 0 65535 1 ms ✔ ✔
E 4 8 opening S 5449 0 65535 1 ms ✔ ✔
Z-fold acceleration mechanism compatible setting. Setting values are

Z-FOLD SPEED For switching to Z-fold acceleration
E 23-6-157 － - 0 0 1 1 - 0: Incompatible mechanism applied when the ✔ ✔
UP MECH mechanism compatible control.
1: Compatible mechanism power is rebooted.


Ejection speed setting for ejecting Z-fold set at B4 size and below
1: 591.6 ㎜ /s (1570 PPS)
2: 650.3 ㎜ /s (1725 PPS)
Z-FOLD EJECT For changing the ejection speed Setting values are
3: 703.9㎜ /s (1867 PPS)
E 23-6-158 SPEED -B4 SIZE － - 7 1 7 1 - when ejecting Z-fold sets at B4 size applied when the ✔ ✔
4: 550 mm/s (1458 PPS) and below. power is rebooted.
OR UNDER
5: 570 mm/s (1515 PPS)
6: 610 mm/s (1623 PPS)
7: 630 mm/s (1675 PPS)
STACK TRAY Carrying out stack tray Flapper Type settings Setting values are
For changing the stack tray flapper
E 23-6-159 FLAPPER TYPE － - 1 0 1 1 - 0: Z-fold 100 sheet stack Type (new type) applied when the ✔ ✔
type.
SELECTION 1: Z-fold 30 sheet stack Type (old type) power is rebooted.
Sets number of non Z-fold paper sheets ejected into the stack tray to lower
the flapper.
FLAPPER DOWN When the set number of non Z-fold paper sheets ejected into the stacker set For changing the number of non Z- Setting values are
E 23-6-162 STACKER SHEET － - 5000 10 5000 1 Sheet by this TM is reached and there are less than 30 Z-fold sheets, the flapper is fold paper sheet limit ejected into the applied when the ✔ ✔
NUMBER lowered. stack tray to lower the flapper. power is rebooted.
Sets lower time in stack tray Snr2 after flapper up operation.

This setting is enabled when TM0-23-6-148 "Z-FOLD 100SHEET STACK
Setting values are
STACKER FALL PERMIT" is set to "1: Allow" For changing the lower time in stack
E 23-6-163 － - 1 1 800 1 2.5ms applied when the ✔ ✔
TIME SETTING 1 = 2.5 ms tray Snr2 after flapper up operation.
power is rebooted.
Sets Z-folding 100 sheet stack sheet limitation 1 = 1 sheet

Z-FOLD 100 Setting values are
80 This TM is enabled when TM0-23-6-148 "Z-FOLD 100SHEET STACK For changing the Z-folding 100 sheet
E 23-6-164 SHEETS STACK 1 A3/11x17 0 255 1 Sheet applied when the ✔ ✔
(Tarzan:79) PERMIT" is set to "1: Allow". stack sheet limitation.
LIMIT NUMBER power is rebooted.
60
E 2 B4 0 255 1 Sheet ✔ ✔
(Tarzan:58)
Flapper up operation setting 1 = 100 sheet Setting values are

FLAPPER UP For changing the flapper up operation
E 23-6-165 － - 12 5 20 1 100ms This TM is enabled when TM0-23-6-148 "Z-FOLD 100SHEET STACK applied when the ✔ ✔
MOVE TIME time.
PERMIT" is set to "1: Allow". power is rebooted.


Flapper down operation setting 1 = 100 sheet Setting values are

FLAPPER DOWN For changing the flapper Down
E 23-6-166 － - 12 5 20 1 100ms This TM is enabled when TM0-23-6-148 "Z-FOLD 100SHEET STACK applied when the ✔ ✔
MOVE TIME operation time.
PERMIT" is set to "1: Allow". power is rebooted.
Setting for whether or not to execute an add tamping operation in the

position in front of the fold before stapling in booklet staple mode.
0: Do not execute
BOOKLET Setting for executing add tamping in Setting values are
1: Execute
E 23-6-167 STAPLE TAMPING － - 2 0 2 1 - the position in front of the fold before applied when the ✔ ✔
2: Execute only for IP cover job stapling in booklet staple mode. power is rebooted.
ADD SELECTION
This TM is enabled when B4SEF size or greater and the current number of
booklet paper sheets ≧ TM0-23-6-076 "BOOKLET ADD TAMPING" setting
value.
Number of tamping operations at the fold position when executing an add

tamping operation in the position in front of the fold before stapling in
booklet staple mode. For changing the number of added
BOOKLET This TM is enabled when B4SEF size or greater and the current number of tamping operations when adding Setting values are
E 23-6-168 STAPLE TAMPING － - 4 1 10 1 Times booklet paper sheets ≧ TM0-23-6- 076 "BOOKLET ADD TAMPING" setting tamping in the position in front of the applied when the ✔ ✔
ADD NUMBER value. fold before stapling in booklet staple power is rebooted.
This TM is enabled when TM0-23-6-167 "BOOKLET STAPLE TAMPING mode.
ADD SELECTION" is set to "1:
Execute".
Setting value for number of Z-fold sheets to execute a flapper raised stack
Z-HOLD 100 tray initialization when the number of Z-folds accumulated in the stack tray
For changing the number of Z-fold Setting values are
FLAPPER UP exceed the setting value in this TM.
E 23-6-169 1 A3/11x17 10 1 30 1 Sheet sheets to initialize the stack tray applied when the ✔ ✔
NUMBER This TM is enabled when TM0-23-6-148 "Z-FOLD 100SHEET STACK when the flapper is raised. power is rebooted.
SETTING PERMIT" is set to "1: Allow".
E 2 B4/8 open 5 1 30 1 Sheet ✔ ✔
Using the EjectClampUp timing of the Set's first sheet as a base, stop
For changing the back time when
processing is carried out going back before the time set by this TM. Setting values are
BUFFER COMB using the EjectClampUp timing of the
E 23-6-170 － - 0 0 35 1 2.5ms 1 = 2.5 ms applied when the ✔ ✔
STOP TIME Set's first sheet as a base to carry
Enabled when TM0-23-6-171 "BUFFER COMB STOP power is rebooted.
out stop processing.
SELECTION" is set to "1: Carry out stop processing".


Factory setting buffer paper overlay confirmation stop processing setting

For switching between with or without Setting values are
BUFFER COMB value
E 23-6-171 － - 0 0 1 1 - stop processing for confirming buffer applied when the ✔ ✔
STOP SELECTION 0: Do not carry out stop processing overlay. power is rebooted.
1: Carry out stop processing
Staple set ejection quantity limit including Z-fold when the flapper is raised
1 = 1 portion For changing the staple set ejection Setting values are
Z-FOLD 100 Number
E 23-6-172 1 A3/11x17 60 0 200 1 This TM is enabled when TM0-23-6-148 "Z-FOLD 100SHEET STACK quantity limit including applied when the ✔ ✔
STAPLE NUMBER of copies Z-fold when the flapper is raised. power is rebooted.
Number
E 2 B4/8 open 40 0 200 1 ✔ ✔
of copies
FACE DOWN FINISHER
Number of forward and reverse operations for the booklet folder roll during For changing the number of forward
Special A4S 1 folding operations. and reverse operations for the
E 23-6-175 FORWARD & 1 0 3 1 Times applied when the ✔ ✔
or lower (Tarzan:3) The type of setting value indicates the paper length. Special A4S has a booklet folder roll during folding
REVERSE TIME power is rebooted.
paper length of 310.00 mm. operations.
Larger than
E 2 1 0 3 1 Times ✔ ✔
Custom A4S
Unstaple Set Eject speed settings for when the paper length of 1 set For changing the Unstaple Set Eject
Setting values are
UNSTAPLE 0 exceeding 30 sheets > 216 mm paper speed settings when the paper length
E 23-6-176 － - 0 1 1 - applied when the ✔ ✔
EJECT SPEED Tarzan:1 0: Eject 5 operation (54 step - 1584 pps) of 1 set exceeding 30 sheets > 216
power is rebooted.
1: Eject 11 operation (117step - 1725pps) mm paper.
Setting for whether or not to execute shelf storage timing during Z-fold For switching between whether to
Z-FOLD SHELF Setting values are
Unstaple in post Z-fold size. Becomes faster by 90 ms after setting. execute shelf storage timing during
E 23-6-177 STORAGE － - 1 0 1 1 - applied when the ✔ ✔
0: Execute before Z-fold size Z-fold Unstaple in pre or post Z-fold
TIMING ADJUST power is rebooted.
1: Execute after Z-fold size size.


SPEED Switch the speed at the time of booklet paper path motor deceleration.
SWITCHING When vibration noise occurs at the
0: Paper feed setting "Standard" ⇒ middle speed, paper time of booklet paper path motor
DURING
E 23-6-178 － - 1 0 1 1 - feed setting "Thin, Thick, or Card" or paper setting "LW Paper" ⇒ low speed deceleration. ✔ ✔
BOOKLET Setting values are applied when the
P PATH MT Specifying this setting reduces the vibration noise.
power is rebooted.
DECELERATION 1: Sets all the speeds at the time of deceleration to middle speed
Adjusts the speed of the return roller.

The job content, TM for adjusting the ejection speed of each FDF, and TM
for adjusting the reception speed for each FDF are driven at the lower limit
FDF REVERSE For adjusting the speed of the return
E 24-6-001 － - 0 -50 50 1 mm/s value speed when the speed is below the lower limit value in cases ✔ ✔
ROLLER SPEED roller.
when the motor drive speed has reached the upper limit value.
FDF return roller speed: Lower limit value: 233 mm/s upper limit value:
335 mm/s
Adjusts the speed of the relay 1 motor.

FDF RELAY for adjusting the reception speed for each FDF are driven at the lower limit When there is a difference between
E 24-6-002 MOTOR 1 SPEED － - 0 -50 50 1 mm/s value speed when the speed is below the lower limit value in cases the speed and the ejection speed of ✔ ✔
ADJUST when the motor drive speed has reached the upper limit value. the main unit.
FDF relay motor 1 speed: Lower limit value: 268 mm/s upper limit value:
1671 mm/s
Adjusts the speed of the relay 2 motor.

FDF RELAY for adjusting the reception speed for each FDF are driven at the lower limit When there is a difference between
E 24-6-003 MOTOR 2 SPEED － - 0 -50 50 1 mm/s value speed when the speed is below the lower limit value in cases the speed of the front and back ✔ ✔
ADJUST when the motor drive speed has reached the upper limit value. rollers.
FDF relay motor 2 speed: Lower limit value: 268 mm/s upper limit value:
1671 mm/s
Adjusts the speed of the transport motor.

FDF TRANSPORT for adjusting the reception speed for each FDF are driven at the lower limit When there is a difference between
E 24-6-004 MOTOR SPEED － - 0 -50 50 1 mm/s value speed when the speed is below the lower limit value in cases the speed of the front and back ✔ ✔
ADJUST when the motor drive speed has reached the upper limit value. rollers.
FDF transport motor speed: Lower limit value: 268 mm/ s upper limit value:
700 mm/s


Adjusts the speed of the paper ejection motor.

FDF PAPER
for adjusting the reception speed for each FDF are driven at the lower limit
EJECTION When the paper ejection alignment is
E 24-6-005 － - 0 -50 50 1 mm/s value speed when the speed is below the lower limit value in cases ✔ ✔
MOTOR SPEED poor.
when the motor drive speed has reached the upper limit value.
ADJUST
FDF paper ejection motor speed: Lower limit value: 268 mm/s upper limit
value: 700 mm/s
Adjust the FDF receiving speed (center value) with the printing speed as the
Use this in situations such as when
FDF MOTOR reference.
the motor speed on the downstream
E 24-6-006 STANDARD 1 Standard -5 -30 30 1 0.001 Receiving speed [mm/s] = Printing speed [mm/s] × (1000 ✔ ✔
side of the transport path is not
SPEED ADJUST + the setting value of this TM) ÷ 1000 appropriate for the printing speed.
E 2 Thin -5 -30 30 1 0.001 ✔ ✔

E 3 Thick 0 -30 30 1 0.001 ✔ ✔
E 4 Envelope 0 -30 30 1 0.001 ✔ ✔
E 5 Card 0 -30 30 1 0.001 ✔ ✔
E 6 U1 -5 -30 30 1 0.001 ✔ ✔
E 7 U2 -5 -30 30 1 0.001 ✔ ✔
E 8 U3 -5 -30 30 1 0.001 ✔ ✔
E 9 U4 -5 -30 30 1 0.001 ✔ ✔
E 10 U5 -5 -30 30 1 0.001 ✔ ✔
E 11 LW Paper -5 -30 30 1 0.001 ✔ ✔
E 12 Rough Paper -5 -30 30 1 0.001 ✔ ✔
FDF TRAY
When you want to adjust the
DESCENDING Adjusts the timing from the point when the upper limit sensor turns OFF to
E 24-6-008 － - 0 0 50 1 ms descending timing of the offset staple ✔ ✔
TIMING the point when the tray descends. paper ejection tray
ADJUSTMENT
PAPER PITCH
ADJUSTMENT When you want to adjust the paper
E 24-6-009 － - 0 0 50 1 ms Adjusts the paper pitch during shifting. ✔ ✔
FOR FDF LEFT/ pitch during shifting.
RIGHT SHIFT
TIMING
ADJUSTMENT When you want to delay the shift
E 24-6-010 － - 0 0 50 1 ms Adjusts the shift timing. ✔ ✔
FOR FDF LEFT/ timing.
RIGHT SHIFT
FDF FIRST
Delays the feeding of the first sheet of paper when printing starts. When the initial operation of the
PAPER FEED
E 24-6-014 － - 0 0 5000 1 ms However, when the offset staple paper ejection tray is in the upper position, offset staple paper ejection tray is not ✔
OPERATION in time and loading defects occur.
there will be no delay, regardless of this test mode.
DELAY


FDF TRAY
With [Def = 0], the paper surface is not detected in order to prioritize the
CORRECTION Adjust the alignment quality when
Number printing speed. As such, the alignment quality may decrease.
E 24-6-019 WHEN FEEDING － - 0 0 50 1 ejecting card paper without staples to ✔
of copies To maintain the alignment quality, the paper surface is detected for the the FDF.
CARD PAPER
number of times specified with this setting's number of copies.
(NON-STAPLE)
Setting for whether or not to apply a capacity limit when ejecting jobs at the
following settings.
- Paper size: custom sized paper* or paper smaller than B5
FDF LOAD
- Job type: No post-processing, or offset
E 24-6-021 CAPACITY LIMIT － - 0 0 1 1 - ✔ ✔
*Registered paper includes custom sized paper
SELECT (B5)
0: No limitation clearing (full error detected when capacity reaches 100
sheets)
1: With limitation clearing
FDF FULL Quantity setting for full detection when ejecting staple jobs.
Number
E 24-6-022 DETECTION － - 55 1 1001 1 1 - 1000: Full detection carried out when the specified quantity is ejected. ✔ ✔
of copies
COUNT 1001: No full detection due to quantity.
FDF ALIGNMENT
When the paper alignment is poor
E 24-6-025 ADJUSTMENT － - 0 -5 5 1 mm Adjusts the distance between the left and right alignment plates. ✔ ✔
during stapling.
VALUE
Adjusts the paper ejection speed when not stapling. Large: A4 portrait or
FDF PAPER When the paper ejection alignment is
E 24-6-026 1 Simplex, large 0 -100 100 1 mm/s larger paper ✔ ✔
EJECTION SPEED poor.
Small: Paper smaller than A4 portrait Thick: Thick paper
E 2 Simplex, small 0 -100 100 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
Simplex,
E 3 0 -100 100 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
large, thick
Simplex,
E 4 0 -100 100 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
small, thick
Simplex,
E 5 0 -100 100 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
envelope
E 6 Duplex, large 0 -100 100 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 7 Duplex, small 0 -100 100 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
Duplex, large,
E 8 0 -100 100 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
thick
Duplex, small,
E 9 0 -100 100 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
thick


When there is a difference between

the speed and the ejection speed of
FDF RECEIVING the main unit due to the paper size
E 24-6-027 1 Simplex, large 0 -50 50 1 mm/s Adjusts to ±50 mm/s compared to the center value. ✔ ✔
SPEED ADJUST and thickness, whether printing is
simplex or duplex, and whether
printing on envelopes.
E 2 Simplex, small 0 -50 50 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
Simplex,
E 3 0 -50 50 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
large, thick
Simplex,
E 4 0 -50 50 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
small, thick
Simplex,
E 5 0 -50 50 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
envelope
E 6 Duplex, large 0 -50 50 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
E 7 Duplex, small 0 -50 50 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
Duplex, large,
E 8 0 -50 50 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
thick
Duplex, small,
E 9 0 -50 50 1 mm/s ✔ ✔
thick
Adjusts the staple position.

FDF STAPLE
E 24-6-028 1 Rear 0 -3 3 1 mm Specify a negative value to move to the front side. Specify a positive value ✔ ✔
POSITION
to move to the rear side.
E 2 Front 0 -3 3 1 mm ✔ ✔
E 3 Middle 0 -3 3 1 mm ✔ ✔
When you want to adjust the number

of sheets for when the offset staple
FDF TRAY
Adjusts the number of sheets for when the offset staple paper ejection tray paper ejection tray descends.
E 24-6-029 DESCENDING 1 Thick 0 -5 5 1 Sheets ✔ ✔
descends. Thick: Thick paper When jams occur easily during paper
SHEET COUNT ejection and when paper ejection is
not well ordered.


E 2 Envelope 0 -5 5 1 Sheets ✔ ✔
FDF EJECTION
ROLLER
E 24-6-030 1 Standard 0 -50 50 1 ms Adjusts the descending timing of the ejection roller during stapling. descending timing of the ejection ✔ ✔
DESCENDING roller.
TIMING
AS side paper guide position compensation (HP compensation)

AS SIDE-FENCE For compensating the AS side paper
E 25-6-001 － - 0 -500 500 1 0.1mm When the paper guide on the other side is focused on, the movement ✔ ✔
HP CORRECT guide HP position.
amount is half of the setting value.
AS SIDE-FENCE AS side paper guide card position compensation (HP compensation)

For compensating the AS side paper
E 25-6-002 HP POST CARD － - 0 -500 500 1 0.1mm When the paper guide on the other side is focused on, the movement ✔ ✔
guide card HP position.
CORRECT amount is half of the setting value.
AS END-FENCE For compensating the AS end paper

E 25-6-003 － - 0 -500 500 1 0.1mm AS end paper guide position compensation (HP compensation) ✔ ✔
HP CORRECT guide HP position.
AS END-FENCE
For compensating the AS end paper
E 25-6-004 HP POST CARD － - 0 -500 500 1 0.1mm AS end paper guide card position compensation (HP compensation) ✔ ✔
guide card HP position.
CORRECT
Adjusts the side paper guide offset of Auto-control Stacking Tray.

AS SIDE-FENCE When the paper guide on the other side is focused on, the movement For changing the offset amount for
E 25-6-006 1 Standard -40 -200 400 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
OFFSET amount is half of the setting value. the AS side paper guide paper.
E 2 Thin -40 -200 400 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔

E 3 Thick -40 -200 400 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 4 Envelope -40 -200 400 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 5 Card -40 -200 400 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 6 U1 -40 -200 400 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 7 U2 -40 -200 400 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 8 U3 -40 -200 400 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 9 U4 -40 -200 400 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 10 U5 -40 -200 400 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 11 LW Paper -40 -200 400 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 12 Rough Paper -40 -200 400 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
AS END-FENCE Adjusts the end paper guide offset of Auto-control Stacking Tray. For changing the offset amount for
E 25-6-007 1 Standard 0 -300 300 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
OFFSET The type of the setting value indicates the paper type. the AS end paper guide paper.


E 2 Thin 0 -300 300 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 3 Thick 0 -300 300 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 4 Envelope 0 -300 300 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 5 Card 0 -300 300 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 6 U1 0 -300 300 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 7 U2 0 -300 300 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 8 U3 0 -300 300 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 9 U4 0 -300 300 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 10 U5 0 -300 300 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 11 LW Paper 0 -300 300 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
E 12 Rough Paper 0 -300 300 1 0.1mm ✔ ✔
Sets the specified position of the TM0-25-3-002 AS side-fence custom. Sets the specified position for moving
AS SIDE-FENCE
E 25-6-011 － - 2970 1060 3380 1 0.1mm When the paper guide on the other side is focused on, the movement with the TM0-25-3-002 AS side-fence ✔ ✔
POSITION custom.
amount is half of the setting value.
Sets the specified position for moving

AS END-FENCE
E 25-6-012 － - 4200 1080 4320 1 0.1mm Sets the specified position of the TM0-25-3-004 AS end- fence custom. with the TM0-25-3-004 AS end-fence ✔ ✔
POSITION custom.
Enters the key code for enabling the IC card option. Enters "XXXX" four-digit
portion of the 12-digit key code when it is set as XXXX-YYYY-ZZZZ.
When the high-order digit is set to "0" (zero), a value will be used to fill in the
zero in the high-order digits (zero padding).
The key code is printed in the license certificate included with the IC card
For entering the key code for
E 27-6-001 IC card key code 1 － - 0 0 9999 1 - option kit. ✔ ✔
enabling the IC card option.
The first four digits are random numbers and the last eight digits are the
serial number.
When the correct values are entered for TM0-27-6-001 "IC card key code
1", TM0-27-6-002 "IC card key code 2", and TM0-27-6-003 "IC card key
code 3", the IC card function is enabled.
Enters the key code for enabling the IC card option. Enters "YYYY" four-digit
E 27-6-002 IC card key code 2 － - 0 0 9999 1 - portion of the 12-digit key code when it is set as XXXX-YYYY-ZZZZ. ✔ ✔
For details, see TM0-27-6-001 "IC key card 1".
Enters the key code for enabling the IC card option. Enters "ZZZZ" four-digit
E 27-6-003 IC card key code 3 － - 0 0 9999 1 - portion of the 12-digit key code when it is set as XXXX-YYYY-ZZZZ. ✔ ✔
For details, see TM0-27-6-001 "IC key card 1".


IC card type selection test mode when using an IC card.

0: Use config file (*1)
1: Operation not confirmed (Felica, Edy number 16 digits)
2: ELWISE (Type B, ID: 10 digits)
3: FCF campus card (Felica, ID number:12 digits)
4: FCF card (Felica, ID number:14 digits)
5: Felica standard (reads card specific ID (IDm: 16 digits))
6: TypeB standard (reads card specific ID (PUPI: 8 digits)) (*2)
7: Felica standard (reads card specific ID (UID: 8, 14, 20 digits) )
8: reserved
9: Operation not confirmed (Felica, nanaco cards, ID 16 digits)
E 27-6-004 IC CARD CONFIG － - 0 0 11 1 - For changing the type of IC card. ✔ ✔
10: Operation not confirmed (Felica, WAON cards, ID 16 digits) (*3)
11: eLWISE (Type B, ID: 16 digits)
*1: When TM0-27-3-001 "Authentication server config import" is not being
executed, standard card reading on a SAXA card reader (Felica standard
and TypeA standard can be read) is not guaranteed. Make sure to configure
settings in (1) TM0-27-3-001 "Authentication server config import" or 2)
change the value to something other than 0 in this TM.
*2: PUPI is not supported for randomly changing cards. (Although the
number can be read, because the number changes each time, login cannot
be used.)
*3: Only normal WAON will function. Aeon cards will not work.
Test mode for configuring the IC card reader.

0: Use SAXA card reader
1: Use Sony PaSoRi (RC-S330/S)
2: Use Sony PaSoRi (RC-S380/S)
E 27-6-005 IC CARD READER － - 0 0 3 1 - For changing the IC card reader. ✔ ✔
3: Use HID standard driver
* This test is not displayed in the menu. It can be executed only by inputting
the test number with numeric keypad, and the test name is not displayed in
the execution screen (Hides which test is being executed.)


PaperCut
PAPERCUT LIST Sets the list update cycles when displaying the job list for retaining For changing the job list update cycle
E 28-6-001 － - 30 5 60 1 sec ✔ ✔
RENEWAL CYCLE PaperCut. referencing the Network Layer.
HCF SERIAL
E 29-6-001 － - 0 0 32500 1 - Sets the HCF serial number. When setting the HCF serial number ✔
NUMBER
HCF PAPER FEED Switches whether to use millimeter values or inch values to control the
TRAY PAPER detection of the HCF paper feed tray paper width.
When switching the used paper size
E 29-6-003 WIDTH － - 0 0 1 1 - ■ Options ✔
between millimeters and inches
CONTROL- 0: Millimeters
MM/INCH 1: Inches
Disables the detection of jams when feeding paper. (No paper feed
detection, multiple paper feed detection, transport jam detection)
HCF JAM
E 29-6-006 － - 1 0 1 1 - ■ Options ✔
DETECTION
0: Disable jam detection
1: Enable jam detection
This is used to improve the ability to clear jams of small sized paper when
registration sensor not reached errors or top edge sensor not reached errors
occur.
It may be difficult to remove jammed paper if the leading edge of the small
HCF EXTERNAL sized paper is kept between the registration sensor and top edge sensor and
PAPER FEED the registration roller. Therefore, this test mode is used to set the method for
When a difficult-to-remove jam
MOTOR SETTING stopping the registration roller and not performing the following activation
occurs upstream of the
E 29-6-007 (ERROR: － - 1 0 1 1 - (assist) of the external paper feed motor (connection roller) when the ✔
registration roller with small sized
REGISTRATION registration sensor timing has not been reached and when the top edge paper
SENSOR NOT sensor has not been reached.
REACHED) ■ Options
0: Feed all the paper, and then generate the error.
1: Stop the registration motor and the external paper feed motor when the
registration sensor is not reached and when the top edge sensor is not
reached.


When warnings are disabled with this test mode, no warning will be
generated even if the paper feed tray upper and lower limit sensors both
DISABLE
turn ON at the same time when printing starts.
SIMULTANEOUS
Also, regardless of whether this test mode is enabled, the upper limit sensor
ACTIVATION
OFF positioning operation within the upper limit positioning operation will be When the user finds warnings
E 29-6-011 WARNING OF － - 1 0 1 1 - ✔
omitted when the upper and lower limit sensors both turn ON at the same annoying
HCF UPPER AND
time.
LOWER LIMIT
■ Options
SENSORS
0: Warning disabled
1: Warning enabled (default)
In the elevator upper limit positioning during transport, the elevator motor
activation current has a curved slope. The tilt of this curved slope is related
HCF ELEVATOR to the responsiveness of the upper limit position. The elevator motor
UPPER LIMIT activation operation is set by way of changing the parameters related to this
E 29-6-012 － - 77 38 3840 1 - ✔
POSITIONING tilt.
RESPONSE This test mode changes the related parameter LSPED_ RATIO (77 for
prototype 1) within the elevator motor's software driver. (The calculation
details will be provided separately.)
The HCF is equipped with two types of paper upper surface detection
(bearing detection and scraper detection). The detection method is changed
HCF IRREGULAR When irregularly sized paper cannot
to match the paper pattern.
SIZE UPPER be fed well, the service technician
E 29-6-013 － - 0 0 2 1 - ■ Options ✔
LIMIT DETECTION switches the upper surface detection
0: Disable controlled switching method for irregularly sized paper.
SWITCHING
1: Controlled bearing detection
2: Controlled scraper detection


The HCF is equipped with two types of paper upper surface detection
(bearing detection and scraper detection). The detection method is changed When the leading edges of the
to match the paper pattern. loaded envelopes gradually rise,
HCF ENVELOPE
The default for the upper surface detection of "envelopes" is the scraper leading to frequent occurrences of no
UPPER LIMIT
E 29-6-014 － - 0 0 2 1 - detection method. paper being feed, the service ✔
DETECTION technician switches the upper
■ Options
SWITCHING surface detection method for
0: Disable controlled switching
envelopes.
1: Controlled bearing detection
2: Controlled scraper detection
Sets the upper limit position during large-capacity paper feeding.

■ Options
HCF UPPER LIMIT
E 29-6-016 1 Standard 1 0 2 1 - 0: Top ✔
POSITION
1: Middle
2: Bottom
E 2 Thin 0 0 2 1 - ✔
E 3 Thick 1 0 2 1 - ✔
E 4 Envelope 0 0 2 1 - ✔
E 5 Card 1 0 2 1 - ✔
E 6 U1 1 0 2 1 - ✔
E 7 U2 1 0 2 1 - ✔
E 8 U3 1 0 2 1 - ✔
E 9 U4 1 0 2 1 - ✔
E 10 U5 1 0 2 1 - ✔
E 11 LW Paper 1 0 2 1 - ✔
When adjusting the release position

HCF NIP of the nip release motor from the
RELEASE MOTOR factory default and when
E 29-6-026 RELEASE － - 0 -1000 1000 1 Pulse Corrects the release position of the nip release mechanism. implementing countermeasures for ✔
POSITION problems such as the stretching of
CORRECTION the spring mechanism of the nip
release mechanism on the market


When adjusting the nip position of

HCF NIP the nip release motor from the factory
default and when implementing
RELEASE MOTOR
E 29-6-027 － - 0 -1000 1000 1 Pulse Corrects the nip position of the nip release mechanism. countermeasures for problems such ✔
NIP POSITION as the stretching of the spring
CORRECTION mechanism of the nip release
mechanism on the market
HCF PAPER Changes the paper pitch. (Up to 60.0 ms + the paper feed time of 1 long
E 29-6-031 － - 600 600 9999 1 0.1ms ✔
PITCH sheet)
HCF PU ROLLER Changes the ratio of the transport speed of the HCF PU roller to the HCF
E 29-6-032 － - 0 -300 300 1 mm/s ✔
SPEED ADJUST intermediate transport roller.
HCF
INTERMEDIATE
Changes the ratio of the transport speed of the HCF intermediate transport
E 29-6-033 TRANSPORT － - 0 -300 300 1 mm/s ✔
roller to the HCF pre-registration roller.
ROLLER SPEED
ADJUST
HCF PRE-
REGISTRATION Changes the ratio of the transport speed of the HCF pre-registration roller to
E 29-6-034 － - 0 -300 300 1 mm/s ✔
ROLLER SPEED the registration roller.
ADJUST
The PU transport rate is related to the amount that can be transported from
the PU roller to the first intermediate transport roller. It is also related to the
HCF PU DRIVE
timing with which paper is fed to the downstream rollers. Also, by design, the
ROLLER
E 29-6-035 － - 70 60 130 1 0.01 transport rate is related to the timing with which the paper feeding reference ✔
TRANSPORT
signal is generated. If you set a small transport rate, the time from the
RATE
generation of the paper feeding reference signal to the activation of the
registration roller will become long.


The time to reach the registration sensor is adjusted by changing the

dimensions of the correction section of the intermediate transport roller.
If the leading edge of the paper reaches the registration sensor quickly, the
contact speed is lowered.
■ Options
TIME TO REACH - When evaluating paper feeding
The correction of the intermediate transport roller is related to the time to
HCF - When implementing
E 29-6-036 － - 0 -1000 1000 1 0.1mm reach the registration sensor. This correction applies to the section from the ✔
REGISTRATION countermeasures for paper transfer
intermediate entrance sensor to the intermediate exit sensor. The defects
SENSOR
intermediate exit sensor is corrected for the delay in paper being fed to the
intermediate entrance sensor.
The time to reach the registration sensor is adjusted by changing the
dimensions of the section specified from the intermediate entrance sensor
to the intermediate exit sensor.
Sets the assist speed of the pre-registration roller compared to the transport
speed of the registration roller (example: 632 + α mm/s).
Setting the speed of the pre-registration roller to a value that is lower than
the speed of the registration roller makes paper be transported with less
buckling.
HCF PRE- - When evaluating paper feeding
■ Options
REGISTRATION - When implementing
E 29-6-037 － - 977 800 1200 1 0.001 The default assumes A3 sized paper, buckling of 6 mm, and a registration ✔
ROLLER ASSIST countermeasures for paper transfer
roller speed of 635 mm/s. The calculation X = A - b/t was used where X is defects
SPEED
the set
speed [mm/s], A is the registration transport speed [mm/ s], t is the assist
section time [sec], and b is the buckle amount [mm]. For example, given an
assist section time for A3 sized paper of 0.436 seconds, X = 635- 6/0.436 =
621 mm/s. Then, 621/635 × 100 is approximately equal to 97.7.
Sets the assist speed of the pre-registration roller compared to the transport
speed of the registration roller (example: 632 + α mm/s).
Setting this to a value that is lower than the speed of the registration roller
makes paper be transported with less buckling.
This is valid when the paper size is larger than the dimensions of the area
HCF
from the registration roller to the third intermediate transport roller. - When evaluating paper feeding
INTERMEDIATE
■ Options - When implementing
E 29-6-038 TRANSPORT － - 977 800 1200 1 0.001 ✔
Currently, the default, minimum, and maximum are all set to the same as the countermeasures for paper transfer
ROLLER ASSIST defects
assist speed of the pre-
SPEED
registration roller. If there is a pre-registration roller nip release, the value is
expected to be 960 for A3 sized paper. For example, given intermediate
transport R and an assist section time for A3 sized paper of 0.247 seconds,
X = 635- 6/0.247 = 610 mm/s. Then, 610/635
× 100 is approximately equal to 96.0.


When dealing with paper wrinkling
Standard- during normal printing.
E 29-6-041 HCF BUCKLE 1 6 -4 15 1 mm Sets the buckle amount of the large-capacity paper feed unit. ✔
long Enter positive values to increase the
buckle amount.
Standard-
E 2 0 -4 15 1 mm ✔
short
E 3 Thin-long 6 -4 15 1 mm ✔
E 4 Thin-short 4 -4 15 1 mm ✔
E 5 Thick-long 6 -4 15 1 mm ✔
E 6 Thick-short 0 -4 15 1 mm ✔
Envelope-
E 7 6 -4 15 1 mm ✔
long
Envelope-
E 8 0 -4 15 1 mm ✔
short
E 9 Card 6 -4 15 1 mm ✔
E 10 U1-long 6 -4 15 1 mm ✔
E 11 U1-short 0 -4 15 1 mm ✔
E 12 U2-long 6 -4 15 1 mm ✔
E 13 U2-short 0 -4 15 1 mm ✔
E 14 U3-long 6 -4 15 1 mm ✔
E 15 U3-short 0 -4 15 1 mm ✔
E 16 U4-long 6 -4 15 1 mm ✔
E 17 U4-short 0 -4 15 1 mm ✔
E 18 U5-long 6 -4 15 1 mm ✔
E 19 U5-short 0 -4 15 1 mm ✔
LW Paper-
E 20 6 -4 15 1 mm ✔
long
LW Paper-
E 21 4 -4 15 1 mm ✔
short
HCF PAPER FEED Adjusts the start timing of paper feeding during large- capacity paper
E 29-6-042 1 Standard 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔
START TIMING feeding.
E 2 Thin 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔

E 3 Thick 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔
E 4 Envelope 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔
E 5 Card 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔
E 6 U1 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔
E 7 U2 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔
E 8 U3 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔
E 9 U4 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔
E 10 U5 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔
E 11 LW Paper 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔
Enables/disables the execution of assist control during large-capacity paper

feeding.
HCF ASSIST
E 29-6-043 1 Standard 1 0 1 1 - ■ Options ✔
CONTROL
0: OFF
1: ON


E 2 Thin 1 0 1 1 - ✔
E 3 Thick 1 0 1 1 - ✔
E 4 Envelope 1 0 1 1 - ✔
E 5 Card 1 0 1 1 - ✔
E 6 U1 1 0 1 1 - ✔
E 7 U2 1 0 1 1 - ✔
E 8 U3 1 0 1 1 - ✔
E 9 U4 1 0 1 1 - ✔
E 10 U5 1 0 1 1 - ✔
E 11 LW Paper 1 0 1 1 - ✔
HCF ASSIST
E 29-6-044 1 Standard 0 -100 100 1 ms Sets the assist start time during large-capacity paper feeding. ✔
START TIME
E 2 Thin 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔
E 3 Thick 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔
E 4 Envelope 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔
E 5 Card 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔
E 6 U1 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔
E 7 U2 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔
E 8 U3 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔
E 9 U4 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔
E 10 U5 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔
E 11 LW Paper 0 -100 100 1 ms ✔
HCF ASSIST END
E 29-6-045 1 Standard 0 0 200 1 ms Sets the assist end time during large-capacity paper feeding. ✔
TIME
E 2 Thin 0 0 200 1 ms ✔
E 3 Thick 0 0 200 1 ms ✔
E 4 Envelope 0 0 200 1 ms ✔
E 5 Card 0 0 200 1 ms ✔
E 6 U1 0 0 200 1 ms ✔
E 7 U2 0 0 200 1 ms ✔


E 8 U3 0 0 200 1 ms ✔
E 9 U4 0 0 200 1 ms ✔
E 10 U5 0 0 200 1 ms ✔
E 11 LW Paper 0 0 200 1 ms ✔
JAM
This is the adjustment time to add to the jam detection time (*) used to
ADJUSTMENT
detect that the large-capacity paper feed entrance sensor has not been When large-capacity paper feed
FOR HCF
E 29-6-060 － - 70 0 170 1 ms reached due to a jam. (*) This is the theoretical time from the paper feed entrance sensor not reached errors ✔
ENTRANCE frequently occur
reference signal turning ON to the large-capacity paper feed entrance
SENSOR NOT
sensor being reached given a transport rate of 70%.
REACHED
JAM This is the adjustment time to add to the jam detection time (*) used to
ADJUSTMENT detect that the large-capacity paper feed exit sensor has not been reached When large-capacity paper feed exit
E 29-6-061 FOR HCF EXIT － - 37 0 137 1 ms due to a jam. (*) This is the theoretical time from the paper feed reference sensor not reached errors frequently ✔
SENSOR NOT signal turning ON to the large-capacity paper feed exit sensor being reached occur
REACHED given a transport rate of 70%.
HCS SERIAL When you want to set the HCS serial

E 30-6-001 － - 0 0 32500 1 - Sets the HCS serial number. ✔
NUMBER number
Sets the lock on the operations (operations permitted/ prohibited) of the

large-capacity paper ejection unit. When operations are prohibited, the only
HCS LOCK settings that operate are downloading in normal mode and this test mode. Prohibiting the HCS initialization
E 30-6-006 － - 1 0 1 1 - ✔
SETTING ■ Options operation when the HCS is packaged
0 = Operations permitted
1 = Operations prohibited
HCS FACTORY
DEFAULT SIDE
Sets the position to move the HCS side paper guide to when executing Adjusting the factory default HCS
E 30-6-007 PAPER GUIDE － - 150 100 343 1 mm ✔
"TM0-30-3-001 MOVE TO HCS FACTORY DEFAULT POSITION". side paper guide position
POSITION
SETTING
HCS FACTORY
DEFAULT END
Sets the position to move the HCS end paper guide to when executing Adjusting the factory default HCS end
E 30-6-008 PAPER GUIDE － - 400 148 490 1 mm ✔
"TM0-30-3-001 MOVE TO HCS FACTORY DEFAULT POSITION". paper guide position
POSITION
SETTING


HCS FACTORY
DEFAULT
Sets the position to move the HCS elevator to when executing "TM0-30-3- Adjusting the factory default HCS
E 30-6-009 ELEVATOR － - 10 0 115 1 mm ✔
001 MOVE TO HCS FACTORY DEFAULT POSITION". elevator position
POSITION
SETTING
HCS ERROR
DETECTION 0.01 Sets the reference value to use in detecting bottom peeling when feeding Adjusting the error detection settings
E 30-6-011 － - 25 0 100 1 ✔
PAPER mm card paper with the HCS. for HCS card paper feeding
THICKNESS
SHEET COUNT
TO JUDGE AS
If the paper trailing edge detection sensor turns ON consecutively for the
PAPER
specified unit, printing is stopped and the user is notified of an error. When you want to set the number of
STACKING
E 30-6-013 － - 5 0 10000 1 Sheets If the judgment for the detection of paper being stacked incorrectly at the sheets to use in judging whether to ✔
ERROR AT HCS detect a paper stacking error
HCS trailing edge detection sensor is time or time and the detection of the
TRAILING EDGE
number of ejected sheets, apply the value of this test mode to the control.
DETECTION
SENSOR
Sets whether to move the large-capacity paper ejection unit's end paper
guide
MOVE TO END
to the home position when a jam occurs in the large- capacity paper ejection Adjusts the behavior when a jam
PAPER GUIDE
E 30-6-014 － - 0 0 1 1 - unit. occurs in the large-capacity paper ✔
HOME POSITION ejection unit.
■ Options
UPON HCS JAM
0 = Move the end paper guide to the home position
1 = Do not move the end paper guide to the home position
NUMBER OF
When the HCS upper surface sensor turns ON, this test mode counts the
SHEETS FOR
number of printed objects that are ejected. When the set count is reached, Adjusting the HCS elevator descend
E 30-6-016 HCS ELEVATOR － - 3 1 100 1 Sheets ✔
the elevator descends if the ON status is maintained. timing
DESCENDING
This test mode sets the specified number of sheets for the above operation.
TIMING
When the HCS upper surface sensor turns ON, this test mode counts the
HCS ELEVATOR number of printed objects that are ejected. When the set count is reached,
Adjusting the HCS elevator descend
E 30-6-017 DESCEND － - 20 1 100 1 0.1mm the elevator descends if the ON status is maintained. ✔
amount
AMOUNT This test mode sets the amount that the elevator descends for the above
operation.


Changes the control when moving the HCS elevator to the trolley set height.
HCS TROLLEY When you want to make it possible to
The elevator is stopped at a position at which it has descended from the
E 30-6-018 SET HEIGHT － - 0 0 200 1 0.1mm remove the trolley from the HCS by ✔
height where the lower limit sensor logic changes for the height amount correcting the HCS trolley set height
CORRECTION
specified by this test mode.
Adjusts the upper limit of the loading height of lightweight paper when there
HCS LW PAPER
is no offset operation. Used when changing the upper limit
LOADING HEIGHT
E 30-6-019 － - 0 0 1 1 - ■ Options of the loading height of lightweight ✔
UPPER LIMIT paper
0 = 405 mm
SWITCHING
1 = 440 mm
When you want to release the

loading height control for small sized
Sets whether loading height control is enabled when using small sized paper
* There is the concern that releasing
HCS LOADING paper* or when the paper type thickness is set to "Envelope".
the loading height control may lead to
E 30-6-020 HEIGHT － - 0 0 1 1 - 0: Enable loading height control ✔
problems such as the printed sheets
CONTROL 1: Disable loading height control * Small sized paper: Short side less than being scattered due to the ejected
182 mm or long side less than 257 mm paper falling over. Ensure that the
user is aware of this fact before using
this test mode.
Switches the speed control setting on the large-capacity paper ejection unit
when using a switchback device.
HCS When you want to fix the operations
■ Options
E 30-6-021 SWITCHBACK － - 1 0 1 1 - on the HCS side during investigation ✔
0: Enable switchback speed control. The speed difference between the into the cause of a malfunction
SPEED CONTROL
printer main unit and the HCS is reduced.
1: Disable switchback speed control. The speed on the HCS side is fixed.
Switches whether switchback transport roller 2 delay detection is performed

by the large-capacity paper ejection unit.
HCS This detects the delay in the transport timing that is caused by the wear of
SWITCHBACK switchback transport roller 2. When the distance between pages falls to a
E 30-6-022 TRANSPORT － - 1 0 1 1 - certain amount or lower, the permissible slip amount is judged to have been ✔
ROLLER 2 DELAY exceeded. This is not applicable to paper lengths less than B5-R (182 mm).
DETECTION ■ Options
0: Disabled
1: Enabled


HCS SIDE PAPER

GUIDE
E 30-6-031 MOVEMENT － - 0 -1000 1000 1 0.1mm Adjusts the side paper guide movement amount. ✔
AMOUNT
CORRECTION
HCS SIDE PAPER

GUIDE When you want to adjust the paper
Adjusts the HCS side paper guide movement amount when the paper
E 30-6-032 MOVEMENT 1 Standard 30 -1000 1000 1 0.1mm guide position in order to improve the ✔
setting is "Standard". paper alignment
AMOUNT
CORRECTION
E 2 Thin 30 -1000 1000 1 0.1mm ✔

E 3 Thick 60 -1000 1000 1 0.1mm ✔
E 4 Envelope 80 -1000 1000 1 0.1mm ✔
E 5 Card 60 -1000 1000 1 0.1mm ✔
E 6 LW Paper 30 -1000 1000 1 0.1mm ✔
HCS END PAPER

GUIDE
E 30-6-033 MOVEMENT － - 0 -1000 1000 1 0.1mm Adjusts the end paper guide movement amount. ✔
AMOUNT
CORRECTION
Adjusts the HCS end paper guide movement amount.

HCS END PAPER 01: When the paper feed setting is "Standard"
GUIDE 02: When the paper feed setting is "Thin" When you want to adjust the paper
E 30-6-034 MOVEMENT 1 Standard 30 -1000 1000 1 0.1mm 03: When the paper feed setting is "Thick" guide position in order to improve the ✔
AMOUNT 04: When the paper feed setting is "Envelope" paper alignment
CORRECTION 05: When the paper feed setting is "Card"
06: When the paper feed setting is "LW Paper"
E 2 Thin 30 -1000 1000 1 0.1mm ✔

E 3 Thick 130 -1000 1000 1 0.1mm ✔
E 4 Envelope 80 -1000 1000 1 0.1mm ✔
E 5 Card 130 -1000 1000 1 0.1mm ✔
E 6 LW Paper 30 -1000 1000 1 0.1mm ✔


Selects the paper feeding setting to use as the reference for each HCS
paper ejection control.
Each paper ejection setting performs control according to the paper feeding
setting selected with this test mode.
REFERENCE
■ Options
PAPER SETTING When you want to adjust the user
E 30-6-039 1 U1 0 0 5 1 - 0: Standard ✔
FOR HCS PAPER setting values
1: Thin
EJECTION
2: Thick
3: Card
4: Envelope
5: LW Paper
E 2 U2 0 0 5 1 - ✔
E 3 U3 0 0 5 1 - ✔
E 4 U4 0 0 5 1 - ✔
E 5 U5 0 0 5 1 - ✔
Switches the operation specifications of the ejection speed.

HCS EJECTION
■ Options:
E 30-6-041 SPEED － - 0 0 1 1 - ✔
0: Follow the ejection parameter setting table
SWITCHING
1: Follow the test mode setting values
Sets the ejection speed when "No. 0-30-6-041 HCS EJECTION SPEED
SWITCHING" = 1.
This is applied under the following conditions. Paper feed setting)
HCS EJECTION Standard
SPEED Applicable paper types)
E 30-6-042 1 A3 800 232 1600 1 mm/s ✔
(STANDARD- Standard paper, IJ paper, Matte-IJ paper, High quality, Card-IJ
BOTTOM SIDE) Ejection position)
When ejecting to the bottom side, the type of the setting value indicates the
applicable paper size.
A3, A3W, Ledger, Sq0, and Sq1
E 2 B4 800 232 1600 1 mm/s B4, C4, and Sq2 ✔

E 3 A4 800 232 1600 1 mm/s A4, Letter, Legal, Foolscap, and Sq3 ✔
E 4 B5 900 232 1600 1 mm/s B5, C5 ✔
A4
E 5 800 232 1600 1 mm/s A4 Landscape and Letter Landscape ✔
Landscape
B5
E 6 800 232 1600 1 mm/s B5 Landscape ✔
Landscape
E 7 A5 800 232 1600 1 mm/s A5 and Statement ✔
E 8 B6 800 232 1600 1 mm/s B6 ✔
E 9 A6 800 232 1600 1 mm/s A6, Card, C6, and DL Landscape ✔
E 10 U 800 232 1600 1 mm/s Registered paper ✔


SWITCHING" = 1.
HCS EJECTION Standard
E 30-6-043 1 A3 900 232 1600 1 mm/s ✔
(STANDARD-TOP Standard paper, IJ paper, Matte-IJ paper, High quality, Card-IJ
SIDE) Ejection position)
When ejecting to the top side, the type of the setting value indicates the
E 2 B4 900 232 1600 1 mm/s B4, C4, and Sq2 ✔

E 4 B5 1000 232 1600 1 mm/s B5, C5 ✔
A4
Landscape
B5
E 6 900 232 1600 1 mm/s B5 Landscape ✔
Landscape
SWITCHING" = 1.
Thin
HCS EJECTION
Applicable paper types)
E 30-6-044 SPEED (THIN- 1 A3 800 232 1600 1 mm/s ✔
Standard paper, IJ paper, Matte-IJ paper, High quality, Card-IJ
BOTTOM SIDE)
Ejection position)
E 2 B4 800 232 1600 1 mm/s B4, C4, and Sq2 ✔

E 4 B5 900 232 1600 1 mm/s B5, C5 ✔
A4
Landscape
B5
E 6 800 232 1600 1 mm/s B5 Landscape ✔
Landscape
E 8 B6 800 232 1600 1 mm/s B6 ✔


SWITCHING" = 1.
Thin
HCS EJECTION
E 30-6-045 SPEED (THIN- 1 A3 900 232 1600 1 mm/s ✔
TOP SIDE)
Ejection position)
E 2 B4 900 232 1600 1 mm/s B4, C4, and Sq2 ✔

E 4 B5 1000 232 1600 1 mm/s B5, C5 ✔
A4
Landscape
B5
E 6 900 232 1600 1 mm/s B5 Landscape ✔
Landscape
SWITCHING" = 1.
Thick
HCS EJECTION
E 30-6-046 SPEED (THICK- 1 A3 900 232 1600 1 mm/s ✔
BOTTOM SIDE)
Ejection position)
E 2 B4 900 232 1600 1 mm/s B4, C4, and Sq2 ✔

E 4 B5 900 232 1600 1 mm/s B5, C5 ✔
A4
Landscape
B5
E 6 900 232 1600 1 mm/s B5 Landscape ✔
Landscape
E 8 B6 900 232 1600 1 mm/s B6 ✔


SWITCHING" = 1.
Thick
HCS EJECTION
E 30-6-047 SPEED (THICK- 1 A3 1000 232 1600 1 mm/s ✔
TOP SIDE)
Ejection position)
E 2 B4 1100 232 1600 1 mm/s B4, C4, and Sq2 ✔

E 4 B5 1000 232 1600 1 mm/s B5, C5 ✔
A4
Landscape
B5
E 6 1000 232 1600 1 mm/s B5 Landscape ✔
Landscape
SWITCHING" = 1.
HCS EJECTION Envelope
E 30-6-048 1 A3 1200 232 1600 1 mm/s ✔
(ENVELOPE- Standard paper, IJ paper, Matte-IJ paper, High quality, Card-IJ
E 2 B4 1200 232 1600 1 mm/s B4, C4, and Sq2 ✔

E 4 B5 1200 232 1600 1 mm/s B5, C5 ✔
A4
Landscape
B5
E 6 1200 232 1600 1 mm/s B5 Landscape ✔
Landscape

E 8 B6 1200 232 1600 1 mm/s B6 ✔


SWITCHING" = 1.
HCS EJECTION Card
E 30-6-050 SPEED (CARD- － - 1600 232 1600 1 mm/s Applicable paper types) ✔
BOTTOM SIDE) Standard paper, IJ paper, Matte-IJ paper, High quality, Card-IJ
Ejection position)
When ejecting to the bottom side Applicable paper size)
Card
SWITCHING" = 1.
HCS EJECTION
This is applied under the following conditions. Applicable paper type)
SPEED (LW
E 30-6-052 1 A3 800 232 1600 1 mm/s LW Paper Ejection position) ✔
PAPER-BOTTOM
SIDE)
E 2 B4 800 232 1600 1 mm/s B4, C4, and Sq2 ✔

E 4 B5 900 232 1600 1 mm/s B5, C5 ✔
A4
Landscape
B5
E 6 800 232 1600 1 mm/s B5 Landscape ✔
Landscape
E 8 B6 800 232 1600 1 mm/s B6 ✔


SWITCHING" = 1.
HCS EJECTION
SPEED (LW
E 30-6-053 1 A3 900 232 1600 1 mm/s LW Paper Ejection position) ✔
PAPER-TOP
SIDE)
E 2 B4 900 232 1600 1 mm/s B4, C4, and Sq2 ✔

E 4 B5 1000 232 1600 1 mm/s B5, C5 ✔
A4
Landscape
B5
E 6 900 232 1600 1 mm/s B5 Landscape ✔
Landscape
Switches the operation specifications of the ejection start speed and the
INITIAL HCS number of sheets.
E 30-6-061 EJECTION SPEED － - 0 0 1 1 - ■ Options: ✔
SWITCHING 0: Follow the ejection parameter setting table
1: Follow the test mode setting values
Sets the ejection speed when "No. 0-30-6-061 INITIAL HCS EJECTION
SPEED SWITCHING" = 1.
INITIAL HCS Standard
EJECTION SPEED Applicable paper types)
E 30-6-062 1 B5 900 232 1600 1 mm/s ✔
(STANDARD- Standard paper, IJ paper, Matte-IJ paper, High quality, Card-IJ
B5, C5
B5
E 2 800 232 1600 1 mm/s B5 Landscape ✔
Landscape


INITIAL HCS Standard
E 30-6-063 1 B5 1000 232 1600 1 mm/s ✔
(STANDARD-TOP Standard paper, IJ paper, Matte-IJ paper, High quality, Card-IJ
B5, C5
B5
E 2 900 232 1600 1 mm/s B5 Landscape ✔
Landscape
INITIAL HCS Thin
E 30-6-064 1 B5 900 232 1600 1 mm/s ✔
(THIN-BOTTOM Standard paper, IJ paper, Matte-IJ paper, High quality, Card-IJ
B5, C5
B5
E 2 800 232 1600 1 mm/s B5 Landscape ✔
Landscape
Thin
INITIAL HCS
E 30-6-065 EJECTION SPEED 1 B5 1000 232 1600 1 mm/s ✔
(THIN-TOP SIDE)
Ejection position)
B5, C5


B5
E 2 900 232 1600 1 mm/s B5 Landscape ✔
Landscape
INITIAL HCS Thick
E 30-6-066 1 A3 900 232 1600 1 mm/s ✔
(THICK-BOTTOM Standard paper, IJ paper, Matte-IJ paper, High quality, Card-IJ
E 2 B4 900 232 1600 1 mm/s B4, C4, and Sq2 ✔
E 4 B5 900 232 1600 1 mm/s B5, C5 ✔

A4
Landscape
B5
E 6 900 232 1600 1 mm/s B5 Landscape ✔
Landscape


Thick
INITIAL HCS
E 30-6-067 EJECTION SPEED 1 A3 1000 232 1600 1 mm/s ✔
(THICK-TOP SIDE)
Ejection position)
E 2 B4 1100 232 1600 1 mm/s B4, C4, and Sq2 ✔
E 4 B5 1000 232 1600 1 mm/s B5, C5 ✔

A4
Landscape
B5
E 6 1000 232 1600 1 mm/s B5 Landscape ✔
Landscape
INITIAL HCS
EJECTION SPEED
E 30-6-068 1 B5 900 232 1600 1 mm/s LW Paper Ejection position) ✔
(LW PAPER-
BOTTOM SIDE)
B5, C5
B5
E 2 800 232 1600 1 mm/s B5 Landscape ✔
Landscape
INITIAL HCS
EJECTION SPEED
E 30-6-069 1 B5 1000 232 1600 1 mm/s LW Paper Ejection position) ✔
(LW PAPER-TOP
SIDE)
B5, C5
B5
E 2 900 232 1600 1 mm/s B5 Landscape ✔
Landscape


Sets the number of sheets to eject when "No. 0-30-6- 061 INITIAL HCS
EJECTION SPEED SWITCHING" = 1.
INITIAL HCS
Standard
EJECTION SHEET
E 30-6-072 COUNT 1 B5 0 0 10 1 Sheets ✔
(STANDARD-
Ejection position)
BOTTOM SIDE)
B5, C5
B5
E 2 0 0 10 1 Sheets B5 Landscape ✔
Landscape
INITIAL HCS
Standard
EJECTION SHEET
E 30-6-073 COUNT 1 B5 0 0 10 1 Sheets ✔
(STANDARD-TOP
Ejection position)
SIDE)
B5, C5
B5
Landscape
INITIAL HCS Thin
EJECTION SHEET Applicable paper types)
E 30-6-074 1 B5 0 0 10 1 Sheets ✔
COUNT (THIN- Standard paper, IJ paper, Matte-IJ paper, High quality, Card-IJ
B5, C5
B5
Landscape


INITIAL HCS Thin
E 30-6-075 1 B5 0 0 10 1 Sheets ✔
COUNT (THIN- Standard paper, IJ paper, Matte-IJ paper, High quality, Card-IJ
TOP SIDE) Ejection position)
B5, C5
B5
Landscape
INITIAL HCS Thick
E 30-6-076 1 A3 0 0 10 1 Sheets ✔
COUNT (THICK- Standard paper, IJ paper, Matte-IJ paper, High quality, Card-IJ
E 2 B4 0 0 10 1 Sheets B4, C4, and Sq2 ✔
E 3 A4 0 0 10 1 Sheets A4, Letter, Legal, Foolscap, and Sq3 ✔
E 4 B5 0 0 10 1 Sheets B5, C5 ✔
A4
E 5 0 0 10 1 Sheets A4 Landscape and Letter Landscape ✔
Landscape
B5
Landscape


INITIAL HCS Thick
E 30-6-077 1 A3 0 0 10 1 Sheets ✔
COUNT (THICK- Standard paper, IJ paper, Matte-IJ paper, High quality, Card-IJ
TOP SIDE) Ejection position)
E 2 B4 0 0 10 1 Sheets B4, C4, and Sq2 ✔

E 3 A4 0 0 10 1 Sheets A4, Letter, Legal, Foolscap, and Sq3 ✔
E 4 B5 0 0 10 1 Sheets B5, C5 ✔
A4
E 5 0 0 10 1 Sheets A4 Landscape and Letter Landscape ✔
Landscape
B5
Landscape
INITIAL HCS EJECTION SPEED SWITCHING" = 1.
EJECTION SHEET This is applied under the following conditions. Applicable paper type)
E 30-6-078 COUNT (LW 1 B5 0 0 10 1 Sheets LW Paper Ejection position) ✔
PAPER-BOTTOM When ejecting to the bottom side, the type of the setting value indicates the
SIDE) applicable paper size.
B5, C5
B5
Landscape
INITIAL HCS EJECTION SPEED SWITCHING" = 1.
EJECTION SHEET This is applied under the following conditions. Applicable paper type)
E 30-6-079 COUNT (LW 1 B5 0 0 10 1 Sheets LW Paper Ejection position) ✔
PAPER-TOP When ejecting to the top side, the type of the setting value indicates the
SIDE) applicable paper size.
B5, C5
B5
Landscape


Switches the control during the offset operation of the large-capacity paper
ejection unit.
If the offset operation causes the paper to be folded, we recommend
selecting 1. 0: Perform offset control with the procedure shown below.
HCS OFFSET When moving to the top side: Lower the paper receiving tray. → Raise the When the paper is folded during the
E 30-6-091 CONTROL － - 0 0 1 1 - end paper guide hook. → Move the end paper guide. → Lower the end offset operation of the large- capacity ✔
SWITCHING paper guide hook. → Raise the paper receiving tray. 1: Perform offset paper ejection unit
control with the procedure shown below.
When moving to the top side: Lower the paper receiving tray. → Raise the
end paper guide hook. → Move the end paper guide. → Raise the paper
receiving tray. → Lower the end paper guide hook.
END PAPER
GUIDE
Sets the amount to move the end paper guide toward the bottom side during End paper guide movement during
E 30-6-092 MOVEMENT － - 300 250 450 1 0.1mm ✔
offsetting. offsetting
AMOUNT DURING
HCS OFFSET
Sets the ejection speed at the offset position when triggered by the HCS
offset operation (the paper pitch is open and the offset unit, end paper
PAPER EJECTION guide, and elevator operate).
When ejecting paper during offset
E 30-6-093 SPEED DURING － - 800 632 1600 1 mm/s Remark ✔
operation (at the offset position)
HCS OFFSET The default value is 800 mm/s, which is the same as the Def. value of the
stacking ejection speed. The speed can be set in units of 1 mm/s from 632
mm/s to 1600 mm/s.
Adjusts the amount to lower the

paper receiving tray during the offset
PAPER
operation.
RECEIVING Currently, there is no plan to change
TRAY LOWERING this value due to factors such as the
AMOUNT DURING Adjusts the amount to lower the paper receiving tray (to the top side) during type of paper.
E 30-6-094 － - 2532 0 10000 1 10 pulses ✔
HCS OFFSET the HCS offset operation. This value has been made
OPERATION changeable due to the possibility of it
needing to be changed for
(MOVEMENT TO
evaluations such as of paper
THE TOP SIDE)
alignment and productivity
improvements.


PAPER
RECEIVING Adjusts the amount to lower the
TRAY LOWERING paper receiving tray during the offset
operation.
AMOUNT DURING
Adjusts the amount to lower the paper receiving tray (to the bottom side) This value has been made
E 30-6-095 HCS OFFSET － - 1765 0 10000 1 10 pulses ✔
during the HCS offset operation. changeable due to the possibility of it
OPERATION needing to be changed for
(MOVEMENT TO evaluations such as of the type of
THE BOTTOM paper.
SIDE)
PAPER PITCH
CORRECTION
DURING HCS Adjusts the paper pitch compensating data during the offset operation to the Adjusts the paper pitch correction
E 30-6-096 － - 8600 0 30000 1 ms ✔
OFFSET HCS top side. during the offset operation.
(MOVEMENT TO
THE TOP SIDE)
PAPER PITCH
CORRECTION
DURING HCS
Adjusts the paper pitch compensating data during the offset operation to the Adjusts the paper pitch correction
E 30-6-097 OFFSET － - 7200 0 30000 1 ms ✔
HCS bottom side. during the offset operation.
(MOVEMENT TO
THE BOTTOM
SIDE)
HCS TEST * This value is used during the execution of the printing operation of "TM0-
During work such as the checking of
PATTERN 30-3-036 HCS TEST PATTERN PRINTING OPERATION".
E 30-6-101 － - 1 1 9999 1 Pages operations after periodic maintenance ✔
PRINTING PAGE Test pattern printing is executed for the number of pages specified with this or replacing mechanical parts
COUNT test mode.


* This value is used during the execution of the printing operation of "TM0-
30-3-036 HCS TEST PATTERN PRINTING OPERATION".
When the set value of this test mode is 0:
- Test pattern printing is executed without any offset for the number of pages
set with "TM0-30-6-101 HCS TEST PATTERN PRINTING PAGE COUNT".
When the set value of this test mode is not 0:
HCS TEST - Test pattern printing is executed with an offset for the number of copies set
During work such as the checking of
PATTERN with this test mode in which the number of pages per copy is specified with
E 30-6-102 － - 0 0 9999 1 - operations after periodic maintenance ✔
PRINTING the value set "TM0-30-6-101 HCS TEST PATTERN PRINTING PAGE or replacing mechanical parts
OFFSET COPIES COUNT".
Example)
"TM0-30-6-101 HCS TEST PATTERN PRINTING PAGE COUNT": 2
"TM0-30-6-102 HCS TEST PATTERN PRINTING OFFSET COPIES": 3
With the above settings, the number of pages per copy of the HCS test
pattern printing is 2 and the number of copies is 3,
so 2 × 3 = 6 pages will be ejected.
HCS TEST
30-3-036 HCS TEST PATTERN PRINTING OPERATION". During work such as the checking of
PATTERN
E 30-6-103 － - 0 0 1 1 - ■ Options operations after periodic maintenance ✔
PRINTING PAPER or replacing mechanical parts
0: Paper is fed along the FD route of the large-capacity paper ejection unit.
FEED ROUTE
1: Paper is fed along the FU route of the large-capacity paper ejection unit.


Postscript Option
Sets whether a connection to an external CI (PS controller) is present.

EXTERNAL CI 0: Not connected ⇒ The functions related to the PS controller cannot be
E 31-6-001 CONNECTION － - 0 0 1 1 - used. ✔ ✔
SETTING 1: Connected ⇒ The functions related to the PS controller can be used.
The printer is in a state in which it can communicate with the PS controller.
Set the type of the external controller.

0-31-6-001 The setting value becomes effective when "EXTERNAL CI
EXTERNAL CONNECTION SETTING" is 1 (connection).
E 31-6-002 CONTROLLER － - 2 2 2 1 - ✔ ✔
TYPE SELECT 0: -
1: -
2: RS1100C connection
Security Option
Overview
Enter the key code that is required for enabling the security package.
Objective
Enabling the security package
When the key code is 12 digits in the format [XXXX- YYYY-ZZZZ], this test
mode corresponds to the 4 digits of "XXXX".
In order to enable the security package, you have to execute TM0-32-6-001
"SECURITY PACKAGE KEY CODE 1", TM0-32-6-002 "SECURITY
PACKAGE KEY CODE 2", and TM0-32-6-003 "SECURITY PACKAGE
SECURITY KEY CODE 3" and enter the applicable key codes. When entering the key code that is
E 32-6-001 PACKAGE KEY － - 0 0 9999 1 - * For the key codes to enter, see the license certificate included with the required for enabling the security ✔
CODE 1 security option kit. package
Operation
When the correct key codes have been entered in TM0-32-6-001
"SECURITY PACKAGE KEY CODE 1", TM0-32-6-002 "SECURITY
PACKAGE KEY CODE 2", and TM0-32-6-003 "SECURITY PACKAGE KEY
CODE
3", it will be possible to install the security package. (If the security package
key codes are not entered or if an incorrect key code is entered, an error
(W087-6015) will be displayed when TM0-32-3-001 "SECURITY
FIRMWARE INSTALLATION" is executed.)


Overview
Objective
SECURITY When the key code is 12 digits in the format [XXXX- YYYY-ZZZZ], this test When entering the key code that is
E 32-6-002 PACKAGE KEY － - 0 0 9999 1 - mode corresponds to the 4 digits of "YYYY". required for enabling the security ✔
CODE 2 * For details, see TM0-32-6-001 "SECURITY PACKAGE KEY CODE 1". package
* For the key codes to enter, see the license certificate included with the
security option kit.
Operation
See TM0-32-6-001 "SECURITY PACKAGE KEY CODE 1".
Overview
Objective
SECURITY When the key code is 12 digits in the format [XXXX- YYYY-ZZZZ], this test When entering the key code that is
E 32-6-003 PACKAGE KEY － - 0 0 9999 1 - mode corresponds to the 4 digits of "ZZZZ". required for enabling the security ✔
CODE 3 * For details, see TM0-32-6-001 "SECURITY PACKAGE KEY CODE 1". package
* For the key codes to enter, see the license certificate included with the
security option kit.
Operation
See TM0-32-6-001 "SECURITY PACKAGE KEY CODE 1".
If you set this test mode to "Display", "Mail Creation Sample Printing" will be
displayed on the administrator setup menu.
If you set this test mode to "Hide", "Mail Creation Sample Printing" will not be
DISPLAY MAIL
displayed on the administrator setup menu. When [0: Hide] is selected for
CREATION When you want to display/hide "Mail
the setting value of this test mode, the setting values of the administrator
E 33-6-001 SAMPLE － - 0 0 1 1 - Creation Sample Printing" on the ✔
setup function "Mail Creation Sample Printing" will all be changed administrator setup menu
PRINTING
(overwritten) to "Display".
BUTTON
■ Options
0: Hide
1: Display


This test mode is designed to—

Upper limit of the setting range for the number of enclosures without having to change the
When you change this setting value, the upper limit of the setting range firmware—deal with cases such as
indicated by "Enclosure Upper Limit" that can be set in the function list when when the number of sheets that can
MAXIMUM MM be enclosed has increased due to
a mail finisher is connected is this setting.
E 33-6-002 ENCLOSURE － - 6 6 15 1 Sheets changes to the mechanical design ✔
The string upper limit that indicates the setting range and is displayed on the and when
SHEET COUNT
panel also changes according to this value. * Note that setting an enclosure making new guarantees regarding
upper limit that exceeds the MM product specifications may lead to the use of paper that is thinner than
mechanical damage of the MM. that currently expected as the
enclosure paper.
Sets whether to switch engine control for each paper feed setting during mail
creation printing when the paper feed settings for "Mail form tray" and "Tray
for enclosure" are [Standard] and [LW Paper], respectively.
■ Options
CONTROL This test mode only has an effect during mail creation printing.
0: When [LW Paper] is selected for the paper feed setting, the engine's When you want to prevent this
SWITCHING WITH
internal processing is performed with the [LW Paper] setting. processing in the rare event that it
E 33-6-006 MIXED MM － - 1 0 1 1 - ✔
has a negative impact on the printing
PAPER FEED ⇒ The productivity is not improved when there are media.
SETTINGS mixed paper feed settings.
1: When [LW Paper] is selected for the paper feed setting, the engine's
internal processing is performed with the [Standard] setting.
⇒ The productivity is improved when there are mixed
paper feed settings.
Switching whether error notification is made or not when there is no

WEF WRAPPING body paper at wrapping. Set when switching the check of the
E 33-6-007 BODY DET － - 0 0 1 1 - presence or absence of the body ✔
ON/OFF SELECT 0: No error detection page.
1: Error detection
JUDGMENT ON
Sets whether to execute ejection tray full detection.
EXECUTING MM When you do not want to execute the
E 33-6-011 － - 1 0 1 1 - ■ Options ✔
EJECTION TRAY tray full detection
0: Do not execute 1: Execute
FULL DETECTION


MM FULL
This is the number of times that the ejection tray full sensor must
CONFIRMATION
E 33-6-012 － - 6 2 16 1 Times consecutively detect the presence of paper in order for the tray to be judged When the tray full detection wavers ✔
JUDGMENT
to be full.
COUNT
MM NON-FULL
This is the number of times that the ejection tray full sensor must
CONFIRMATION When a non-full tray is detected
E 33-6-013 － - 6 2 16 1 Times consecutively not detect the presence of paper in order for the tray to be ✔
JUDGMENT erroneously
judged to not be full.
COUNT
This is the number of pages that are ejected after the full sensor detects that
PAPER EJECTION the tray is full. When you want to change the
E 33-6-014 COUNT WHEN － - 0 0 50 1 Pages (After the full tray is confirmed, the number of pages specified by [Pages] of number of pages that are ejected ✔
MM FULL this test mode are ejected, and then a notification of E1 is sent to the after a full tray is detected
printer.)
MM EJECTION
PAPER GUIDE This value is used to confirm the status of the ejection paper guide.
STATUS When the same logic of the ejection paper guide position sensor is detected When detecting whether the paper
E 33-6-021 － - 10 2 100 1 Times ✔
CONFIRMATION for the number of times specified by [Times] of this test mode, the ejection guide is lying down
JUDGMENT paper guide position is confirmed.
COUNT
MM PAD
Sets whether to have the mail finisher execute the MM water application pad
WETTING When you do not want to execute the
wetting operation.
E 33-6-026 OPERATION － - 1 0 1 1 - MM water application pad wetting ✔
■ Options operation
EXECUTION
0: Do not execute 1: Execute
JUDGMENT
MM PAD
This is the number of times to execute the water application pad wetting When you want to adjust the
WETTING
E 33-6-027 － - 6 1 999 1 Times operation according to the water application pad wetting operation pattern of operation count to match the usage ✔
OPERATION conditions
the mail finisher.
COUNT
This is the time until the gluing motor starts in order to move to the pressing
MM PAD
position according to the water application pad wetting operation pattern of
WETTING When you want to adjust the time of
the mail finisher.
E 33-6-028 OPERATION － - 1 0 100 1 Sec the water application pad wetting ✔
■ Options operation
ROTATION WAIT
0: Continue rotating (N times) * The braking in the operation pattern will not
TIME
be performed.
MM PAD
This is the time from the edge where the gluing home position sensor does When you want to adjust the time of
WETTING
E 33-6-029 － - 10 1 300 1 ms not detect the shield plate to the start of gluing motor braking according to the water application pad wetting ✔
OPERATION operation
the water application pad wetting operation pattern of the mail finisher.
ROTATION TIME


MM PAD
This is the time until the gluing motor starts in order to stop at the pressing When you want to adjust the time of
WETTING
E 33-6-030 － - 3 1 100 1 Sec position according to the water application pad wetting operation pattern of the water application pad wetting ✔
OPERATION operation
the mail finisher.
PRESSING TIME
MM NO WATER
When the sensor frequently switches
CONFIRMATION This is the number of times that the water level sensor must consecutively
E 33-6-036 － - 10 1 16 1 Times between detecting no water and ✔
JUDGMENT detect there is no water in order to judge that there is no water. detecting water
COUNT
This is the number of pages that are ejected after the water level sensor
MM NO WATER When you want to adjust the number
detects that there is no water. (After it is confirmed that there is no water,
E 33-6-037 PAPER EJECTION － - 4000 0 5000 1 Pages of pages that can be ejected after it ✔
the number of pages specified by [Pages] of this test mode are ejected, and is detected that there is no water
COUNT
then the printer is notified that there is no water.)
Switches the mode of the stoppage time (automatic/ manual) when the When the gluing is poor, when you
MM LOW
temperature is low. want to perform tests of the
TEMPERATURE
■ Options productivity, and when
E 33-6-041 STOPPAGE TIME － - 0 0 1 1 - ✔
0: Automatic (The stoppage time is determined according to the determining the temperature and time
MODE thresholds according to the gluing
temperature of the environment.) 1: Manual (The stoppage time is not
SWITCHING status
determined according to the temperature of the environment.)
MM LOW This is the threshold used to determine whether to apply ejection elevation When the gluing is poor and when
determining the temperature
TEMPERATURE Low belt stoppage control in order to improve gluing.
E 33-6-042 1 11 0 30 1 °C threshold for the low temperature/ ✔
MODE temperature When the temperature of the environment is lower than this test mode, ultra low temperature mode
TEMPERATURE switch to low temperature/ultra low temperature mode. according to the gluing status
Ultra low
E 2 5 0 30 1 °C ✔
temperature


When the setting value of the test mode (MM LOW TEMPERATURE
STOPPAGE TIME MODE
SWITCHING) is 1 (Manual) and the setting value for setting the ejection When the gluing is poor, when you
MM EJECTION elevation belt stoppage time in order to improve the gluing is 0, paper want to perform tests of the
ELEVATION BELT continues to be transported with no stopping of operations even when the productivity, and when
E 33-6-044 － - 55 0 600 1 100ms ✔
- PAUSE TIME - temperature is low. determining the temperature and time
MANUAL When you change the setting value of this test mode, if it is inconsistent with thresholds according to the gluing
status
the setting value of No. 0-33-6- 047, an error (W070-3822) will be displayed
and the
value of this test mode will be returned to the value prior to the change.
Sets the ejection elevation belt stoppage time in order to improve the gluing
at low/ultra low temperatures. When the gluing is poor, when you
want to perform tests of the
MM EJECTION When the setting value is 0, paper continues to be transported with no
Low productivity, and when
E 33-6-045 ELEVATION BELT 1 75 0 600 1 100ms stopping of operations even when the temperature is low/ultra low. When ✔
temperature determining the temperature and time
- PAUSE TIME you change the setting value of this test mode, if it is inconsistent with the thresholds according to the gluing
setting value of No. 0-33-6-047, an error (W070- 3822) will be displayed and status
the value of this test mode will be returned to the value prior to the change.
Ultra low
E 2 75 0 600 1 100ms ✔
temperature
Sets the number of times to execute the mail finisher's flap watering
MM LOW
operation at low temperatures. When you change the setting value of this
TEMPERATURE When gluing defects occur at low
E 33-6-047 － - 1 1 3 1 Times test mode, if it is inconsistent with the setting value of No. 0-33-6-044 or No. ✔
FLAP WATERING temperatures
0-33-6-045, an error (W70-3822) will be displayed and the value of this test
COUNT
mode will be returned to the value prior to the change.
When the speed difference

MM ENTRY compared to the main unit is
E 33-6-051 MOTOR SPEED － - 990 900 1000 1 0.001 Adjusts the speed of the entry motor compared to the speed of the printer. noticeable enough that it causes ✔
ADJUST problems such as paper being bent
at the introducing section
MM ENTRY U
Adjusts the timing with which to use the entry selection solenoid to switch When jams in which paper gets
FORM
E 33-6-052 1 Speed 1 49 1 200 1 ms from the middle paper transfer path to the form transfer path. caught on the entry switching flipper ✔
SWITCHING frequently occur
Apply a speed that matches the entry motor (BLM1).
TIMING


E 2 Speed 2 36 1 200 1 ms ✔
E 3 Speed 3 33 1 200 1 ms ✔
E 4 Speed 4 29 1 200 1 ms ✔
E 5 Speed 5 25 1 200 1 ms ✔
E 6 Speed 6 22 1 200 1 ms ✔
MM ENTRY U
Adjusts the timing with which to use the entry selection solenoid to switch When jams in which paper gets
MIDDLE PAPER
E 33-6-053 1 Speed 1 47 1 200 1 ms from the form transfer path to the middle paper transfer path. caught on the entry switching flipper ✔
SWITCHING frequently occur
Apply a speed that matches the entry motor (BLM1).
TIMING
E 2 Speed 2 23 1 200 1 ms ✔
E 3 Speed 3 18 1 200 1 ms ✔
E 4 Speed 4 12 1 200 1 ms ✔
E 5 Speed 5 4 1 200 1 ms ✔
E 6 Speed 6 1 1 200 1 ms ✔
MM TRAILING This is the time from the detection of the trailing edge of the nth sheet of
When sheets are not aligned such as
EDGE middle paper by the introduction sensor to the start of the driving of the
E 33-6-056 1 Speed 1 318 100 600 1 ms when the final middle paper sheet is ✔
ALIGNMENT - trailing edge alignment motor. not aligned
START TIMING Apply a speed that matches the entry motor (BLM1).
E 2 Speed 2 247 100 600 1 ms ✔

E 3 Speed 3 232 100 600 1 ms ✔
E 4 Speed 4 214 100 600 1 ms ✔
E 5 Speed 5 190 100 600 1 ms ✔
E 6 Speed 6 175 100 600 1 ms ✔
MM TRAILING
EDGE
ALIGNMENT - This is the time from the detection of the nip position detection edge by the When sheets are not aligned such as
E 33-6-057 TIMING FOR － - 150 20 500 1 ms alignment nip home position sensor to the start of the driving of the trailing when there are wrinkles at the trailing ✔
RETURN TO edge alignment motor. edge of the middle paper sheets
WAITING
POSITION
MM SIDE When sheets are not aligned such as

This is the time from the start of the driving of the trailing edge alignment
E 33-6-061 ALIGNMENT - － - 10 10 200 1 ms when the middle paper sides are not ✔
motor to the start of the driving of the side alignment motor. aligned
START TIMING
MM SIDE
ALIGNMENT -
This is the time from the detection of the nip position detection edge by the
TIMING FOR When middle paper jams occur at the
E 33-6-062 － - 180 10 300 1 ms alignment nip home position sensor to the start of the driving of the side ✔
RETURN TO alignment entrance
alignment motor.
WAITING
POSITION
MM SIDE
E 33-6-063 ALIGNMENT 1 First time 115 24 126 1 Pulse This is the beating amount of the first time for the side alignment motor. ✔
alignment
PULSE


Second time This is the beating amount of the second time and later for the side
E 2 28 24 100 1 Pulse ✔
and later alignment motor.
MM SIDE
E 33-6-064 ALIGNMENT － - 2 1 5 1 Times This is the beating count of the side alignment motor. ✔
alignment
COUNT
MM ALIGNED This is the time from the detection of the leading edge of the first sheet of
When paper jams, such as middle
FEEDING MOTOR middle paper by the introduction sensor to the stoppage of the aligned
E 33-6-071 1 Speed 1 908 10 1500 1 ms paper protruding from the leading ✔
- STOPPAGE feeding motor. edge alignment, frequently occur
TIMING Apply a speed that matches the entry motor (BLM1).
E 2 Speed 2 687 10 1200 1 ms ✔

E 3 Speed 3 640 10 1150 1 ms ✔
E 4 Speed 4 583 10 1050 1 ms ✔
E 5 Speed 5 510 10 1050 1 ms ✔
E 6 Speed 6 462 10 1050 1 ms ✔
MM ALIGNED This is the time from the detection of the nip position detection edge by the
When paper jams frequently occur in
E 33-6-072 FEEDING - START － - 130 10 500 1 ms alignment nip home position sensor to the start of the driving of the aligned ✔
the alignment section
TIMING feeding motor.
MM ALIGNMENT
When aligned nipping is not
E 33-6-076 NIP MOTOR - － - 100 80 120 1 ms Brake time of the alignment nip motor ✔
performed
BRAKE TIME
MM LEADING
EDGE
ALIGNMENT - Adjusts the timing with which the alignment leading edge solenoid is used to
E 33-6-077 TIMING FOR － - 50 10 200 1 ms switch the leading edge alignment plate from the contact position to the ✔
SWITCH FROM shelter position.
CONTACT TO
SHELTER
MM LEADING
Adjusts the timing with which the alignment leading edge solenoid is used to
EDGE When paper jams frequently occur in
E 33-6-078 － - 1 1 100 1 ms switch the leading edge alignment plate from the shelter position to the ✔
ALIGNMENT - the alignment section
contact position.
CONTACT TIMING
MM ALIGNED This is the time from the detection of the middle paper leading edge by the
E 33-6-079 NIPPING - － - 200 10 300 1 ms alignment ejection sensor to the start of the driving of the aligned feeding ✔
RETURN TIMING motor.


MM SIDE
Adjusts the waiting position of the side alignment plate from mechanical
ALIGNMENT
initialization. When you want to adjust the
E 33-6-081 - WAITING 1 A4 0 -25 94 1 Pulse ✔
(Adjusts the timing of the stoppage for the movement to the waiting position alignment
POSITION
of the side alignment motor.)
ADJUST
E 2 B5 0 -105 14 1 Pulse ✔
E 3 Letter 0 -20 111 1 Pulse ✔
E 4 Legal 0 -20 111 1 Pulse ✔
MM LEADING
EDGE Adjusts the waiting position of the leading edge alignment plate from the
ALIGNMENT home positioning operation. (Adjusts the timing of the stoppage for the When you want to adjust the
E 33-6-082 1 A4 0 -500 500 1 Pulse ✔
- WAITING movement to the waiting position of the leading edge alignment motor.) alignment
POSITION Apply a value that matches the size of the middle paper.
ADJUST
E 2 B5 0 -41 500 1 Pulse ✔

E 3 Letter 0 -385 500 1 Pulse ✔
E 4 Legal 0 -500 43 1 Pulse ✔
MM ALIGNED
This is the time from the detection of the nip position detection edge by the
NIPPING - NIP
E 33-6-086 － - 90 0 120 1 ms alignment nip home position sensor to the start of the braking of the aligned When not performing nipping ✔
BRAKE START
feeding motor.
TIMING
MM ALIGNED
This is the time from the detection of the home position detection edge by
NIPPING - HP When not returning to the home
E 33-6-087 － - 90 0 120 1 ms the alignment nip home position sensor to the start of the braking of the ✔
BRAKE START position after nipping
aligned feeding motor.
TIMING
MM ALIGNED
FEEDING MOTOR This is the time for which to operate the aligned feeding motor at its starting When jams occur in the alignment
E 33-6-088 － - 100 10 500 1 ms ✔
START DRIVING speed when the motor starts. ejection section
TIME
MM ALIGNED
This is the speed when the aligned feeding motor starts. After the start
FEEDING MOTOR When jams occur in the alignment
E 33-6-089 － - 9 1 21 1 Speed driving time has passed, the motor operates at a speed defined in the CRU ✔
STARTING ejection section
operation specifications.
SPEED
MM TRAILING
EDGE
Adjusts the middle paper trailing edge waiting position according to the When the middle paper trailing edge
E 33-6-091 ALIGNMENT － - 22 17 27 1 Pulse ✔
trailing edge alignment plate. alignment is poor
- WAITING
POSITION


MM TRAILING
EDGE
Adjusts the middle paper trailing edge beating position according to the When the middle paper trailing edge
E 33-6-092 ALIGNMENT － - 12 10 17 1 Pulse ✔
trailing edge alignment plate. alignment is poor
- CONTACT
POSITION
MM MIDDLE Adjusts the waiting position of middle paper contact plate 1 in the positioning When the middle paper folding
PAPER CONTACT operation. position is misaligned.
A4 - inner
E 33-6-096 1 - WAITING 1 0 -479 10000 1 Pulse (Adjusts the timing of the stoppage for the movement to the waiting position Adjusts the first folding position for ✔
trifold A4 trifolding (the back fold compared
POSITION of middle paper contact motor 1.) Apply a value that matches the size and
ADJUST folding method of the middle paper. to the transport direction).
Adjusts the first folding position for

E 2 A4 - bifold 0 -7400 10000 1 Pulse A4 bifolding (the back fold compared ✔
to the transport direction).

B5 - inner
E 3 0 -3570 10000 1 Pulse B5 trifolding (the back fold compared ✔
trifold to the transport direction).

Letter - inner
E 4 0 -2092 10000 1 Pulse Letter trifolding (the back fold ✔
trifold compared to the transport direction).

Legal -
E 5 0 -3462 10000 1 Pulse Legal fourfolding (the middle folding ✔
fourfold position).
When the middle paper folding

MM MIDDLE position is misaligned.
PAPER CONTACT When jobs that frequently change the
E 33-6-097 1 - BACKLASH － - 0 0 269 1 Pulse This is the number of pulses to use to correct backlashing. folding position are executed ✔
CORRECTION consecutively, backlashing occurs.
PULSE This test mode corrects this
backlashing.


MM MIDDLE Adjusts the waiting position of middle paper contact plate 2 in the positioning When the middle paper folding
PAPER CONTACT operation. position is misaligned.
A4 - inner
E 33-6-098 2 - WAITING 1 0 -102 10000 1 Pulse (Adjusts the timing of the stoppage for the movement to the waiting position Adjusts the second folding position ✔
trifold for A4 trifolding (the front fold
POSITION of middle paper contact motor 2.) Apply a value that matches the size and
ADJUST folding method of the middle paper. compared to the transport direction).

position is misaligned.
B5 - inner
E 2 0 -1850 10000 1 Pulse Adjusts the second folding position ✔
trifold for B5 trifolding (the front fold
compared to the transport direction).

position is misaligned.
Letter - inner
E 3 0 -909 10000 1 Pulse Adjusts the second folding position ✔
trifold for Letter trifolding (the front fold
compared to the transport direction).

Legal - position is misaligned.
E 4 0 -1729 10000 1 Pulse ✔
fourfold Adjusts the second folding position
for Legal fourfolding.



MM MIDDLE position is misaligned.
PAPER CONTACT When jobs that frequently change the
E 33-6-099 2 - BACKLASH － - 0 0 269 1 Pulse This is the number of pulses to use to correct backlashing. folding position are executed ✔
CORRECTION consecutively, backlashing occurs.
PULSE This test mode corrects this
backlashing.
MM MIDDLE
PAPER FOLDING When a middle paper fold switch
Adjusts the waiting position of the middle paper fold switching flipper in the setting error (such as when trifolding
SWITCH - NO
E 33-6-100 － - 0 -32 32 1 Pulse positioning operation. (Adjusts the timing of the stoppage for the movement is performed even though bifolding ✔
FOLD WAITING was set) occurs. Adjusts the no fold
to the waiting position of the middle paper fold switch motor.)
POSITION waiting position.
ADJUST
When jams frequently occur in the

wrapping section.
MM WRAPPING
This is the number of pulses from the detection of the middle paper leading Delaying this operation will cause the
E 33-6-101 FEED PAUSE － - 321 250 345 1 Pulse ✔
edge by the wrapping wait sensor to the pausing of the wrapping feed motor. middle paper waiting
TIMING position to shift forward, which will
increase the enclosure speed.
When jams frequently occur in the

wrapping section.
Delaying this operation will cause the
MM WRAPPING This is the number of pulses from the detection of the middle paper trailing waiting position of the next piece of
E 33-6-102 FEED MOTOR － - 250 150 350 1 Pulse edge by the wrapping wait sensor to the stopping of the wrapping feed middle paper to be misaligned. ✔
STOP TIMING motor. Making this operation occur faster will
cause the motor to stop even though
the paper has not been fed
completely.
MM FORM Adjusts the waiting position of form contact plate 2 in the positioning
CONTACT 2 operation.
Form A - When the form folding position is
E 33-6-106 - WAITING 1 0 -6836 1747 1 Pulse (Adjusts the timing of the stoppage for the movement to the waiting position ✔
trifold misaligned.
POSITION of form contact motor 2.)
ADJUST Apply a value that matches the size and folding method of the form.
Form B -
E 2 0 -385 8198 1 Pulse ✔
trifold


Form C -
E 3 0 -6836 1747 1 Pulse ✔
trifold
MM FORM
CONTACT 2
When the form folding position is
E 33-6-107 - BACKLASH － - 0 0 269 1 Pulse This is the number of pulses to use to correct backlashing. ✔
misaligned.
CORRECTION
PULSE
This is the time from the detection of the form leading edge by the wrapping
MM WRAPPING
sensor after the wrapping feed motor pauses to the restarting of the driving Middle paper enclosure position
E 33-6-108 FEED RESTART 1 A4/Letter 20 1 80 1 ms ✔
of the motor. misalignment adjustment
TIMING
Apply a value that matches the middle paper.
E 2 B5/Legal 30 1 80 1 ms ✔
MM WRAPPING
Middle paper enclosure position
E 33-6-109 FOLD MOTOR － - 100 90 100 1 % Adjusts the wrapping fold motor speed. ✔
misalignment adjustment
SPEED ADJUST
MM WRAPPING
Specifies the speed of the wrapping feed motor. 1: Speed 1 Middle paper enclosure position
E 33-6-110 FEED MOTOR － - 1 1 2 1 Speed ✔
2: Trapezoidal speed set from the terminal misalignment adjustment
SPEED
EXCITATION TIME
AFTER MM FORM
HORIZONTAL When you want to correct pressure
E 33-6-116 － - 20 20 100 1 ms This is the excitation time after the form horizontal movement motor stops. ✔
MOVEMENT bonding position misalignments
MOTOR
STOPPAGE
This is the time from the detection of the form leading edge by the form
MM FORM registration sensor to the starting of the driving of the form registration When you want to correct pressure
E 33-6-117 1 Speed 1 253 166 340 1 ms ✔
BUCKLE ADJUST motor. bonding position misalignments
Apply a speed that matches the entry motor.
E 2 Speed 2 189 123 254 1 ms ✔

E 3 Speed 3 175 114 236 1 ms ✔
E 4 Speed 4 159 104 214 1 ms ✔
E 5 Speed 5 137 90 185 1 ms ✔
E 6 Speed 6 124 80 167 1 ms ✔


MM FORM
WAITING When "X54-3654: paper jam due to
This is the number of form adjustment transport pulses prior to performing
E 33-6-118 POSITION － - 502 443 564 1 Pulse the form edge not reaching the ✔
form horizontal movement. sensor" occurs
ADJUSTMENT
PULSES
MM FORM
This is the number of pulses from the detection of the form trailing edge by When "X54-3654: paper jam due to
REGISTRATION
E 33-6-119 － - 483 458 534 1 Pulse the form registration sensor after form horizontal movement to the stopping the form edge not reaching the ✔
MOTOR STOP sensor" occurs
of the form registration motor.
TIMING
This is the number of pulses from the detection of the paper edge by the
MM FORM
form edge detection sensor to the stopping of the form horizontal movement
HORIZONTAL
motor. When you want to correct pressure
E 33-6-120 POSITION － - 23 12 116 1 Pulse ✔
The number of pulses of the falling edge of the trapezoid that matches the bonding position misalignments
ADJUSTMENT
speed of the form horizontal movement motor is applied to the minimum
PULSES
value.
This is the number of pulses from the detection of the home position edge
MM FORM by the form horizontal home position sensor to the stopping of the form
HORIZONTAL HP horizontal movement motor. When you want to correct pressure
E 33-6-121 － - 47 12 116 1 Pulse ✔
STAMPING The number of pulses of the falling edge of the trapezoid that matches the bonding position misalignments
MARGIN PULSES speed of the form horizontal movement motor is applied to the minimum
value.
MM FORM
HORIZONTAL When you want to correct pressure
E 33-6-122 － - 2 1 6 1 Speed This is the speed of the form horizontal movement motor. ✔
MOVEMENT bonding position misalignments
MOTOR SPEED
Specifies the speed after horizontal movement of the form registration

MM FORM
motor. When paper jams frequently occur in
E 33-6-123 REGISTRATION － - 7 7 8 1 Speed ✔
7: 632 mm/s the form transport section
MOTOR SPEED 2
8: Trapezoidal speed set from the terminal
MM FORM Adjusting this value adjusts the timing with which the horizontal movement
HORIZONTAL No middle starts. When form horizontal movement
E 33-6-124 1 70 20 150 1 ms ✔
MOVEMENT WAIT paper present (It is necessary to wait until the form's trailing edge leaves the form folding paper jams occur
TIME roller before performing the horizontal movement.)
Middle paper
E 2 200 20 300 1 ms ✔
present


MM FORM
RECEIVING NIP When form receiving roller 3 is not
E 33-6-125 － - 100 80 120 1 ms Adjusting this value adjusts the nip position and the release position. ✔
MOTOR BRAKE nipped or nip released
TIME
MM FORM
Adjusts the waiting position of form contact plate 3 in the positioning
CONTACT 3
Form A - operation. (Adjusts the timing of the stoppage for the movement to the When the form folding position is
E 33-6-126 - WAITING 1 0 -8879 10000 1 Pulse ✔
trifold waiting position of form contact motor 3.) Apply a value that matches the misaligned.
POSITION
size and folding method of the form.
ADJUST
Form B -
E 2 0 -2428 10000 1 Pulse ✔
trifold
Form C -
E 3 0 -8879 10000 1 Pulse ✔
trifold


MM FORM
CONTACT 3
When the form folding position is
E 33-6-127 - BACKLASH － - 0 0 269 1 Pulse This is the number of pulses to use to correct backlashing. ✔
misaligned.
CORRECTION
PULSE
MM GLUING This is the time to stop the flap fold motor during gluing according to the
E 33-6-131 － - 220 100 300 1 ms When you want to adjust the gluing ✔
STOP TIME stoppage operation pattern during gluing.
According to the stoppage pattern during gluing, this is the time from the
MM GLUING
E 33-6-132 － - 32 1 100 1 ms point when the flap fold motor stops to the starting of the driving of the gluing When you want to adjust the gluing ✔
START TIMING
motor.
MM GLUING
This is the time from the detection of the shield plate edge by the gluing
PLATE WAITING
E 33-6-133 － - 1 1 100 1 ms home position sensor to the starting of braking of the gluing motor according When you want to adjust the gluing ✔
POSITION
to the stoppage pattern during gluing.
ADJUST
MM GLUING
E 33-6-134 MOTOR - BRAKE － - 100 100 300 1 ms This is the brake time of the gluing motor. When you want to adjust the gluing ✔
TIME
MM FLAP FOLD
When the gluing position is
E 33-6-135 MOTOR - BRAKE － - 100 100 300 1 ms This is the brake time of the flap fold motor. ✔
misaligned
TIME
MM GLUING
This is the time from the detection of the paper edge by the gluing sensor to When you want to adjust the gluing
E 33-6-136 POSITION 1 Form A/C 95 50 150 1 ms ✔
the stopping of the flap fold motor. Apply a value that matches the form. position
ADJUST
E 2 Form B 171 125 225 1 ms ✔
MM PAPER
SUPPLY SYSTEM
When you want to change the
MOTOR - TIME This is the time to add to the ejection completion time of the last sheet of
E 33-6-141 － - 1000 0 2000 1 ms stoppage timing of the paper ejection ✔
TO ADD TO THE paper (paper supply system motor - stoppage timing). motor
STOPPAGE
TIMING


■ Options
Ejection elevation motor speed (mm/s)
Speed 1 (80),
MM EJECTION Speed 2 (100),
When you want to change the speed
E 33-6-142 ELEVATION － - 7 1 7 1 Speed Speed 3 (120), ✔
of the paper ejection elevation motor
MOTOR SPEED Speed 4(140),
Speed 5 (160),
Speed 6 (180),
Speed 7 (200)
MM EJECTION
ELEVATION
When you want to adjust the time at
E 33-6-143 MOTOR - FLAP － - 700 0 2000 1 ms Adjust the time at which to start suppressing the flap. ✔
which to start suppressing the flap
SUPPRESSION
TIMING
Paper ejection motor speed (mm/s)

Apply a speed that matches the paper guide status or the number of middle
paper sheets.
(The paper guide status is the condition with the higher priority. If the paper
guide is vertical, apply a speed that matches the number of middle paper
sheets.)
Speed 1 (300),
Speed 2 (600),
Speed 3 (650),
Speed 4 (700),
Speed 5 (750),
Speed 6 (800),
Speed 7 (850),
Speed 8 (900),
MM PAPER Speed 9(950),
Middle paper When you want to adjust the paper
E 33-6-146 EJECTION 1 6 1 25 1 Speed Speed 10 (1000), ✔
- 0 sheets ejection motor speed
MOTOR SPEED Speed 11 (1050),
Speed 12 (1100),
Speed 13 (1150),
Speed 14 (1200),
Speed 15 (1250),
Speed 16 (1300),
Speed 17 (1380),
Speed 18 (1460),
Speed 19 (1540),
Speed 20 (1620),
Speed 21 (1700),
Speed 22 (1780),
Speed 23 (1860),
Speed 24 (1940),
Speed 25 (2020)
Middle paper
E 2 7 1 25 1 Speed ✔
- 1 sheet
Middle paper
E 3 7 1 25 1 Speed ✔
- 2 sheets


Middle paper
E 4 7 1 25 1 Speed ✔
- 3 sheets
Middle paper
E 5 7 1 25 1 Speed ✔
- 4 sheets
Middle paper
E 6 7 1 25 1 Speed ✔
- 5 sheets
Middle paper
E 7 7 1 25 1 Speed ✔
- 6 sheets
Paper guide
E 8 1 1 25 1 Speed ✔
lying down
MM ASTRAY JAM Performing adjustments to eliminate

Adjusts the timing with which to disable the astray jam detection.
DETECTION causes when "X54- 3532: paper jams
E 33-6-151 － - 0 -100 100 1 mm (Adjust the distance between the introduction sensor and the form receiving ✔
- DISABLED due to astray errors" occurs
sensor.) frequently
SECTION ADJUST
MM ASTRAY JAM Performing adjustments to eliminate

Adjusts the timing with which to enable the astray jam detection.
DETECTION causes when "X54- 3532: paper jams
E 33-6-152 － - 0 -100 100 1 mm (Adjust the distance between the introduction sensor and the form receiving ✔
- ENABLED due to astray errors" occurs
sensor.) frequently
SECTION ADJUST
MM
When paper jams frequently occur
INTRODUCTION This is the adjustment time to add to the jam confirmation time during the
E 33-6-156 － - 48 0 1000 1 mm due to the introduction sensor not ✔
- NOT REACHED detection of jams due to the introduction sensor not being reached. being reached
JAM ADJUST
MM
Adjusts the value to add to the distance when calculating the congestion jam
INTRODUCTION When introduction congestion jams
E 33-6-157 1 A4 99 0 1000 1 mm detection confirmation time for the introduction sensor. The type of the ✔
- CONGESTION frequently occur
setting value indicates the paper. A4: A4 sized middle paper
JAM ADJUST
E 2 B5 86 0 1000 1 mm B5: B5 sized middle paper ✔

E 3 Letter 94 0 1000 1 mm Letter: Letter sized middle paper ✔
E 4 Legal 119 0 1000 1 mm Legal: Legal sized middle paper ✔
E 5 Form A 100 0 1000 1 mm Form A ✔
E 6 Form B 130 0 1000 1 mm Form B ✔
E 7 Form C 100 0 1000 1 mm Form C ✔
MM
INTERMEDIATE
Adjusts the value to add to the calculated distance of the jam confirmation When intermediate alignment sensor
E 33-6-161 ALIGNMENT － - 46 0 1000 1 mm ✔
time when detecting congestion jams for the intermediate alignment sensor. congestion errors frequently occur
CONGESTION
JAM ADJUST
MM LEADING
EDGE
Adjusts the value to add to the calculated distance of the not reached jam When leading edge alignment sensor
E 33-6-162 ALIGNMENT - － - 28 0 1000 1 mm ✔
detection confirmation time of the leading edge alignment sensor. not reached errors frequently occur
NOT REACHED
JAM ADJUST


MM LEADING
EDGE
Adjusts the value to add to the calculated distance of the congestion jam When leading edge alignment sensor
E 33-6-163 ALIGNMENT - 1 A4 93 0 1000 1 mm ✔
detection confirmation time of the leading edge alignment sensor. congestion errors frequently occur
CONGESTION
JAM ADJUST
E 2 B5 80 0 1000 1 mm ✔
E 3 Letter 88 0 1000 1 mm ✔
E 4 Legal 113 0 1000 1 mm ✔
MM ALIGNMENT
EJECTION - NOT This is the adjustment time to add to the jam confirmation time during the
E 33-6-164 1 A4 65 0 1000 1 ms due to the alignment ejection sensor ✔
REACHED JAM detection of jams due to the alignment ejection sensor not being reached. not being reached
ADJUST
E 2 B5 97 0 1000 1 ms ✔
E 3 Letter 79 0 1000 1 ms ✔
E 4 Legal 19 0 1000 1 ms ✔
MM ALIGNMENT
EJECTION - Adjusts the value to add to the calculated distance of the jam confirmation When alignment ejection sensor
E 33-6-165 1 A4 99 0 1000 1 mm ✔
CONGESTION time when detecting congestion jams for the alignment ejection sensor. congestion errors frequently occur
JAM ADJUST
E 2 B5 86 0 1000 1 mm ✔
E 3 Letter 94 0 1000 1 mm ✔
E 4 Legal 119 0 1000 1 mm ✔
MM MIDDLE
PAPER FOLD This is the adjustment time to add to the jam confirmation time during the When paper jams frequently occur
E 33-6-166 ENTRANCE - NOT － - 121 0 1000 1 ms detection of jams due to the middle paper fold entrance sensor not being due to the middle paper fold entrance ✔
REACHED JAM reached. not being reached
ADJUST
MM MIDDLE
PAPER FOLD When middle paper fold entrance
A4 - inner Adjusts the value to add to the calculated distance of the congestion jam
E 33-6-167 ENTRANCE - 1 100 0 1000 1 mm sensor congestion errors frequently ✔
trifold detection confirmation time of the middle paper fold entrance sensor. occur
CONGESTION
JAM ADJUST
E 2 A4 - bifold 65 0 1000 1 mm ✔
B5 - inner
E 3 84 0 1000 1 mm ✔
trifold
Letter - inner
E 4 92 0 1000 1 mm ✔
trifold
Legal -
E 5 85 0 1000 1 mm ✔
fourfold
MM WRAPPING
ENTRANCE - NOT A4 - inner This is the adjustment time to add to the jam confirmation time during the
E 33-6-168 1 253 0 1000 1 ms due to the middle paper fold entrance ✔
REACHED JAM trifold detection of jams due to the wrapping entrance sensor not being reached. not being reached
ADJUST
E 2 A4 - bifold 137 0 1000 1 ms ✔

B5 - inner
E 3 225 0 1000 1 ms ✔
trifold


Letter - inner
E 4 239 0 1000 1 ms ✔
trifold
Legal -
E 5 226 0 1000 1 ms ✔
fourfold
MM WRAPPING
ENTRANCE - A4 - inner Adjusts the value to add to the calculated distance of the congestion jam When wrapping entrance sensor
E 33-6-169 1 23 0 1000 1 mm ✔
CONGESTION trifold detection confirmation time of the wrapping entrance sensor. congestion errors frequently occur
JAM ADJUST
E 2 A4 - bifold 23 0 1000 1 mm ✔
B5 - inner
E 3 23 0 1000 1 mm ✔
trifold
Letter - inner
E 4 23 0 1000 1 mm ✔
trifold
Legal -
E 5 23 0 1000 1 mm ✔
fourfold
MM WRAPPING
WAIT - NOT This is the adjustment time to add to the jam confirmation time during the
E 33-6-170 － - 112 0 1000 1 ms due to the wrapping wait sensor not ✔
REACHED JAM detection of jams due to the wrapping wait sensor not being reached. being reached
ADJUST
MM WRAPPING
This is the adjustment distance for congestion jams detected by the
WAIT - A4 - inner When wrapping congestion paper
E 33-6-171 1 23 0 1000 1 mm wrapping wait sensor. ✔
CONGESTION trifold jams frequently occur
Apply a value that matches the size and folding method of the middle paper.
JAM ADJUST
E 2 A4 - bifold 23 0 1000 1 mm ✔
B5 - inner
E 3 23 0 1000 1 mm ✔
trifold
Letter - inner
E 4 23 0 1000 1 mm ✔
trifold
Legal -
E 5 23 0 1000 1 mm ✔
fourfold
MM MIDDLE
PAPER EXIT - Adjusts the value to add to the not reached jam detection confirmation time When middle paper exit sensor not
E 33-6-172 － - 44 0 1000 1 ms ✔
NOT REACHED of the middle paper exit sensor. reached errors frequently occur
JAM ADJUST
MM MIDDLE
PAPER EXIT - A4 - inner Adjusts the value to add to the calculated distance of the congestion jam When middle paper exit congestion
E 33-6-173 1 27 0 1000 1 mm ✔
CONGESTION trifold detection confirmation time of the middle paper exit sensor. errors frequently occur
JAM ADJUST
E 2 A4 - bifold 43 0 1000 1 mm ✔
B5 - inner
E 3 23 0 1000 1 mm ✔
trifold
Letter - inner
E 4 25 0 1000 1 mm ✔
trifold


Legal -
E 5 23 0 1000 1 mm ✔
fourfold
MM WRAPPING This is the adjustment time to add to the jam confirmation time during the When paper jams frequently occur
E 33-6-174 - NOT REACHED 1 Form A 64 0 1000 1 ms detection of jams due to the wrapping sensor not being reached. due to the wrapping sensor not being ✔
JAM ADJUST Apply a value that matches the size and folding method of the form. reached
E 2 Form B 102 0 1000 1 ms ✔

E 3 Form C 64 0 1000 1 ms ✔
MM FORM
RECEPTION - This is the adjustment time to add to the jam confirmation time during the
E 33-6-176 － - 52 0 1000 1 mm due to the form receiving sensor not ✔
NOT REACHED detection of jams due to the form receiving sensor not being reached. being reached
JAM ADJUST
MM FORM This is the adjustment time to add to the jam confirmation time during the
REGISTRATION detection of jams due to the form registration sensor not being reached.
E 33-6-178 － - 185 0 1000 1 mm due to the form registration sensor ✔
- NOT REACHED Apply a value that matches the speed of the entry motor and the size and not being reached
JAM ADJUST folding method of the form.
MM FORM
HORIZONTAL When paper jams frequently occur
Adjusts the number of motor pulses when a jam is detected due to the form
E 33-6-180 MOVEMENT - － - 688 1 30000 1 Pulse due to the form horizontal movement ✔
horizontal movement sensor not being reached. sensor not being reached
NOT REACHED
JAM ADJUST
MM FLAP ENTRY
Adjusts the value to add to the calculated distance of the congestion jam When flap entry sensor congestion
E 33-6-183 - CONGESTION 1 Form A 22 0 1000 1 mm ✔
detection confirmation time of the flap entry sensor. errors frequently occur
JAM ADJUST
E 2 Form B 22 0 1000 1 mm ✔
E 3 Form C 22 0 1000 1 mm ✔
MM GLUING - When paper jams frequently occur

This is the adjustment time to add to the jam confirmation time during the
E 33-6-184 NOT REACHED － - 192 0 1000 1 ms due to the gluing sensor not being ✔
detection of jams due to the gluing sensor not being reached. reached
JAM ADJUST
MM GLUING -
Adjusts the value to add to the calculated distance of the congestion jam When gluing sensor congestion
E 33-6-185 CONGESTION 1 Form A 40 0 1000 1 mm ✔
detection confirmation time of the gluing sensor. errors frequently occur
JAM ADJUST
E 2 Form B 72 0 1000 1 mm ✔
E 3 Form C 40 0 1000 1 mm ✔


MM FLAP
BONDING This is the adjustment time to add to the jam confirmation time during the When paper jams frequently occur
E 33-6-186 EJECTION - NOT 1 Form A 222 0 1000 1 ms detection of jams due to the flap bonding ejection sensor not being reached. due to the flap bonding ejection ✔
REACHED JAM (Form A - trifold) sensor not being reached
ADJUST
E 2 Form B 260 0 1000 1 ms (Form B - trifold) ✔

E 3 Form C 222 0 1000 1 ms (Form size No. 10 - fourfold) ✔
MM FLAP
BONDING
Adjusts the value to add to the calculated distance of the congestion jam When flap bonding ejection sensor
E 33-6-187 EJECTION - 1 Form A 17 0 1000 1 mm ✔
detection confirmation time of the flap bonding ejection sensor. congestion errors frequently occur
CONGESTION
JAM ADJUST
E 2 Form B 17 0 1000 1 mm ✔
E 3 Form C 17 0 1000 1 mm ✔
MM PRESSURE
This is the adjustment time to add to the jam confirmation time during the When paper jams frequently occur
BONDING EXIT -
E 33-6-188 － - 130 0 1000 1 ms detection of jams due to the pressure bonding exit sensor not being due to the pressure bonding exit ✔
NOT REACHED sensor not being reached
reached.
JAM ADJUST
MM PRESSURE
This is the time to add to the jam confirmation time during the detection of
BONDING EXIT
E 33-6-189 1 Form A 55 0 1000 1 mm jams due to pressure bonding exit sensor congestion. ✔
- CONGESTION
(Form A)
JAM ADJUST
E 2 Form B 79 0 1000 1 mm (Form B) ✔

E 3 Form C 55 0 1000 1 mm (Form C) ✔
MM EJECTION
This is the jam confirmation time for congestion jams detected by the When ejection congestion jams
E 33-6-191 - CONGESTION － - 10 1 60 1 s ✔
ejection sensor. frequently occur
JAM TIME
MM EJECTION
ELEVATION This is the time to add to the jam confirmation time during the detection of When paper jams frequently occur
E 33-6-192 EDGE 1 Form A 74 0 1000 1 ms jams due to the ejection elevation edge sensor not being reached. due to the ejection elevation sensor ✔
- NOT REACHED (Form A) not being reached
JAM ADJUST
E 2 Form B 58 0 1000 1 ms (Form B) ✔

E 3 Form C 74 0 1000 1 ms (Form C) ✔
MM EJECTION
Changes the threshold of the ejection tray full sensor and adjusts the
TRAY FULL When you want to adjust the full and
E 33-6-201 1 Front 2048 0 4096 1 - accuracy of the tray full sensor. The type of the setting value indicates the ✔
SENSOR not-full detection positions
position of the full sensor.
THRESHOLD
E 2 Rear 2048 0 4096 1 - ✔


MM
This is the analog threshold used to judge that the intermediate alignment
INTERMEDIATE
sensor (analog sensor) has detected paper. When intermediate alignment sensor
E 33-6-203 ALIGNMENT － - 2048 0 4096 1 - ✔
The sensor is judged to have detected paper if the threshold is met or congestion errors frequently occur
SENSOR
exceeded.
THRESHOLD
MM ENVELOPE
Adjusts the envelope edge detection accuracy. The envelope pressure
EDGE
bonding position is determined according to the envelope edge detection When you want to correct pressure
E 33-6-204 DETECTION － - 2048 0 4096 1 - ✔
timing, so this test method adjusts the accuracy of the sensor that detects bonding position misalignments
SENSOR
this edge. This accuracy is used in correcting the pressure bonding position.
THRESHOLD
MM DA1
BARCODE
SENSOR LIGHT
E 33-6-205 EMITTING － - 60 0 255 1 - This is the barcode sensor light emitting amount. ✔
AMOUNT
(SCALING
FACTOR)
MM DA2
ENVELOPE EDGE
SENSOR LIGHT
E 33-6-206 EMITTING － - 72 0 255 1 - This is the envelope edge detection sensor light emitting amount. ✔
AMOUNT
(SCALING
FACTOR)


33-3-025 MM TEST PATTERN PRINTING OPERATION".
■ Options
0: Mail form: Form A (long side sealed), no enclosure present
1: Mail form: Form A (simplex), enclosure present (A4- inner trifold)
2: Mail form: Form A (long side sealed), enclosure present (A4-inner trifold)
3: Mail form: Form A (simplex), enclosure present (B5- inner trifold)
MM TEST
4: Mail form: Form A (long side sealed), enclosure present (B5-inner trifold) During work such as the checking of
PATTERN
E 33-6-211 － - 1 0 12 1 - 5: Mail form: Form B (long side sealed), no enclosure present operations after periodic maintenance ✔
PRINTING-PRINT or replacing mechanical parts
6: Mail form: Form B (simplex), enclosure present (A4- inner bifold)
SETTINGS
7: Mail form: Form B (long side sealed), enclosure present (A4-inner bifold)
8: Mail form: Form C (long side sealed), no enclosure present
9: Mail form: Form C (simplex), enclosure present (Letter-inner trifold)
10: Mail form: Form C (long side sealed), enclosure present (Letter-inner
trifold)
11: Mail form: Form C (simplex), enclosure present (Legal-fourfold)
12: Mail form: Form C (long side sealed), enclosure present (Legal-fourfold)
33-3-025 MM TEST PATTERN PRINTING OPERATION".
MM TEST This test mode sets the number of enclosure sheets when "enclosure
PATTERN present" is set with "TM0-33-6-211 MM TEST PATTERN PRINTING-PRINT During work such as the checking of
E 33-6-212 PRINTING- － - 1 1 15 1 - SETTINGS". operations after periodic maintenance ✔
ENCLOSURE If the setting value of this test mode exceeds the setting value of "TM0-33-6- or replacing mechanical parts
COUNT 002 MAXIMUM MM ENCLOSURE SHEET COUNT",
the enclosure will contain just the number of sheets set with "TM0-33-6-002
MAXIMUM MM ENCLOSURE SHEET COUNT".
PB CLAMP
HORIZONTAL This is set by service engineers when
This is the compensating data used when the clamp moves horizontally to
E 34-6-006 BODY RECEIVING － - 0 -150 150 1 0.1mm adjusting the device in order to ✔
the body receiving position. maintain the binding quality.
POSITION
ADJUST
PB CLAMP
E 34-6-007 GLUING － - 0 -150 150 1 0.1mm adjusting the device in order to ✔
the gluing position. maintain the binding quality.
POSITION
ADJUST


PB CLAMP
This is set by service engineers when
HORIZONTAL This is the compensating data used when the clamp moves horizontally to
E 34-6-008 － - 0 -150 150 1 0.1mm adjusting the device in order to ✔
BLADE POSITION the blade position. maintain the binding quality.
ADJUST
PB CLAMP
E 34-6-009 ARRANGEMENT － - 0 -150 150 1 0.1mm adjusting the device in order to ✔
the arrangement position. maintain the binding quality.
POSITION
ADJUST
Perfect Binder
PB COVER
ARRANGEMENT This is the compensating data used when transporting the cover to the
POSITION arrangement position. maintain the binding quality.
CORRECTION
PB EDGE
ALIGNMENT When adjusting the edge alignment
E 34-6-011 － - 0 -50 50 1 0.1mm This is the compensating data of the edge alignment plate position. ✔
PLATE POSITION plate position of the body
CORRECTION
PB TOP-BOTTOM
ALIGNMENT When adjusting the top-bottom
E 34-6-012 － - -33 -50 50 1 0.1mm This is the compensating data of the top-bottom alignment plate position. ✔
PLATE POSITION alignment plate position of the body
CORRECTION
PB COVER
ALIGNMENT When adjusting the cover alignment
E 34-6-013 － - 0 -50 50 1 0.1mm This is the compensating data of the cover alignment plate position. ✔
PLATE POSITION plate position of the cover
CORRECTION
PB COVER CUT This is set by service engineers when

This is the compensating data used when transporting the cover to the
E 34-6-014 POSITION － - 0 -150 150 1 0.1mm adjusting the device in order to ✔
cutting position. maintain the binding quality.
CORRECTION
PB EDGE
REFERENCE 0.1° This is the correction angle used when returning the edge reference plate to
E 34-6-018 － - 0 -300 300 1 adjusting the device in order to ✔
PLATE HP ANGLE (angle) the home position. maintain the binding quality.
ADJUST
PB CLAMP BODY This is set by service engineers when

This is the compensating data used when the clamp moves vertically to the
E 34-6-021 RECEIVING － - 0 -25 25 1 0.1mm adjusting the device in order to ✔
body receiving height. maintain the binding quality.
HEIGHT ADJUST


PB CLAMP This is set by service engineers when

E 34-6-022 GLUING HEIGHT － - 0 -40 40 1 0.1mm adjusting the device in order to ✔
gluing height. maintain the binding quality.
ADJUST
PB CLAMP This is set by service engineers when

E 34-6-023 ARRANGEMENT － - 0 -40 40 1 0.1mm adjusting the device in order to ✔
arrangement height. maintain the binding quality.
HEIGHT ADJUST

PB CLAMP BLADE This is the compensating data used when the clamp moves vertically to the
HEIGHT ADJUST blade height. maintain the binding quality.
Corrects the position of the glue cutting blade of the case binding finisher in
PB CLAMP BLADE relation to When you want to adjust the area
E 34-6-025 HEIGHT 1 Condition 1 0 -2 10 1 0.1ms "TM7625 PB CLAMP BLADE HEIGHT ADJUST". that is not coated with glue, correct ✔
CORRECTION The larger the value, the smaller the area that is not coated with glue. the glue cutting height of the blade.
(When the body thickness is 1.0 mm to 2.5 mm)
E 2 Condition 2 0 -2 10 1 0.1ms (When the body thickness is 2.5 mm to 5.0 mm) ✔
E 5 Condition 5 0 -2 10 1 0.1ms (When the body thickness is 20.0 mm or more) ✔
PB COVER
LENGTH 0.01um This is the resolution (per motor driving pulse) used to calculate the cover
E 34-6-031 － - 6480 6380 6530 1 adjusting the device in order to ✔
MEASUREMENT /pulse length maintain the binding quality.
RESOLUTION
PB COVER
LENGTH
MEASUREMENT 0.01um This is the resolution (per motor driving pulse) used to calculate the cover When calculating the cover length of
E 34-6-032 － - 6480 6380 6530 1 ✔
RESOLUTION /pulse length the interposer section
(INTERPOSER
SECTION)
PB CLAMP PULSE When adjusting the setting value for

Changes the encoder pulse value when the clamp is closed with no body
E 34-6-036 COUNT WITH NO － - 1180 1100 1250 1 Pulse the measurement of the body ✔
present. thickness
BODY


PB CLAMP PULSE When adjusting the setting value for

Changes the encoder pulse value when the clamp is closed on a body
E 34-6-037 COUNT WITH 20 － - 700 600 800 1 Pulse the measurement of the body ✔
having the reference thickness. thickness
MM THICK BODY
Perfect Binder
PB LEFT SIDE This is set by service engineers when

This is the adjustment value for the left side glue amount.
E 34-6-041 GLUE AMOUNT 1 Condition 1 25 5 99 1 0.1mm adjusting the device in order to ✔
When the body thickness is 1.0 to 2.4 mm maintain the binding quality.
ADJUST
E 2 Condition 2 25 5 99 1 0.1mm When the body thickness is 2.5 to 4.9 mm ✔
E 5 Condition 5 25 5 99 1 0.1mm When the body thickness is 20.0 mm or more ✔
PB RIGHT SIDE This is set by service engineers when

This is the adjustment value for the right side glue amount.
E 34-6-042 GLUE AMOUNT 1 Condition 1 25 5 99 1 0.1mm adjusting the device in order to ✔
When the body thickness is 1.0 to 2.4 mm maintain the binding quality.
ADJUST
E 5 Condition 5 25 5 99 1 0.1mm When the body thickness is 20.0 mm or more ✔
PB BODY PAPER This is set by service engineers when

This is the interval between sheets of paper when transporting a body made
E 34-6-046 PITCH 1 A4/LTR 200 50 300 1 ms adjusting the device in order to ✔
of A4/Letter sized paper. maintain the binding quality.
CORRECTION
E 2 B5 200 50 300 1 ms ✔
of B5 sized paper.
E 3 A5 259 50 400 1 ms ✔
of A5 sized paper.
PB PAPER This is set by service engineers when

E 34-6-047 TRANSFER 1 700mm/s 693 613 665 1 mm/s This is the set transfer speed when the printer speed is 700 mm/s. adjusting the device in order to ✔
SPEED maintain the binding quality.


E 2 632mm/s 626 601 651 1 mm/s This is the set transfer speed when the printer speed is 632 mm/s. ✔
PB FEED Adjusts the drive feeding amount of the lower belt in the ejection direction
AMOUNT ADJUST when sensor S30 turns ON.
When cover looseness, cover
E 34-6-051 DURING LOWER － - 10 5 50 5 mm If a fraction (that is, a value that cannot be divided perfectly by 5) is entered, ✔
folding, or booklet skewing occurs
BOOKLET rounding is performed on the
ALIGNMENT case binding finisher.
Adjusts the compensating data for the opening timing of the top-bottom
PB TOP- BOTTOM
edge alignment plate.
EDGE
(The reference is the detection of the S3 trailing edge.) Making the timing When stocking defects or body
E 34-6-056 ALIGNMENT 1 A4/LTR 0 -200 100 1 ms ✔
quicker is effective in fixing stocking defects. alignment accuracy defects occur
PLATE -
Making the timing slower is effective in fixing body alignment accuracy
OPENING TIMING
defects.
E 2 B5/A5 -20 -150 150 1 ms ✔
PB TOP- Adjusts the compensating data for the closing timing of the top-bottom edge
BOTTOM EDGE alignment plate.
When stocking defects or body
E 34-6-057 ALIGNMENT 1 A4/LTR 280 50 300 1 ms Making the timing quicker is effective in fixing stocking defects. ✔
alignment accuracy defects occur
PLATE - CLOSING Making the timing slower is effective in fixing body alignment accuracy
TIMING ADJUST defects.
E 2 B5 230 50 300 1 ms ✔
E 3 A5 180 50 300 1 ms ✔
Sets the body size to use when executing "TM0- 34-3-061 TRANSPORT TO
TM TRANSPORT
PB BODY STACKING POSITION".
TO PB BODY Operation check during production
■ Options
STACKING Mechanical adjustment after
E 34-6-061 － - 0 0 3 1 - 0: A4 Landscape ✔
POSITION: replacement of case binding finisher
1: B5 Landscape mechanical parts
BINDING SIZE
2: A5 Landscape
SETTING
3: Letter Landscape The data is not stored in a nonvolatile manner.


TM TRANSPORT
TO PB BODY Operation check during production
Sets the body page count to use when executing "TM0- 34-3-061
STACKING Mechanical adjustment after
E 34-6-062 － - 50 15 300 1 Sheets TRANSPORT TO PB BODY STACKING ✔
POSITION: BODY replacement of case binding finisher
POSITION". The data is not stored in a non-volatile manner. mechanical parts
PAGE COUNT
SETTING
34-3-062 PB TEST PATTERN PRINTING OPERATION".
TM PB TEST ■ Options During work such as the checking of
E 34-6-066 PATTERN PRINT: － - 0 0 3 1 - 0: A4 Landscape operations after periodic maintenance ✔
BODY SIZE 1: B5 Landscape or replacing mechanical parts
2: A5 Landscape
3: Letter Landscape
TM PB TEST
34-3-062 PB TEST PATTERN PRINTING OPERATION". During work such as the checking of
PATTERN PRINT:
E 34-6-067 － - 50 15 600 1 Sheets The physical upper limit when using IJ paper for the body is 300 sheets. operations after periodic maintenance ✔
BODY PAGE or replacing mechanical parts
The physical upper limit when using lightweight paper for the body is 600
COUNT
sheets.
TM PB TEST * This value is used during the execution of the printing operation of "TM0- During work such as the checking of
E 34-6-068 PATTERN PRINT: － - 4650 2985 4768 1 0.1mm 34-3-062 PB TEST PATTERN PRINTING OPERATION". operations after periodic maintenance ✔
COVER LENGTH Specifies the cover length. or replacing mechanical parts
34-3-062 PB TEST PATTERN PRINTING OPERATION".
Specifies the tray in which to place the covers. You have to specify a
different tray for the body specified with "No. 1867 PAPER FEED TRAY
SETTING".
TM PB TEST During work such as the checking of
■ Options
E 34-6-069 PATTERN PRINT: － - 5 0 5 1 - operations after periodic maintenance ✔
0: Paper feed tray or replacing mechanical parts
COVER TRAY
1: Tray 1
2: Tray 2
3: Tray 3
4: Large-capacity paper feed unit
5: Cover inserter

ComColor FW / GD Series
Technical Manual
Reproduction and duplication prohibited.
Edited and published by: Overseas Technical Department,
RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION
The contents of this manual are subject to change

without notice to permit product improvements.

FW GD TestMode - Rev 1.3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FW GD TestMode - Rev 1.3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IE-02193-013

Copyright: 2017 RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION

1/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

2/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

3/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

4/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

5/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

6/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

7/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

8/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

9/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

10/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

Type Test mode No. Test mode name Action FW GD

11/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

Type Test mode No. Test mode name Action FW GD

Ink maintenance section

Pressure regulator valve ✔ ✔

12/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

Type Test mode No. Test mode name Action FW GD

13/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

Type Test mode No. Test mode name Action FW GD

14/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

Type Test mode No. Test mode name Action FW GD

15/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

16/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

17/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

18/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

19/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

<Automatic image adjustment>

20/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

<Automatic image adjustment>

<Automatic image adjustment>

<Automatic image adjustment>

<Automatic image adjustment>

21/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

<Automatic image adjustment>

<Manual image adjustment>

<Automatic image adjustment>

<Automatic image adjustment>

<Automatic image adjustment>

22/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

<Automatic image adjustment>

<Manual image adjustment>

<Manual image adjustment>

<Manual image adjustment>

23/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

<Manual image adjustment>

<Manual image adjustment>

<Manual image adjustment>

<Manual image adjustment>

Temporarily saves (backs up) current image adjustment data.

24/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

Engine system section

OPTION PCB FIRMWARE

Automatically acquires paper edge information and AD values.

Executes automatic shading compensation for the rear (left) CIS.

Engine system section

Executes automatic shading compensation for the front (right-side) CIS.

25/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

- Prints a head test pattern.

Executes print operation.

26/316 ComColor FW/GD Series Revision 1.3

Engine system section